manualshive.com logo in svg

Dell MXL 10GbE, Reference Manual

The Dell MXL 10GbE is a high-performance networking solution that delivers lightning-fast data transfer speeds. Access the comprehensive Reference Manual for this product, available for free download from manualshive.com, to unleash the full potential of your network. Get the manual today and optimize your network with ease.

Share
Download
background image

• 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface = 

2000

• 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface = 

1400

• Port Channel interface with one 10 Gigabit Ethernet = 

2000

• Port Channel interface with one 40 Gigabit Ethernet = 

1400

• Port Channel with two 10 Gigabit Ethernet = 

1800

• Port Channel with two 40 Gigabit Ethernet = 

600

edge-port

Enter the keywords 

edge-port

 to configure the interface as 

a rapid spanning tree edge port.

bpduguard

(OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword 

portfast

 to enable Portfast 

to move the interface into Forwarding mode immediately 
after the root fails.

Enter the keyword 

bpduguard

 to disable the port when it 

receives a BPDU.

shutdown-on-
violation

(OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords 

shutdown-on-violation 

to hardware disable an interface when a BPDU is received 
and the port is disabled.

bpdufilter

(OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword 

bpdufilter

 to enable 

BPDU Filter to stop sending and receiving BPDUs on port 
enabled interfaces.

priority 

priority

Enter keyword 

priority

 then a value in increments of 16 as 

the priority. The range is from 0 to 240. The default is 

128

.

rootguard

Enter the keyword 

rootguard

 to enable root guard on an 

RSTP port or port-channel interface.

Defaults

Not configured.

Command 
Modes

INTERFACE

Command 
History

Version 8.3.16.1

Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.

Usage 
Information

The 

BPDU guard

 option prevents the port from participating in an active STP 

topology in case a BPDU appears on a port unintentionally, or is misconfigured, or 
is subject to a DOS attack. This option places the port into an Error Disable state if a 
BPDU appears and a message is logged so that the administrator can take 
corrective action.

NOTE: A port configured as an edge port, on an RSTP switch, immediately 
transitions to the Forwarding state. Only configure ports connected to end-
hosts as edge ports. Consider an edge port similar to a port with a 

spanning-

tree portfast

 enabled.

1150

Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP)

Summary of Contents for MXL 10GbE

Page 1: ...Dell Networking Command Line Reference Guide for the MXL 10 40GbE Switch I O Module 9 5 0 1 ...

Page 2: ...problem WARNING A WARNING indicates a potential for property damage personal injury or death Copyright 2014 Dell Inc All rights reserved This product is protected by U S and international copyright and intellectual property laws Dell and the Dell logo are trademarks of Dell Inc in the United States and or other jurisdictions All other marks and names mentioned herein may be trademarks of their res...

Page 3: ...d 53 Filtering show Commands 53 Command Modes 54 3 File Management 59 cd 59 copy 59 copy running config startup config 61 delete 61 format flash 62 HTTP Copy via CLI 63 logging coredump 63 logging coredump server 64 pwd 65 rename 65 show boot system 66 show file 66 show file systems 67 show os version 68 show running config 69 show startup config 72 show version 73 upgrade boot 74 upgrade system 7...

Page 4: ... exec timeout 88 exit 88 ftp server enable 89 ftp server topdir 90 ftp server username 90 hostname 91 ip ftp password 91 ip ftp source interface 92 ip ftp username 93 ip telnet server enable 93 ip telnet source interface 93 ip tftp source interface 94 line 95 motd banner 95 ping 96 reload 98 send 98 service timestamps 99 show alarms 100 show command history 100 show command tree 102 show cpu traff...

Page 5: ...entication Configuration 128 dot1x authentication Interface 128 dot1x guest vlan 128 dot1x host mode 129 dot1x mac auth bypass 130 dot1x max eap req 130 dot1x max supplicants 131 dot1x port control 131 dot1x quiet period 132 dot1x reauthentication 132 dot1x reauth max 133 dot1x server timeout 133 dot1x supplicant timeout 134 dot1x tx period 134 show dot1x cos mapping interface 135 show dot1x inter...

Page 6: ...deny icmp 157 deny tcp 159 deny udp 162 ip access list extended 165 permit for Extended IP ACLs 166 permit icmp 168 permit tcp 170 permit udp 174 seq 177 Common MAC Access List Commands 180 clear counters mac access group 180 mac access group 180 show mac access lists 182 show mac accounting access list 182 Standard MAC ACL Commands 183 deny 183 mac access list standard 185 permit 186 seq 188 Exte...

Page 7: ...set automatic tag 207 set metric 208 set metric type 209 set tag 209 show config 210 show route map 210 deny for Standard IP ACLs 211 deny for Extended IP ACLs 213 seq 215 deny tcp 217 deny udp 221 deny arp for Extended MAC ACLs 223 deny icmp 226 deny ether type for Extended MAC ACLs 228 deny 231 deny 232 permit for Standard IP ACLs 235 permit arp 237 permit ether type for Extended MAC ACLs 239 pe...

Page 8: ... 289 cam acl vlan 290 show cam usage 291 show running config acl vlan group 294 acl vlan group 295 show acl vlan group detail 296 description ACL VLAN Group 297 8 Bidirectional Forwarding Detection BFD 298 bfd all neighbors 298 bfd disable 299 bfd enable Configuration 300 bfd enable Interface 300 bfd interval 300 bfd neighbor 301 bfd protocol liveness 302 ip route bfd 302 ipv6 ospf bfd all neighbo...

Page 9: ...1 bgp enforce first as 321 bgp fast external failover 322 bgp four octet as support 322 bgp graceful restart 323 bgp non deterministic med 324 bgp recursive bgp next hop 324 bgp regex eval optz disable 325 bgp router id 326 bgp soft reconfig backup 326 capture bgp pdu neighbor 327 capture bgp pdu max buffer size 328 clear ip bgp 328 clear ip bgp dampening 329 clear ip bgp flap statistics 329 clear...

Page 10: ...hbor peer group passive 349 neighbor remote as 350 neighbor remove private as 351 neighbor route map 351 neighbor route reflector client 352 neighbor shutdown 353 neighbor soft reconfiguration inbound 354 neighbor timers 355 neighbor update source 355 neighbor weight 356 network 357 network backdoor 358 redistribute 358 redistribute ospf 359 router bgp 360 show capture bgp pdu neighbor 361 show co...

Page 11: ...o 396 show ip bgp paths extcommunity 397 show ip bgp extcommunity list 397 IPv6 BGP Commands 398 bgp soft reconfig backup 398 clear ip bgp ipv6 unicast soft 399 debug ip bgp ipv6 unicast soft reconfiguration 400 ipv6 prefix list 400 show ipv6 prefix list 401 IPv6 MBGP Commands 401 show ipv6 mbgproutes 401 10 Content Addressable Memory CAM 403 CAM Profile Commands 403 cam acl Configuration 403 cam ...

Page 12: ...put stack unit stack ports all 423 dcb stack unit all pfc buffering pfc port count pfc queues 424 dcb stack unit pfc buffering pfc port count pfc queues 424 dcbx port role 425 dcbx version 426 debug dcbx 427 description 428 ets mode on 428 fcoe priority bits 429 iscsi priority bits 430 priority 430 pfc link delay 432 pfc mode on 432 pfc no drop queues 433 pfc priority 434 priority group 435 priori...

Page 13: ...iagnostic Commands 464 diag stack unit 464 offline stack unit 465 online stack unit 466 Buffer Tuning Commands 466 buffer Buffer Profile 466 buffer Configuration 468 buffer profile Configuration 469 buffer profile Interface 470 show buffer profile 470 show buffer profile interface 471 Hardware Commands 472 clear hardware stack unit 472 clear hardware system flow 473 show hardware layer2 acl 473 sh...

Page 14: ...cp clients packets 493 release dhcp interface 494 renew dhcp interface 494 show ip dhcp client statistics 495 show ip dhcp lease 496 Commands to Configure Secure DHCP 496 arp inspection 496 arp inspection trust 497 clear ip dhcp snooping 497 ip dhcp snooping 497 ip dhcp snooping database 498 ip dhcp snooping binding 498 ip dhcp snooping database renew 499 ip dhcp snooping trust 499 ip dhcp source ...

Page 15: ...tistics 516 feature fip snooping 517 fip snooping enable 517 fip snooping fc map 518 fip snooping port mode fcf 518 show fip snooping config 519 show fip snooping enode 519 show fip snooping fcf 520 show fip snooping sessions 521 show fip snooping statistics 522 show fip snooping system 525 show fip snooping vlan 525 18 Force10 Resilient Ring Protocol FRRP 527 clear frrp 527 debug frrp 528 descrip...

Page 16: ... ip igmp query max resp time 548 ip igmp version 548 ip igmp snooping enable 548 ip igmp snooping fast leave 549 ip igmp snooping flood 549 ip igmp snooping last member query interval 550 ip igmp snooping mrouter 550 ip igmp snooping querier 551 show ip igmp snooping mrouter 552 21 Interfaces 553 Basic Interface Commands 553 clear counters 553 clear dampening 554 cx4 cable length 555 dampening 556...

Page 17: ...k unit 587 show interfaces status 588 show interfaces switchport 589 show interfaces transceiver 591 show range 596 shutdown 596 speed for 1000 10000 auto interfaces 597 stack unit portmode 598 Port Channel Commands 599 channel member 599 group 601 interface port channel 602 minimum links 603 port channel failover group 603 show config 604 show interfaces port channel 604 Time Domain Reflectometer...

Page 18: ...in lookup 625 ip domain name 625 ip helper address 626 ip helper address hop count disable 627 ip host 627 ip icmp source interface 628 ipv6 icmp source interface 629 ip max frag count 630 ip name server 631 ip proxy arp 631 ip route 632 ip source route 633 ip tcp initial time 633 show ip tcp initial time 634 ip unreachables 634 management route 635 show arp 635 show arp retries 638 show hosts 638...

Page 19: ...6 Access Control Lists IPv6 ACLs 664 IPv6 ACL Commands 664 cam acl 664 cam acl egress 665 ipv6 access list 666 ipv6 control plane egress filter 667 permit 667 permit icmp 669 show cam acl 671 show cam acl egress 672 25 IPv6 Basics 673 clear ipv6 fib 673 clear ipv6 route 673 clear ipv6 mld_host 674 ipv6 address autoconfig 674 ipv6 address 675 ipv6 address eui64 676 ipv6 control plane icmp error rat...

Page 20: ...client reflection 697 bgp cluster id 698 bgp confederation identifier 698 bgp confederation peers 699 bgp dampening 700 bgp default local preference 701 bgp enforce first as 701 bgp fast external fallover 702 bgp four octet as support 702 bgp graceful restart 703 bgp log neighbor changes 704 bgp non deterministic med 704 bgp recursive bgp next hop 705 bgp regex eval optz disable 705 bgp router id ...

Page 21: ...bor distribute list 724 neighbor ebgp multihop 725 neighbor fall over 726 neighbor filter list 726 neighbor maximum prefix 727 neighbor X X X X password 728 neighbor next hop self 729 neighbor peer group assigning peers 729 neighbor peer group creating group 730 neighbor peer group passive 731 neighbor remote as 732 neighbor remove private as 732 neighbor route map 733 neighbor route reflector cli...

Page 22: ... group 753 show ip bgp ipv6 unicast summary 754 show ip bgp next hop 755 show ip bgp paths 756 show ip bgp paths as path 756 show ip bgp paths community 757 show ip bgp paths extcommunity 757 show ip bgp regexp 757 timers bgp 758 IPv6 MBGP Commands 759 address family 759 aggregate address 759 bgp dampening 761 clear ip bgp ipv6 unicast 761 clear ip bgp ipv6 unicast dampening 762 clear ip bgp ipv6 ...

Page 23: ...cast inconsistent as 779 show ip bgp ipv6 unicast neighbors 779 show ip bgp ipv6 unicast peer group 782 show ip bgp ipv6 unicast summary 783 27 iSCSI Optimization 785 advertise dcbx app tlv 785 iscsi aging time 785 iscsi cos 786 iscsi enable 787 iscsi priority bits 787 iscsi profile compellant 788 iscsi target port 788 show iscsi 789 show iscsi session 790 show iscsi session detailed 790 show run ...

Page 24: ...estart restart wait 806 hello padding 807 hostname dynamic 808 ignore lsp errors 808 ip router isis 809 ipv6 router isis 809 isis circuit type 810 isis csnp interval 811 isis csnp interval 811 isis hello multiplier 812 isis hello padding 813 isis ipv6 metric 813 isis metric 814 isis network point to point 814 isis password 815 isis priority 816 is type 816 log adjacency changes 817 lsp gen interva...

Page 25: ... port priority 842 lacp system priority 842 port channel mode 843 port channel protocol lacp 844 show lacp 844 30 Layer 2 846 MAC Addressing Commands 846 clear mac address table 846 mac address table aging time 847 mac address table static 847 mac address table station move refresh arp 848 mac learning limit 848 mac learning limit learn limit violation 850 mac learning limit station move violation...

Page 26: ...hbors 872 show lldp statistics 873 show running config lldp 873 LLDP MED Commands 874 advertise med guest voice 874 advertise med guest voice signaling 875 advertise med location identification 876 advertise med power via mdi 877 advertise med softphone voice 877 advertise med streaming video 878 advertise med video conferencing 878 advertise med voice signaling 879 advertise med voice 880 adverti...

Page 27: ... show ip msdp 895 show ip msdp sa cache rejected sa 896 34 Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP 898 debug spanning tree mstp 898 description 899 disable 899 disable 900 forward delay 900 hello time 901 max age 901 max hops 902 msti 902 name 903 protocol spanning tree mstp 904 revision 904 show config 905 show spanning tree mst configuration 905 show spanning tree msti 906 spanning tree 908 spannin...

Page 28: ...a range 926 area stub 926 auto cost 927 clear ip ospf 927 clear ip ospf statistics 928 debug ip ospf 929 default information originate 931 default metric 932 description 932 distance 933 distance ospf 933 distribute list in 934 distribute list out 935 fast convergence 935 flood 2328 936 graceful restart grace period 937 graceful restart helper reject 937 graceful restart mode 938 graceful restart ...

Page 29: ...w ip ospf database external 958 show ip ospf database network 960 show ip ospf database nssa external 962 show ip ospf database opaque area 962 show ip ospf database opaque as 964 show ip ospf database opaque link 965 show ip ospf database router 965 show ip ospf database summary 968 show ip ospf interface 970 show ip ospf neighbor 972 show ip ospf routes 973 show ip ospf statistics 973 show ip os...

Page 30: ...router ospf 995 maximum paths 996 passive interface 996 redistribute 997 router id 999 show crypto ipsec policy 1000 show crypto ipsec sa ipv6 1000 show ipv6 ospf database 1001 show ipv6 ospf interface 1002 show ipv6 ospf neighbor 1003 38 Policy based Routing PBR 1004 description 1004 ip redirect group 1004 ip redirect list 1005 permit 1006 redirect 1007 seq 1009 show cam pbr 1011 show ip redirect...

Page 31: ...nterface 1026 show ip pim snooping neighbor 1027 show ip pim snooping tib 1028 show ip pim summary 1030 show ip pim tib 1031 show running config pim 1033 IPv6 PIM Sparse Mode Commands 1034 ipv6 pim bsr border 1034 ipv6 pim bsr candidate 1034 ipv6 pim dr priority 1035 ipv6 pim join filter 1035 ipv6 pim query interval 1036 ipv6 pim neighbor filter 1036 ipv6 pim register filter 1037 ipv6 pim rp addre...

Page 32: ...s PVST 1060 description 1060 disable 1060 edge port bpdufilter default 1061 extend system id 1061 protocol spanning tree pvst 1062 show spanning tree pvst 1063 spanning tree pvst 1066 spanning tree pvst err disable 1067 tc flush standard 1068 vlan bridge priority 1068 vlan forward delay 1069 vlan hello time 1070 vlan max age 1071 43 Quality of Service QoS 1072 Global Configuration Commands 1072 qo...

Page 33: ...olicy map input 1089 policy map output 1089 qos policy input 1090 qos policy output 1091 rate police 1091 rate shape 1092 service policy input 1093 service policy output 1094 service queue 1094 set 1095 show qos class map 1096 show qos policy map 1096 show qos policy map input 1097 show qos policy map output 1098 show qos qos policy input 1099 show qos qos policy output 1099 show qos statistics 11...

Page 34: ...119 ip rip send version 1119 ip split horizon 1120 maximum paths 1120 neighbor 1121 network 1121 offset list 1122 output delay 1123 passive interface 1123 redistribute 1124 redistribute ospf 1125 router rip 1125 show config 1126 show ip rip database 1126 show running config rip 1127 timers basic 1128 version 1129 45 Remote Monitoring RMON 1130 rmon alarm 1130 rmon collection history 1131 rmon coll...

Page 35: ...A Accounting Commands 1152 aaa accounting 1152 aaa accounting suppress 1154 accounting 1154 crypto key zeroize rsa 1155 show accounting 1155 Authorization and Privilege Commands 1156 authorization 1156 aaa authorization commands 1157 aaa authorization role only 1158 aaa authorization config commands 1159 aaa authorization exec 1159 privilege level CONFIGURATION mode 1160 privilege level LINE mode ...

Page 36: ...e interface 1181 tacacs server host 1181 tacacs server key 1182 SSH Server and SCP Commands 1183 crypto key generate 1183 debug ip ssh 1184 ip scp topdir 1185 ip ssh authentication retries 1185 ip ssh connection rate limit 1186 ip ssh hostbased authentication 1186 ip ssh key size 1187 ip ssh password authentication 1187 ip ssh pub key file 1188 ip ssh rekey 1189 ip ssh rhostsfile 1189 ip ssh rsa a...

Page 37: ... 1209 sflow enable Global 1210 sflow enable Interface 1210 sflow extended switch enable 1211 sflow polling interval Global 1211 sflow polling interval Global 1212 sflow sample rate Global 1212 sflow sample rate Interface 1213 show sflow 1214 show sflow stack unit 1215 49 Service Provider Bridging 1216 debug protocol tunnel 1216 protocol tunnel 1217 protocol tunnel destination mac 1218 protocol tun...

Page 38: ... link status 1239 Syslog Commands 1240 clear logging 1240 default logging buffered 1240 default logging console 1240 logging extended 1241 default logging monitor 1242 default logging trap 1242 logging 1242 logging buffered 1243 logging console 1244 logging facility 1245 logging history 1246 logging history size 1246 logging monitor 1247 logging on 1247 logging source interface 1248 logging synchr...

Page 39: ...adcast Interface 1267 storm control multicast Configuration 1267 storm control multicast Interface 1268 storm control unknown unicast Configuration 1268 storm control unknown unicast Interface 1269 53 Spanning Tree Protocol STP 1270 bridge priority 1270 debug spanning tree 1270 description 1271 disable 1272 forward delay 1272 hello time 1273 max age 1273 portfast bpdufilter default 1274 protocol s...

Page 40: ...e 1296 tunnel source 1297 tunnel keepalive 1298 tunnel allow remote 1298 tunnel dscp 1299 tunnel destination 1300 tunnel flow label 1301 tunnel hop limit 1301 ip unnumbered 1302 ipv6 unnumbered 1303 56 u Boot 1304 boot change 1304 boot selection 1304 boot show net config retries 1305 boot write net config retries 1305 boot zero 1305 default gateway 1306 enable 1306 help 1306 ignore enable password...

Page 41: ...able links 1316 enable 1317 show running config uplink state group 1318 show uplink state group 1318 uplink state group 1319 upstream 1320 58 VLAN Stacking 1322 dei enable 1322 dei honor 1323 dei mark 1323 member 1324 show interface dei honor 1325 show interface dei mark 1325 vlan stack access 1326 vlan stack compatible 1326 vlan stack dot1p mapping 1327 vlan stack protocol type 1327 vlan stack tr...

Page 42: ...t peer lag port channel 1343 show vlt private vlan 1343 60 Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol VRRP 1345 advertise interval 1345 authentication type 1346 clear counters vrrp 1346 debug vrrp 1347 description 1348 disable 1348 hold time 1348 preempt 1349 priority 1349 show config 1350 show vrrp 1351 track 1354 virtual address 1354 vrrp delay minimum 1355 vrrp delay reload 1356 vrrp group 1356 VRRP fo...

Page 43: ... priority bits 1381 iscsi priority bits 1382 show interface dcbx detail 1382 ETS Commands 1385 bandwidth percentage 1385 clear ets counters 1386 dcb map 1386 priority group bandwidth pfc 1387 scheduler 1388 set pgid 1389 show interface ets 1390 show qos dcb output 1393 show qos priority groups 1394 show stack unit stack ports ets details 1394 PFC Commands 1395 clear pfc counters 1395 description 1...

Page 44: ...he MXL 10 40GbE Switch I O Module 1421 Data Center Bridging DCB 1421 advertise dcbx appln tlv 1421 advertise dcbx tlv 1422 bandwidth percentage 1422 dcb enable 1423 dcb input 1424 dcb output 1425 dcb policy input 1425 dcb policy input stack unit stack ports all 1426 dcb policy output 1427 dcb policy output stack unit stack ports all 1428 dcb stack unit all pfc buffering pfc port count pfc queues 1...

Page 45: ...ack ports pfc details 1455 FIP Snooping 1456 clear fip snooping database interface vlan 1456 feature fip snooping 1457 fip snooping enable 1458 fip snooping fc map 1458 fip snooping port mode fcf 1459 iSCSI Optimization 1459 advertise dcbx app tlv 1459 iscsi aging time 1460 iscsi cos 1460 iscsi enable 1461 iscsi priority bits 1461 iscsi profile compellant 1462 iscsi target port 1462 Interfaces 146...

Page 46: ...col LACP 1493 lacp long timeout 1493 lacp port priority 1494 port channel mode 1494 port channel protocol lacp 1495 Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP 1496 advertise dot3 tlv 1496 advertise management tlv 1496 clear lldp counters 1497 clear lldp neighbors 1498 debug lldp interface 1498 disable 1499 hello 1500 multiplier 1500 Quality of Service QoS 1501 Per Port QoS Commands 1501 dot1p priority 150...

Page 47: ... id 1515 vlt domain 1516 vlt peer lag port channel 1517 reload type 1518 Uplink Failure Detection UFD 1520 clear ufd disable 1520 debug uplink state group 1521 description 1522 downstream 1522 downstream auto recover 1524 downstream disable links 1524 enable 1525 show running config uplink state group 1526 show uplink state group 1527 uplink state group 1528 upstream 1529 Simple Network Management...

Page 48: ...nstallation and Maintenance Guides for the MXL 10 40GbE Switch System Release Notes for the MXL 10 40GbE Switch System and Dell Networking OS version 8 3 16 4 Objectives This book is intended as a reference guide for the Dell OS CLI commands with detailed syntax statements along with usage information and sample output This guide contains an Appendix with a list of the request for comment RFCs and...

Page 49: ...Keywords and parameters within braces must be entered in the CLI X Keywords and parameters within brackets are optional x y Keywords and parameters separated by a bar require you to choose one option x y Keywords and parameters separated by a double bar allows you to choose any or all of the options Information Icons This book uses the following information symbols NOTE The Note icon signals impor...

Page 50: ...72 31 1 53 Connected to 172 31 1 53 Escape character is Login username Password Dell After you log in to the switch the prompt provides you with the current command level information For example Prompt CLI Command Mode Dell EXEC Dell EXEC Privilege Dell conf CONFIGURATION NOTE For a list of all the command mode prompts refer to the Command Modes section Multiple Configuration Users When a user ent...

Page 51: ...refer to the command mode list in the Accessing the Command Line section The CLI prompt changes as you move up and down the levels of the command structure Starting with CONFIGURATION mode the command prompt adds modifiers to further identify the mode For more information about command modes refer to the Command Modes section Prompt CLI Command Mode Dell EXEC Dell EXEC Privilege Dell conf CONFIGUR...

Page 52: ...commands use the TAB key To display the last enabled command use the up Arrow key Use either the Backspace key or Delete key to erase the previous character To navigate left or right in the Dell Networking OS command line use the left and right Arrow keys The shortcut key combinations at the Dell Networking OS command line are as follows Key Combination Action CNTL A Moves the cursor to the beginn...

Page 53: ...ver hardware hostname ip line logging monitor service io aggregator broadcast storm control snmp server username Defaults None Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 8 3 17 0 Supported on the M I O Aggregator Filtering show Commands To find specific information display certain information only or begin the command output at the first instance of a regular expression or phrase you can ...

Page 54: ...ind regular expression no more save Command Modes To navigate and launch various CLI modes use specific commands Navigation to these modes is described in the following sections EXEC Mode When you initially log in to the switch by default you are logged in to EXEC mode This mode allows you to view settings and enter EXEC Privilege mode which is used to configure the device When you are in EXEC mod...

Page 55: ...face type and interface number that is available on the switch The prompt changes to include the designated interface and slot port number For example Prompt Interface Type Dell conf if INTERFACE mode Dell conf if te 0 0 Ten Gigabit Ethernet interface then slot port information Dell conf if fo 0 0 Forty Gigabit Ethernet interface then slot port information Dell conf if lo 0 Loopback interface numb...

Page 56: ...st extended command To enter MAC ACCESS LIST mode 1 Verify that you are logged in to CONFIGURATION mode 2 Use the mac access list standard or mac access list extended command Include a name for the ACL The prompt changes to include conf std macl or conf ext macl You can return to CONFIGURATION mode by using the exit command MULTIPLE SPANNING TREE Mode To enable and configure the multiple spanning ...

Page 57: ...protocol gvrp command The prompt changes to include config gvrp You can return to CONFIGURATION mode by using the exit command RAPID SPANNING TREE RSTP Mode To enable and configure RSTP use RSTP mode For more information refer to Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP To enter RSTP mode 1 Verify that you are logged in to CONFIGURATION mode 2 Enter the protocol spanning tree rstp command The prompt chan...

Page 58: ...formation Protocol RIP To enter ROUTER RIP mode 1 Verify that you are logged in to CONFIGURATION mode 2 Enter the router rip command The prompt changes to include conf router_rip You can return to CONFIGURATION mode by using the exit command SPANNING TREE Mode To enable and configure the Spanning Tree protocol use SPANNING TREE mode For more information refer to Spanning Tree Protocol STP To enter...

Page 59: ...sh internal Flash or any sub directory usbflash external Flash or any sub directory Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Version 8 3 16 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module copy Copy one file to another location The Dell Networking Operating System OS supports IPv4 addressing for FTP TFTP and SCP in the hostip field Syntax copy source file url destination file url Parameters E...

Page 60: ...he Dell Networking OS prompts you to enter any required information as needed for the named destination remote destination destination filename user ID password and so forth When you use the copy running config startup config command to copy the running configuration the startup configuration file amended by any configuration changes made since the system was started to the startup configuration f...

Page 61: ... Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information This command is useful for quickly making a changed configuration on one chassis available on external flash in order to move it to another chassis delete Delete a file from the flash After deletion files cannot be restored Syntax delete flash flash filepath usbflash usb...

Page 62: ...d Commands cd Changes the working directory format flash Erase all existing files and reformat the filesystem in the internal flash memory After the filesystem is formatted files cannot be restored Syntax format flash usbflash Defaults flash memory Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information You must include the co...

Page 63: ...m the server to the switch and vice versa Parameters copy http flash Address or name of remote host 10 16 206 77 Port number of the server 80 Source file name sample_file User name to login remote host x Password to login remote host Destination file name sample_file Defaults None Command Modes EXEC Command History Version 9 3 0 1 Introduced on the S6000 Z9000 S4810 and S4820T Example copy http ad...

Page 64: ...erver to upload core dumps Syntax logging coredump server ipv4 address username name password type password Parameters ipv4 address Enter the server IPv4 address A B C D name Enter a username to access the target server type Enter the password type Enter 0 to enter an unencrypted password Enter 7 to enter a password that has already been encrypted using a Type 7 hashing algorithm password Enter a ...

Page 65: ... on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Example Dell pwd flash Dell Related Commands cd changes the directory rename Rename a file in the local file system Syntax rename url url Parameters url Enter the following keywords and a filename For a file on the internal Flash enter flash then the filename For a file on an external USB drive enter usbflash then the filename Command Modes EXEC Privilege Comm...

Page 66: ...the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Example Dell show boot system stack unit all Current system image information in the system Type Boot Type A B Stack unit 0 is not present Stack unit 1 is not present Stack unit 2 is not present Stack unit 3 is not present Stack unit 4 is not present Stack unit 5 DOWNLOAD BOOT 9 1 0 675 9 1 0 684 show file Display contents of a text file in the local filesystem Sy...

Page 67: ...ndancy disable auto reboot stack unit 3 redundancy disable auto reboot stack unit 4 redundancy disable auto reboot stack unit 5 service timestamps log datetime logging coredump stack unit all hostname FTOS More Related Commands format flash Erases all the existing files and reformats the filesystem in the internal flash memory show file systems displays information about the file systems on the sy...

Page 68: ... name of the storage location Related Commands format flash Erases all the existing files and reformats the filesystem in the internal flash memory show file Displays the contents of a text file in the local filesystem show startup config Displays the current SFM status show os version Display the release and software image version information of the image file specified Syntax show os version fil...

Page 69: ...boot flash 4 0 1 0bt Control Processor passed BOOTSEL IMAGE INFORMATION Type Version Target checksum boot selector 4 0 0 0bt Control Processor passed CPLD IMAGE INFORMATION Card CPLD Name Version Stack unit 5 IOM SYSTEM CPLD 5 Dell show running config Display the current configuration and display changes from the default values Syntax show running config entity configured status Parameters entity ...

Page 70: ...on logging for the current logging configuration mac for the current MAC ACL configuration mac address table for the current MAC configuration management route for the current Management port forwarding configuration mroute for the current Mroutes configuration ntp for the current NTP configuration ospf for the current OSPF configuration pim for the current PIM configuration policy map input for t...

Page 71: ... the start up configuration Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Example Dell show running config Current Configuration Version E8 3 16 29 Last configuration change at Thu Apr 26 19 19 21 2012 by admin Startup config last updated at Thu Apr 26 19 19 04 2012 by default boot system stack unit 0 primary system A boot system stac...

Page 72: ... Dell show startup config Version E8 3 16 29 Last configuration change at Thu Apr 26 19 19 02 2012 by default Startup config last updated at Thu Apr 26 19 19 04 2012 by default boot system stack unit 0 primary system A boot system stack unit 0 secondary tftp 10 11 200 241 dt m1000e 5 c2 boot system gateway 10 11 209 254 redundancy auto synchronize full redundancy disable auto reboot stack unit red...

Page 73: ... Cp_src Tacacs FTOS uptime is 13 hour s 29 minute s System image file is system A System Type MXL 10 40GbE Control Processor MIPS RMI XLP with 2147483648 bytes of memory 256M bytes of boot flash memory 1 34 port GE TE FG XL 48 Ten GigabitEthernet IEEE 802 3 interface s 2 Forty GigabitEthernet IEEE 802 3 interface s Command Fields Lines Beginning With Description Dell Force10 Network Name of the op...

Page 74: ...ge to change the bootflash image bootselector image Enter the keywords bootselector image to change the bootselector image 0 5 Enter the keyword 0 5 to upgrade all stack units all Enter the keyword all to upgrade all the member stack units booted Enter the keyword booted to upgrade from the current image in the MXL 10 40GbE Switch ftp After entering the keyword ftp you can either follow it with th...

Page 75: ...elector image Dell upgrade system Upgrade the bootflash image or system image Syntax upgrade system flash ftp scp tftp usbflash stack unit 0 5 all A B Parameters 0 5 Enter the keyword 0 5 to upgrade only the mentioned stack unit all Enter the keyword all to upgrade all the member units of the stack ftp After entering the keyword ftp you can either follow it with the location of the source file in ...

Page 76: ...wer cycle option after restoring the FPGA command Example Dell upgrade system flash Copy from flash file system flash filepath ftp Copy from remote file system IPv4 or IPv6 ftp userid password hostip filepath scp Copy from remote file system IPv4 or IPv6 scp userid password hostip filepath stack unit Sync image to the stack unit tftp Copy from remote file system IPv4 or IPv6 tftp hostip filepath u...

Page 77: ...r this command in the following ways verify md5 flash img file verify md5 flash img file hash value verify sha256 flash img file verify sha256 flash img file hash value Example Without Entering the Hash Value for Verification using SHA256 Dell verify sha256 flash FTOS SE 9 5 0 0 bin SHA256 hash for FTOS SE 9 5 0 0 bin e6328c06faf814e6899ceead219afbf9360e986d692988023b749e6b2093e93 3 Entering the H...

Page 78: ... stack member This option accepts a maximum of 10 characters including all special characters except double quotes To include a space in the asset tag enter a space within double quotes Defaults No asset tag is assigned Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Related Commands show system Displays the current status of all stack m...

Page 79: ...rs c Enter the keywords banner exec then enter a character delineator represented here by the letter c Press ENTER line Enter a text string for your banner message ending the message with your delineator In the following example the delineator is a percent character the banner message is testing testing Defaults No banner is displayed Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 8 3 16 1 In...

Page 80: ...to require a carriage return CR to get the message banner prompt c Enter a delineator character to specify the limits of the text banner The delineator is a percent character line Enter a text string for your text banner message ending the message with your delineator The delineator is a percent character Range maximum of 50 lines up to 255 characters per line Defaults No banner is configured and ...

Page 81: ...exec banner enables the display of a text string when you enter EXEC mode banner motd Set a message of the day MOTD banner Syntax banner motd c line c Parameters c Enter a delineator character to specify the limits of the text banner The delineator is a percent character line Enter a text string for your message of the day banner message ending the message with your delineator The delineator is a ...

Page 82: ... active it is seen in the system output clear command history Clear the command history log Syntax clear command history Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Related Commands show command history displays a buffered log of all the commands all users enter along with a time stamp clear line Reset a terminal line Syntax clear l...

Page 83: ...ory Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Example Dell configure Dell conf debug cpu traffic stats Enable the collection of computer processor unit CPU traffic statistics Syntax debug cpu traffic stats Defaults Disabled Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information This command enables and ...

Page 84: ... is complete Related Commands show cpu traffic stats displays the cpu traffic statistics debug ftpserver View transactions during an FTP session when a user is logged into the FTP server Syntax debug ftpserver Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module disable Return to EXEC mode Syntax disable level Parameters level OPTIONAL Enter...

Page 85: ...if te 5 0 do clear counters Clear counters on all interfaces confirm Dell conf if te 5 0 Dell conf if te 5 0 do clear logging Clear logging buffer confirm Dell conf if te 5 0 Dell conf if te 5 0 do reload System configuration has been modified Save yes no n Proceed with reload confirm yes no n Dell conf if te 5 0 enable Enter EXEC Privilege mode or any other privilege level configured After enteri...

Page 86: ...nable password Related Commands enable password configures a password for the enable command and to access a privilege level enable optic info update interval Enable polling intervals of optical information updates for simple network management protocol SNMP Syntax enable optical info update interval seconds To disable optical power information updates use the no enable optical info update interva...

Page 87: ...er Enable the display of a text string when the user enters EXEC mode Syntax exec banner Defaults Enabled on all lines if configured the banner appears Command Modes LINE Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information Optionally use the banner exec command to create a text string that is displayed when you access EXEC mode This command toggles th...

Page 88: ...ONAL Enter the number of seconds The range is from 0 to 2147483 The default is 0 seconds Defaults 10 minutes for console line 30 minutes for VTY lines 0 seconds Command Modes LINE Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information To remove the time interval use the exec timeout 0 0 command Example Dell con0 is now available Press RETURN to get start...

Page 89: ...S 1 0 FTP server ready Name 10 31 1 111 dch dch 331 Password required Password 230 User logged in ftp pwd 257 Current directory is flash ftp dir 200 Port set okay 150 Opening ASCII mode data connection size date time name 512 Jul 20 2004 18 15 00 tgtimg 512 Jul 20 2004 18 15 00 diagnostic 512 Jul 20 2004 18 15 00 other 512 Jul 20 2004 18 15 00 tgt 226 Transfer complete 329 bytes received in 0 018 ...

Page 90: ...erver Related Commands ftp server enable enables FTP server functions on the MXL 10 40GbE switch IO module ftp server username sets a username and password for incoming FTP connections to the MXL 10 40GbE switch IO module ftp server username Create a user name and associated password for incoming FTP server sessions Syntax ftp server username username password encryption type password Parameters u...

Page 91: ...ation The hostname is used in the prompt You cannot specify spaces in the hostname Starting with Dell Networking OS version 9 3 0 0 the default hostname is modified as Dell instead of FTOS on all of the supported platforms ip ftp password Specify a password for outgoing FTP connections Syntax ip ftp password encryption type password Parameters encryption type OPTIONAL Enter one of the following nu...

Page 92: ...ords and slot port or number information For Loopback interfaces enter the keyword loopback then a number from zero 0 to 16383 For a Port Channel interface enter the keywords port channel then a number The range is from 1 to 128 For a 10 Gigabit Ethernet interface enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot port information For a 40 Gigabit Ethernet interface enter the keyword fortyGigE the...

Page 93: ...P connections ip telnet server enable Enable the Telnet server on the switch Syntax ip telnet server enable To disable the Telnet server use the no ip telnet server enable command Defaults Enabled Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Related Commands ip ssh server enables the secure shell SSH server on the system ip telnet sou...

Page 94: ...ed Commands telnet telnets to another device ip tftp source interface Assign an interface s IP address in outgoing packets for TFTP traffic Syntax ip tftp source interface interface Parameters interface Enter the following keywords and slot port or number information For Loopback interfaces enter the keyword loopback then a number from zero 0 to 16383 For a Port Channel enter the keywords port cha...

Page 95: ...sessions The system supports 10 Telnet sessions end number OPTIONAL Enter a number from 1 to 9 as the last virtual terminal line to configure You can configure multiple lines at one time Defaults Not configured Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 8 3 17 0 Supported on the M I O Aggregator Usage Information You cannot delete a terminal connection Related Commands show memory view cu...

Page 96: ...agram size The range is from 36 to 15360 bytes The default is 100 timeout Enter the interval to wait for an echo reply before timing out The range is from 0 to 3600 seconds The default is 2 seconds source Enter the IPv4 or IPv6 source ip address or the source interface For IPv6 addresses you may enter global addresses only Enter the IP address in A B C D format For a Port Channel interface enter t...

Page 97: ...n the slot port information For a 40 Gigabit Ethernet interface enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot port information For a VLAN interface enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094 Defaults See parameters above Command Modes EXEC EXEC Privilege Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information When you enter the ping command without s...

Page 98: ...f there is a change in the configuration the Dell Networking OS prompts you to save the new configuration Or you can save your running configuration with the copy running config command Related Commands redundancy disable auto reboot Resets any designated stack member except the management unit send Send messages to one or all terminal line users Syntax send line console vty Parameters Enter the a...

Page 99: ... add timestamps to log messages with severity from 0 to 6 datetime OPTIONAL Enter the keyword datetime to have the current time and date added to the message localtime OPTIONAL Enter the keyword localtime to include the localtime in the timestamp msec OPTIONAL Enter the keyword msec to include milliseconds in the timestamp show timezone OPTIONAL Enter the keyword show timezone to include the time ...

Page 100: ...jor Alarms Alarm Type Duration No major alarms Dell show command history Display a buffered log of all commands all users enter along with a time stamp Syntax show command history Defaults none Command Modes EXEC EXEC Privilege Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information One trace log message is generated for each command No password informati...

Page 101: ...ault from console 4 20 10 27 29 CMD CLI show version by default from console 4 20 10 27 56 CMD CLI show interfaces tengigabitethernet 0 3 by default from console 4 20 10 55 8 CMD CLI show lldp neighbors by default from console 4 20 15 17 6 CMD CLI show cam acl by default from console 4 20 16 34 59 CMD CLI show running config interface tengigabitethernet 0 55 by default from console 4 20 16 38 14 C...

Page 102: ...ple Dell show command tree count Enable privilege mode calendar command usage 5 set option usage 0 hh mm ss option usage 0 1 31 option usage 0 MONTH option usage 0 1993 2035 option usage 0 MONTH option usage 0 1 31 option usage 0 1993 2035 option usage 0 clear arp cache command usage 2 clear ip dhcp command usage 1 binding option usage 0 A B C D option usage 0 client option usage 0 statistics opti...

Page 103: ...rsion 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information Traffic statistics are sorted on a per interface basis the interface receiving the most traffic is displayed first All CPU and port information is displayed unless a specific port or CPU is specified Traffic information is displayed for router ports only not for management interfaces The traffic statistics are collect...

Page 104: ...or TenGigabitEthernet 0 16 OSPF 1 OSPF packet debugging is on DHCP DHCP debugging is on Dell show environment View system component status for example temperature or voltage Syntax show environment all stack unit unit id Parameters all Enter the keyword all to view all components stack unit unit id Enter the keyword stack unit then the unit id to display information on a specific stack member The ...

Page 105: ... 48 57 57 53 56 Dell Example stack unit Dell show environment stack unit 0 Unit Environment Status Unit Status Temp Voltage 0 online 49C ok Management Unit Example thermal sensor Dell show environment thermal sensor Thermal Sensor Readings deg C Unit Sensor0 Sensor1 Sensor2 Sensor3 Sensor4 Sensor5 Sensor6 Sensor7 Sensor8 Sensor9 0 50 52 53 53 54 48 57 5753 56 Management Unit Dell show inventory Di...

Page 106: ...gement Unit Software Protocol Configured SNMP LLDP Dell Example media Dell show inv media Slot Port Type Media Serial Number F10Qualid 0 33 QSFP 40GBASE CR4 1M APF11490011J2Q Yes 0 37 QSFP 40GBASE SR4 MLJ004V No 0 41 QSFP 40GBASE SR4 MLJ003P No 0 42 QSFP 40GBASE SR4 MLJ003P No 0 43 QSFP 40GBASE SR4 MLJ003P No 0 44 QSFP 40GBASE SR4 MLJ003P No 0 45 QSFP 40GBASE SR4 MLJ004Y No 0 46 QSFP 40GBASE SR4 M...

Page 107: ... is an aggregate task that handles all the tasks running on the CPU Example Dell show memory stack unit 0 Statistics On Unit 0 Processor Total b Used b Free b Lowest b Largest b 268435456 4010354 264425102 264375410 264425102 show processes cpu Display CPU usage information based on processes running Syntax show processes cpu management unit 1 99 details stack unit 0 5 summary ipc memory stack uni...

Page 108: ...ary Dell show processes cpu summary CPU utilization 5Sec 1Min 5Min Unit0 0 0 0 CPU utilization 5Sec 1Min 5Min Unit1 1 0 0 Unit2 0 0 0 Unit3 0 0 0 Mgmt Unit Example management unit Dell show proc cpu management unit 5 CPU utilization for five seconds 6 0 one minute 6 five minutes 7 PID Runtime ms Invoked uSecs 5Sec 1Min 5Min TTY Process 0x00000000 4650 465 10000 4 43 4 43 4 43 0 system 0x00000112 5...

Page 109: ...0 0 0 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 tDDB 0x7811c000 22980 2298 10000 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 GC 0x7811e000 0 0 0 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 bshell_reaper_threa 0x78365000 10 1 10000 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 tSysLog 0x78367000 1106980 110698 10000 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 tTimerTask 0x78369000 13131160 1313116 10000 0 00 0 08 0 00 0 tExcTask 0x7836b000 30 3 10000 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 tLogTask 0x785bb000 147650 14765 10000 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 tUsrRoot...

Page 110: ...0 1310720 f10appioserv 225280 0 0 208896 ndpm 618496 0 0 7512064 f10appioserv 225280 0 0 208896 vrrp 335872 0 0 8048640 f10appioserv 225280 0 0 208896 frrp 180224 0 0 7512064 f10appioserv 225280 0 0 208896 xstp 2740224 0 0 9801728 f10appioserv 225280 0 0 208896 pim 1007616 0 0 7757824 f10appioserv 225280 0 0 208896 Dell Related Commands show hardware layer2 acl displays Layer 2 ACL data for the se...

Page 111: ...urce Service Identifier Destination QID Rx Process Destination Service Identifier Cur Len Current number of messages enqueued High Mark Highest number of packets in the queue at any time of to Timeout Timeout count of Retr Retries Number of retransmissions msg Sent Msg Sent Number of messages sent msg Ackd Ack Rcvd Number of messages acknowledged Retr Available Retra Number of retries left Total M...

Page 112: ...0 10 ARPMGR0 MRTM0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 100 LACP0 IFMGR0 0 0 0 0 0 0 25 25 RTM0 OTM0 0 0 0 0 0 0 60 60 RTM0 OTM0 0 0 0 0 0 0 60 60 Dell show processes memory Display memory usage information based on the running processes Syntax show processes memory management unit stack unit 0 5 all summary Parameters management unit Enter the keyword management unit for CPU memory usage of the stack management unit ...

Page 113: ... of the system The sysd is an aggregate task that handles all the tasks running on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module s CP The output of the show memory command and this command differ based on which the Dell OS processes are counted In the show memory output the memory size is equal to the size of the application processes In the output of this command the memory size is equal to the size of the a...

Page 114: ...play interface management IFM data Syntax show software ifm clients summary ifagt number ifcb interface stack unit unit ID trace flags Parameters clients Enter the keyword clients to display IFM client information summary OPTIONAL Enter the keyword summary to display brief information about IFM clients ifagt number Enter the keyword ifagt then the number of an interface agent to display software p...

Page 115: ...338 0x00000000 0x00000000 0 PIM 0 0x000e00f3 0x0000c000 0x00000000 0x00000000 0 IGMP 0 0x000e027f 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x00000000 0 SNMP 0 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x8000c2c0 0x00000002 21 EVTTERM 0 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x800002c0 0x0003c000 20 MRTM 0 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x81f7103f 0xc0600000 30 DSM 0 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x80771033 0x00000000 58 Mirror 0 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x80770003 0x00000...

Page 116: ... Member not present 5 Member not present Dell Example stack unit Dell show system stack unit 0 Unit 0 Unit Type Management Unit Status online Next Boot online Required Type MXL 10 40GbE 34 port GE TE FG XL Current Type MXL 10 40GbE 34 port GE TE FG XL Master priority 0 Hardware Rev X01 Num Ports 56 Up Time 3 hr 35 min FTOS Version 8 3 16 160 Jumbo Capable yes POE Capable no Boot Flash A 4 0 1 0bt1...

Page 117: ...e and management plane input and output statistics of a particular stack member stack unit priority Configures the ability of the switch to become the management unit of a stack show tech support Display a collection of data from other show commands necessary for Dell Networking OS technical support to perform troubleshooting on MXL switches Syntax show tech support stack unit unit id page Paramet...

Page 118: ...ion save flash result This display output is an accumulation of the same information that is displayed when you execute one of the following show commands show cam show clock show environment show file show interfaces show inventory show ip protocols show ip route summary show processes cpu show processes memory show redundancy show running conf show version Example partial Dell show tech support ...

Page 119: ...artup config backup 10 drwx 4096 Mar 08 2012 22 58 54 01 00 WJ_running config 11 rwx 7689 Feb 21 2012 04 45 40 01 00 stbkup flash 2143281152 bytes total 2131476480 bytes free Dell Example Partial Dell show tech support stack unit 0 Required Type Unit 5 Unit Type Member Unit Status not present Required Type show environment Unit Environment Status Unit Status Temp Voltage 1 online 41C ok Management...

Page 120: ...g OS version show system Displays the current switch status show environment Displays the system component status show processes memory Displays memory usage based on running processes telnet Connect through Telnet to a server The Telnet client and server in the Dell Networking Operating System OS support IPv4 connections You can establish a Telnet session directly to the router or a connection ca...

Page 121: ...n the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module terminal xml Enable XML mode in Telnet and SSH client sessions Syntax terminal xml To exit XML mode use the terminal no xml command Defaults Disabled Command Modes EXEC EXEC Privilege Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information This command enables the XML input mode where you can either cut and paste XML re...

Page 122: ... 1 maximum TTL default is 30 and port number default is 33434 To keep the default setting for those parameters press the ENTER key Example IPv4 Dell traceroute www force10networks com Translating www force10networks com domain server 10 11 0 1 OK Type Ctrl C to abort Tracing the route to www force10networks com 10 11 84 18 30 hops max 40 byte packets TTL Hostname Probe1 Probe2 Probe3 1 10 11 199 1...

Page 123: ... Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information Each time you issue this command it replaces the previously configured address of the same family The no virtual ip command takes an address prefix length argument so that the desired address only is removed If you enter the no virtual ip command without any specified address the IPv4 virtual addres...

Page 124: ...ege Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information The write memory command saves the running configuration to the file labeled startup configuration When using a LOCAL CONFIG FILE other than the startup config not named startup configuration the running config is not saved to that file use the copy command to save any running configuration chang...

Page 125: ... not valid the port returns to the Unauthorized state and remains in the configured access VLAN This safeguard prevents ports from appearing unexpectedly in an inappropriate VLAN due to a configuration error Configuration errors create an entry in Syslog If you enable 802 1X authorization and all information from the RADIUS server is valid the port is placed in the specified VLAN after authenticat...

Page 126: ...ommand Parameters vlan id Enter the VLAN Identifier The range is from 1 to 4094 max attempts number OPTIONAL Enter the keywords max attempts followed number of attempts desired before authentication fails The range is from 1 to 5 The default is 3 Defaults 3 attempts Command Modes CONFIGURATION conf if interface slot port Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Modu...

Page 127: ...y use the host MAC address Syntax dot1x auth type mab only Defaults Disabled Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information The prerequisites for enabling MAB only authentication on a port are Enable 802 1X authentication globally on the switch and on the port the dot1x authentication command Enable MAC authentication bypas...

Page 128: ...ds dot1x authentication Interface Enables dot1x on an interface dot1x authentication Interface Enable dot1x on an interface Enable dot1x both globally and at the interface level Syntax dot1x authentication To disable dot1x on an interface use the no dot1x authentication command Defaults Disabled Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module...

Page 129: ... for the designated number of times the authenticator places the port in authentication failed VLAN dot1x auth fail vlan NOTE You can create the Layer 3 portion of a guest VLAN and authentication fail VLANs regardless if the VLAN is assigned to an interface or not After an interface is assigned a guest VLAN which has an IP address routing through the guest VLAN is the same as any other traffic How...

Page 130: ...ecause the host did not respond to the Identity Request frame the system attempts to authenticate the host based on its MAC address Syntax dot1x mac auth bypass To disable MAC authentication bypass on a port use the no dot1x mac auth bypass command Defaults Disabled Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module dot1x max eap req Configure t...

Page 131: ...he default is 128 Defaults 128 hosts can be authenticated on a single authenticator port Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Related Commands dot1x host mode Enables single host or multi host authentication dot1x port control Enable port control on an interface Syntax dot1x port control force authorized auto force unauthorized Par...

Page 132: ...r of seconds The range is from 1 to 65535 The default is 60 Defaults 60 seconds Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module dot1x reauthentication Enable periodic reauthentication of the client Syntax dot1x reauthentication interval seconds To disable periodic reauthentication use the no dot1x reauthentication command Parameters interval ...

Page 133: ...dule dot1x server timeout Configure the amount of time after which exchanges with the server time out Syntax dot1x server timeout seconds To return to the default use the no dot1x server timeout command Parameters seconds Enter a time out value in seconds The range is from 1 to 300 where 300 is implementation dependant The default is 30 Defaults 30 seconds Command Modes INTERFACE Command History V...

Page 134: ...pplicant timeout Configure the amount of time after which exchanges with the supplicant time out Syntax dot1x supplicant timeout seconds To return to the default use the no dot1x supplicant timeout command Parameters seconds Enter a time out value in seconds The range is from 1 to 300 where 300 is implementation dependant The default is 30 Defaults 30 seconds Command Modes INTERFACE Command Histor...

Page 135: ...et then the slot port information For a Ten Gigabit Ethernet interface enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot port information mac address Optional MAC address of an 802 1X authenticated supplicant Defaults none Command Modes EXEC EXEC privilege Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information To display CoS mapping information only for ...

Page 136: ...n of an interface Syntax show dot1x interface interface mac address mac address Parameters interface Enter one of the following keywords and slot port or number information For a Gigabit Ethernet interface enter the keyword GigabitEthernet then the slot port information For a Fast Ethernet interface enter the keyword FastEthernet then the slot port information For a Ten Gigabit Ethernet interface ...

Page 137: ...th Bypass Disable Mac Auth Bypass Only Disable Tx Period 30 seconds Quiet Period 60 seconds ReAuth Max 2 Supplicant Timeout 30 seconds Server Timeout 30 seconds Re Auth Interval 3600 seconds Max EAP Req 2 Host Mode SINGLE_HOST Auth PAE State Initialize Backend State Initialize Dell Dell show dot1x interface tengigabitethernet 0 32 802 1x information on Te 0 32 Dot1x Status Enable Port Control AUTO...

Page 138: ...ts 128 Port status and State info for Supplicant 00 00 00 00 00 10 Port Auth Status AUTHORIZED MAC AUTH BYPASS Untagged VLAN id 400 Auth PAE State Authenticated Backend State Idle Dell Example mac address Dell show dot1x interface gig 2 21 mac address 00 00 01 00 07 00 802 1x information on Gi 2 21 Dot1x Status Enable Port Control AUTO Re Authentication Disable Guest VLAN Disable Guest VLAN id NON...

Page 139: ... 3 Supplicant Timeout 30 seconds Server Timeout 30 seconds Re Auth Interval 60 seconds Max EAP Req 2 Host Mode MULTI_AUTH Max Supplicants 128 Port status and State info for Supplicant 00 00 00 00 00 10 Port Auth Status AUTHORIZED Untagged VLAN id 400 Auth PAE State Authenticated Backend State Idle Port status and State info for Supplicant 00 00 00 00 00 11 192 802 1X www dell com s u p p o r t d e...

Page 140: ...he Secure DHCP Commands section in the Security chapter Commands Common to all ACL Types The following commands are available within each ACL mode and do not have mode specific options Some commands in this chapter may use similar names but require different options to support the different ACL types for example the deny command description Configure a short text string describing the ACL Syntax d...

Page 141: ...lable in each ACL mode You can configure up to 4294967290 remarks in a given ACL The following example shows the use of the remark command twice within CONFIGURATION STANDARD ACCESS LIST mode The same sequence number was used for the remark and for an associated ACL rule The remark precedes the rule in the running config because it is assumed that the remark is for the rule with the same sequence ...

Page 142: ...tory Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information When you have exhausted all the sequence numbers this feature permits re assigning a new sequence number to entries of an existing access list Related Commands resequence prefix list ipv4 resequences a prefix list resequence prefix list ipv4 Re assign sequence numbers to entries of an existing prefix list Synta...

Page 143: ...ST EXTENDED CONFIGURATION MAC ACCESS LIST STANDARD CONFIGURATION MAC ACCESS LIST EXTENDED Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Example Dell config std nacl show conf ip access list standard test remark 5 Permit traffic from XYZ Inc seq 5 permit 1 1 1 0 24 count remark 10 Deny traffic from ABC seq 10 deny 2 1 1 0 24 count Dell config std nacl Common IP AC...

Page 144: ...ers ip access group Erase all counters maintained for access lists Syntax clear counters ip access group access list name Parameters access list name OPTIONAL Enter the name of a configured access list up to 140 characters Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module ip access group Apply an egress IP ACL to an interface Syntax ip ac...

Page 145: ...XL Switch Loopback interfaces When you apply an ACL that filters IGMP traffic all IGMP traffic is redirected to the CPUs and soft forwarded if necessary in the following scenarios on a Layer 2 interface if a Layer 3 ACL is applied to the interface on a Layer 3 port or on a Layer 2 Layer 3 port Related Commands ip access list standard configures a standard ACL ip access list extended configures an ...

Page 146: ... list Display the IP access lists created on the switch and the sequence of filters Syntax show ip accounting access list access list name cam_count interface interface Parameters access list name Enter the name of the ACL to be displayed cam_count List the count of the CAM rules for this ACL interface interface Enter the keyword interface then the one of the following keywords and slot port or nu...

Page 147: ... ACL without any rule and then apply it to an interface the ACL behavior reflects an implicit permit The MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module platform supports both Ingress and Egress IP ACLs NOTE Also refer to the Commands Common to all ACL Types and Common IP ACL Commands sections deny for Standard IP ACLs To drop packets with a certain IP address configure a filter Syntax deny source any host ip addre...

Page 148: ...e threshold in msgs keyword followed by a value to indicate the maximum number of ACL logs that can be generated exceeding which the generation of ACL logs is terminated with the seq permit or deny commands The threshold range is from 1 to 100 interval minutes OPTIONAL Enter the keyword interval followed by the time period in minutes at which ACL logs must be generated The interval range is from 1...

Page 149: ...gress and egress interfaces are examined and appropriate ACLs can be applied in both the ingress and egress direction Flow based monitoring conserves bandwidth by monitoring only specified traffic instead all traffic on the interface This feature is particularly useful when looking for malicious traffic It is available for Layer 2 and Layer 3 ingress and egress traffic You may specify traffic usin...

Page 150: ... msgs count monitor To remove this filter you have two choices Use the no seq sequence number command if you know the filter s sequence number Use the no permit source mask any host ip address command Parameters source Enter the IP address in dotted decimal format of the network from which the packet was sent mask OPTIONAL Enter a network mask in prefix format x or A B C D The mask when specified ...

Page 151: ...nterface Defaults By default 10 ACL logs are generated if you do not specify the threshold explicitly The default frequency at which ACL logs are generated is five minutes By default flow based monitoring is not enabled Command Modes CONFIGURATION STANDARD ACCESS LIST Command History Version 9 4 0 0 Added support for flow based monitoring on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module platforms Version 9 3 ...

Page 152: ...rd creates a standard ACL seq Assign a sequence number to a deny or permit filter in an extended IP access list while creating the filter Syntax seq sequence number deny permit source mask any host ip address count byte dscp value order fragments log interval minutes threshold in msgs count monitor Parameters sequence number Enter a number from 0 to 4294967290 The range is from 0 to 65534 deny Ent...

Page 153: ...ing the traffic that you want to monitor and the ACL in which you are creating the rule is applied to the monitored interface Defaults By default 10 ACL logs are generated if you do not specify the threshold explicitly The default frequency at which ACL logs are generated is five minutes By default flow based monitoring is not enabled Command Modes CONFIGURATION IP ACCESS LIST STANDARD Command His...

Page 154: ...and egress interfaces are examined and appropriate ACLs can be applied in both the ingress and egress direction Flow based monitoring conserves bandwidth by monitoring only specified traffic instead all traffic on the interface This feature is particularly useful when looking for malicious traffic It is available for Layer 2 and Layer 3 ingress and egress traffic You may specify traffic using stan...

Page 155: ...re subject to the filter host ip address Enter the keyword host then the IP address to specify a host IP address destination Enter the IP address of the network or host to which the packets are sent count OPTIONAL Enter the keyword count to count packets processed by the filter byte OPTIONAL Enter the keyword byte to count bytes processed by the filter order OPTIONAL Enter the keyword order to spe...

Page 156: ...the subsequent fresh interval timer is started and the packet count for that new interval commences from zero If ACL logging was stopped previously because the configured threshold is exceeded it is re enabled for this new interval If ACL logging is stopped because the configured threshold is exceeded it is re enabled after the logging interval period elapses ACL logging is supported for standard ...

Page 157: ...e packets were sent mask Enter a network mask in prefix format x or A B C D The mask when specified in A B C D format may be either contiguous or non contiguous any Enter the keyword any to specify that all routes are subject to the filter host ip address Enter the keyword host then the IP address to specify a host IP address destination Enter the IP address of the network or host to which the pac...

Page 158: ...ive minutes By default flow based monitoring is not enabled Command Modes CONFIGURATION IP ACCESS LIST EXTENDED Command History Version 9 4 0 0 Added the support for flow based monitoring on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Version 9 3 0 0 Added the support for logging ACLs on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information The ...

Page 159: ...tion port is the monitoring port MG deny tcp Configure a filter that drops transmission control protocol TCP packets meeting the filter criteria Syntax deny tcp source mask any host ip address bit operator port port destination mask any host ip address dscp bit operator port port count byte order fragments log interval minutes threshold in msgs count monitor To remove this filter you have two choi...

Page 160: ...ork or host to which the packets are sent mask Enter a network mask in prefix format x or A B C D The mask when specified in A B C D format may be either contiguous or non contiguous count OPTIONAL Enter the keyword count to count packets the filter processes byte OPTIONAL Enter the keyword byte to count bytes the filter processes order OPTIONAL Enter the keyword order to specify the QoS priority ...

Page 161: ...8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information The order option is relevant in the context of the Policy QoS feature only For more information refer to the Quality of Service chapter of the Dell Networking OS Configuration Guide In the MXL switch you can configure either count packets or count bytes However for an ACL with multiple rules you can configure some ACLs with...

Page 162: ...is the monitored port MD and the destination port is the monitoring port MG Example An ACL rule with a TCP port range of 4000 8000 uses eight entries in the CAM Dell Data Mask From To Covered 1 0000111110100000 1111111111100000 4000 4031 32 2 0000111111000000 1111111111000000 4032 4095 64 3 0001000000000000 1111100000000000 4096 6143 2048 4 0001100000000000 1111110000000000 6144 7167 1024 5 000111...

Page 163: ...f the following logical operand eq equal to neq not equal to gt greater than lt less than range inclusive range of ports you must specify two ports for the port command port port Enter the application layer port number Enter two port numbers if using the range logical operand The range is from 0 to 65535 destination Enter the IP address of the network or host to which the packets are sent mask Ent...

Page 164: ... relevant in the context of the Policy QoS feature only For more information refer to the Quality of Service chapter of the Dell Networking OS Configuration Guide In the MXL switch you can configure either count packets or count bytes However for an ACL with multiple rules you can configure some ACLs with count packets and others as count bytes at any given time Most ACL rules require one entry in...

Page 165: ... Ports 4001 Example An ACL rule with a TCP port lt 1023 uses only one entry in the CAM Dell Data Mask From To Covered 1 0000000000000000 1111110000000000 0 1023 1024 Total Ports 1024 Related Commands deny assigns a filter to deny IP traffic deny tcp assigns a filter to deny TCP traffic ip access list extended Name or select an extended IP access list IP ACL based on IP addresses or protocols Synta...

Page 166: ...ce mask any host ip address destination mask any host ip address command Parameters source Enter the IP address in dotted decimal format of the network from which the packet was sent mask OPTIONAL Enter a network mask in prefix format x or A B C D The mask when specified in A B C D format may be either contiguous or non contiguous any Enter the keyword any to specify that all routes are subject to...

Page 167: ...and History Version 9 4 0 0 Added support for flow based monitoring on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module platforms Version 9 3 0 0 Added support for logging of ACLs on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module platform Usage Information When the configured maximum threshold is exceeded generation of logs is stopped When the interval at which ACL logs are configured to be recorded expires the subsequent fr...

Page 168: ...ddress dscp message type count byte order fragments log interval minutes threshold in msgs count monitor To remove this filter you have two choices Use the no seq sequence number command if you know the filter s sequence number Use the no permit icmp source mask any host ip address destination mask any host ip address command Parameters source Enter the IP address of the network or host from which...

Page 169: ...generation of ACL logs is terminated with the seq permit or deny commands The threshold range is from 1 to 100 interval minutes OPTIONAL Enter the keyword interval followed by the time period in minutes at which ACL logs must be generated The interval range is from 1 to 10 minutes monitor OPTIONAL Enter the keyword monitor when the rule is describing the traffic that you want to monitor and the AC...

Page 170: ... with particular flows that are traversing through the ingress and egress interfaces are examined and appropriate ACLs can be applied in both the ingress and egress direction Flow based monitoring conserves bandwidth by monitoring only specified traffic instead all traffic on the interface This feature is particularly useful when looking for malicious traffic It is available for Layer 2 and Layer ...

Page 171: ...from 0 to 63 operator OPTIONAL Enter one of the following logical operand eq equal to neq not equal to gt greater than lt less than range inclusive range of ports you must specify two ports for the port parameter port port Enter the application layer port number Enter two port numbers if you are using the range logical operand The range is from 0 to 65535 The following list includes some common TC...

Page 172: ...hold range is from 1 to 10 minutes monitor OPTIONAL Enter the keyword monitor when the rule is describing the traffic that you want to monitor and the ACL in which you are creating the rule is applied to the monitored interface Defaults By default 10 ACL logs are generated if you do not specify the threshold explicitly The default frequency at which ACL logs are generated is five minutes By defaul...

Page 173: ...ffic with particular flows that are traversing through the ingress and egress interfaces are examined and appropriate ACLs can be applied in both the ingress and egress direction Flow based monitoring conserves bandwidth by monitoring only specified traffic instead all traffic on the interface This feature is particularly useful when looking for malicious traffic It is available for Layer 2 and La...

Page 174: ...arameters source Enter the IP address of the network or host from which the packets were sent mask Enter a network mask in prefix format x or A B C D The mask when specified in A B C D format may be either contiguous or non contiguous any Enter the keyword any to specify that all routes are subject to the filter host ip address Enter the keyword host and then enter the IP address to specify a host...

Page 175: ... is from 1 to 100 interval minutes OPTIONAL Enter the keyword interval followed by the time period in minutes at which ACL logs must be generated The interval range is from 1 to 10 minutes monitor OPTIONAL Enter the keyword monitor when the rule is describing the traffic that you want to monitor and the ACL in which you are creating the rule is applied to the monitored interface Defaults By defaul...

Page 176: ...ffic with particular flows that are traversing through the ingress and egress interfaces are examined and appropriate ACLs can be applied in both the ingress and egress direction Flow based monitoring conserves bandwidth by monitoring only specified traffic instead all traffic on the interface This feature is particularly useful when looking for malicious traffic It is available for Layer 2 and La...

Page 177: ...ter to forward packets meeting this criteria ip protocol number Enter a number from 0 to 255 to filter based on the protocol identified in the IP protocol header icmp Enter the keyword icmp to configure an ICMP access list filter ip Enter the keyword ip to configure a generic IP access list The keyword ip specifies that the access list permits all IP protocols tcp Enter the keyword tcp to configur...

Page 178: ...DCSCP values order OPTIONAL Enter the keyword order to specify the QoS order for the ACL entry The range is from 0 to 254 where 0 is the highest priority and 254 is the lowest lower order numbers have a higher priority If you do not use the keyword order the ACLs have the lowest order by default 255 fragments Enter the keyword fragments to use ACLs to control packet fragments log OPTIONAL Enter th...

Page 179: ...r If sequence number is configured the sequence number is used as a tie breaker for rules with the same order If you configure the sequence number the sequence number is used as a tie breaker for rules with the same order When the configured maximum threshold is exceeded generation of logs is stopped When the interval at which ACL logs are configured to be recorded expires the subsequent fresh int...

Page 180: ... These commands allow you to clear display and assign MAC ACL configurations The MAC ACL can be applied on Physical Port channel and VLAN interfaces As per the stipulated rules in the ACL the traffic on the Interface VLAN members or Port channel members will be permitted or denied The MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module platform supports both Ingress and Egress MAC ACLs clear counters mac access group C...

Page 181: ...one ACL standard or extended to an interface In case of applying a MAC ACL to traffic entering or exiting a VLAN interface Enter the VLAN interface mode and apply the mac acl in the following manner mac access group access list name in out 1 If the MAC ACL is applied on VLAN none of the VLAN members should have an access list applied for that VLAN 2 If the MAC ACL is applied on a Physical or Port ...

Page 182: ...rt information For a 40 Gigabit Ethernet interface enter the keyword fortyGigE and then enter the slot port information For a VLAN interface enter the keyword VLAN and then the vlan id in out Identify whether ACL is applied on ingress or egress side Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module show mac accounting access list Display ...

Page 183: ...face tengigabitethernet 0 89 in Ingress Standard mac access list TestMac on TenGigabitEthernet 0 89 Total cam count 2 seq 5 permit aa aa aa aa 00 00 00 00 00 00 ff ff count 0 packets seq 10 deny any count 20072594 packets Dell Standard MAC ACL Commands When you create an access control list without any rule and then apply it to an interface the ACL behavior reflects implicit permit These commands ...

Page 184: ...a value to indicate the maximum number of ACL logs that can be generated exceeding which the generation of ACL logs is terminated with the seq permit or deny commands The threshold range is from 1 to 100 interval minutes OPTIONAL Enter the keyword interval followed by the time period in minutes at which ACL logs must be generated The threshold range is from 1 to 10 minutes monitor OPTIONAL Enter t...

Page 185: ...raffic with particular flows that are traversing through the ingress and egress interfaces are examined and appropriate ACLs can be applied in both the ingress and egress direction Flow based monitoring conserves bandwidth by monitoring only specified traffic instead all traffic on the interface This feature is particularly useful when looking for malicious traffic It is available for Layer 2 and ...

Page 186: ... mask count byte log interval minutes threshold in msgs count monitor To remove this filter you have two choices Use the no seq sequence number command if you know the filter s sequence number Use the no permit any mac source address mac source address mask command Parameters any Enter the keyword any to forward all packets received with a MAC address mac source address Enter a MAC address in nn n...

Page 187: ...ed expires the subsequent fresh interval timer is started and the packet count for that new interval commences from zero If ACL logging was stopped previously because the configured threshold is exceeded it is re enabled for this new interval If ACL logging is stopped because the configured threshold is exceeded it is re enabled after the logging interval period elapses ACL logging is supported fo...

Page 188: ...the keyword permit to configure a filter to forward packets meeting this criteria any Enter the keyword any to filter all packets mac source address Enter a MAC address in nn nn nn nn nn nn format mac source address mask OPTIONAL Specify which bits in the MAC address must match If no mask is specified a mask of 00 00 00 00 00 00 is applied in other words the filter allows only MAC addresses that m...

Page 189: ...eviously because the configured threshold is exceeded it is re enabled for this new interval If ACL logging is stopped because the configured threshold is exceeded it is re enabled after the logging interval period elapses ACL logging is supported for standard and extended IPv4 ACLs IPv6 ACLs and MAC ACLs You can configure ACL logging only on ACLs that are applied to ingress interfaces you cannot ...

Page 190: ...q sequence number command if you know the filter s sequence number Use the no deny any host mac address mac source address mac source address mask any host mac address mac destination address mac destination address mask command Parameters any Enter the keyword any to drop all packets host mac address Enter the keyword host and then enter a MAC address to drop packets with that host address mac so...

Page 191: ...r the keyword byte to count bytes processed by the filter Defaults Not configured Command Modes CONFIGURATION MAC ACCESS LIST EXTENDED Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Related Commands permit configures a MAC address filter to pass packets seq configures a MAC address filter with a specified sequence number mac access list extended Name a new or exis...

Page 192: ...counting access list snickers interface g0 47 in Extended mac access list snickers on GigabitEthernet 0 47 seq 10 permit any any ev2 eq 800 count bytes 559851886 packets 191402152148bytes seq 20 permit any any ev2 eq 806 count bytes 74481486 packets 5031686754bytes seq 30 permit any any ev2 eq 86dd count bytes 7751519 packets 797843521 bytes Related Commands mac access list standard configures a s...

Page 193: ...The MAC ACL supports an inverse mask therefore a mask of ff ff ff ff ff ff allows entries that do not match and a mask of 00 00 00 00 00 00 only allows entries that match exactly ethertype operator OPTIONAL To filter based on protocol type enter one of the following Ethertypes ev2 is the Ethernet II frame format llc is the IEEE 802 3 frame format snap is the IEEE 802 3 SNAP frame format count OPTI...

Page 194: ...mask therefore a mask of ff ff ff ff ff ff allows entries that do not match and a mask of 00 00 00 00 00 00 only allows entries that match exactly mac source address mask Specify which bits in the MAC address must be matched mac destination address Enter the destination MAC address and mask in nn nn nn nn nn nn format mac destination address mask Specify which bits in the MAC address must be match...

Page 195: ...t the number of times traffic mets the conditions hit counters of the configured prefix lists Syntax clear ip prefix list prefix name Parameters prefix name OPTIONAL Enter the name of the configured prefix list to clear only counters for that prefix list up to 140 characters long Defaults Clears hit counters for all prefix lists unless a prefix list is specified Command Modes EXEC Privilege Comman...

Page 196: ...mbers for this filter are automatically assigned starting at sequence number 5 If you do not use the ge or le options only packets with an exact match to the prefix are filtered Related Commands permit configures a filter to pass packets seq configures a drop or permit filter with a specified sequence number ip prefix list Enter the PREFIX LIST mode and configure a prefix list Syntax ip prefix lis...

Page 197: ...TIONAL Enter the keyword le and then enter the maximum prefix length which is a number from zero 0 to 32 Command Modes PREFIX LIST Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information Sequence numbers for this filter are automatically assigned starting at sequence number 5 If you do not use the ge or le options only packets with an exact match to the p...

Page 198: ...length which is a number from zero 0 to 32 le max prefix length OPTIONAL Enter the keyword le and then enter the maximum prefix length which is a number from zero 0 to 32 bitmask number Enter the keyword bitmask then enter a bit mask number in dotted decimal format Defaults Not configured Command Modes PREFIX LIST Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usa...

Page 199: ... 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Example Dell show ip prefix list detail Ip Prefix list with the last deletion insertion PL_OSPF_to_RIP ip prefix list PL_OSPF_to_RIP count 3 range entries 1 sequences 5 25 seq 5 permit 1 1 1 0 24 hit count 0 seq 10 deny 2 1 0 0 16 ge 23 hit count 0 seq 25 permit 192 0 0 0 bitmask 192 0 0 0 hit count 800 show ip prefix list summary Display a sum...

Page 200: ...ed Command Modes ROUTE MAP Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information The continue feature allows movement from one route map entry to a specific route map entry the sequence number If you do not specify the sequence number the continue feature simply moves to the next sequence number also known as an implied continue If a match clause exists...

Page 201: ...umps to the specified route map entry If a set action occurs in the first route map entry and then the same set action occurs with a different value in a subsequent route map entry the last set of actions overrides the previous set of actions with the same set command If set community additive and set as path prepend are configure the communities and AS numbers are prepended Related Commands set m...

Page 202: ...net interface enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot port information Defaults Not configured Command Modes ROUTE MAP Command History Version 8 3 16 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Related Commands match ip address redistributes routes that match an IP address match ip next hop redistributes routes that match the next hop IP address match ip route source redistributes routes t...

Page 203: ...type match tag redistributes routes that match a specific tag match ip next hop To match based on the next hop IP addresses specified in an IP access list or IP prefix list configure a filter Syntax match ip next hop access list prefix list prefix list name Parameters access list name Enter the name of a configured IP access list up to 140 characters prefix list prefix list name Enter the keywords...

Page 204: ...ured IP access list up to 140 characters prefix list prefix list name Enter the keywords prefix list and then enter the name of configured prefix list up to 140 characters Defaults Not configured Command Modes ROUTE MAP Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Related Commands match interface redistributes routes that match the next hop interface match ip ad...

Page 205: ...route source redistributes routes that match routes advertised by other routers match route type redistributes routes that match a route type match tag redistributes routes that match a specific tag match route type To match routes based on the how the route is defined configure a filter Syntax match route type external type 1 type 2 internal local Parameters external type 1 type 2 Enter the keywo...

Page 206: ... specified tag value configure a filter Syntax match tag tag value Parameters tag value Enter a value as the tag on which to match The range is from zero 0 to 4294967295 Defaults Not configured Command Modes ROUTE MAP Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Related Commands match interface redistributes routes that match the next hop interface match ip addr...

Page 207: ...nce number if there are multiple instances of the route map The range is from 1 to 65535 Defaults Not configured If you do not define a keyword permit or deny for the route map the permit action is the default Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information Use caution when you delete route maps because if you do not sp...

Page 208: ...e To delete a setting use the no set metric command Parameters OPTIONAL Enter to add a metric value to the redistributed routes OPTIONAL Enter to subtract a metric value from the redistributed routes metric value Enter a number as the new metric value The range is from zero 0 to 4294967295 Defaults Not configured Command Modes ROUTE MAP Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40G...

Page 209: ...mand History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Related Commands set automatic tag computes the tag value of the route set metric specifies the metric value assigned to redistributed routes set tag specifies the tag assigned to redistributed routes set tag To specify a tag for redistributed routes configure a filter Syntax set tag tag value Parameters tag value Enter ...

Page 210: ... permit 10 Dell config route map show route map Display the current route map configurations Syntax show route map map name Parameters map name OPTIONAL Enter the name of a configured route map up to 140 characters Command Modes EXEC EXEC Privilege Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Example Dell show route map route map firpo permit sequence 10 Match c...

Page 211: ...ter this keyword dscp to deny a packet based on the DSCP value The range is from 0 to 63 log OPTIONAL Enter the keyword log to enable the triggering of ACL log messages order OPTIONAL Enter the keyword order to specify the QoS priority for the ACL entry The range is from 0 to 254 where 0 is the highest priority and 254 is the lowest lower order numbers have a higher priority If you did not use the...

Page 212: ... threshold is exceeded it is re enabled after the logging interval period elapses ACL logging is supported for standard and extended IPv4 ACLs IPv6 ACLs and MAC ACLs You can configure ACL logging only on ACLs that are applied to ingress interfaces you cannot enable logging for ACLs that are associated with egress interfaces You can activate flow based monitoring for a monitoring session by enterin...

Page 213: ...re subject to the filter host ip address Enter the keyword host then the IP address to specify a host IP address destination Enter the IP address of the network or host to which the packets are sent count OPTIONAL Enter the keyword count to count packets processed by the filter byte OPTIONAL Enter the keyword byte to count bytes processed by the filter order OPTIONAL Enter the keyword order to spe...

Page 214: ...the subsequent fresh interval timer is started and the packet count for that new interval commences from zero If ACL logging was stopped previously because the configured threshold is exceeded it is re enabled for this new interval If ACL logging is stopped because the configured threshold is exceeded it is re enabled after the logging interval period elapses ACL logging is supported for standard ...

Page 215: ... address in dotted decimal format of the network from which the packet was received mask OPTIONAL Enter a network mask in prefix format x or A B C D The mask when specified in A B C D format may be either contiguous or non contiguous any Enter the keyword any to specify that all routes are subject to the filter count OPTIONAL Enter the keyword count to count packets the filter processes byte OPTIO...

Page 216: ...rsion 9 3 0 0 Added support for logging of ACLs on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module platform Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information The order option is relevant in the context of the Policy QoS feature only The following applies The seq sequence number command is applicable only in an ACL group The order option works across ACL groups that have been app...

Page 217: ...t The source port is the monitored port MD and the destination port is the monitoring port MG Related Commands deny configures a filter to drop packets permit configures a filter to forward packets seq assigns a sequence number to a deny or permit filter in an IP access list while creating the filter deny tcp Configure a filter that drops transmission control protocol TCP packets meeting the filte...

Page 218: ... application layer port number Enter two port numbers if using the range logical operand The range is from 0 to 65535 The following list includes some common TCP port numbers 23 Telnet 20 and 21 FTP 25 SMTP 169 SNMP destination Enter the IP address of the network or host to which the packets are sent mask Enter a network mask in prefix format x or A B C D The mask when specified in A B C D format ...

Page 219: ...e threshold explicitly The default frequency at which ACL logs are generated is five minutes By default flow based monitoring is not enabled Command Modes CONFIGURATION IP ACCESS LIST EXTENDED Command History 9 4 0 0 Added the support for flow based monitoring on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module platforms 9 3 0 0 Added the support for logging of ACLs on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module platforms...

Page 220: ... conserves bandwidth by monitoring only specified traffic instead all traffic on the interface This feature is particularly useful when looking for malicious traffic It is available for Layer 2 and Layer 3 ingress and egress traffic You may specify traffic using standard or extended access lists This mechanism copies all incoming or outgoing packets on one port and forwards mirrors them to another...

Page 221: ... contiguous any Enter the keyword any to specify that all routes are subject to the filter host ip address Enter the keyword host then the IP address to specify a host IP address dscp Enter this keyword dscp to deny a packet based on the DSCP value The range is from 0 to 63 operator OPTIONAL Enter one of the following logical operand eq equal to neq not equal to gt greater than lt less than range ...

Page 222: ...tly The default frequency at which the ACL logs are generated is five minutes Command Modes CONFIGURATION IP ACCESS LIST EXTENDED Command History Version 9 3 0 0 Added the support for logging of ACLs on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module platform Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information The order option is relevant in the context of the Policy QoS feature o...

Page 223: ...10000000000 6144 7167 1024 5 0001110000000000 1111111000000000 7168 7679 512 6 0001111000000000 1111111100000000 7680 7935 256 7 0001111100000000 1111111111000000 7936 7999 64 8 0001111101000000 1111111111111111 8000 8000 1 Total Ports 4001 Example An ACL rule with a TCP port lt 1023 uses only one entry in the CAM Dell Data Mask From To Covered 1 0000000000000000 1111110000000000 0 1023 1024 Total...

Page 224: ...fic specify VLAN 1 ip address Enter an IP address in dotted decimal format A B C D as the target IP address of the ARP opcode code number Enter the keyword opcode and then enter the number of the ARP opcode The range is from 1 to 23 count OPTIONAL Enter the keyword count to count packets processed by the filter byte OPTIONAL Enter the keyword byte to count bytes processed by the filter log OPTIONA...

Page 225: ...ontiguous mask and the monitor option Version 6 5 1 0 Expanded to include the optional QoS order priority for the ACL entry Usage Information When the configured maximum threshold is exceeded generation of logs is stopped When the interval at which ACL logs are configured to be recorded expires the subsequent fresh interval timer is started and the packet count for that new interval commences from...

Page 226: ...ecome busy as it has to log these packets details You cannot include IP TCP or UDP Layer 3 filters in an ACL configured with ARP or Ether type Layer 2 filters Apply Layer 2 ACLs ARP and Ether type to Layer 2 interfaces only NOTE When ACL logging and byte counters are configured simultaneously byte counters may display an incorrect value Configure packet counters with logging instead deny icmp To d...

Page 227: ...log to enable the triggering of ACL log messages threshold in msgs count OPTIONAL Enter the threshold in msgs keyword followed by a value to indicate the maximum number of ACL logs that can be generated exceeding which the generation of ACL logs is terminated with the seq permit or deny commands The threshold range is from 1 to 100 interval minutes OPTIONAL Enter the keyword interval followed by t...

Page 228: ...ion by entering the flow based enablecommand in the Monitor Session mode When you enable this capability traffic with particular flows that are traversing through the ingress and egress interfaces are examined and appropriate ACLs can be applied in both the ingress and egress direction Flow based monitoring conserves bandwidth by monitoring only specified traffic instead all traffic on the interfa...

Page 229: ... traffic specify VLAN 1 source mac address mac address mask Enter a MAC address and mask in the nn nn nn nn nn format For the MAC address mask specify which bits in the MAC address must match The MAC ACL supports an inverse mask therefore a mask of ff ff ff ff ff ff allows entries that do not match and a mask of 00 00 00 00 00 00 only allows entries that match exactly count OPTIONAL Enter the keyw...

Page 230: ...nces from zero If ACL logging was stopped previously because the configured threshold is exceeded it is re enabled for this new interval If ACL logging is stopped because the configured threshold is exceeded it is re enabled after the logging interval period elapses ACL logging is supported for standard and extended IPv4 ACLs IPv6 ACLs and MAC ACLs You can configure ACL logging only on ACLs that a...

Page 231: ...e OPTIONAL Enter the keyword byte to count bytes processed by the filter log OPTIONAL Enter the keywordlog to enable the triggering of ACL log messages threshold in msgs count OPTIONAL Enter thethreshold in msgs keyword followed by a value to indicate the maximum number of ACL logs that can be generated exceeding which the generation of ACL logs is terminated with the seq permit or deny commands T...

Page 232: ...ith egress interfaces You can activate flow based monitoring for a monitoring session by entering the flow based enable command in the Monitor Session mode When you enable this capability traffic with particular flows that are traversing through the ingress and egress interfaces are examined and appropriate ACLs can be applied in both the ingress and egress direction Flow based monitoring conserve...

Page 233: ...essed by the filter byte OPTIONAL Enter the keyword byte to count bytes processed by the filter log OPTIONAL Enter the keyword log to enable the triggering of ACL log messages threshold in msgs count OPTIONAL Enter the threshold in msgs keyword followed by a value to indicate the maximum number of ACL logs that can be generated exceeding which the generation of ACL logs is terminated with the seq ...

Page 234: ... enabled after the logging interval period elapses ACL logging is supported for standard and extended IPv4 ACLs IPv6 ACLs and s MAC ACLs You can configure ACL logging only on ACLs that are applied to ingress interfaces you cannot enable logging for ACLs that are associated with egress interfaces You can activate flow based monitoring for a monitoring session by entering the flow based enable comma...

Page 235: ...ss to specify a host IP address or hostname count OPTIONAL Enter the keyword count to count packets processed by the filter bytes OPTIONAL Enter the keyword bytes to count bytes processed by the filter dscp OPTIONAL Enter the keyword dcsp to match to the IP DCSCP values order OPTIONAL Enter the keyword order to specify the QoS priority for the ACL entry The range is from 0 to 254 where 0 is the hi...

Page 236: ...e enabled for this new interval If ACL logging is stopped because the configured threshold is exceeded it is re enabled after the logging interval period elapses ACL logging is supported for standard and extended IPv4 ACLs IPv6 ACLs and MAC ACLs You can configure ACL logging only on ACLs that are applied to ingress interfaces you cannot enable logging for ACLs that are associated with egress inter...

Page 237: ...0 00 00 00 00 00 only allows entries that match exactly any Enter the keyword any to match and drop specific Ethernet traffic on the interface vlan vlan id Enter the keyword vlan and then enter the VLAN ID to filter traffic associated with a specific VLAN The range is 1 to 4094 and 1 to 2094 for ExaScale you can use IDs 1 to 4094 To filter all VLAN traffic specify VLAN 1 ip address Enter an IP add...

Page 238: ... period in minutes at which ACL logs must be generated The interval range is from 1 to 10 minutes monitor OPTIONAL Enter the keyword monitor when the rule is describing the traffic that you want to monitor and the ACL in which you are creating the rule is applied to the monitored interface Defaults By default 10 ACL logs are generated if you do not specify the threshold explicitly The default freq...

Page 239: ...annot enable logging for ACLs that are associated with egress interfaces You can activate flow based monitoring for a monitoring session by entering the flow based enable command in the Monitor Session mode When you enable this capability traffic with particular flows that are traversing through the ingress and egress interfaces are examined and appropriate ACLs can be applied in both the ingress ...

Page 240: ...thernet traffic on the interface vlan vlan id Enter the keyword vlan and then enter the VLAN ID to filter traffic associated with a specific VLAN The range is 1 to 4094 and 1 to 2094 for ExaScale you can use IDs 1 to 4094 To filter all VLAN traffic specify VLAN 1 source mac address mac address mask Enter a MAC address and mask in the nn nn nn nn nn format For the MAC address mask specify which bit...

Page 241: ... 10 ACL logs are generated if you do not specify the threshold explicitly The default frequency at which ACL logs are generated is five minutes By default flow based monitoring is not enabled Command Modes CONFIGURATION EXTENDED ACCESS LIST Command History Version 9 4 0 0 Added the support for flow based monitoring on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module platform Version 9 3 0 0 Added the support for...

Page 242: ...s You can activate flow based monitoring for a monitoring session by entering the flow based enable command in the Monitor Session mode When you enable this capability traffic with particular flows that are traversing through the ingress and egress interfaces are examined and appropriate ACLs can be applied in both the ingress and egress direction Flow based monitoring conserves bandwidth by monit...

Page 243: ... keyword byte to count bytes the filter processes order OPTIONAL Enter the keyword order to specify the QoS priority for the ACL entry The range is 0 to 254 where 0 is the highest priority and 254 is the lowest lower order numbers have a higher priority If you do not use the keyword order the ACLs have the lowest order by default 255 fragments Enter the keyword fragments to use ACLs to control pac...

Page 244: ...figured threshold is exceeded it is re enabled for this new interval If ACL logging is stopped because the configured threshold is exceeded it is re enabled after the logging interval period elapses ACL logging is supported for standard and extended IPv4 ACLs IPv6 ACLs and MAC ACLs You can configure ACL logging only on ACLs that are applied to ingress interfaces you cannot enable logging for ACLs ...

Page 245: ...to specify that all routes are subject to the filter host ip address Enter the keyword host and then enter the IP address to specify a host IP address dscp Enter the keyword dscp to deny a packet based on the DSCP value The range is from 0 to 63 operator OPTIONAL Enter one of the following logical operand eq equal to neq not equal to gt greater than lt less than range inclusive range of ports you ...

Page 246: ...ecify the threshold explicitly The default frequency at which ACL logs are generated is five minutes By default flow based monitoring is not enabled Command Modes CONFIGURATION IP ACCESS LIST EXTENDED Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information The order option is relevant in the context of the Policy QoS feature only For more information refe...

Page 247: ...or malicious traffic It is available for Layer 2 and Layer 3 ingress and egress traffic You may specify traffic using standard or extended access lists This mechanism copies all incoming or outgoing packets on one port and forwards mirrors them to another port The source port is the monitored port MD and the destination port is the monitoring port MG Example An ACL rule with a TCP port range of 40...

Page 248: ...d host then the IP address to specify a host IP address or hostname count OPTIONAL Enter the keyword count to count packets processed by the filter bytes OPTIONAL Enter the keyword bytes to count bytes processed by the filter dscp OPTIONAL Enter the keyword dcsp to match to the IP DCSCP values order OPTIONAL Enter the keyword order to specify the QoS priority for the ACL entry The range is from 0 ...

Page 249: ...enabled for this new interval If ACL logging is stopped because the configured threshold is exceeded it is re enabled after the logging interval period elapses ACL logging is supported for standard and extended IPv4 ACLs IPv6 ACLs and MAC ACLs You can configure ACL logging only on ACLs that are applied to ingress interfaces you cannot enable logging for ACLs that are associated with egress interfa...

Page 250: ...rds the filter allows only MAC addresses that match count OPTIONAL Enter the keyword count to count packets processed by the filter byte OPTIONAL Enter the keyword byte to count bytes processed by the filter log OPTIONAL Enter the keyword log to enable the triggering of ACL log messages threshold in msgs count OPTIONAL Enter the threshold in msgs keyword followed by a value to indicate the maximum...

Page 251: ...an configure ACL logging only on ACLs that are applied to ingress interfaces you cannot enable logging for ACLs that are associated with egress interfaces You can activate flow based monitoring for a monitoring session by entering the flow based enable command in the Monitor Session mode When you enable this capability traffic with particular flows that are traversing through the ingress and egres...

Page 252: ... 00 00 00 00 is applied in other words the filter allows only MAC addresses that match count OPTIONAL Enter the keyword count to count packets the filter processes byte OPTIONAL Enter the keyword byte to count bytes the filter processes log OPTIONAL Enter the keyword log to enable the triggering of ACL log messages threshold in msgs count OPTIONAL Enter the threshold in msgs keyword followed by a ...

Page 253: ...al period elapses ACL logging is supported for standard and extended IPv4 ACLs IPv6 ACLs and MAC ACLs You can configure ACL logging only on ACLs that are applied to ingress interfaces you cannot enable logging for ACLs that are associated with egress interfaces You can activate flow based monitoring for a monitoring session by entering the flow based enable command in the Monitor Session mode When...

Page 254: ...ter a network mask in prefix format x or A B C D The mask when specified in A B C D format may be either contiguous or non contiguous any Enter the keyword any to specify that all routes are subject to the filter host ip address Enter the keyword host then the IP address to specify a host IP address bit Enter a flag or combination of bits ack acknowledgement field fin finish no more data from the ...

Page 255: ...s the lowest lower order numbers have a higher priority If you do not use the keyword order the ACLs have the lowest order by default 255 fragments Enter the keyword fragments to use ACLs to control packet fragments log OPTIONAL Enter the keyword log to enable the triggering of ACL log messages threshold in msgs count OPTIONAL Enter the threshold in msgs keyword followed by a value to indicate the...

Page 256: ...be recorded expires the subsequent fresh interval timer is started and the packet count for that new interval commences from zero If ACL logging was stopped previously because the configured threshold is exceeded it is re enabled for this new interval If ACL logging is stopped because the configured threshold is exceeded it is re enabled after the logging interval period elapses ACL logging is sup...

Page 257: ...ed Commands ip access list extended creates an extended ACL permit assigns a permit filter for IP packets permit udp assigns a permit filter for UDP packets seq arp Configure an egress filter with a sequence number that filters ARP packets meeting this criteria This command is supported only on 12 port GE line cards with SFP optics For specifications refer to your line card documentation Syntax se...

Page 258: ...ter processes byte OPTIONAL Enter the keyword byte to count bytes the filter processes order OPTIONAL Enter the keyword order to specify the QoS priority for the ACL entry The range is 0 to 254 where 0 is the highest priority and 254 is the lowest lower order numbers have a higher priority If you do not use the keyword order the ACLs have the lowest order by default 255 log OPTIONAL Enter the keyw...

Page 259: ...onitoring The order option is relevant in the context of the Policy QoS feature only The following applies The seq sequence number command is applicable only in an ACL group The order option works across ACL groups that have been applied on an interface via the QoS policy framework The order option takes precedence over seq sequence number If sequence number is not configured the rules with the sa...

Page 260: ...yer 2 and Layer 3 ingress and egress traffic You may specify traffic using standard or extended access lists This mechanism copies all incoming or outgoing packets on one port and forwards mirrors them to another port The source port is the monitored port MD and the destination port is the monitoring port MG NOTE When ACL logging and byte counters are configured simultaneously byte counters may di...

Page 261: ...f ff allows entries that do not match and a mask of 00 00 00 00 00 00 only allows entries that match exactly count OPTIONAL Enter the keyword count to count packets the filter processes byte OPTIONAL Enter the keyword byte to count bytes the filter processes order OPTIONAL Enter the keyword order to specify the QoS priority for the ACL entry The range is 0 to 254 where 0 is the highest priority an...

Page 262: ...ntroduced on the E Series ExaScale Version 7 4 1 0 Added the monitor option Version 6 5 10 Expanded to include the optional QoS order priority for the ACL entry Usage Information The monitor option is relevant in the context of flow based monitoring only For more information refer to Port Monitoring The order option is relevant in the context of the Policy QoS feature only The following applies Th...

Page 263: ... be applied in both the ingress and egress direction Flow based monitoring conserves bandwidth by monitoring only specified traffic instead all traffic on the interface This feature is particularly useful when looking for malicious traffic It is available for Layer 2 and Layer 3 ingress and egress traffic You may specify traffic using standard or extended access lists This mechanism copies all inc...

Page 264: ...f ACL log messages threshold in msgs count OPTIONAL Enter the threshold in msgs keyword followed by a value to indicate the maximum number of ACL logs that can be generated exceeding which the generation of ACL logs is terminated with the seq permit or deny commands The threshold range is from 1 to 100 interval minutes OPTIONAL Enter the keyword interval then by the time period in minutes at which...

Page 265: ... is re enabled after the logging interval period elapses ACL logging is supported for standard and extended IPv4 ACLs IPv6 ACLs and MAC ACLs You can configure ACL logging only on ACLs that are applied to ingress interfaces you cannot enable logging for ACLs that are associated with egress interfaces You can activate flow based monitoring for a monitoring session by entering the flow based enable c...

Page 266: ...word icmp to configure an ICMP access list filter ip Enter the keyword ip to configure a generic IP access list The keyword ip specifies that the access list permits all IP protocols tcp Enter the keyword tcp to configure a TCP access list filter udp Enter the keyword udp to configure a UDP access list filter source Enter an IP address in dotted decimal format of the network from which the packet ...

Page 267: ...nts Enter the keyword fragments to use ACLs to control packet fragments log OPTIONAL Enter the keyword log to enable the triggering of ACL log messages threshold in msgs count OPTIONAL Enter the threshold in msgs keyword followed by a value to indicate the maximum number of ACL logs that can be generated exceeding which the generation of ACL logs is terminated with the seq permit or deny commands ...

Page 268: ... interval commences from zero If ACL logging was stopped previously because the configured threshold is exceeded it is re enabled for this new interval If ACL logging is stopped because the configured threshold is exceeded it is re enabled after the logging interval period elapses ACL logging is supported for standard and extended IPv4 ACLs IPv6 ACLs and MAC ACLs You can configure ACL logging only...

Page 269: ...ss of the network or host from which the packets were sent in the x x x x x format followed by the prefix length in the x format The range is 0 to 128 The notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zero mask Enter a network mask in prefix format x any Enter the keyword any to specify that all routes are subject to the filter host ipv6 address Enter the keyword host followed by the IPv6 ad...

Page 270: ...ch you are creating the rule is applied to the monitored interface Defaults By default 10 ACL logs are generated if you do not specify the threshold explicitly The default frequency at which the ACL logs are generated in five minutes By default flow based monitoring is not enabled Command Modes ACCESS LIST Command History Version 9 4 0 0 Added support for flow based monitoring on the MXL 10 40GbE ...

Page 271: ...ed Commands permit assigns a permit filter for IP packets permit tcp assigns a permit filter for TCP packets permit tcp Configure a filter to pass TCP packets that match the filter criteria Syntax permit tcp source address mask any host ipv6 address operator port port destination address any host ipv6 address bit operator port port count byte log interval minutes threshold in msgs count monitor To...

Page 272: ...o 128 The notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zero bit Enter a flag or combination of bits ack acknowledgement field fin finish no more data from the user psh push function rst reset the connection syn synchronize sequence numbers urg urgent field count OPTIONAL Enter the keyword count to count packets processed by the filter byte OPTIONAL Enter the keyword byte to count bytes proc...

Page 273: ... this new interval If ACL logging is stopped because the configured threshold is exceeded it is re enabled after the logging interval period elapses ACL logging is supported for standard and extended IPv4 ACLs IPv6 ACLs and MAC ACLs You can configure ACL logging only on ACLs that are applied to ingress interfaces you cannot enable logging for ACLs that are associated with egress interfaces You can...

Page 274: ...keyword host then the IPv6 address of the host in the x x x x x format The notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zero destination address Enter the IPv6 address of the network or host to which the packets are sent in the x x x x x format then the prefix length in the x format The range is from 0 to 128 The notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zero message type OPTIONAL...

Page 275: ... stopped previously because the configured threshold is exceeded it is re enabled for this new interval If ACL logging is stopped because the configured threshold is exceeded it is re enabled after the logging interval period elapses ACL logging is supported for standard and extended IPv4 ACLs IPv6 ACLs and MAC ACLs You can configure ACL logging only on ACLs that are applied to ingress interfaces ...

Page 276: ...he User Datagram Protocol count OPTIONAL Enter the keyword count to count packets the filter processes byte OPTIONAL Enter the keyword byte to count bytes the filter processes dscp OPTIONAL Enter the keyword dcsp to match to the IP DCSCP values order OPTIONAL Enter the keyword order to specify the QoS priority for the ACL entry The range is from 0 to 254 where 0 is the highest priority and 254 is ...

Page 277: ...v6 ACLs Configure a filter to drop user datagram protocol UDP packets meeting the filter criteria Syntax deny udp source address mask any host ipv6 address operator port port destination address any host ipv6 address operator port port count byte log interval minutes threshold in msgs count monitor To remove this filter you have two choices Use the no seq sequence number command syntax if you know...

Page 278: ...able the triggering of ACL log messages threshold in msgs count OPTIONAL Enter the threshold in msgs keyword followed by a value to indicate the maximum number of ACL logs that can be generated exceeding which the generation of ACL logs is terminated with the seq permit or deny commands The threshold range is from 1 to 100 interval minutes OPTIONAL Enter the keyword interval followed by the time p...

Page 279: ...r a monitoring session by entering the flow based enable command in the Monitor Session mode When you enable this capability traffic with particular flows that are traversing through the ingress and egress interfaces are examined and appropriate ACLs can be applied in both the ingress and egress direction Flow based monitoring conserves bandwidth by monitoring only specified traffic instead all tr...

Page 280: ...er the keyword host then the IPv6 address to specify a host IP address operator OPTIONAL Enter one of the following logical operand eq equal to neq not equal to gt greater than lt less than range inclusive range of ports you must specify two ports for the port command port Enter the application layer port number Enter two port numbers if using the range logical operand The range is from 0 to 65535...

Page 281: ...orm Version 9 3 0 0 Added support for logging of ACLs on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module platform Usage Information When the configured maximum threshold is exceeded generation of logs is stopped When the interval at which ACL logs are configured to be recorded expires the subsequent fresh interval timer is started and the packet count for that new interval commences from zero If ACL logging was...

Page 282: ...r you have two choices Use the no seq sequence number command syntax if you know the filter s sequence number Use the no deny icmp source address mask any host ipv6 address destination address any host ipv6 address command Parameters source Enter the IPv6 address of the network or host from which the packets were sent mask Enter a network mask in prefix format x or A B C D The mask when specified ...

Page 283: ...nterval at which ACL logs are configured to be recorded expires the subsequent fresh interval timer is started and the packet count for that new interval commences from zero If ACL logging was stopped previously because the configured threshold is exceeded it is re enabled for this new interval If ACL logging is stopped because the configured threshold is exceeded it is re enabled after the loggin...

Page 284: ...d order to specify the QoS order of priority for the ACL entry The range is from 0 to 254 where 0 is the highest priority and 254 is the lowest lower order numbers have a higher priority If you do not use the order keyword the ACLs have the lowest order by default as 255 fragments Enter the keyword fragments to use ACLs to control packet fragments log OPTIONAL Enter the keyword log to enable the t...

Page 285: ...ded it is re enabled after the logging interval period elapses ACL logging is supported for standard and extended IPv4 ACLs IPv6 ACLs and MAC ACLs You can configure ACL logging only on ACLs that are applied to ingress interfaces you cannot enable logging for ACLs that are associated with egress interfaces You can activate flow based monitoring for a monitoring session by entering the flow based en...

Page 286: ...d History Version 9 3 0 0 Introduced on the MXL platform Usage Information At a maximum there can be only 32 VLAN members in all ACL VLAN groups A VLAN can belong to only one group at any given time You can create an ACL VLAN group and attach the ACL with the VLAN members The optimization is applicable only when you create an ACL VLAN group If you apply an ACL separately on the VLAN interface each...

Page 287: ...ION conf acl vl grp Command History Version 9 3 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module platform Usage Information You can apply only an egress IP ACL on an ACL VLAN group show acl vlan group Display all the ACL VLAN groups or display a specific ACL VLAN group identified by name Syntax show acl vlan group group name detail Parameters group name Optional Display only the ACL VLAN group ...

Page 288: ...ell The following sample output is displayed when using the show acl vlan group group name option NOTE The access list name is truncated Dell show acl vlan group TestGroupSeventeenTwenty Group Name Egress IP Acl Vlan Members TestGroupSeventeenTwenty SpecialAccessOnlyExperts 100 200 300 Dell The following sample output shows the line by line style display when using the show acl vlan group detail o...

Page 289: ... output fields of this show command Field Description Chassis Vlan Cam ACL Details about the CAM blocks allocated for ACLs for various VLAN operations at a system wide global level Stack Unit number Details about the CAM blocks allocated for ACLs for various VLAN operations for a particular stack unit Current Settings in block sizes Information about the number of FP blocks that are currently in u...

Page 290: ...By default 0 groups are allocated for the ACL in VCAP ACL VLAN groups or CAM optimization is not enabled by default and you need to allocate the slices for CAM optimization vlanopenflow 0 2 Allocate the number of FP blocks for VLAN open flow operations vlaniscsi 0 2 Allocate the number of FP blocks for VLAN iSCSI counters vlanaclopt 0 2 Allocate the number of FP blocks for the ACL VLAN optimizatio...

Page 291: ...a point in time show cam usage View the amount of CAM space available used and remaining in each partition including IPv4Flow and Layer 2 ACL sub partitions Syntax show cam usage acl router switch Parameters acl OPTIONAL Enter the keyword acl to display Layer 2 and Layer 3 ACL CAM usage router OPTIONAL Enter the keyword router to display Layer 3 CAM usage switch OPTIONAL Enter the keyword switch t...

Page 292: ... ACLs Example 1 Output of the show cam usage Command Dell show cam usage Linecard Portpipe CAM Partition Total CAM Used CAM Available CAM 1 0 IN L2 ACL 1008 320 688 IN L2 FIB 32768 1132 31636 IN L3 ACL 12288 2 12286 IN L3 FIB 262141 14 262127 IN L3 SysFlow 2878 45 2833 IN L3 TrcList 1024 0 1024 IN L3 McastFib 9215 0 9215 IN L3 Qos 8192 0 8192 IN L3 PBR 1024 0 1024 IN V6 ACL 0 0 0 IN V6 FIB 0 0 0 I...

Page 293: ...show cam usage router Linecard Portpipe CAM Partition Total CAM Used CAM Available CAM 11 0 IN L3 ACL 8192 3 8189 IN L3 FIB 196607 1 196606 IN L3 SysFlow 2878 0 2878 IN L3 TrcList 1024 0 1024 IN L3 McastFib 9215 0 9215 IN L3 Qos 8192 0 8192 IN L3 PBR 1024 0 1024 OUT L3 ACL 16384 0 16384 11 1 IN L3 ACL 8192 3 8189 IN L3 FIB 196607 1 196606 IN L3 SysFlow 2878 0 2878 IN L3 TrcList 1024 0 1024 IN L3 M...

Page 294: ...AN group that is specified The maximum group name is 140 characters Default None Command Modes EXEC EXEC Privilege Command History Version 9 3 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module platform Examples The following sample output shows the line by line style display when using the show running config acl vlan group option Note that no group or access list names are truncated Dell show r...

Page 295: ...ration mode To avoid the problem of excessive consumption of CAM area you can configure ACL VLAN groups that combines all the VLANs that are applied with the same ACL in a single group A unique identifier for each of ACL attached to the VLAN is used as a handle or locator in the CAM area instead of the VLAN id This method of processing signficiantly reduces the number of entries in the CAM area an...

Page 296: ...Module platform Usage Information The output for this command displays in a line by line format This allows the ACL VLAN Group names or the Access List Group Names to display in their entirety Examples The following sample output shows the line by line style display when using the show acl vlan group detail option Note that no group or access list names are truncated Dell show acl vlan group detai...

Page 297: ...um Default No default behavior or values Command Modes CONFIGURATION conf acl vl grp Command History Version 9 3 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module platform Usage Information Enter a description for each ACL VLAN group that you create for effective and streamlined administrative and logging purposes Access Control List ACL VLAN Groups and Content Addressable Memory CAM 297 ...

Page 298: ...p Enter the keyword vrrp in INTERFACE mode to enable BFD for VRRP interval milliseconds OPTIONAL Enter the keyword interval to specify non default BFD session parameters beginning with the transmission interval The range is from 50 to 1000 The default is 100 min_rx milliseconds Enter the keyword min_rx to specify the minimum rate at which the local system would like to receive control packets from...

Page 299: ...n explicitly enabled or disabled for a BFD session with the bfd neighbor or neighbor bfd disable commands in ROUTER BGP mode do not inherit the global BFD enable disable values configured with the bfd neighbor command or configured for the peer group to which a neighbor belongs The neighbors inherit only the global timer values configured with the bfd neighbor command Related Commands show bfd nei...

Page 300: ...Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module bfd enable Interface Enable BFD on an interface Syntax bfd enable Defaults BFD is enabled on all interfaces when you enable BFD from CONFIGURATION mode Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module bfd interval Specify non default BFD session parameters beginning with the transmission interval...

Page 301: ...ssive Enter the role that the local system assumes Active The active system initiates the BFD session Both systems can be active for the same session Passive The passive system does not initiate a session It only responds to a request for session initialization from the active system The default is Active Defaults Refer to Parameters Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduc...

Page 302: ... the Down state Peer routers might take corrective action by choosing alternative paths for the routes that originally pointed to this router ip route bfd Enable BFD for all neighbors configured through static routes Syntax ip route bfd interval interval min_rx min_rx multiplier value role active passive To disable BFD for all neighbors configured through static routes use the no ip route bfd inte...

Page 303: ...d all neighbors Establish BFD sessions with all OSPFv3 neighbors on a single interface or use non default BFD session parameters Syntax ipv6 ospf bfd all neighbors disable interval interval min_rx min_rx multiplier value role active passive To disable all BFD sessions on an OSPFv3 interface implicitly use the no ipv6 ospf bfd all neighbors disable interval interval min_rx min_rx multiplier value r...

Page 304: ...rval min_rx min_rx multiplier value role active passive To remove all BFD sessions with IS IS neighbors discovered on this interface use the no isis bfd all neighbors disable interval interval min_rx min_rx multiplier value role active passive command Parameters disable OPTIONAL Enter the keyword disable to disable BFD on this interface interval milliseconds OPTIONAL Enter the keywords interval to...

Page 305: ...es specified with this command overrides timers set using the bfd all neighbors command Using the no form of this command does not disable BFD if BFD is configured in CONFIGURATION mode To disable BFD on a specific interface while BFD is configured in CONFIGURATION mode use the keyword disable neighbor bfd Explicitly enable a BFD session with a BGP neighbor or a BGP peer group Syntax neighbor ip a...

Page 306: ...BFD sessions with all neighbors the Layer 3 protocols discover neighbor bfd disable explicitly disables a BFD session with a BGP neighbor or a BGP peer group show bfd neighbors displays the BFD neighbor information on all interfaces or a specified interface neighbor bfd disable Explicitly disable a BFD session with a BGP neighbor or a BGP peer group Syntax neighbor ip address peer group name bfd d...

Page 307: ...d neighbor explicitly enables a BFD session with a BGP neighbor or a BGP peer group show bfd neighbors displays the BFD neighbor information on all interfaces or a specified interface show bfd neighbors Display BFD neighbor information on all interfaces or a specified interface Syntax show bfd neighbors interface detail Parameters interface Enter one of the following keywords and slot port or numb...

Page 308: ... State Up Configured parameters TX 100ms RX 100ms Multiplier 3 Neighbor parameters TX 250ms RX 300ms Multiplier 4 Actual parameters TX 300ms RX 250ms Multiplier 3 Role Active Delete session on Down False Client Registered CLI Uptime 00 02 04 Statistics Number of packets received from neighbor 376 Number of packets sent to neighbor 314 Number of state changes 2 Number of messages from IFA about por...

Page 309: ...Syntax vrrp bfd neighbor ip address Parameters neighbor ip address Enter the IP address of the BFD neighbor Defaults none Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Bidirectional Forwarding Detection BFD 309 ...

Page 310: ...rmation including full routing tables and periodically send messages to update those routing tables NOTE Dell Networking OS Version 7 7 1 supports 2 Byte 16 bit and 4 Byte 32 bit format for autonomous system numbers ASNs where the 2 Byte format is 1 65535 and the 4 Byte format is 1 4294967295 NOTE Dell Networking OS Version 8 3 1 0 supports dotted format as well as the traditional plain format for...

Page 311: ... set filters for advertising an aggregate route as set OPTIONAL Enter the keyword as set to generate path attribute information and include it in the aggregate AS_SET includes AS_PATH and community information from the routes included in the aggregated route attribute map map name OPTIONAL Enter the keywords attribute map then the name of a configured route map to modify attributes of the aggregat...

Page 312: ...ress command The summary only parameter suppresses all advertisements If you want to suppress advertisements to only specific neighbors use the neighbor distribute list command In the show ip bgp command aggregates contain an a in the first column and routes suppressed by the aggregate contain an s in the first column bgp add path Allow the advertisement of multiple paths for the same address pref...

Page 313: ... within the same AS Command Modes ROUTER BGP Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information Any update without a MED attribute is the least preferred route If you enable this command use the clear ip bgp command to recompute the best path bgp asnotation Allows you to implement a method for AS number representation in the command line interface CLI...

Page 314: ...ell conf router bgp 1 Dell conf router_bgp bgp asnotation asdot Dell conf router_bgp ex Dell conf do show run grep bgp router bgp 1 bgp four octet as support bgp asnotation asdot Dell conf router bgp 1 Dell conf router_bgp bgp asnotation asplain Dell conf router_bgp ex Dell conf do show run grep bgp router bgp 1 bgp four octet as support Dell conf Related Commands bgp four octet as support enables...

Page 315: ...40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information The bestpath router bgp configuration mode command changes the default bestpath selection algorithm The multipath relax option allows load sharing across providers with different but equal length autonomous system paths Without this option ECMP expects the AS paths to be identical for load sharing bgp bestpath med confed Enable MULTI_EXIT_DISC MED attribute...

Page 316: ...e Information The MED is a 4 byte unsigned integer value and the default behavior is to assume a missing MED as 4294967295 This command causes a missing MED to be treated as 0 During path selection paths with a lower MED are preferred over paths with a higher MED bgp bestpath router id ignore Do not compare router id information for external paths during best path selection Syntax bgp bestpath rou...

Page 317: ...d Assign a cluster ID to a BGP cluster with more than one route reflector Syntax bgp cluster id ip address number To delete a cluster ID use the no bgp cluster id ip address number command Parameters ip address Enter an IP address as the route reflector cluster ID number Enter a route reflector cluster ID as a number from 1 to 4294967295 Defaults Not configured Command Modes ROUTER BGP Command His...

Page 318: ...from 0 1 to 65535 65535 dotted format Defaults Not configured Command Modes ROUTER BGP Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information To accept 4 byte formats before entering a 4 byte AS number configure your system All the routers in the Confederation must be 4 byte or 2 byte identified routers You cannot mix them The autonomous systems configure...

Page 319: ... All the routers in the Confederation must be 4 byte or 2 byte identified routers You cannot mix them The autonomous systems configured in this command are visible to the EBGP neighbors Each autonomous system is fully meshed and contains a few connections to other autonomous systems After specifying autonomous systems numbers for the BGP confederation recycle the peers to update their configuratio...

Page 320: ... that is it is suppressed The range is from 1 to 20000 The default is 2000 max suppress time OPTIONAL Enter the maximum number of minutes a route can be suppressed The default is four times the half life value The range is from 1 to 255 The default is 60 minutes route map map name OPTIONAL Enter the keyword route map then the name of a configured route map Only match commands in the configured rou...

Page 321: ...command setting within the AS To set the local preference for a specific route use the set local preference command in ROUTE MAP mode Related Commands set metric assigns a local preference value for a specific route bgp enforce first as Disable or enable enforce first as check for updates received from EBGP peers Syntax bgp enforce first as To turn off the default use the no bgp enforce first as c...

Page 322: ...ast external failover use the no bgp fast external failover command Defaults Enabled Command Modes ROUTER BGP Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information The bgp fast external failover command appears in the show config command output bgp four octet as support Enable 4 byte support for the BGP process Syntax bgp four octet as support To disable...

Page 323: ...art restart time seconds stale path time seconds role receiver only To return to the default use the no bgp graceful restart command Parameters restart time seconds Enter the keyword restart time then the maximum number of seconds to restart and bring up all the peers The range is from 1 to 3600 seconds The default is 120 seconds stale path time seconds Enter the keyword stale path time then the m...

Page 324: ... This method can lead to the system choosing different best paths from a set of paths depending on the order in which they are received from the neighbors because MED may or may not get compared between adjacent paths In Deterministic mode no bgp non deterministic med the system compares MED between adjacent paths within an AS group because all paths in the AS group are from the same AS When you c...

Page 325: ... MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information BGP uses regular expressions regex to filter route information In particular the use of regular expressions to filter routes based on AS PATHs and communities is common In a large scale configuration filtering millions of routes based on regular expressions can be quite CPU intensive as a regular expression evaluation involves generation and evaluat...

Page 326: ... id ip address To delete a user assigned IP address use the no bgp router id command Parameters ip address Enter an IP address in dotted decimal format to reset only that BGP neighbor Defaults The router ID is the highest IP address of the Loopback interface or if no Loopback interfaces are configured the highest IP address of a physical interface on the router Command Modes ROUTER BGP Command His...

Page 327: ... the peer s updates Related Commands clear ip bgp activates inbound policies without resetting the BGP TCP session capture bgp pdu neighbor Enable capture of an IPv4 BGP neighbor packet Syntax capture bgp pdu neighbor ipv4 address direction both rx tx To disable capture of the IPv4 BGP neighbor packet use the no capture bgp pdu neighbor ipv4 address command Parameters ipv4 address Enter the IPv4 a...

Page 328: ...olicies without resetting the TCP connection Syntax clear ip bgp as number ip address flap statistics soft in out Parameters Enter an asterisk to reset all BGP sessions as number Enter the AS number to reset all neighbors belonging to that AS The range is from 0 to 65535 2 byte from 1 to 4294967295 4 byte or from 0 1 to 65535 65535 dotted format ip address Enter an IP address in dotted decimal for...

Page 329: ...sk OPTIONAL Enter an IP address in dotted decimal format and the prefix mask in slash format x to clear dampening information only that BGP neighbor Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information After you enter this command the software deletes the history routes and returns the suppressed routes to the Active state c...

Page 330: ...n elements to a single element braces minimum and the maximum match count caret the beginning of the input string If you use the caret at the beginning of a sequence or range it matches on everything BUT the characters specified dollar sign the end of the output string Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information If ...

Page 331: ...the keyword in to view only information on inbound BGP routes out OPTIONAL Enter the keyword out to view only information on outbound BGP routes Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information To view information on both incoming and outgoing routes do not include the in and out parameters in the debugging command The i...

Page 332: ...t to view only outbound dampened routes Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Related Commands show debugging view enabled debugging operations show ip bgp dampened paths view BGP dampened routes debug ip bgp events Display information on local BGP state changes and other BGP events Syntax debug ip bgp ip address peer group pee...

Page 333: ...ion about BGP keepalive messages Syntax debug ip bgp ip address peer group peer group name keepalives in out To disable debugging use the no debug ip bgp ip address peer group peer group name keepalives in out command Parameters ip address OPTIONAL Enter the IP address of the neighbor in dotted decimal format peer group peer group name OPTIONAL Enter the keyword peer group then the name of the pee...

Page 334: ... name OPTIONAL Enter the keyword peer group then the name of the peer group in OPTIONAL Enter the keyword in to view BGP notifications received from neighbors out OPTIONAL Enter the keyword out to view BGP notifications sent to neighbors Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information To remove all configured debug comm...

Page 335: ... To disable debugging use the no debug ip bgp ip address peer group peer group name updates in out command Parameters in OPTIONAL Enter the keyword in to view only BGP updates received from neighbors out OPTIONAL Enter the keyword out to view only BGP updates sent to neighbors prefix list prefix list name OPTIONAL Enter the keyword prefix list then the name of an established prefix list If the pre...

Page 336: ...s ROUTER BGP Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information The default metric command in BGP sets the value of the BGP MULTI_EXIT_DISC MED attribute for redistributed routes only Related Commands bgp always compare med enables comparison of all BGP MED attributes redistribute redistributes routes from other routing protocols into BGP description ...

Page 337: ...ultipath support for Internal BGP routes number Enter a number as the maximum number of parallel paths The range is from 2 to 64 Defaults none Command Modes ROUTER BGP Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information If you enable this command use the clear ip bgp command to recompute the best path neighbor activate This command allows the specified...

Page 338: ...for AFI SAFI neighbor add path This command allows the specified neighbor peer group to send receive multiple path advertisements Syntax neighbor ip address peer group name add path send receive both count Parameters ip address OPTIONAL Enter the IP address of the neighbor in dotted decimal format peer group name OPTIONAL Enter the name of the peer group send Enter the keyword send to indicate tha...

Page 339: ...in dotted decimal format peer group name Enter the name of the peer group to set the advertisement interval for all routers in the peer group seconds Enter a number as the time interval in seconds between BGP advertisements The range is from 0 to 600 seconds The default is 5 seconds for internal BGP peers and 30 seconds for external BGP peers Defaults seconds 5 seconds internal peers seconds 30 se...

Page 340: ...in number To return to the default value use the no neighbor ip address peer group name allowas in command Parameters ip address OPTIONAL Enter the IP address of the neighbor in dotted decimal format peer group name Enter the name of the peer group to set the advertisement interval for all routers in the peer group number Enter a number of times to allow this neighbor ID to use the AS path The ran...

Page 341: ...P Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information If you apply a route map to a BGP peer or neighbor with the neighbor default originate command configured the software does not apply the set filters in the route map to that BGP peer or neighbor neighbor description Assign a character string describing the neighbor or group of neighbors peer group ...

Page 342: ...of the peer group to apply the distribute list filter to all routers in the peer group prefix list name Enter the name of an established prefix list If the prefix list is not configured the default is permit to allow all routes in Enter the keyword in to distribute only inbound traffic out Enter the keyword out to distribute only outbound traffic Defaults Not configured Command Modes ROUTER BGP Co...

Page 343: ...ts Disabled Command Modes ROUTER BGP Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information To prevent loops the neighbor ebgp multihop command does not install the default routes of the multihop peer Networks not directly connected are not considered valid for best path selection neighbor fall over Enable or disable fast fall over for BGP neighbors Synta...

Page 344: ... of the neighbor in dotted decimal format peer group name Enter the name of the peer group to apply the filter to all routers in the peer group restart time seconds Enter the keyword restart time then the maximum number of seconds to restart and bring up all the peers The range is from 1 to 3600 seconds The default is 120 seconds stale path time seconds Enter the keyword stale path time then the m...

Page 345: ... from 1 to 4294967295 4 byte or from 0 1 to 65535 65535 dotted format no prepend Specifies that local AS values do not prepend to announcements from the neighbor Defaults Not configured Command Modes ROUTER BGP Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Related Commands bgp four octet as support enables 4 byte support for the BGP process neighbor maximum prefix...

Page 346: ...neighbor maximum prefix command configuration allows the neighbor goes down and the show ip bgp summary command displays prfxd in the State PfxRcd column for that neighbor The neighbor remains down until you enter the clear ip bgp command for the neighbor or the peer group to which the neighbor belongs or you enter the neighbor shutdown and neighbor no shutdown commands Related Commands show ip bg...

Page 347: ... group inherit the characteristic configured with this command If you configure a password on one neighbor but you have not configured a password for the neighboring router the following message appears on the console while the routers attempt to establish a BGP session between them RPM0 P RP1 KERN 6 INT No BGP MD5 from peer s IP address 179 to local router s IP address 65524 Also if you configure...

Page 348: ...eep its configuration after it was added to a peer group if the neighbor s configuration is more specific than the peer group s and the neighbor s configuration does not affect outgoing updates A peer group must exist before you add a peer to it If the peer group is disabled shutdown the peers within the group are also disabled shutdown Related Commands clear ip bgp resets BGP sessions neighbor pe...

Page 349: ...oup that is the peer group does not send an OPEN message but responds to one Syntax neighbor peer group name peer group passive limit sessions To delete a passive peer group use the no neighbor peer group name peer group passive command Parameters peer group name Enter a text string up to 16 characters long as the name of the peer group limit Optional Enter the keyword limit to constrain the numbe...

Page 350: ...f the peer group to enter the remote AS into routing tables of all routers within the peer group number Enter a number of the AS The range is from 0 to 65535 2 byte or from 1 to 4294967295 4 byte Defaults Not configured Command Modes ROUTER BGP Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information To accept 4 byte formats before entering a 4 byte AS Numb...

Page 351: ...e your system to accept 4 byte formats before entering a 4 byte AS Number If the AS PATH contains both public and private AS number or contains AS numbers of an EBGP neighbor the private AS numbers are not removed If a confederation contains private AS numbers in its AS PATH the software removes the private AS numbers only if they follow the confederation numbers in the AS path Private AS numbers ...

Page 352: ... in the Route map used in this command If you identify a peer by IP address the Route map overwrites either the inbound or outbound policies on that peer neighbor route reflector client Configure the router as a route reflector and the specified neighbors as members of the cluster Syntax neighbor ip address peer group name route reflector client To remove one or more neighbors from a cluster use t...

Page 353: ... a route reflector are fully meshed you can configure the route reflector to not reflect routes to specified clients by using the no bgp client to client reflection command Related Commands bgp client to client reflection enables route reflection between the route reflector and the clients neighbor shutdown Disable a BGP neighbor or peer group Syntax neighbor ip address peer group name shutdown To...

Page 354: ...configuration inbound command Parameters ip address Enter the IP address of the neighbor in dotted decimal format peer group name Enter the name of the peer group to disable or enable all routers within the peer group Defaults Disabled Command Modes ROUTER BGP Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information This command enables soft reconfiguration...

Page 355: ...eclaring the router dead The range is from 3 to 65535 The default is 180 seconds Defaults keepalive 60 seconds holdtime 180 seconds Command Modes ROUTER BGP Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information Timer values configured with the neighbor timers command override the timer values configured with any other command When two neighbors configure...

Page 356: ...one interface constantly up to stabilize the session The neighbor update source command is not necessary for directly connected internal BGP sessions neighbor weight Assign a weight to the neighbor connection which is used to determine the best path Syntax neighbor ip address peer group name weight weight To remove a weight value use the no neighbor ip address peer group name weight command Parame...

Page 357: ...rk use the no network ip address mask route map map name command Parameters ip address Enter an IP address in dotted decimal format of the network mask Enter the mask of the IP address in the slash prefix length format for example 24 The mask appears in command outputs in dotted decimal format A B C D route map map name OPTIONAL Enter the keyword route map then the name of an established route map...

Page 358: ...s in the slash prefix length format for example 24 The mask appears in command outputs in dotted decimal format A B C D Defaults Not configured Command Modes ROUTER BGP Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information Although the system does not generate a route due to the backdoor config there is an option for injecting sourcing a local route in t...

Page 359: ...redistribute command to advertise the IGP cost as the MED on redistributed routes When you set the route map with metric type internal and applied outbound to an EBGP peer peer group the advertised routes corresponding to those peer peer groups have the IGP cost set as MED If you do not configure the default metric command in addition to the redistribute command or there is no route map to set the...

Page 360: ...working OS version 8 3 1 0 and later you can use the redistribute command to advertise the IGP cost as the MED on redistributed routes When you set the route map with metric type internal and apply outbound to an EBGP peer peer group the advertised routes corresponding to those peer peer groups have the IGP cost set as MED When you enter the redistribute isis process id command without any other p...

Page 361: ...n the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Example Dell conf router_bgp show capture bgp pdu neighbor 20 20 20 2 Incoming packet capture enabled for BGP neighbor 20 20 20 2 Available buffer size 40958758 26 packet s captured using 680 bytes PDU 1 len 101 captured 00 34 51 ago ffffffff ffffffff ffffffff ffffffff 00650100 00000013 00000000 00000000 419ef06c 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 0181...

Page 362: ...uter_bgp show config router bgp 45 neighbor suzanne peer group neighbor suzanne no shutdown neighbor sara peer group neighbor sara shutdown neighbor 13 14 15 20 peer group suzanne neighbor 13 14 15 20 shutdown neighbor 123 34 55 123 peer group suzanne neighbor 123 34 55 123 shutdown Dell conf router_bgp Related Commands capture bgp pdu max buffer size specifies a size for the capture buffer show i...

Page 363: ...p Displays the next hop address of the BGP router If 0 0 0 0 is listed in this column then local routes exist in the routing table Metric Displays the BGP route s metric if assigned LocPrf Displays the BGP LOCAL_PREF attribute for the route Weight Displays the route s weight Path Lists all the ASs the route passed through to reach the destination network Example Dell show ip bgp BGP table version ...

Page 364: ...uster list View BGP neighbors in a specific cluster Syntax show ip bgp ipv4 unicast cluster list cluster id Parameters ipv4 unicast OPTIONAL Enter the keywords ipv4 unicast to view information only related to ipv4 unicast routes cluster id OPTIONAL Enter the cluster id in dotted decimal format The range is 1 4294967295 Command Modes EXEC EXEC Privilege Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on...

Page 365: ...00 0 i I 192 68 16 1 0 100 0 i I 192 68 16 1 0 100 0 i I 10 19 75 5 32 192 68 16 1 0 100 0 I 192 68 16 1 0 100 0 I 192 68 16 1 0 100 0 I 192 68 16 1 0 100 0 I 192 68 16 1 0 100 0 I 192 68 16 1 0 100 0 I 10 30 1 0 24 192 68 16 1 0 100 0 I 192 68 16 1 0 100 0 I 192 68 16 1 0 100 0 I 192 68 16 1 0 100 0 I 192 68 16 1 0 100 0 I 192 68 16 1 0 100 0 show ip bgp community View information on all routes w...

Page 366: ...nity attribute must not be advertised outside a BGP confederation boundary Command Modes EXEC EXEC Privilege Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information To view the total number of COMMUNITY attributes found use the show ip bgp summary command The text line above the route table states the number of COMMUNITY attributes found The show ip bgp co...

Page 367: ...4 21 132 0 23 205 171 0 16 100 0 209 6461 16422 i i 4 24 118 16 3 205 171 0 16 100 0 209 i i 4 24 145 0 30 205 171 0 16 100 0 209 i i 4 24 187 12 30 205 171 0 16 100 0 209 i i 4 24 202 0 30 205 171 0 16 100 0 209 i i 4 25 88 0 30 205 171 0 16 100 0 209 3561 3908 i i 6 1 0 0 16 205 171 0 16 100 0 209 7170 1455 i i 6 2 0 0 22 205 171 0 16 100 0 209 7170 1455 i i 6 3 0 0 18 205 171 0 16 100 0 209 717...

Page 368: ... same as for the show ip bgp command output The following describes the show ip bgp community list pass command shown in the following example Field Description Network Displays the destination network prefix of each BGP route Next Hop Displays the next hop address of the BGP router If 0 0 0 0 is listed in this column then local routes exist in the routing table Metric Displays the BGP route s met...

Page 369: ... of the neighbor advertising the dampened route Reuse Displays the hour minutes seconds until the dampened route is available Path Lists all the ASs the dampened route passed through to reach the destination network Example Dell show ip bgp dampened paths BGP table version is 210708 local router ID is 63 114 8 2 Status codes s suppressed d damped h history valid best Path source I internal a aggre...

Page 370: ...AFRstSet 0x41a1a298 NHopDfrdHdP 0x41a1a3e0 NumNhDfrd 0 CfgHdrAFMsk 1 AFChkNetTmrP 0x41ee705c AFRtDamp 0 AlwysCmpMed 0 LocrHld 10 LocrRem 10 softReconfig 0x41a1a58c DefMet 0 AutoSumm 1 NhopsP 0x41a0d100 Starts 0 Stops 0 Opens 0 Closes 0 Fails 0 Fatals 0 ConnExps 0 HldExps 0 KeepExps 0 RxOpens 0 RxKeeps 0 RxUpds 0 RxNotifs 0 TxUpds 0 TxNotifs 0 BadEvts 0 SynFails 0 RxeCodeP 0x41a1b6b8 RxHdrCodeP 0x4...

Page 371: ...p 0 AfNumAggrValidPfx 0 AfMPathRttP 0x41a0d700 MpathCtxAddr 1101111140 MpathCtxAddrlen 255 AfEorSet 0x41a19f98 NumDfrdPfx 0 AfActPeerHd 0x41a1a3a4 AfExtDist 1101112312 AfIntDist 200 AfLocDist 200 AfNumRRc 0 AfRR 0 AfNetRttP 0x41a0d300 AfNetCtxAddr 1101112392 AfNetCtxAddrlen 255 AfNwCtxAddr 1101112443 AfNwCtxAddrlen 255 AfNetBKDrRttP 0x41a0d500 AfNetBKDRCnt 0 AfDampHLife 0 AfDampReuse 0 AfDampSupp ...

Page 372: ...nicast filter list as path name Parameters ipv4 unicast OPTIONAL Enter the keywords ipv4 unicast to view information only related to ipv4 unicast routes as path name Enter an AS PATH access list name The range is 140 characters Command Modes EXEC EXEC Privilege Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information The following describes the show ip bgp ...

Page 373: ...etric LocPrf Weight Path I 6 1 5 0 24 192 100 11 2 20000 9999 0 I 192 100 8 2 20000 9999 0 I 192 100 9 2 20000 9999 0 I 192 100 10 2 20000 9999 0 I 6 1 5 1 20000 9999 0 I 6 1 6 1 20000 9999 0 I 6 1 20 1 20000 9999 0 I 6 1 6 0 24 192 100 11 2 20000 9999 0 I 192 100 8 2 20000 9999 0 I 192 100 9 2 20000 9999 0 I 192 100 10 2 20000 9999 0 I 6 1 5 1 20000 9999 0 I 6 1 6 1 20000 9999 0 I 6 1 20 1 20000 ...

Page 374: ...s in a pattern either zero or one sequences NOTE Enter an escape sequence CTRL v prior to entering the regular expression brackets a range of single character patterns parenthesis groups a series of pattern elements to a single element braces minimum and the maximum match count caret the beginning of the input string If you use the caret at the beginning of a sequence or range it matches on everyt...

Page 375: ... Duration Reuse Path Dell show ip bgp inconsistent as View routes with inconsistent originating autonomous system AS numbers that is prefixes that are announced from the same neighbor AS but with a different AS Path Syntax show ip bgp ipv4 unicast inconsistent as Command Modes EXEC EXEC Privilege Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information The ...

Page 376: ... 33 0 18508 701 7018 63 114 8 33 0 18508 209 7018 4 0 0 0 8 63 114 8 60 0 18508 209 1 i 63 114 8 34 0 18508 209 1 i 63 114 8 33 0 18508 701 1 i 63 114 8 33 0 18508 209 1 i 6 0 0 0 20 63 114 8 60 0 18508 209 3549 i 63 114 8 34 0 18508 209 3549 i 63 114 8 33 0 0 18508 63 114 8 33 0 18508 209 3549 i 9 2 0 0 16 63 114 8 60 0 18508 209 701 i 63 114 8 34 0 18508 209 701 i More show ip bgp neighbors Allo...

Page 377: ...uration inbound command prior to viewing all the information received from the neighbors denied routes network network mask OPTIONAL Enter the keywords denied routes then either the network address in dotted decimal format or the network mask in slash prefix format to view all information on routes denied via neighbor inbound filters Command Modes EXEC EXEC Privilege Command History Version 9 2 0 ...

Page 378: ... of messages waiting in a queue for processing Received updates This line displays the number of BGP updates received and sent Soft reconfiguration This line indicates that soft reconfiguration inbound is configured Minimum time Displays the minimum time in seconds between advertisements list of inbound and outbound policies Displays the policy commands configured and the names of the Route map AS...

Page 379: ...00 external link BGP version 4 remote router ID 192 168 2 101 BGP state ESTABLISHED in this state for 00 16 12 Last read 00 00 12 last write 00 00 03 Hold time is 180 keepalive interval is 60 seconds Received 1404 messages 0 in queue 3 opens 1 notifications 1394 updates 6 keepalives 0 route refresh requests Sent 48 messages 0 in queue 3 opens 2 notifications 0 updates 43 keepalives 0 route refresh...

Page 380: ...s suppressed S stale d damped h history valid best Path source I internal a aggregate c confed external r redistributed n network D denied S stale Origin codes i IGP e EGP incomplete Network Next Hop Metric LocPrf Weight Path D 70 70 21 0 24 100 10 10 2 0 0 100 200 D 70 70 22 0 24 100 10 10 2 0 0 100 200 D 70 70 23 0 24 100 10 10 2 0 0 100 200 D 70 70 24 0 24 100 10 10 2 0 0 100 200 70 70 25 0 24 ...

Page 381: ...e Field Description Next hop Displays the next hop IP address Via Displays the IP address and interface used to reach the next hop RefCount Displays the number of BGP routes using this next hop Cost Displays the cost associated with using this next hop Flaps Displays the number of times the next hop has flapped Time Elapsed Displays the time elapsed since the next hop was learned If the route is d...

Page 382: ...ts to a single element braces minimum and the maximum match count caret the beginning of the input string If you use the caret at the beginning of a sequence or range it matches on everything BUT the characters specified dollar sign the end of the output string Command Modes EXEC EXEC Privilege Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information The fo...

Page 383: ...1efe7bdc 451 6 72 73 0x1efe7b5c 491 78 0 0x1efe7adc 883 2 120 i 0x1efe7e9c 983 10000 33 0x1efe7b9c 1003 6 0 i Dell show ip bgp paths as path View all unique AS PATHs in the BGP database Syntax show ip bgp paths as path Command Modes EXEC EXEC Privilege Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information The following describes the show ip bgp paths as ...

Page 384: ...019 1 23 0x1ea3c02c 1021 4 Dell show ip bgp paths community View all unique COMMUNITY numbers in the BGP database Syntax show ip bgp paths community Command Modes EXEC EXEC Privilege Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information The following describes the show ip bgp paths community command shown in the following example Field Description Addres...

Page 385: ... 0x1c6e2374 80 2 209 777 209 41528 0x1f58ad6c 82 46 209 209 209 41528 0x1c6e2064 83 2 209 777 209 40832 0x1f588ecc 85 570 209 209 209 40832 0x1f57cc0c 98 2 209 209 209 21226 286 3031 13646 1044 13646 1124 13646 1154 13646 1164 13646 1184 13646 1194 13646 1204 13646 1214 13646 1224 13646 1234 13646 1244 13646 1254 13646 1264 13646 3000 0x1d65b2ac 117 6 209 209 209 999 209 31272 0x1f5854ac 119 18 20...

Page 386: ...GP version supported Minimum time Displays the time interval between BGP advertisements For address family Displays IPv4 Unicast as the address family BGP neighbor Displays the name of the BGP neighbor Number of peers Displays the number of peers currently configured for this peer group Peer group members Lists the IP addresses of the peers in the peer group If the address is outbound optimized an...

Page 387: ...hbor peer group assigning peers assigns a peer to a peer group neighbor peer group creating group creates a peer group show ip bgp regexp Display the subset of the BGP routing table matching the regular expressions specified Syntax show ip bgp regexp regular expression character Parameters regular expression character Enter a regular expression then use one or a combination of the following charac...

Page 388: ...d in this column then non BGP routes exist in the router s routing table Metric Displays the BGP router s metric if assigned LocPrf Displays the BGP LOCAL_PREF attribute for the route Weight Displays the route s weight Path Lists all the AS paths the route passed through to reach the destination network Example S4810 Dell show ip bgp regexp 2914 BGP table version is 3700481 local router ID is 63 1...

Page 389: ...668 i I 6 2 0 0 22 1 1 1 2 0 100 0 2914 701 668 i I 6 3 0 0 18 1 1 1 2 0 100 0 2914 701 668 i show ip bgp summary Allows you to view the status of all BGP connections Syntax show ip bgp ipv4 unicast summary Command Modes EXEC EXEC Privilege Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information The following describes the show ip bgp summary command shown...

Page 390: ...mpened or penalized Neighbor Displays the BGP neighbor address AS Displays the AS number of the neighbor MsgRcvd Displays the number of BGP messages that neighbor received MsgSent Displays the number of BGP messages that neighbor sent TblVer Displays the version of the BGP table that was sent to that neighbor InQ Displays the number of messages from that neighbor waiting to be processed OutQ Displ...

Page 391: ...able version is 34 main routing table version 34 9 network entrie s using 1372 bytes of memory 5 paths using 380 bytes of memory 4 denied paths using 164 bytes of memory BGP RIB over all using 385 bytes of memory 2 BGP path attribute entrie s using 168 bytes of memory 1 BGP AS PATH entrie s using 39 bytes of memory 1 BGP community entrie s using 43 bytes of memory 2 neighbor s using 7232 bytes of ...

Page 392: ...ds Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module MBGP Commands Multiprotocol BGP MBGP is an enhanced BGP that enables multicast routing policy throughout the internet and connecting multicast topologies between BGP and autonomous systems ASs MBGP is implemented as per IETF RFC 1858 debug ip bgp dampening View information ...

Page 393: ...routes learned from networks listed in the network command The range is from 1 to 255 The default is 200 Defaults external distance 20 internal distance 200 local distance 200 Command Modes ROUTER BGP conf router_bgp_af Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information CAUTION Dell Networking OS recommends that you do not change the administrative di...

Page 394: ...the destination network Example Dell show ip bgp dampened paths BGP table version is 210708 local router ID is 63 114 8 2 Status codes s suppressed d damped h history valid best Path source I internal a aggregate c confed external r redistributed n network Origin codes i IGP e EGP incomplete Network From Reuse Path Dell BGP Extended Communities RFC 4360 BGP Extended Communities as defined in RFC 4...

Page 395: ...community value additive OPTIONAL Enter the keyword additive to add to the existing extended community non trans OPTIONAL Enter the keywords non trans to indicate a non transitive BGP extended community Defaults none Command Modes ROUTE MAP config route map Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information If the set community rt and soo are in the s...

Page 396: ...e IPv4 Unicast Address 2 byte community value non trans OPTIONAL Enter the keywords non trans to indicate a non transitive BGP extended community Defaults none Command Modes ROUTE MAP config route map Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information If the set community rt and soo are in the same route map entry the behavior defines as If the rt opt...

Page 397: ...nt Displays the number of BGP routes using these extended communities Community Displays the extended community attributes in this BGP path Example Dell show ip bgp paths extcommunity Total 1 Extended Communities Address Hash Refcount Extended Community 0x41d57024 12272 1 RT 7 200 SoO 5 300 SoO 0 0 0 3 1285 Dell show ip bgp extcommunity list View information on all routes with Extended Community a...

Page 398: ...aggregation of routes and AS paths Basically two routers called neighbors or peers exchange information including full routing tables and periodically send messages to update those routing tables bgp soft reconfig backup To avoid the peer from resending messages use this command only when route refresh is not negotiated Syntax bgp soft reconfig backup To return to the default setting use the no bg...

Page 399: ... belonging to the AS The range is from 0 to 65535 2 Byte from 1 to 4294967295 4 Byte or from 0 1 to 0 65535 65535 Dotted format ipv4 neighbor addr ipv6 neighbor addr Clear and reapply policies for a neighbor peer group name Clear and reapply policies for all BGP routers in the specified peer group ipv6 unicast soft Clear and reapply policies for all IPv6 unicast routes in Reapply only inbound poli...

Page 400: ...onfiguration debugging ipv6 unicast Debug soft reconfiguration for IPv6 unicast routes Defaults Disabled Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information This command turns on BGP soft reconfiguration inbound debugging for IPv6 unicast routes If no neighbor is specified debug is turned on for all neighbors ipv6 prefix li...

Page 401: ...ated Commands ipv6 prefix list configures an IPv6 prefix list IPv6 MBGP Commands Multiprotocol BGP MBGP is an enhanced BGP that enables multicast routing policy throughout the Internet and connecting multicast topologies between BGP and autonomous systems AS MBGP is implemented as per IETF RFC 1858 show ipv6 mbgproutes Display the selected IPv6 MBGP route or a summary of all MBGP routes in the tab...

Page 402: ...summary Display a summary of RPF routes Command Modes EXEC Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module 402 Border Gateway Protocol IPv4 BGPv4 ...

Page 403: ...you use the CONFIGURATION mode commands Save the running configuration to affect the change When budgeting your CAM allocations for ACLs and quality of service QoS configurations remember that ACL and QoS rules might consume more than one CAM entry depending on complexity For example transmission control protocol TCP and user datagram protocol UDP rules with port range options might require more t...

Page 404: ...number Enter the keyword l2qos and then the number of FP blocks for l2 qos The range is from 1to 8 l2pt number Enter the keyword l2pt and then the number of FP blocks for l2 protocol tunnelling The range is from 0 to 1 Ipmacacl number Enter the keyword ipmacacl and then the number of FP blocks for IP and MAC ACL The range is from 0 to 6 ecfmacl number Enter the keyword ecfmacacl and then the numbe...

Page 405: ...each CAM region Enter the CAM profile name then the amount of CAM space to be allotted The total space allocated must equal 13 The range for ipv4acl is from 1 to 4 The ipv6acl range must be a factor of 2 The total space allocated must equal 13 The range for ipv4acl is 1 to 4 The ipv6acl range must be a factor of 2 The vman qos dual fp number must be entered as a multiple of 4 Command Modes CONFIGU...

Page 406: ...ory Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information When you enable this command if a Policy Map containing classification rules ACL and or dscp ip precedence rules is applied to more than one physical interface on the same port pipe only a single copy of the policy is written only one FP entry is used NOTE An ACL itself may still require more that a single FP en...

Page 407: ... 0 vrfv4Acl 0 Openflow 0 fedgovacl 0 stack unit 0 Current Settings in block sizes 1 block 128 entries L2Acl 6 Ipv4Acl 4 Ipv6Acl 0 Ipv4Qos 2 L2Qos 1 L2PT 0 IpMacAcl 0 VmanQos 0 VmanDualQos 0 EcfmAcl 0 FcoeAcl 0 iscsiOptAcl 0 ipv4pbr 0 vrfv4Acl 0 Openflow 0 fedgovacl 0 Example Non Default Dell show cam acl Chassis Cam ACL Current Settings in block sizes L2Acl 2 Ipv4Acl 2 Ipv6Acl 2 Ipv4Qos 2 L2Qos 2 ...

Page 408: ...ommand Modes Configuration Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information The display reflects the settings implemented with the cam acl egress command Example Dell show cam acl egress Chassis Egress Cam ACL Current Settings in block sizes L2Acl 1 Ipv4Acl 1 Ipv6Acl 2 Stack unit 0 Current Settings in block sizes L2Acl 1 Ipv4Acl 1 Ipv6Acl 2 Dell 40...

Page 409: ...ues Apply a policy map for the system to rate limit control traffic on a per queue basis Syntax service policy rate limit cpu queues policy name Parameters policy name Enter the service policy name using a string up to 32 characters Defaults Not configured Command Modes CONTROL PLANE CPUQOS Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information Create a p...

Page 410: ...ced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information This command applies the service policy based on the type of protocol defined in the ACL rules Create ACL and QoS policies prior to enabling this command For CoPP do not use the keywords cpu qos when creating qos policy input Related Commands ip access list extended creates an extended IP ACL mac access list extended creates an extended MA...

Page 411: ... Q5 300 50 Q6 400 50 Q7 400 50 Q8 400 50 Q9 600 50 Q10 300 50 Q11 300 50 show ip protocol queue mapping Display the queue mapping for each configured protocol Syntax show ip protocol queue mapping Defaults Not configured Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Example Dell show ip protocol queue mapping Protocol Src Port Dst Port...

Page 412: ...yntax show ipv6 protocol queue mapping Defaults Not configured Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Example Dell show ipv6 protocol queue mapping Protocol Src Port Dst Port TcpFlag Queue EgPort Rate kbps TCP BGP any 179 179 any _ Q9 _ _ ICMPV6 NA any any _ Q6 _ _ ICMPV6 RA any any _ Q6 _ _ ICMPV6 NS any any _ Q5 _ _ ICMPV6 RS ...

Page 413: ...0 40GbE Switch IO Module Example Dell show mac protocol queue mapping Protocol Destination Mac EtherType Queue EgPort Rate kbps ARP any 0x0806 Q5 Q6 CP _ FRRP 01 01 e8 00 00 10 11 any Q7 CP _ LACP 01 80 c2 00 00 02 0x8809 Q7 CP _ LLDP any 0x88cc Q8 CP _ GVRP 01 80 c2 00 00 21 any Q8 CP _ STP 01 80 c2 00 00 00 any Q7 CP _ ISIS 01 80 c2 00 00 14 15 any Q9 CP _ 09 00 2b 00 00 04 05 any Q9 CP Dell Con...

Page 414: ...erface to DCBX peers Syntax advertise dcbx appln tlv fcoe iscsi To remove the application priority TLVs use the no advertise dcbx appln tlv fcoe iscsi command Parameters fcoe iscsi Enter the application priority TLVs where fcoe enables the advertisement of FCoE in application priority TLVs iscsi enables the advertisement of iSCSI in application priority TLVs Defaults Application priority TLVs are ...

Page 415: ...de only Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information You can configure the transmission of more than one TLV type at a time for example advertise dcbx tlv ets conf ets reco You can enable ETS recommend TLVs ets reco only if you enable ETS configuration TLVs ets conf To disable TLV transmission use the no form of the command for example no advertise dcbx tlv pf...

Page 416: ...igned bandwidth allocation applies only to data queues not to control queues The configuration of bandwidth allocation and strict queue scheduling is not supported at the same time for a priority group If you configure both the configured bandwidth allocation is ignored for priority group traffic when you apply the output policy on an interface By default equal bandwidth is assigned to each priori...

Page 417: ... 0 0 Introduced on the M I O Aggregator This command is supported in Programmable Mux PMUX mode only Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information As soon as you apply a DCB policy with PFC enabled on an interface DCBx starts exchanging information with PFC enabled peers The IEEE802 1Qbb CEE and CIN versions of PFC TLV are supported DCBx also validates PFC conf...

Page 418: ...sion 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information To associate a priority group with an ETS output policy with scheduling and bandwidth configuration create a DCB output policy You can apply a DCB output policy on multiple egress ports When you apply an ETS output policy on an interface ETS configured scheduling and bandwidth allocation take precedence over any config...

Page 419: ...s queues you can configure four different priorities and assign a particular priority to each application that your network is used to process For example you can assign a higher priority for time sensitive applications and a lower priority for other services such as file transfers You can configure the amount of buffer space to be allocated for each priority and the pause or resume thresholds for...

Page 420: ...the input policy with the PFC configuration to an ingress interface Syntax dcb policy input policy name To delete the input policy use the no dcb policy input command Parameters policy name Enter the input policy name with the PFC configuration to an ingress interface Defaults none Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the M I O Aggregator This command is supported ...

Page 421: ...mmand as it has been deprecated in the current 9 4 0 0 release A warning message appears when you try to run this command indicating that you have to use the dcb map commands in the future Related Commands dcb input creates a DCB input policy dcb policy input stack unit stack ports all Apply the specified DCB input policy on all ports of the switch stack or a single stacked switch Syntax dcb polic...

Page 422: ...utput policy use the no dcb policy output command Parameters policy name Enter the output policy name Defaults none Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the M I O Aggregator This command is supported in Programmable Mux PMUX mode only Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information When you apply an ETS output policy to on interfa...

Page 423: ... is supported in Programmable Mux PMUX mode only Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information The dcb policy output stack unit all command overwrites any previous dcb policy output stack unit stack unit id configurations Similarly a dcb policy output stack unit stack unit id command overwrites any previous dcb policy output stack unit all configuration You can...

Page 424: ...ure PFC on a 40GbE port count the 40GbE port as four PFC enabled ports in the pfc port number you enter in the command syntax To achieve lossless PFC operation the PFC port count and queue number used for the reserved buffer size that is created must be greater than or equal to the buffer size required for PFC enabled ports and lossless queues on the switch You must reload the stack or a specified...

Page 425: ...rmation If you configure PFC on a 40GbE port count the 40GbE port as four PFC enabled ports in the pfc port number you enter in the command syntax To achieve lossless PFC operation the PFC port count and queue number used for the reserved buffer size that is created must be greater than or equal to the buffer size required for PFC enabled ports and lossless queues on the switch You must reload the...

Page 426: ...uced on the M I O Aggregator This command is supported in Programmable Mux PMUX mode only Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information DCBX requires that you enable LLDP to advertise DCBX TLVs to peers Configure DCBX operation at the INTERFACE level on a switch or globally on the switch To verify the DCBX configuration on a port use the show interface dcbx det...

Page 427: ...nterface dcbx detail command debug dcbx Enable DCBX debugging Syntax debug dcbx all auto detect timer config exchng fail mgmt resource sem tlv To disable DCBX debugging use the no debug dcbx command Parameters all auto detect timer config exchng fail mgmt resource sem tlv Enter the type of debugging where all enables all DCBX debugging operations auto detect timer enables traces for DCBX auto dete...

Page 428: ...NPUT POLICY DCB OUTPUT POLICY Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the M I O Aggregator This command is supported in Programmable Mux PMUX mode only Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Related Commands dcb input creates a DCB PFC input policy dcb policy input applies the output policy dcb output creates a DCBETS output policy dcb policy output applies the outp...

Page 429: ...mmended to use this command as it has been deprecated in the current 9 4 0 0 release A warning message appears when you try to run this command indicating that you have to use the dcb map commands in the future Related Commands dcb output creates a DCB output policy dcb policy output applies the output policy fcoe priority bits Configure the FCoE priority advertised for the FCoE protocol in applic...

Page 430: ...oduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information This command is available at the global level only priority Configure the priority for the PFC threshold to be allocated to the buffer space parameters Syntax priority value buffer size size pause threshold threshold value resume offset threshold value shared threshold weight size Parameters priority Specify the priority of the queue fo...

Page 431: ...eshold limit the ingress buffer size buffer limit for pausing the acceptance of packets and the buffer offset limit for resuming the acceptance of received packets When PFC detects congestion on a queue for a specified priority it sends a pause frame for the 802 1p priority traffic to the transmitting device You can use thepriority command to set up both the administrative and peer related PFC pri...

Page 432: ...me a peer must honor a PFC pause frame multiplied by the number of PFC enabled ingress ports Related Commands dcb input creates a DCB input policy pfc mode on Enable the PFC configuration on the port so that the priorities are included in DCBX negotiation with peer PFC devices Syntax pfc mode on To disable the PFC configuration use the no pfc mode on command Defaults PFC mode is on Command Modes D...

Page 433: ...no drop queues queue range To remove the no drop port queues use the no pfc no drop queues command Parameters queue range Enter the queue range Separate the queue values with a comma specify a priority range with a dash for example pfc no drop queues 1 3 or pfc no drop queues 2 3 The range is from 0 to 3 Defaults No lossless queues are configured Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Version 9 2...

Page 434: ... History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the M I O Aggregator This command is supported in Programmable Mux PMUX mode only Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information You can enable any number of 802 1p priorities for PFC Queues to which PFC priority traffic is mapped are lossless by default Traffic may be interrupted due to an interface flap going down and com...

Page 435: ...2 1p priority values that are grouped for similar bandwidth allocation and scheduling and that share latency and loss requirements All 802 1p priorities mapped to the same queue must be in the same priority group You must configure 802 1p priorities in priority groups associated with an ETS output policy You can assign each dot1p priority to only one priority group The maximum number of priority g...

Page 436: ...duced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information The ETS configuration associated with 802 1p priority traffic in a DCB output policy is used in DCBX negotiation with ETS peers If you disable ETS in an output policy applied to an interface using the no ets mode on command any previously configured QoS settings at the interface or global level take effect If you configure QoS settings a...

Page 437: ...0 of the port bandwidth is assigned to priority group 0 The complete bandwidth is equally assigned to each priority class so that each class has 12 to 13 NOTE Please note that Dell Networking does not recommended to use this command as it has been deprecated in the current 9 4 0 0 release A warning message appears when you try to run this command indicating that you have to use the dcb map command...

Page 438: ...he port is reset to the default ETS parameters Related Commands scheduler schedules the priority traffic in port queues bandwidth percentage bandwidth percentage allocated to the priority traffic in port queues scheduler Configure the method used to schedule priority traffic in port queues Syntax scheduler value To remove the configured priority schedule use the no scheduler command Parameters val...

Page 439: ...entage bandwidth percentage allocated to priority traffic in port queues set pgid Configure the priority group identifier Syntax set pgid value To remove the priority group use the no set pgid command Parameters value Enter the priority group identification The range is from 0 to 7 Defaults none Command Modes PRIORITY GROUP Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the M I O Aggregator This co...

Page 440: ...y Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information Specify a stack unit number on the Master switch in a stack Example Dell conf do show dcb stack unit 0 port set 0 DCB Status Enabled PFC Queue Count 2 Total Buffer lossy lossless in KB 7982 PFC Total Buffer in KB 5872 PFC Shared Buffer in KB 832 PFC Available Buffer in KB 4860 Dell conf show interface dcbx detail ...

Page 441: ...rational status Configuration Source Specifies whether the port serves as the DCBX configuration source on the switch true yes or false no Local DCBX Compatibility mode DCBX version accepted in a DCB configuration as compatible In auto upstream mode a port can only receive a DCBX version supported on the remote peer Local DCBX Configured mode DCBX version configured on the port CEE CIN IEEE v2 5 o...

Page 442: ...transmitted Number of DCBX frames sent from the local port Total DCBX Frames received Number of DCBX frames received from the remote peer port Total DCBX Frame errors Number of DCBX frames with errors received Total DCBX Frames unrecognized Number of unrecognizable DCBX frames received Example Dell conf show interface tengigabitethernet 0 49 dcbx detail Dell show interface te 0 49 dcbx detail E ET...

Page 443: ...tion applied to egress traffic on an interface including priority groups with priorities and bandwidth allocation Syntax show interface port type slot port ets summary detail Parameters port type slot port ets Enter the port type slot and port ETS information summary detail Enter the keyword summary for a summary list of results or enter the keyword detail for a full list of results Command Modes ...

Page 444: ...eceived in ETS TLVs from the remote peer is included Local Parameters ETS configuration on local port including admin mode enabled when a valid TLV is received from a peer priority groups assigned dot1p priorities and bandwidth allocation Operational status local port Port state for current operational ETS configuration Init Local ETS configuration parameters were exchanged with the peer Recommend...

Page 445: ...in Parameters Admin is enabled TC grp Priority Bandwidth TSA 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 100 ETS 1 0 ETS 2 0 ETS 3 0 ETS 4 0 ETS 5 0 ETS 6 0 ETS 7 0 ETS Priority Bandwidth TSA 0 13 ETS 1 13 ETS 2 13 ETS 3 13 ETS 4 12 ETS 5 12 ETS 6 12 ETS 7 12 ETS Remote Parameters Remote is disabled Local Parameters Local is enabled TC grp Priority Bandwidth TSA 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 100 ETS 1 0 ETS 2 0 ETS 3 0 ETS 4 0 ETS 5 0...

Page 446: ...SA 0 13 ETS 1 13 ETS 2 13 ETS 3 13 ETS 4 12 ETS 5 12 ETS 6 12 ETS 7 12 ETS Remote Parameters Remote is disabled Local Parameters Local is enabled TC grp Priority Bandwidth TSA 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 100 ETS 1 0 ETS 2 0 ETS 3 0 ETS 4 0 ETS 5 0 ETS 6 0 ETS 7 0 ETS Priority Bandwidth TSA 0 13 ETS 1 13 ETS 2 13 ETS 3 13 ETS 4 12 ETS 5 12 ETS 6 12 ETS 7 12 ETS Oper status is init Conf TLV Tx Status is disab...

Page 447: ... The following describes the show interface pfc summary command shown in the following example Field Description Interface Interface type with stack unit and port number Admin mode is on Admin is enabled PFC admin mode is on or off with a list of the configured PFC priorities When the PFC admin mode is on PFC advertisements are enabled to be sent and received from peers received PFC configuration ...

Page 448: ... Status of FCoE advertisements in application priority TLVs from the local DCBX port enabled or disabled Application Priority TLV SCSI TLV Tx Status Status of ISCSI advertisements in application priority TLVs from the local DCBX port enabled or disabled Application Priority TLV Local FCOE Priority Map Priority bitmap the local DCBX port uses in FCoE advertisements in application priority TLVs Appl...

Page 449: ...Tx Status is disabled ISCSI TLV Tx Status is disabled Local FCOE PriorityMap is 0x8 Local ISCSI PriorityMap is 0x10 Remote FCOE PriorityMap is 0x8 Remote ISCSI PriorityMap is 0x8 Dell show interfaces tengigabitethernet 0 49 pfc detail Interface TenGigabitEthernet 0 49 Admin mode is on Admin is enabled Remote is enabled Remote Willing Status is enabled Local is enabled Oper status is recommended PF...

Page 450: ... the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Example Summary Dell show interfaces te 0 3 pfc statistics Interface TenGigabitEthernet 0 3 Priority Rx XOFF Frames Rx Total Frames Tx Total Frames 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 6 0 0 0 7 0 0 0 show qos dcb input Displays the PFC configuration in a DCB input policy Syntax show qos dcb input pfc profile Parameters pfc profile Enter the PFC profil...

Page 451: ... profile Parameters ets profile Enter the ETS profile Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the M I O Aggregator This command is supported in Programmable Mux PMUX mode only Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information NOTE Please note that Dell Networking does not recommended to use this command as it has been deprecated i...

Page 452: ... the future Example Dell show qos priority groups priority group ipc priority list 4 set pgid 2 show stack unit stack ports ets details Displays the ETS configuration applied to egress traffic on stacked ports including ETS Operational mode on each unit and the configurated priority groups with dot1p priorities bandwidth allocation and scheduler type Syntax show stack unit all stack unit stack por...

Page 453: ...ze and DCB buffer threshold settings are applied on one or more ports a validaiton is performed to determine whether following condition is satisfied Shared pfc buffer size Total pfc buffer size Σpfc priority buffer size on each port priority If the preceding condition is not satisfied by the shared PFC buffer size value the configuration is not saved and a system logging message is generated stat...

Page 454: ...ize value the configuration is not saved and a system logging message is generated as follows S4810 YU MR FTOS conf dcb pfc shared buffer size 2000 ERROR pfc shared buffer size configured cannot accommodate existing buffer requirement in the system Example Dell conf dcb pfc shared buffer size 5000 dcb buffer threshold Configure the profile name for the DCB buffer threshold Syntax dcb buffer thresh...

Page 455: ...that your network is used to process For example you can assign a higher priority for time sensitive applications and a lower priority for other services such as file transfers You can configure the amount of buffer space to be allocated for each priority and the pause or resume thresholds for the buffer This method of configuration enables you to effectively manage and administer the behavior of ...

Page 456: ...using a dcb map dcb map applies dcb map profile on interface dcb policy buffer threshold Interface Configuration Assign the DCB policy to the DCB buffer threshold profile on interfaces This setting takes precedence over the global buffer threshold setting Syntax dcb policy buffer threshold profile name Parameters buffer threshold Configure the profile name for the DCB buffer threshold profile name...

Page 457: ...unit or units Entering all shows the status for all stacks stack port all Enter the port number of a port in a switch stack Default None Command Modes CONFIGURATION mode Command History Version 9 3 0 0 Introduced on the MXL platform Usage Information You can configure up to a maximum of four lossless PFC queues By configuring four lossless queues you can configure four different priorities and ass...

Page 458: ...e enter the no pfc mode on command in DCB Input Policy Configuration mode PFC is enabled and disabled as global DCB operation is enabled dcb enable or disabled no dcb enable You cannot enable PFC and link level flow control at the same time on an interface NOTE Please note that Dell Networking does not recommended to use this command as it has been deprecated in the current 9 4 0 0 release A warni...

Page 459: ...that are grouped together for similar bandwidth allocation and scheduling and that share latency and loss requirements All 802 1p priorities mapped to the same queue must be in the same priority group For example the priority pgid 0 0 0 1 2 4 4 4 command creates the following groups of 802 1p priority traffic Priority group 0 contains traffic with dot1p priorities 0 1 and 2 Priority group 1 contai...

Page 460: ...fferent peer provided and administrative priorities to be set up because the intended queue is directly configured instead of determining the priority to queue mapping for local and remote parameters queue 0 to queue 7 Specify the queue number to which the QoS policy buffer parameters apply pause Pause frames to be sent at the specified buffer limit levels and pause packet settings no drop The pac...

Page 461: ...ackets When PFC detects congestion on a queue for a specified priority it sends a pause frame for the 802 1p priority traffic to the transmitting device You can use set up both the administrative and peer related PFC priorities For example you can configure the intended buffer configuration for all 8 priorities If you configure the number of lossless queues as 4 and if the administrator configured...

Page 462: ...able describes the show qos dcb map output shown in the example below Field Description State Complete All mandatory DCB parameters are correctly configured In progress The DCB map configuration is not complete Some mandatory parameters are not configured PFC Mode PFC configuration in DCB map On enabled or Off PG Priority group configured in the DCB map TSA Transmission scheduling algorithm used b...

Page 463: ...e stack unit port number Enter the port number Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the M I O Aggregator This command is supported in Programmable Mux PMUX mode only Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Example Dell conf show stack unit all stack ports all pfc details stack unit 0 stack port all Admin mode is On Admin is enabled Prio...

Page 464: ... unit to which you are connected via the console In other words you cannot run diagnostics on a unit to which you are connected to via a stacking link Diagnostic results are printed to the screen The Dell Networking OS does not write them to memory Diagnostics only test connectivity not the entire data path diag stack unit Run offline diagnostics on a stack unit Syntax diag stack unit number allle...

Page 465: ...to Loopback mode and test packets are transmitted through those components These diagnostics also perform snake tests using VLAN configurations To test 10G links physically remove the unit from the stack verbose Enter the keyword verbose to run the diagnostic in Verbose mode Verbose mode gives more information in the output than Standard mode no reboot Enter the keyword no reboot to avoid automati...

Page 466: ... to 5 Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Buffer Tuning Commands The following sections detail the buffer tuning commands WARNING Altering the buffer allocations is a sensitive operation Do not use any buffer tuning commands without first contacting the Dell Networking Technical Assistance Center TAC buffer Buf...

Page 467: ... to 2013 CSF 0 to 131200 in multiples of 80 Packet Pointer Range 0 to 2047 queue2 number Enter the keyword queue2 and the number to allocate an amount of buffer space or packet pointers to Queue 2 Dedicated Buffer Range 0 to 2013 Dynamic Buffer Range FP 0 to 2013 CSF 0 to 131200 in multiples of 80 Packet Pointer Range 0 to 2047 queue3 number Enter the keyword queue3 and the number to allocate an a...

Page 468: ...mation If you attempt to apply a buffer profile to a non existent port pipe the Dell Networking OS displays the following message However the configuration still appears in the running config DIFFSERV 2 DSA_BUFF_CARVING_INVALID_PORT_SET Invalid FP port set 2 for stack unit 2 Valid range of port set is 0 1 When you remove a buffer profile using the no buffer profile fp csf command from CONFIGURATIO...

Page 469: ...ple QoS applications Defaults Dynamic Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Changed the default value from global 4Q to Dynamic Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information The buffer profile global command fails if you have already applied a custom buffer profile on an interface Similarly when you configure buffer profile global you cann...

Page 470: ...ow buffer profile detail summary csf fp uplink Parameters detail Display the buffer allocations of the applied buffer profiles summary Display the buffer profiles that are applied to line card port pipes in the system csf Display the Switch Fabric Processor buffer profiles that you have applied to line card port pipes in the system fp uplink Display the Field Processor buffer profiles that you hav...

Page 471: ...Enter the keyword interface then the interface type either gigabitethernet or tengigabitethernet slot port Enter the slot and port number of the interface Defaults none Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Example Dell show buffer profile detail csf linecard 4 port set 0 Linecard 4 Port set 0 Buffer profile test Queue Dedicated Bu...

Page 472: ...cted port pipe cpu data plane statistics Enter the keywords cpu data plane statistics to clear the data plane statistics cpu party bus statistics Enter the keywords cpu party bus statistics to clear the management statistics stack port 33 56 Enter the keywords stack port then the port number of the stacking port to clear the statistics of the particular stacking port The range is from 33 to 56 NOT...

Page 473: ...Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Related Commands show hardware stack unit displays the data plane or management plane input and output statistics of the designated component of the designated stack member show hardware layer2 acl Display Layer 2 ACL or eg data for the selected stack member and stack member port pipe Syntax show ...

Page 474: ...buffer info phy firmware version cpu data plane statistics stack port 0 52 cpu party bus statistics cpu private mgmt statistics drops unit 0 1 port 1 56 stack port 33 56 unit 0 0 counters details port stats detail register Parameters stack unit 0 5 command option Enter the keywords stack unit then 0 to 5 to select a particular stack member and then enter one of the following command options to dis...

Page 475: ...play internal drops on the selected stack member Optionally use the keyword unit with 0 to select port pipe 0 and then use port 1 56 to select a port on that port pipe stack port 33 56 Enter the keywords stack port and a stacking port number to select a stacking port for which to display statistics Identify the stack port number as you would to identify a 10G port that was in the same place in one...

Page 476: ...SDK version Example data plane Dell show hardware stack unit 0 cpu data plane statistics bc pci driver statistics for device rxHandle 0 noMhdr 0 noMbuf 0 noClus 0 recvd 0 dropped 0 recvToNet 0 rxError 0 rxDatapathErr 0 rxPkt COS0 0 rxPkt COS1 0 rxPkt COS2 0 rxPkt COS3 0 rxPkt COS4 0 rxPkt COS5 0 rxPkt COS6 0 rxPkt COS7 0 rxPkt UNIT0 0 transmitted 1696 txRequested 1696 noTxDesc 0 txError 0 txReqToo...

Page 477: ...Drops IngMac Drops Total Mmu Drops EgMac Drops Egress Drops 1 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 Dell Example drop counters Dell show hardware stack unit 0 drops unit 0 port 27 Ingress Drops Ingress Drops 0 IBP CBP Full Drops 0 PortSTPnotFwd Drops 0 IPv4 L3 Discards 0 Policy Discards 0 Packets dropped by FP 0 L2 L3 Drops 0 Port bitmap zero Drops 0 Rx VLAN Drops 0 Ingress MAC counters In...

Page 478: ... Yes Forward Tag F GMII 1550 xe19 ena 1G FD SW Yes Forward Tag F GMII 1550 xe20 down 1G FD SW Yes Forward Tag F GMII 1550 Dell Example register Dell show hardware stack unit 0 unit 0 register 0x0f180d34 ALTERNATE_EMIRROR_BITMAP_PARITY_CONTROL ipipe0 0x00000001 0x0f180d35 ALTERNATE_EMIRROR_BITMAP_PARITY_STATUS_INTR ipipe0 0x00000000 0x0f180d36 ALTERNATE_EMIRROR_BITMAP_PARITY_STATUS_NACK ipipe0 0x00...

Page 479: ...k Status 0x00000000 Link Status of all the ports in the Device 0 The linkStatus of Front End Port 1 is FALSE The linkStatus of Front End Port 2 is FALSE The linkStatus of Front End Port 3 is TRUE The linkStatus of Front End Port 4 is FALSE The linkStatus of Front End Port 5 is FALSE The linkStatus of Front End Port 6 is FALSE The linkStatus of Front End Port 7 is FALSE The linkStatus of Front End ...

Page 480: ...fer for the Port 0 Example queue buffer Dell conf show hardware stack unit 0 buffer unit 0 port 1 queue 2 buffer info Buffer Stats for Unit 0 Port 1 Queue 2 Maximum Shared Limit 30720 Default Packet Buffer allocate for the Queue 8 Used Packet Buffer 0 Related Commands clear hardware system flow clears the statistics from selected hardware components show interfaces stack unit displays information ...

Page 481: ...edirects 164904 2045 LACP traffic Redirects 0 2044 GVRP traffic Redirects 0 2043 ARP Reply Redirects 0 2042 802 1x frames Redirects 0 2041 VRRP frames Redirects 0 2040 IPv6VRRP frames Redirects 0 2039 GRAT ARP 0 2036 IPv6 Mcast Control Traffic 128840 2000 VLT ARP SYNC Frames 0 1999 ICL Hellos 0 1998 ICL MAC SYNC Frames 0 1997 VLT Tunneled STP Frames 0 1995 DROP Cases 43207 1917 L3 Term Traffic Cla...

Page 482: ...7 0x07 param1 0 0x00 action act CopyToCpu param0 0 0x00 param1 0 0x00 action act UpdateCounter param0 1 0x01 param1 0 0x00 meter NULL counter idx 1 mode 0x01 entries 1 FP Entry for redirecting LACP traffic to CPU Port EID 2045 gid 1 slice 15 slice_idx 0x02 prio 0x7fd flags 0x82 Installed tcam color_indep 0 higig 0 higig_mask 0 KEY 0x00000000 00000000 00000000 0180c200 00020000 00000000 00000000 FP...

Page 483: ... 3 mode 0x01 entries 1 FP Entry for redirecting ARP Replies to RSM EID 2043 gid 1 slice 15 slice_idx 0x04 prio 0x7fb flags 0x82 Installed tcam color_indep 0 higig 0 higig_mask 0 KEY 0x00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000806 00001600 FPF4 0x00 MASK 0x00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 0000ffff 00001600 0x00 action act Drop param0 0 0x00 param1 0 0x00 action act CosQCpuNew pa...

Page 484: ...o Configure the System to be a DHCP Server Commands to Configure Secure DHCP Commands to Configure the System to be a DHCP Server To configure the system to be a DHCP server use the following commands clear ip dhcp Reset the DHCP counters Syntax clear ip dhcp binding address conflict server statistics Parameters binding Enter the keyword binding to delete all entries in the binding table address E...

Page 485: ... keyword packet to display packet transmission reception Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module default router Assign a default gateway to clients based on the address pool Syntax default router address address2 address8 Parameters address Enter a list of routers that may be the default gateway for clients on the ...

Page 486: ...tax dns server address address2 address8 Parameters address Enter a list of DNS servers that may service clients on the subnet You may list up to eight servers in order of preference Defaults none Command Modes DHCP POOL Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module domain name Assign a domain to clients based on the address pool Syntax domain name name Parameter...

Page 487: ... be excluded from the pool high address Enter the highest address in a range of addresses to be excluded from the pool Defaults none Command Modes DHCP Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module hardware address For manual configurations specify the client hardware address Syntax hardware address address Parameters address Enter the hardware address of the cli...

Page 488: ...e lease The range is from 0 to 31 hours Enter the number of hours of the lease The range is from 0 to 23 minutes Enter the number of minutes of the lease The range is from 0 to 59 infinite Specify that the lease never expires Defaults 24 hours Command Modes DHCP POOL Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module netbios name server Specify the NetBIOS windows int...

Page 489: ... Syntax netbios node type type Parameters type Enter the NETBIOS node type Broadcast Enter the keyword b node Hybrid Enter the keyword h node Mixed Enter the keyword m node Peer to peer Enter the keyword p node Defaults Hybrid Command Modes DHCP POOL Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module network Specify the range of addresses in an address pool Syntax net...

Page 490: ...ration Display the DHCP configuration Syntax show ip dhcp configuration global pool name Parameters pool name Display the configuration for a DHCP pool global Display the DHCP configuration for the entire system Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module show ip dhcp conflict Display the address conflict log Syntax sh...

Page 491: ...acquire its IP address from a DHCP network server Syntax ip address dhcp Command Modes INTERFACE Default The Ethernet is not configured to operate as a DHCP client and receive a dynamic IP address Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information The ip address dhcp command enables an Ethernet interface to acquire a DHCP server assigned dynamic IP a...

Page 492: ... a DHCP server DHCP packet transactions on the interface are stopped To display the currently configure dynamic IP address and lease time use the show ip dhcp lease command Other Commands Supported by the DHCP Client The following commands are supported by the DHCP client clear ip dhcp client statistics Display DHCP client statistics including the number of DHCP messages sent and received on an in...

Page 493: ...rnet Ethernet interface enter FortyGigabitEthernet then the slot port numbers for example fortygigabitethernet 0 2 Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module debug ip dhcp clients packets Enable the display of log messages for all DHCP packets sent and received on DHCP client interfaces Syntax debug ip dhcp client pac...

Page 494: ...ommand History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information When you enter the release dhcp command although the IP address that was dynamically acquired from a DHCP server is released from an interface the ability to acquire a new DHCP server assigned address remains in the running configuration for the interface To acquire a new IP address enter either the r...

Page 495: ...ient statistics including the number of DHCP messages sent and received on an interface Syntax show ip dhcp client statistics all interface type slot port Parameters all Display DHCP client statistics on all DHCP client enabled interfaces on the switch interface type slot port Display DHCP client statistics on the specified interface For a 10 GigabitEthernet Ethernet interface enter TenGigabitEthe...

Page 496: ...n on all DHCP client enabled interfaces on the switch Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Commands to Configure Secure DHCP DHCP as defined by RFC 2131 provides no authentication or security mechanisms Secure DHCP is a suite of features that protects networks that use dynamic address allocation from spoofing and attacks arp ...

Page 497: ... VLAN clear ip dhcp snooping Clear the DHCP binding table Syntax clear ip dhcp snooping binding Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Related Commands show ip dhcp snooping displays the contents of the DHCP binding table ip dhcp snooping Enable DHCP snooping globally Syntax no ip dhcp snooping Defaults Disabled C...

Page 498: ...e Syntax ip dhcp snooping database write delay minutes Parameters minutes The range is from 5 to 21600 Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module ip dhcp snooping binding Create a static entry in the DHCP binding table Syntax no ip dhcp snooping binding mac address vlan id vlan id ip ip address interface type slot port...

Page 499: ...mmand History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Related Commands show ip dhcp snooping displays the contents of the DHCP binding table ip dhcp snooping database renew Renew the binding table Syntax ip dhcp snooping database renew Defaults none Command Modes EXEC EXEC Privilege Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module ip dhcp sn...

Page 500: ...efore you can enable IP MAC Source Address Validation 1 Use the cam acl l2acl command from CONFIGURATION mode 2 Save the running config to the startup config 3 Reload the system ip dhcp snooping vlan Enable DHCP Snooping on one or more VLANs Syntax no ip dhcp snooping vlan name Parameters name Enter the name of a VLAN on which to enable DHCP Snooping Defaults Disabled Command Modes CONFIGURATION C...

Page 501: ...ts Disabled Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module show ip dhcp snooping Display the contents of the DHCP binding table or display the interfaces configured with IP Source Guard Syntax show ip dhcp snooping binding source address validation Parameters binding Display the interfaces configured with IP Source Guard source address ...

Page 502: ...idate a DHCP packet s source hardware address against the client hardware address field CHADDR in the payload Syntax no ip dhcp snooping verify mac address Defaults Disabled Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module 502 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP ...

Page 503: ...nitoring use the ecmp group no link bundle monitor command Parameters ecmp group ID Enter the identifier number for the ECMP group The range is from 2 to 64 interface Enter the following keywords and slot port to add the interface to the ECMP group 10 Gigabit Ethernet interface enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot port information 40 Gigabit Ethernet interface enter the keyword forty...

Page 504: ...rd ecmp then one of the following options crc16 Use CRC16_BISYNC 16 bit CRC16 bisync polynomial default crc16cc Use CRC16_CCITT 16 bit CRC16 using CRC16 CCITT polynomial crc32MSB Use CRC32_UPPER MSB 16 bits of computed CRC32 crc32LSB Use CRC32_LOWER LSB 16 bits of computed CRC32 crc upper Uses the upper 32 bits of the key for the hash computation dest ip Uses the destination IP for ECMP hashing ls...

Page 505: ...mmand with the line card option changes the hash for a particular line card by applying the mask specified in the IPSA and IPDA fields The line card option is applicable with the lag hash align microcode only refer to CAM Profile Commands Any other microcode returns an error message as follows Dell conf hash algorithm linecard 5 ip sa mask ff ip da mask ff Error This command is not supported in th...

Page 506: ...e range 0 47 The default for ExaScale is 24 hash algorithm ecmp Change the hash algorithm used to distribute traffic flows across an ECMP equal cost multipath routing group Syntax hash algorithm ecmp crc upper dest ip lsb To return to the default hash algorithm use the no hash algorithm ecmp command Parameters crc upper Uses the upper 32 bits of the key for the hash computation The default is crc ...

Page 507: ...ter the keyword linecard then the linecard slot number port set number Enter the keywords port set then the linecard port pipe number Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information Deterministic ECMP sorts ECMPs in order even though RTM provides them in a random order However the hash algorithm uses as a s...

Page 508: ... To negate a command use the no ip ecmp group maximum paths command Parameters maximum paths Specify the maximum number of ECMP for a route The range is 2 to 64 path fallback Use the keywords path fallback to enable this feature If you enable the feature re enter this keyword to disable the feature Defaults 16 Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40G...

Page 509: ...des a mechanism to enable monitoring of traffic distribution on an ECMP link bundle Syntax link bundle monitor enable To exit from ECMP group mode use the exit command Command Modes ECMP GROUP PORT CHANNEL INTERFACE Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module show config Display the ECMP configuration Syntax show config Command Modes CONFIGURATION ECMP GROUP Com...

Page 510: ...maximum rate for each interface Syntax show link bundle distribution Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Example Dell show link bundle distribution Link bundle trigger threshold 60 ECMP bundle 5 Utilization In Percent 0 Alarm State Inactive Interface Line Protocol Utilization In Percent Te 0 4 Up 5 Te 0 3 Up 30 510 Equal Cost...

Page 511: ... Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Example Dell conf fips mode enable WARNING Enabling FIPS mode will close all SSH Telnet connection restart those servers and destroy all configured host keys proceed y n y Dell conf Related Commands ssh opens an SSH connection specifying the hostname username port number and version of the ...

Page 512: ...ple Dell show ip ssh SSH server enabled SSH server version v1 and v2 Password Authentication enabled Hostbased Authentication disabled RSA Authentication disabled Vty Encryption HMAC Remote IP 1 3des cbc hmac md5 10 1 20 48 2 3des cbc hmac md5 10 1 20 48 With FIPS Mode enabled Dell show ip ssh SSH server enabled SSH server version v2 Password Authentication enabled Hostbased Authentication disable...

Page 513: ...e For v2 clients only Without the FIPS mode enabled 3des cbc Force ssh to use 3des cbc encryption cipher With the FIPS mode enabled aes128 cbc Force ssh to use the aes128 cbc encryption cipher aes256 cbc Force ssh to use the aes256 cbc encryption cipher l username OPTIONAL Enter the keyword l then the user name used in this SSH session The default is the user name of the user associated with the t...

Page 514: ...only p SSH server port option default 22 v SSH protocol version cr Dell ssh 10 11 8 12 c 3des cbc Force ssh to use 3des cbc encryption cipher Dell ssh 10 11 8 12 m hmac sha1 Force ssh to use hmac sha1 HMAC algorithm hmac sha1 96 Force ssh to use hmac sha1 96 HMAC algorithm hmac md5 Force ssh to use hmac md5 HMAC algorithm hmac md5 96 Force ssh to use hmac md5 96 HMAC algorithm With FIPS mode enabl...

Page 515: ...ce vlan Clear FIP snooping information on a VLAN for a specified FCoE MAC address ENode MAC address or FCF MAC address and remove the corresponding ACLs FIP snooping generates Syntax clear fip snooping database interface vlan vlan id fcoe mac address enode mac address fcf mac address Parameters fcoe mac address Enter the FCoE MAC address to be cleared of FIP snooping information enode mac address ...

Page 516: ...his command is supported in Programmable Mux PMUX mode only Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module clear fip snooping statistics Clears the statistics on the FIP packets snooped on all VLANs a specified VLAN or a specified port interface Syntax clear fip snooping statistics interface vlan vlan id interface port type port slot interface port channel port channel number Par...

Page 517: ...le fip snooping enable Enable FIP snooping on all VLANs or on a specified VLAN Syntax fip snooping enable To disable the FIP snooping feature on all or a specified VLAN use the no fip snooping enable command Defaults FIP snooping is disabled on all VLANs Command Modes CONFIGURATION VLAN INTERFACE Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the M I O Aggregator This command is supported in Progra...

Page 518: ...This command is supported in Programmable Mux PMUX mode only Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module fip snooping port mode fcf Configure the port for bridge to FCF links Syntax fip snooping port mode fcf To disable the bridge to FCF link on a port use the no fip snooping port mode fcf command Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the M I O ...

Page 519: ...information on the ENodes in FIP snooped sessions including the ENode interface and MAC address FCF MAC address VLAN ID and FC ID Syntax show fip snooping enode enode mac address Parameters enode mac address Enter the MAC address of the ENodes to display Command Modes EXEC EXEC Privilege Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information The following de...

Page 520: ...lege Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information The following describes the show fip snooping fcf command shown in the following example Field Description FCF MAC MAC address of the FCF FCF Interface Slot port number of the interface to which the FCF is connected VLAN VLAN ID number the session uses FC MAP FC Map value the FCF advertises ENod...

Page 521: ...ption ENode MAC MAC address of the ENode ENode Interface Slot port number of the interface connected to the ENode FCF MAC MAC address of the FCF FCF Interface Slot port number of the interface to which the FCF is connected VLAN VLAN ID number the session uses FCoE MAC MAC address of the FCoE session the FCF assigns FC ID Fibre Channel ID the FCF assigns Port WWPN Worldwide port name of the CNA por...

Page 522: ...s port type port slot Enter the port type and slot number of the FIP packet statistics displays port channel number Enter the port channel number of the FIP packet statistics displays Command Modes EXEC EXEC Privilege Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information The following describes the show fip snooping statistics command shown in the follo...

Page 523: ...face Number of FLOGI Accepts Number of FIP FLOGI accept frames received on the interface Number of FLOGI Rejects Number of FIP FLOGI reject frames received on the interface Number of FDISC Accepts Number of FIP FDISC accept frames received on the interface Number of FDISC Rejects Number of FIP FDISC reject frames received on the interface Number of FLOGO Accepts Number of FIP FLOGO accept frames r...

Page 524: ...itethernet 0 11 Number of Vlan Requests 1 Number of Vlan Notifications 0 Number of Multicast Discovery Solicits 1 Number of Unicast Discovery Solicits 0 Number of FLOGI 1 Number of FDISC 16 Number of FLOGO 0 Number of Enode Keep Alive 4416 Number of VN Port Keep Alive 3136 Number of Multicast Discovery Advertisement 0 Number of Unicast Discovery Advertisement 0 Number of FLOGI Accepts 0 Number of ...

Page 525: ... disabled including the number of FCoE VLANs FCFs ENodes and currently active sessions Syntax show fip snooping system Command Modes EXEC EXEC Privilege Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Example Dell show fip snooping system Global Mode Enabled FCOE VLAN List Operational 1 100 FCFs 1 Enodes 2 Sessions 17 show fip snooping vlan Display information on t...

Page 526: ... 1 100 0X0EFC00 1 2 17 526 FIP Snooping ...

Page 527: ... Ring protocol is enabled A virtual local area network VLAN configured as the control VLAN for a ring cannot be configured as a control or member VLAN for any other ring Member VLANs across multiple rings are not supported in Master nodes If multiple rings share one or more member VLANs they cannot share any links between them Each ring can have only one Master node all others are Transit nodes cl...

Page 528: ...nt to display debug information related to ring protocol transitions packet Enter the keyword packet to display brief debug information related to control packets detail Enter the keyword detail to display detailed debug information related to the entire ring protocol packets ring id Optional Enter the ring identification number The range is from 1 to 255 count number Enter the keyword count then ...

Page 529: ...nt Ring Protocol use the no disable command Defaults Disabled Command Modes CONFIGURATION conf frrp Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module interface Configure the primary secondary and control vlan interfaces Syntax interface primary interface secondary interface control vlan vlan id To return to the default use the no interface primary interface secondary ...

Page 530: ...eyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot port information 40 Gigabit Ethernet interface enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot port information control vlan vlan id Enter the keyword control vlan then the VLAN ID The range is from 1 to 4094 Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION conf frrp Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information This co...

Page 531: ...ansit To reset the mode use the no mode master transit command Parameters master Enter the keyword master to set the Ring node to Master mode transit Enter the keywordtransit to set the Ring node to Transit mode Defaults Mode None Command Modes CONFIGURATION conf frrp Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module protocol frrp Enter the Resilient Ring Protocol and...

Page 532: ...and Modes EXEC Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information Executing this command without the optional ring id command clears the statistics counters on all the available rings The system requires a command line confirmation before the command executes This command clears the following counters hello Rx and Tx counters Topology change Rx and Tx...

Page 533: ...nterval milliseconds To remove the timer use the no timer hello interval milliseconds dead interval milliseconds command Parameters hello interval milliseconds Enter the keyword hello interval then the time in milliseconds to set the hello interval of the control packets The milliseconds must be entered in increments of 50 millisecond for example 50 100 150 and so on If an invalid value is entered...

Page 534: ... MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information The hello interval command is the interval at which ring frames are generated from the primary interface of the master node The dead interval command is the time that elapses before a time out occurs 534 Force10 Resilient Ring Protocol FRRP ...

Page 535: ...owing components The GVRP application GARP information propagation GIP GARP information declaration GID Important Points to Remember GVRP is supported on Layer 2 ports only All VLAN ports added by GVRP are tagged GVRP is supported on untagged ports belonging to a default VLAN and tagged ports GVRP cannot be enabled on untagged ports belonging to a non default VLAN unless native VLAN is turned on G...

Page 536: ... deletes all VLAN interfaces that were learned through GVRP and leaves unchanged all VLANs that were manually configured clear gvrp statistics Clear GVRP statistics on an interface Syntax clear gvrp statistics interface interface Parameters interface interface Enter the following keywords and slot port or number information For a Port Channel interface enter the keywords port channel then a number...

Page 537: ...d TenGigabitEthernet then the slot port information For a 40 Gigabit Ethernet interface enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot port information Defaults Disabled Command Modes EXEC Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module disable Globally disable GVRP Syntax disable To re enable GVRP use the no disable command Defaults Enabled Command Modes CONFIGURATION ...

Page 538: ...ONFIGURATION GVRP Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information Join Timer Join messages announce the willingness to register some attributes with other participants For reliability each GARP application entity sends a Join message twice and uses a join timer to set the sending interval Leave Timer Leave announces the willingness to de register ...

Page 539: ...d VLAN ID set This setting is the default forbidden Enter the keyword forbidden then the VLAN range in a comma separated VLAN ID set Defaults normal Command Modes CONFIGURATION INTERFACE Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information Fixed registration prevents an interface configured using the command line to belong to a VLAN static configuratio...

Page 540: ...8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Related Commands disable globally disables GVRP show config Display the global GVRP configuration Syntax show config Command Modes CONFIGURATION GVRP Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Related Commands gvrp enable enables GVRP on physical interfaces and LAGs protocol gvrp accesses the GVRP protoc...

Page 541: ...on interface OPTIONAL Enter the following keywords and slot port or number information For a Port Channel interface enter the keywords port channel then a number The range is from 1 to 128 For a 10 Gigabit Ethernet interface enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot port information For a 40 Gigabit Ethernet interface enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot port information Defaults non...

Page 542: ...ords port channel then a number The range is from 1 to 128 For a 10 Gigabit Ethernet interface enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot port information For a 40 Gigabit Ethernet interface enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot port information summary Enter the keyword summary to display just a summary of the GVRP statistics Defaults none Command Modes EXEC EXEC Privilege Command His...

Page 543: ...All Received 40 Join Empty Transmitted 156 Join In Transmitted 0 Empty Transmitted 0 Leave In Transmitted 0 Leave Empty Transmitted 0 Leave All Transmitted 41 Invalid Messages Attributes skipped 0 Failed Registrations 0 Dell Related Commands show gvrp displays the GVRP configuration show vlan Display the global VLAN configuration Syntax show vlan Command Modes EXEC EXEC Privilege Command History V...

Page 544: ... 1 Active U Te 3 20 U Te 5 20 21 G 10 Active G Po128 Te 5 49 dynamically leanred vlan Dell Related Commands show gvrp statistics displays the GVRP statistics 544 GARP VLAN Registration GVRP ...

Page 545: ...es triggered by spanning tree protocol STP IGMP snooping reacts to Layer 2 topology changes multiple spanning tree protocol MSTP triggers by sending a general query on the interface that comes in the FWD state Important Points to Remember for IGMP Querier The IGMP snooping Querier supports version 2 You must configure an IP address to the VLAN interface for IGMP snooping Querier to begin The IGMP ...

Page 546: ...1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information The access list accepted is an extended ACL To block IGMP reports from hosts on a per interface basis based on the group address and source address that you specify in the access list use this feature ip igmp group join limit To limit the number of IGMP groups that can be joined in a second use this feature Syntax ip igmp group jo...

Page 547: ...Defaults 125 seconds Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module ip igmp query interval Change the transmission frequency of IGMP general queries the Querier sends Syntax ip igmp query interval seconds To return to the default values use the no ip igmp query interval command Parameters seconds Enter the number of seconds between queries ...

Page 548: ...tch IO Module ip igmp version Manually set the version of the router to IGMPv2 or IGMPv3 Syntax ip igmp version 2 3 Parameters 2 Enter the number 2 to set the IGMP version number to IGMPv2 3 Enter the number 3 to set the IGMP version number to IGMPv3 Defaults 2 that is IGMPv2 Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module ip igmp snooping e...

Page 549: ...o disable IGMP snooping fast leave use the no igmp snooping fast leave command Defaults Not configured Command Modes INTERFACE VLAN conf if vl n Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information Queriers normally send some queries when a leave message is received prior to deleting a group from the membership database There may be situations when you...

Page 550: ...m response time inserted into Group Specific queries sent in response to Group Leave messages Syntax ip igmp snooping last member query interval milliseconds To return to the default value use the no ip igmp snooping last member query interval command Parameters milliseconds Enter the interval in milliseconds The range is from 100 to 65535 The default is 1000 milliseconds Defaults 1000 millisecond...

Page 551: ...ich a multicast router is attached To configure a static connection to the multicast router enter the ip igmp snooping mrouter interface command in the VLAN context The interface to the router must be a part of the VLAN where you are entering the command ip igmp snooping querier Enable IGMP querier processing for the VLAN interface Syntax ip igmp snooping querier To disable IGMP querier processing...

Page 552: ...n number Enter the keyword vlan then the VLAN number The range is from 1 to 4094 Command Modes EXEC EXEC Privilege Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Example Dell show ip igmp snooping mrouter Interface Router Ports Vlan 2 Gi 13 3 Po 1 Dell 552 Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP ...

Page 553: ... or number to clear counters from a specified interface For a Loopback interface enter the keyword loopback then a number from 0 to 16383 For a Port Channel interface enter the keywords port channel then a number The range is from 1 to 128 For the management interface on the RPM enter the keyword ManagementEthernet then slot port information The slot range is from 0 to 1 and the port range is 0 Fo...

Page 554: ...ar counters on all interfaces confirm Related Commands mac learning limit allows aging of MACs even though a learning limit is configured or disallow station move on learned MACs show interfaces displays information on the interfaces clear dampening Clear the dampening counters on all the interfaces or just the specified interface Syntax clear dampening interface Parameters interface OPTIONAL Ente...

Page 555: ...cx4 cable length Configure the length of the cable to be connected to the selected CX4 port Syntax no cx4 cable length long medium short Parameters long medium short Enter the keyword that matches the cable length to be used at the selected port short For 1 meter and 3 meter cable lengths medium For 5 meter cable length long For 10 meter and 15 meter cable lengths Defaults medium Command Modes INT...

Page 556: ...onfig Related Commands show config displays the configuration of the selected interface dampening Configure dampening on an interface Syntax dampening half life reuse threshold suppress threshold max suppress time To disable dampening use the no dampening half life reuse threshold suppress threshold max suppress time command Parameters half life Enter the number of seconds after which the penalty ...

Page 557: ...otocols The penalty is exponentially decayed based on the half life timer After the penalty decays below the reuse threshold the interface enables The configured parameters are as follows suppress threshold should be greater than reuse threshold max suppress time should be at least 4 times half life NOTE You cannot apply dampening on an interface that is monitoring traffic for other interfaces Exa...

Page 558: ...s a member of a port channel Use the show interfaces description command to display descriptions configured for each interface Related Commands show interfaces description displays the description field of the interfaces duplex 1000 10000 Interfaces Configure duplex mode on any physical interfaces where the speed is set to 1000 10000 Syntax duplex half full To return to the default setting use the...

Page 559: ...ocess the received flow control frames on this port This is the default value for the receive side rx off Enter the keywords rx off to ignore the received flow control frames on this port tx on Enter the keywords tx on to send control frames from this port to the connected device when a higher rate of traffic is received This is the default value on the send side tx off Enter the keywords tx off s...

Page 560: ...nable tx pause when buffer carving is enabled For information and assistance consult Dell Networking TAC Asymmetric flow control rx on tx off or rx off tx on setting for the interface port less than 100 Mb s speed is not permitted The following error is returned Can t configure Asymmetric flowcontrol when speed 1G config ignored The only configuration applicable to half duplex ports is rx off tx o...

Page 561: ...ff off off off on on off off off off off off off off off on off off on on on on on on on on on off off off off off off off off on on on on on on on on Related Commands show running config displays the flow configuration parameters non default values only show interfaces displays the negotiated flow control parameters interface Configure a physical interface on the switch Syntax interface interface...

Page 562: ... interfaces are disabled shutdown and are in Layer 3 mode To place an interface in mode ensure that the interface s configuration does not contain an IP address and enter the Port Channel Commands command The tunnel interface operates as an ECMP equal cost multi path only when the next hop to the tunnel destination is over a physical interface If you select any other interface as the next hop to t...

Page 563: ...igures a port channel interface vlan configures a VLAN interface ManagementEthernet Configure the Management port on the system Syntax interface ManagementEthernet slot port Parameters slot port Enter the keyword ManagementEthernet then the slot number 0 or 1 and port number zero 0 Defaults Not configured Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the M I O Aggregato...

Page 564: ...interface The only configuration command possible in a Null interface is ip unreachables Example Dell conf interface null 0 Dell conf if nu 0 Related Commands interface configures a physical interface interface loopback configures a Loopback interface interface port channel configures a port channel interface vlan configures a VLAN ip unreachables enables generation of internet control message pro...

Page 565: ...1 to 4094 Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the M I O Aggregator This command is supported in Programmable Mux PMUX mode only Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information When creating an interface range interfaces appear in the order they are entered they are not sorted The command verifies that interfaces...

Page 566: ...SONET interfaces only commands related to physical interfaces can be bulk configured To configure commands specific to VLAN or port channel only those respective interfaces should be configured in a particular range Example Single Range This example shows a single range bulk configuration Dell config interface range gigabitethernet 5 1 23 Dell config if range no shutdown Dell config if range Examp...

Page 567: ...equired between the commas Comma separated ranges can include VLANs port channels and physical interfaces Slot Port information must contain a space before and after the dash For example interface range gigabitethernet 0 1 5 is valid interface range gigabitethernet 0 1 5 is NOT valid For a Port Channel interface enter the keywords port channel then a number The range is from 1 to 128 For a 10 Giga...

Page 568: ...erface range macro interface range macro name Run the interface range macro to automatically configure the pre defined range of interfaces Syntax interface range macro name Parameters name Enter the name of an existing macro Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the M I O Aggregator This command is supported in Programmable Mux PMUX mode only Versi...

Page 569: ...10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information For more information about VLANs and the commands to configure them refer to the Virtual LAN VLAN Commands FTP TFTP and SNMP operations are not supported on a VLAN MAC IP ACLs are not supported Example Dell conf int vlan 3 Dell conf if vl 3 Related Commands interface configures a physical interface interface port channel configures a port channel group i...

Page 570: ...epalive seconds To stop sending keepalive packets use the no keepalive command Parameters seconds OPTIONAL For interfaces with PPP encapsulation enabled enter the number of seconds between keepalive packets The range is from 0 to 23767 The default is 10 seconds Defaults Enabled Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the M I O Aggregator This command is supported in P...

Page 571: ...ivilege Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the M I O Aggregator This command is supported in Programmable Mux PMUX mode only Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information In the Example the delta column displays changes since the last screen refresh The following are the monitor command menu options Key Description systest 3 Displays the host name as...

Page 572: ...s 9401589 0 pps 1 64B packets 67 0 pps 0 Over 64B packets 49166 0 pps 1 Over 127B packets 350 0 pps 0 Over 255B packets 1351 0 pps 0 Over 511B packets 286 0 pps 0 Over 1023B packets 2781 0 pps 0 Error statistics Input underruns 0 0 pps 0 Input giants 0 0 pps 0 Input throttles 0 0 pps 0 Input CRC 0 0 pps 0 Input IP checksum 0 0 pps 0 Input overrun 0 0 pps 0 Output underruns 0 0 pps 0 Output throttl...

Page 573: ... to the link MTU and IP MTU values configured on the channel members For example if the members have a link MTU of 2100 and an IP MTU 2000 the port channel s MTU values cannot be higher than 2100 for link MTU or 2000 bytes for IP MTU VLANs All members of a VLAN must have same IP MTU value Members can have different Link MTU values Tagged members must have a link MTU 4 bytes higher than untagged me...

Page 574: ...es a mode option for configuring an individual port to forced master forced slave after you enable auto negotiation If you do not use the mode option the default setting is slave If you do not configure forced master or forced slave on a port the port negotiates to either a master or a slave state Port status is one of the following Forced master Force slave Master Slave Auto neg Error typically i...

Page 575: ...s LineSpeed 1000 Mbit Mode full duplex Master ARP type ARPA ARP Timeout 04 00 00 Last clearing of show interfaces counters 00 12 42 Queueing strategy fifo Input Statistics User Information Both sides of the link must have auto negotiation enabled or disabled for the link to come up The following details the possible speed and auto negotiation combinations for a line between two 10 100 1000 Base T ...

Page 576: ...UX mode only Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information The following describes the interface command shown in the following example This example sets a port as hybrid makes the port a tagged member of VLAN 20 and an untagged member of VLAN 10 which becomes the native VLAN of the port The port now accepts untagged frames and classify them as VLAN 10 frames V...

Page 577: ... if vl 20 Dell conf do show interfaces switchport tengigabitethernet 3 20 Codes U Untagged T Tagged x Dot1x untagged X Dot1x tagged G GVRP tagged M Trunk H VSN tagged i Internal untagged I Internal tagged v VLT untagged V VLT tagged Name TenGigabitEthernet 3 20 802 1QTagged Hybrid Vlan membership Q Vlans U 20 T 10 Native VlanId 20 Dell conf Example unconfigure the hybrid port Dell conf if vl 20 in...

Page 578: ...des INTERFACE Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information The output of the show interfaces command displays the configured rate interval along with the collected traffic data Related Commands show interfaces displays information on physical and virtual interfaces show config Display the interface configuration Syntax show config Command Modes...

Page 579: ...nterface or virtual interface Syntax show interfaces interface Parameters interface Enter one of the following keywords and slot port or number information For a Loopback interface enter the keyword loopback then a number from 0 to 16383 For a management interface enter the keyword ManagementEthernet then the slot port information The slot range is 0 to 1 and the port range is 0 For a Port Channel...

Page 580: ...In the CLI output the power value is rounded to a 3 digit value For receive transmit power that is less than 0 000 an snmp query returns the corresponding dbm value even though the CLI displays as 0 000 NOTE After the counters are cleared the line rate continues to increase until it reaches the maximum line rate When the maximum line rate is reached there is no change in the line rate User Informa...

Page 581: ... overrun and discarded packets CRC packets with CRC FCS errors overrun number of packets discarded due to FIFO overrun conditions discarded the sum of runts giants CRC and overrun packets discarded without any processing Output Statistics Displays output statistics sent out of the interface including Number of packets bytes and underruns out of the interface Packet size and the number of those pac...

Page 582: ...ksum 0 overrun 0 discarded Output Statistics 1 packets 64 bytes 0 underruns 0 Multicasts 2 Broadcasts 0 Unicasts 0 IP Packets 0 Vlans 0 MPLS 0 throttles 0 discarded Rate info interval 299 seconds Input 00 00 Mbits sec 0 packets sec 0 00 of line rate Output 00 00 Mbits sec 0 packets sec 0 00 of line rate Time since last interface status change 00 00 27 Usage Information The interface counter over 1...

Page 583: ...ow interface managementethernet 0 0 Management Ethernet interface number Dell show interface managementethernet 0 0 ManagementEthernet 0 0 is up line protocol is up Hardware is DellForce10Eth address is 00 1e c9 f1 00 05 Current address is 00 1e c9 f1 00 05 Pluggable media not present Interface index is 235159752 Internet address is 10 11 209 87 16 Mode of IP Address Assignment MANUAL DHCP Client ...

Page 584: ...ol is up Hardware is Force10Eth address is 00 01 e8 05 f7 fc Current address is 00 01 e8 05 f7 fc Interface index is 474791997 Internet address is 1 1 1 1 24 MTU 1554 bytes IP MTU 1500 bytes LineSpeed 1000 Mbit Mode full duplex Master ARP type ARPA ARP Timeout 04 00 00 Last clearing of show interfaces counters 00 12 42 Queueing strategy fifo Input Statistics 10 packets 10000 bytes 0 Vlans 0 64 byt...

Page 585: ...rt information For a 40 Gigabit Ethernet interface enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot port information summary OPTIONAL Enter the keyword summary to display the current summary of dampening data including the number of interfaces configured and the number of interfaces suppressed if any detail OPTIONAL Enter the keyword detail to display detailed interface dampening data Defaults none Comma...

Page 586: ...el then a number The range is 1 to 128 For a 10 Gigabit Ethernet interface enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot port information For a 40 Gigabit Ethernet interface enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot port information For VLAN interfaces enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094 Command Modes EXEC EXEC Privilege Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 1...

Page 587: ...5 NO admin down down TenGigabitEthernet 0 16 YES up up TenGigabitEthernet 0 17 NO admin down down TenGigabitEthernet 0 18 NO admin down down TenGigabitEthernet 0 19 NO admin down down TenGigabitEthernet 0 20 NO admin down down TenGigabitEthernet 0 21 NO admin down down Related Commands show interfaces displays information on a specific physical interface or virtual interface show interfaces stack ...

Page 588: ...carded 0 collisions Rate info interval 299 seconds Input 00 00 Mbits sec 0 packets sec 0 00 of line rate Output 00 00 Mbits sec 0 packets sec 0 00 of line rate Time since last interface status change 5d5h23m output truncated Related Commands show hardware stack unit displays data plane and management plane input output statistics show interfaces displays information on a specific physical interfac...

Page 589: ...s displays information on a specific physical interface or virtual interface show interfaces switchport Display only virtual and physical interfaces in Layer 2 mode This command displays the Layer 2 mode interfaces IEEE 802 1Q tag status and VLAN membership Syntax show interfaces switchport interface stack unit unit id Parameters interface OPTIONAL Enter one of the following keywords and slot port...

Page 590: ...lan membership Lists the VLANs to which the interface is a member Starting with the Dell Networking OS version 7 6 1 this field can display native VLAN membership by port 13 0 Example Dell show interfaces switchport Codes U Untagged T Tagged x Dot1x untagged X Dot1x tagged G GVRP tagged M Trunk H VSN tagged i Internal untagged I Internal tagged v VLT untagged V VLT tagged Name TenGigabitEthernet 3...

Page 591: ...t slot port fortyGigE slot port transceiver Parameters tengigabitether net For a 10G interface enter the keyword tengigabitethernet then the slot port information fortyGigE For a 40G interface enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot port information Command Modes EXEC EXEC Privilege Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information The following d...

Page 592: ... SFP and SFP Voltage High Warning threshold Factory defined setting Value can differ between SFP and SFP Bias High Warning threshold Factory defined setting Value can differ between SFP and SFP TX Power High Warning threshold Factory defined setting Value can differ between SFP and SFP RX Power High Warning threshold Factory defined setting Value can differ between SFP and SFP Temp Low Warning thr...

Page 593: ...a Ready state Bar This field indicates that the transceiver has achieved power up and data is ready This is set to true if data is ready to be sent and set to false if data is being transmitted Rx LOS state This is the digital state of the Rx_LOS output pin This is set to true if the operating status is down Tx Fault state This is the digital state of the Tx Fault output pin Rate Select state This...

Page 594: ...wer High Warning Flag This can be either true or false depending on the Current Tx power value displayed above Rx Power High Warning Flag This can be either true or false depending on the Current Tx power value displayed above Temperature Low Warning Flag This can be either true or false depending on the Current Temperature value displayed above Voltage Low Warning Flag This can be either true or ...

Page 595: ...tage High Warning threshold 3 700V SFP 1 Bias High Warning threshold 14 000mA SFP 1 TX Power High Warning threshold 0 631mW SFP 1 RX Power High Warning threshold 0 794mW SFP 1 Temp Low Warning threshold 20 000C SFP 1 Voltage Low Warning threshold 2 900V SFP 1 Bias Low Warning threshold 2 000mA SFP 1 TX Power Low Warning threshold 0 079mW SFP 1 RX Power Low Warning threshold 0 016mW SFP 1 Temperatu...

Page 596: ...ing the interface range command Syntax show range Command Modes INTERFACE RANGE config if range Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Example Dell conf if range te 0 16 show range interface tengigabitethernet 0 16 Dell conf if range te 0 16 Related Commands interface configures a physical interface on the switch show ip interface displays Layer 3 informat...

Page 597: ...only commands that you can configure on an interface that is a member of a port channel Related Commands interface port channel creates a port channel interface interface vlan creates a VLAN show ip interface displays the interface routing status Add the keyword brief to display a table of interfaces and their status speed for 1000 10000 auto interfaces Set the speed for 1000 10000 Base T Ethernet...

Page 598: ... configures duplex mode on physical interfaces with the speed set to 10 100 negotiation auto enables or disables auto negotiation on an interface stack unit portmode Split a single 40G port into 4 10G ports on the MXL switch Syntax stack unit stack unit port number portmode quad Parameters stack unit Enter the stack member unit identifier of the stack member to reset The range is 0 to 5 NOTE The M...

Page 599: ...2 3ad In the Dell Networking OS a LAG is referred to as a Port Channel For the MXL switch the maximum port channel ID is 128 and the maximum members per port channel is 16 Because each port can be assigned to only one Port Channel and each Port Channel must have at least one port some of those nominally available Port Channels might have no function because they could have no members if there are ...

Page 600: ...ation prior to joining the Port Channel An interface can belong to only one Port Channel You can add up to 16 interfaces to a Port Channel on the MXL switch The interfaces can be located on different line cards but must be the same physical type and speed for example all 10 Gigabit Ethernet interfaces However you can combine 100 1000 interfaces and GE interfaces in the same Port Channel If the Por...

Page 601: ...ber Enter the keywords port channel then an existing LAG number Enter this keyword variable combination twice identifying the two paired LAGs Defaults none Command Modes PORT CHANNEL FAILOVER GROUP conf po failover grp Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the M I O Aggregator This command is supported in Programmable Mux PMUX mode only Version 8 3 16 1 Examle Dell conf port channel failov...

Page 602: ...ing an IP address You can add a Port Channel in Layer 2 mode to a VLAN A Port Channel can contain both 100 1000 interfaces and GE interfaces Based on the first interface configured in the Port Channel and enabled the Dell Networking OS determines if the Port Channel uses 100 Mb s or 1000 Mb s as the common speed For more information refer to channel member If the line card is in a Jumbo mode chass...

Page 603: ...re it can be declared as up For example if the required minimum is four and only three are up the LAG is considered down port channel failover group To configure a LAG failover group access PORT CHANNEL FAILOVER GROUP mode Syntax port channel failover group To remove all LAG failover groups use the no port channel failover group command Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Ver...

Page 604: ... IO Module Example Dell conf if po 1 show config interface Port channel 1 no ip address shutdown Dell conf if po 1 show interfaces port channel Display information on configured Port Channel groups Syntax show interfaces port channel channel number brief Parameters channel number For a Port Channel interface enter the keywords port channel then a number The range is from 1 to 128 brief OPTIONAL En...

Page 605: ... clearing Displays the time when the show interfaces counters were cleared Queueing strategy States the packet queuing strategy FIFO means first in first out packets input Displays the number of packets and bytes into the interface Input 0 IP packets Displays the number of packets with IP headers VLAN tagged headers and MPLS headers The number of packets may not add correctly because a VLAN tagged...

Page 606: ...iscarded Output Statistics 0 packets 0 bytes 0 underruns 0 64 byte pkts 0 over 64 byte pkts 0 over 127 byte pkts 0 over 255 byte pkts 0 over 511 byte pkts 0 over 1023 byte pkts 0 Multicasts 0 Broadcasts 0 Unicasts 0 throttles 0 discarded 0 collisions User Information The following describes the show interfaces port channel brief command shown in the following example Field Description LAG Lists th...

Page 607: ...red refer to the interface command before running TDR An error message is generated if you have not enabled the interface The interface on the far end device must be shut down before running TDR Because TDR is an intrusive test on an interface that is not establishing a link do not run TDR on an interface that is passing traffic When testing between two devices do not run the test on both ends of ...

Page 608: ...R test has not been run an error message is generated Error Please run the TDR test first The following describes the TDR test status Status Definition OK Status Terminated TDR test is complete no fault is detected on the cable and the test is terminated Length 92 1 meters Status Shorted A short is detected on the cable The location in this Example is 92 meters The short is accurate to plus or min...

Page 609: ...effective on that interface The existing show interface command has been modified to display the configured broadcast address debug ip udp helper Enable UDP debug and display the debug information on a console Syntax debug ip udp helper To disable debug information use the no debug ip udp helper command Defaults Debug disabled Command Modes EXEC EXEC Privilege Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Intr...

Page 610: ...ace and the outgoing interface is configured using this command the outgoing packet s IP destination address is replaced with the configured broadcast address Related Commands debug ip udp helper enables debug and displays the debug information on a console show ip udp helper displays the configured UDP helpers on all interfaces ip udp helper udp port Enable the UDP broadcast feature on an interfa...

Page 611: ... 68 traffic if those ports are part of the udp port list Related Commands ip helper address configures the destination broadcast or host address for the DHCP server debug ip udp helper enables debug and displays the debug information on a console show ip udp helper displays the configured UDP helpers on all interfaces show ip udp helper Display the configured UDP helpers on all interfaces Syntax s...

Page 612: ...commas that you configure by using the interface range command For example if you enter a list of interface ranges such as interface range fo 2 0 1 te 10 0 gi 3 0 fa 0 0 this configuration is considered valid The comma separated list is not required to be separated by spaces in between the ranges You can associate multicast MAC or hardware addresses to an interface range and VLANs by using the mac...

Page 613: ...lowing keywords and slot port or number information For the Management interface enter the keyword ManagementEthernet then the slot port information The slot range is from 0 to 1 and the port range is 0 For a Port Channel interface enter the keywords port channel then a number The range is from 1 to 128 For a 10 Gigabit Ethernet interface enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot port inf...

Page 614: ...C addresses 00 00 00 00 00 00 are also invalid Related Commands clear arp cache clears dynamic ARP entries from the ARP table show arp displays the ARP table arp learn enable Enable ARP learning using gratuitous ARP Syntax arp learn enable Defaults Disabled Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module arp retries Set the number of ARP...

Page 615: ...entries from a specific interface or optionally delete no refresh ARP entries from the content addressable memory CAM Syntax clear arp cache interface ip ip address no refresh Parameters interface OPTIONAL Enter the following keywords and slot port or number information For the Management interface enter the keyword ManagementEthernet then the slot port information The slot range is from 0 to 1 an...

Page 616: ...ory Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module clear host Remove one or all dynamically learned host table entries Syntax clear host name Parameters name Enter the name of the host to delete Enter to delete all host table entries Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module clear ip fib stack unit Clear all forw...

Page 617: ...l learned IP routes ip address mask Enter a specific IP address and mask in dotted decimal format to clear that IP address from the routing table Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Related Commands ip route assigns an IP route to the switch show ip route views the routing table show ip route summary views a summary of the r...

Page 618: ... information For a 40 Gigabit Ethernet interface enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot port information For a VLAN enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094 count value OPTIONAL Enter the keyword count then the count value The range is from 1 to 65534 Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Info...

Page 619: ... received at interface 14 4 4 1 BOOTP Reply hops 0 XID 0xda4f9503 secs 0 hwaddr 00 60 CF 20 7B 8C giaddr 113 3 3 17 00 12 42 RELAY I BOOTREPLY Forwarded BOOTREPLY for 00 60 CF 20 7B 8C to 113 3 3 254 00 12 42 RELAY I PACKET BOOTP REQUEST Unicast received at interface 113 3 3 17 BOOTP Request hops 0 XID 0xda4f9503 secs 0 hwaddr 00 60 CF 20 7B 8C giaddr 0 0 0 0 00 12 42 RELAY I BOOTREQUEST Forwarded...

Page 620: ...History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Example ICMP echo request rcvd from src 40 40 40 40 ICMP src 40 40 40 40 dst 40 40 40 40 echo reply ICMP src 40 40 40 40 dst 40 40 40 40 echo reply ICMP echo request sent to dst 40 40 40 40 ICMP echo request rcvd from src 40 40 40 40 ICMP src 40 40 40 40 dst 40 40 40 40 echo reply ICMP src 40 40 40 40 dst 40 40 40 40 echo rep...

Page 621: ...ntroduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information The following describes the debug ip packet command in the following example Field Description s Lists the source address of the packet and the name of the interface in parentheses that received the packet d Lists the destination address of the packet and the name of the interface in parentheses through which the packet is being sent...

Page 622: ...ulticast proto 2 IP s 0 0 0 0 d 30 30 30 30 len 100 unroutable ICMP type 8 code 0 IP s 0 0 0 0 d 30 30 30 30 len 100 unroutable ICMP type 8 code 0 Usage Information To stop packets from flooding the user terminal when debugging is turned on use the count option The access group option supports only the equal to eq operator in TCP ACL rules Port operators not equal to neq greater than gt less than ...

Page 623: ...use the no ip address ip address command Parameters ip address Enter an IP address in dotted decimal format mask Enter the mask of the IP address in slash prefix format for example 24 secondary OPTIONAL Enter the keyword secondary to designate the IP address as the secondary address Defaults Not configured Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Swit...

Page 624: ...GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information To configure a list of possible domain names configure the ip domain list command up to six times If you configure both the ip domain name and ip domain list commands the software tries to resolve the name using the ip domain name command If the name is not resolved the software goes through the list of names configured with the ip domain list command to find...

Page 625: ...over a VLAN DNS queries are sent out all other interfaces including the Management port To view current bindings use the show hosts command Related Commands ip name server specifies a DNS server show hosts Views the current bindings ip domain name Configure one domain name for the switch Syntax ip domain name name To remove the domain name use the no ip domain name command Parameters name Enter on...

Page 626: ... address command Parameters ip address Enter an IP address in dotted decimal format A B C D Defaults Not configured Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information You can add multiple DHCP servers by entering the ip helper address command multiple times If multiple servers are defined an incoming request is sent simultaneo...

Page 627: ...e is relayed with the same value for hops However the message is discarded if the hops field exceeds 16 to comply with the relay agent behavior specified in RFC 1542 Related Commands ip helper address specifies the destination broadcast or host address for DHCP server requests show running config displays the current configuration and changes from the default values ip host Assign a name and IP ad...

Page 628: ...treated to the management interface of the primary unit or the existing unit For a Loopback interface enter the keyword loopback The range is from 0 to 16383 For a 1 Gigabit Ethernet interface enter the keyword GigabitEthernet For a Port Channel interface enter the keywords port channel then a number The range is from 1 to 128 For a 10 Gigabit Ethernet interface enter the keyword TenGigabitEtherne...

Page 629: ... of network disconnections and reachability problems with IPv6 packets This functionality is supported on the MXL platform Syntax ipv6 icmp source interface interface Parameters interface Enter one of the following keywords and slot port or number information For a Management Ethernet interface enter the keyword managementethernet NOTE When you configure the capability to enable the loopback IP ad...

Page 630: ...ath contains the IP address of the adjacent neighboring interface from which the packet is received it is difficult to employ the ping and traceroute utilites You can enable the ICMP unreachable messages to contain the loopback address of the source device instead of the previous hop s IP address to be able to easily and quickly identify the device and devices along the path because the DNS server...

Page 631: ...dress6 OPTIONAL Enter up five more IPv4 addresses in dotted decimal format of name servers to be used Separate the addresses with a space Defaults No name servers are configured Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information The system does not support sending DNS queries over a VLAN DNS queries are sent out on all oth...

Page 632: ...a number from zero 0 to 16383 For the null interface enter the keyword null then zero 0 For a Port Channel interface enter the keywords port channel then a number The range is from 1 to 128 For a 10 Gigabit Ethernet interface enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot port information For a 40 Gigabit Ethernet interface enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot port information For a VLAN ...

Page 633: ...installs the route When recursive resolution is broken the system withdraws the route When recursive resolution is satisfied the system re installs the route Related Commands show ip route views the switch routing table ip source route Enable the system to forward IP packets with source route information in the header Syntax ip source route To drop packets with source route information use the no ...

Page 634: ...outer waits for a period of time for the ACK packet to be sent from the requesting host that will establish the TCP connection show ip tcp initial time Displays the interval that you configured for the device to wait before the TCP connection is attempted to be established This command is supported on the MXL switch Syntax show ip tcp initial time Command Modes EXEC EXEC Privilege Command History ...

Page 635: ...he keyword managementethernet for the Management interface Defaults Not configured Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information When a static route or a protocol route overlaps with Management static route the static route or a protocol route is preferred over the Management Static route Also Management static routes...

Page 636: ...n nn format Enter the optional MAC address mask in nn nn nn nn nn format also static OPTIONAL Enter the keyword static to view entries entered manually dynamic OPTIONAL Enter the keyword dynamic to view dynamic entries summary OPTIONAL Enter the keyword summary to view a summary of ARP entries Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Version 9 4 0 0 Added usage information for Clear arp cache ...

Page 637: ... this example Line 1 shows community VLAN 200 in primary VLAN 10 in a PVLAN Line 2 shows primary VLAN 10 Dell show arp Protocol Address Age min Hardware Address Interface VLAN CPU Internet 5 5 5 1 00 01 e8 43 96 5e Vl 10 pv 200 CP Internet 5 5 5 10 00 01 e8 44 99 55 Vl 10 CP Internet 10 1 2 4 1 00 01 e8 d5 9e e2 Ma 0 0 CP Internet 10 10 10 4 1 00 01 e8 d5 9e e2 Ma 0 0 CP Internet 10 16 127 53 1 00...

Page 638: ...RP retries Syntax show arp retries Command Modes EXEC EXEC Privilege Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Related Commands arp retries sets the number of ARP retries in case the system does not receive an ARP reply in response to an ARP request show hosts View the host table and DNS configuration Syntax show hosts Command Modes EXEC EXEC Privilege Command Hi...

Page 639: ...rs of inactivity Also included in the flag is an indication of the validity of the route ok the entry is valid ex the entry expired the entry is suspect TTL Displays the amount of time until the entry ages out of the cache For dynamically learned entries only Type Displays IP as the type of entry Address Displays the IP addresses assigned to the host Example Dell show hosts Default domain is not s...

Page 640: ... egress ports members for the ecmp and the port details of each member The detail information under member info gives the MAC address VLAN ID and gateway of every member port of the ecmp summary OPTIONAL Enter the keyword summary to view a table listing route prefixes and the total number routes which can be entered in to CAM Command Modes EXEC EXEC Privilege Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Intro...

Page 641: ...escription Prefix Length Displays the prefix length or mask for the IP address configured on the linecard 0 port pipe 0 Current Use Displays the number of routes currently configured for the corresponding prefix or mask on the linecard 0 port pipe 0 Initial Size Displays the CAM size the system allocates for the corresponding mask The system adjusts the CAM size if the number of routes for the mas...

Page 642: ...lash prefix format X longer prefixes OPTIONAL Enter the keywords longer prefixes to view all routes with a common prefix summary OPTIONAL Enter the keyword summary to view the total number of prefixes in the FIB Command Modes EXEC EXEC Privilege Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information The following describes the show ip fib stack unit comm...

Page 643: ... the keyword Loopback then a number from 0 to 16383 For the Management interface enter the keyword ManagementEthernet then zero 0 For the Null interface enter the keyword null then zero 0 For a Port Channel interface enter the keywords port channel then a number The range is from 1 to 128 For a 10 Gigabit Ethernet interface enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot port information For a ...

Page 644: ...rizon States whether split horizon for RIP is enabled on the interface Poison Reverse States whether poison for RIP is enabled on the interface ICMP redirects States if ICMP redirects are sent ICMP unreachables States if ICMP unreachable messages are sent Example Dell show ip int te 0 0 TenGigabitEthernet 0 0 is down line protocol is down Internet address is not set IP MTU is 1500 bytes Inbound ac...

Page 645: ...ernet 1 4 unassigned YES Manual up up GigabitEthernet 1 5 10 10 10 1 YES Manual up up GigabitEthernet 1 6 unassigned NO Manual administratively down down show ip management route View the IP addresses assigned to the Management interface Syntax show ip management route all connected summary static Parameters all OPTIONAL Enter the keyword all to view all IP addresses assigned to all Management int...

Page 646: ...how ip protocols Routing Protocol is bgp 1 Cluster Id is set to 20 20 20 3 Router Id is set to 20 20 20 3 Fast external fallover enabled Regular expression evaluation optimization enabled Capable of ROUTE_REFRESH For Address Family IPv4 Unicast BGP table version is 0 main routing table version 0 Distance external 20 internal 200 local 200 Neighbor s Address 20 20 20 2 Filter list in foo Route map ...

Page 647: ...nected OPTIONAL Enter the keyword connected to view only the directly connected routes all OPTIONAL Enter the keyword all to view both active and non active routes static OPTIONAL Enter the keyword static to view only routes the ip route command configures summary OPTIONAL Enter the keyword summary For more information refer to the show ip route summary command Command Modes EXEC EXEC Privilege Co...

Page 648: ...SPF IA OSPF inter area N1 OSPF NSSA external type 1 N2 OSPF NSSA external type 2 E1 OSPF external type 1 E2 OSPF external type 2 i IS IS L1 IS IS level 1 L2 IS IS level 2 IA IS IS inter area candidate default non active route summary route Gateway of last resort is not set Destination Gateway Dist Metric Last Change R 3 0 0 0 8 via 100 10 10 10 So 2 8 120 1 00 07 12 via 101 10 10 10 So 2 9 100 10 ...

Page 649: ...inter area N1 OSPF NSSA external type 1 N2 OSPF NSSA external type 2 E1 OSPF external type 1 E2 OSPF external type 2 i IS IS L1 IS IS level 1 L2 IS IS level 2 IA IS IS inter area candidate default non active route summary route Gateway of last resort is not set Destination Gateway Dist Metric Last Change R 2 1 0 0 24 via 2 1 4 1 Gi 4 43 120 2 3d0h R 2 1 1 0 24 via 2 1 4 1 Gi 4 43 120 2 3d1h R 2 1 ...

Page 650: ...ocols If the best route or active route goes down the non active route becomes the best route ospf 100 If routing protocols OSPF RIP are configured and routes are advertised then information on those routes is displayed Total 1388 active Displays the number of active and non active routes and the memory usage of those routes If there are no routes configured in the the system this line does not ap...

Page 651: ...roup destination IP address belongs to reserved prefixes the host network is unreachable bad options Unrecognized IP option on a received packet Frags IP fragments received reassembled Number of IP fragments that were reassembled timeouts Number of times a timer expired on a reassembled queue too big Number of invalid IP fragments received couldn t fragment Number of packets that could not be frag...

Page 652: ...atistics Sent Proxy Object f10ArpProxySent OIDs 1 3 6 1 4 1 6027 3 3 5 2 5 Example Dell show ip traffic IP statistics Rcvd 10021161 total 3197480 local destination 2501 format errors 390 checksum errors 0 bad hop count 0 unknown protocol 0 not a gateway 115 security failures 0 bad options Frags 0 reassembled 0 timeouts 0 too big 0 fragmented 0 couldn t fragment Bcast 6281 received 0 sent Mcast 500...

Page 653: ...t 329 packets Displays the number of packets and bytes received in sequence 17 dup Displays the number of duplicate packets and bytes received 0 partially Displays the number of partially duplicated packets and bytes received 7 out of order Displays the number of packets and bytes received out of order 0 packets with data after window Displays the number of packets and bytes received that exceed t...

Page 654: ...d 0 Keepalive Lists the number of keepalive packets in timeout the number keepalive probes and the number of TCP connections dropped during keepalive Example Dell show tcp statistics Rcvd 9849 Total 0 no port 0 checksum error 0 bad offset 0 too short 5735 packets 7919 bytes in sequence 20 dup packets 2 bytes 0 partially dup packets 0 bytes 1 out of order packets 0 bytes 0 packets 0 bytes with data...

Page 655: ...dropped in keepalive Dell Related Commands show ip cam stack unit displays the CAM table IPv4 Routing 655 ...

Page 656: ...ion in the IP header Tunnel mode is typically used in creating virtual private networks VPNs Transport mode provides IP packet payload protection using ESP You can use ESP alone or in combination with AH to provide additional authentication AH protects data from modification but does not provide confidentiality SA is the configuration information that specifies the type of security provided to the...

Page 657: ...lgorithm 1 SHA 1 authentication null Causes an encryption policy configured for the area to not be inherited on the interface esp encryption Enter the keywords esp encryption then the transform type of operation to apply to traffic The transform type represents the encryption or authentication applied to traffic 3des Use 3DES encryption cbc Use CDC encryption des Use DES encryption null Causes an ...

Page 658: ...olicy entry and enters the crypto policy configuration mode for configuring the flow parameters Example Dell conf crypto ipsec policy West 10 ipsec manual Dell conf crypto policy management crypto policy Apply the crypto policy to management traffic Syntax management crypto policy name To remove the management traffic crypto policy use the no management crypto policy name command Parameters name E...

Page 659: ...tion IP address dest port num Enter the destination port number The range is from 0 to 65535 Defaults none Command Modes CONFIG CRYPTO POLICY Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information UDP is not supported Only TCP 23 telnet and 21 FTP are supported Example Dell conf crypto policy match 0 tcp a 1 128 0 a 2 128 23 Dell conf crypto policy match ...

Page 660: ...policy spi Enter the security parameter index number hex key string Enter the session key in hex format a string of 8 16 or 20 bytes For DES algorithms specify at least 16 bytes per key For SHA algorithms specify at least 20 bytes per key encrypt Indicates the ESP encryption transform set key string auth Indicates the ESP authentication transform set key string Defaults none Command Modes CONF CRY...

Page 661: ...ersion 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Example Dell show crypto ipsec policy Policy name West Policy refcount 1 Sequence Num 10 SA Mode IPSEC MANUAL Transform Set Name dallas Peer IP Address Inbound AH SPI 0 Inbound ESP Auth SPI 0 Inbound ESP Encry SPI 256 Inbound AH Key 0 Inbound ESP Auth Key 0 Inbound ESP Encry Key 96 a5b6b42009d47895b420a5b6789509d4b420a5b6789509d4b420a5...

Page 662: ...tination mask 128 Destination port 0 source interface name source interface num Match sequence Num 2 Protocol type tcp IP or IPv6 IPv6 Source address a 1 Source mask 128 Source port 0 Destination address a 2 Destination mask 128 Destination port 21 source interface name source interface num Match sequence Num 3 Protocol type tcp IP or IPv6 IPv6 Source address a 1 Source mask 128 Source port 21 Des...

Page 663: ... set from the crypto policy use the no transform set transform set name command Parameters transform set name Enter the name for the crypto policy transform set Defaults none Command Modes CONFIG CRYPTO POLICY Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Internet Protocol Security IPSec 663 ...

Page 664: ...rol Protocol traffic and for egress ACLs the routed bit must be set You can use the same access list name for both IPv4 and IPv6 ACLs You can apply both IPv4 and IPv6 ACLs on an interface at the same time You can apply IPv6 ACLs on physical interfaces and a logical interfaces Port channel VLAN Non contiguous masks are not supported in source or destination addresses in IPv6 ACL entries Because the...

Page 665: ...uires three blocks and these blocks cannot be reallocated When configuring space for IPv6 ACLs the total number of Blocks must equal 13 Ranges for the CAM profiles are from 1 to 10 except for the ipv6acl profile which is from 0 to 10 The ipv6acl allocation must be a factor of 2 2 4 6 8 10 cam acl egress Allocate space for IPv6 egress ACLs Syntax cam acl egress default l2acl 1 4 ipv4acl 1 4 ipv6acl...

Page 666: ...acl 1 4 Number of FP blocks for l2acl Dell conf cam acl egress l2acl 1 ipv4acl Set IPV4 ACL entries Dell conf cam acl egress l2acl 1 ipv4acl 1 ipv6acl Set IPV6 ACL entries Dell conf cam acl egress l2acl 1 ipv4acl 1 ipv6acl 0 4 Number of FP blocks for IPV6 multiples of 2 Dell conf cam acl egress l2acl 1 ipv4acl 1 ipv6acl 2 ipv6 access list Configure an access list based on IPv6 addresses or protoco...

Page 667: ...port for VRRP BGP and ICMP that existed in Dell Networking OS releases 9 3 0 0 and earlier Related Commands show config views the current configuration ipv6 control plane egress filter Enable egress Layer 3 ACL lookup for IPv6 CPU traffic Syntax ipv6 control plane egress filter Defaults Not enabled Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch I...

Page 668: ...254 is the lowest lower order numbers have a higher priority If you do not use the keyword order the ACLs have the lowest order by default 255 fragments Enter the keyword fragments to use ACLs to control packet fragments log OPTIONAL Enter the keyword log to enable the triggering of ACL log messages threshold in msgs OPTIONAL Enter the threshold in msgs keyword followed by a value to indicate the ...

Page 669: ...e address Enter the IPv6 address of the network or host from which the packets were sent in the x x x x x format then the prefix length in the x format The range is from 0 to 128 The notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zero mask Enter a network mask in prefix format x any Enter the keyword any to specify that all routes are subject to the filter host ipv6 address Enter the keyword ...

Page 670: ...des ACCESS LIST Command History Version 9 4 0 0 Added the support for flow based monitoring on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module platform Version 9 3 0 0 Added the support for logging of ACLs on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module platform Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module platform Usage Information When the configured maximum threshold is exceeded generation of logs is...

Page 671: ...her port The source port is the monitored port MD and the destination port is the monitoring port MG show cam acl Show space allocated for IPv6 ACLs Syntax show cam acl Command Modes EXEC EXEC Privilege Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Example show cam acl non default Dell conf cam acl l2acl 2 ipv4acl 4 ipv6acl 4 ipv4qos 2 l2qos 1 l2pt 0 ipmacacl 0 vm...

Page 672: ... egress ACLs Syntax show cam acl egress Command Modes EXEC EXEC Privilege Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Example Dell show cam acl egress Chassis Egress Cam ACL Current Settings in block sizes 1 block 256 entries L2Acl 1 Ipv4Acl 1 Ipv6Acl 2 stack unit 0 Current Settings in block sizes L2Acl 1 Ipv4Acl 1 Ipv6Acl 2 Related Commands cam acl configures C...

Page 673: ...ory Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module clear ipv6 route Clear refresh all or a specific route from the IPv6 routing table Syntax clear ipv6 route ipv6 address prefix length Parameters Enter the to clear refresh all routes from the IPv6 routing table ipv6 address prefix length Enter the IPv6 address in the x x x x x format then the prefix length in the x format The rang...

Page 674: ...nding address are deprecated or removed If an address is removed due to a time out an address from the current unused prefix is used to create a new address If there are no remaining prefixes the software waits to receive a new prefix from the RA If auto configuration is enabled all IPv6 addresses on that management interface are auto configured Manual and auto configurations are not supported on ...

Page 675: ...ing a new address If the last manually configured global IPv6 address is removed using the no form of the command the link local IPv6 address is removed automatically IPv6 addresses on a single management interface cannot be members of the same subnet IPv6 secondary addresses on management interfaces across platform must be members of the same subnet IPv6 secondary addresses on management interfac...

Page 676: ...ows you to create an EUI64 address based on the specified prefix and MAC address only Prefixes may be configured on the interface using the ipv6 nd prefix command without creating an EUI64 address Example Dell conf int ten 0 4 Dell conf if te 0 4 ipv6 address 200 1 64 eui64 Dell conf int ten 0 6 Dell conf if te 0 6 ipv6 address 801 10 64 eui64 ipv6 control plane icmp error rate limit Configure the...

Page 677: ...value is already set for BGP or SSH the system defaults to the already configured value All packets on the same connection are considered part of the same flow by the system For new connections set the new flowlabel to zero ipv6 host Assign a name and IPv6 address the host to IPv6 address mapping table uses Syntax ipv6 host name ipv6 address To remove an IP host use the no ipv6 host name ipv6 addr...

Page 678: ...ddresses with a space Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information You can separately configure both IPv4 and IPv6 domain name servers ipv6 nd dad attempts To perform duplicate address detection DAD on the management interface configure the number of neighbor solicitation messages that are sent Syntax ip...

Page 679: ...specify the maximum lifetime value of 4294967295 or infinite the lifetime does not expire A value of 0 indicates to the host that the RDNSS address should not be used You must specify a lifetime using the lifetime or infinite parameter infinite Enter the keyword infinite to specify that the RDNSS lifetime does not expire Defaults Not Configured Command Modes INTERFACE CONFIG Command History Versio...

Page 680: ...link or off link valid lifetime infinite Enter the amount of time that the prefix is advertised or enter infinite for an unlimited amount of time The range is from 0 to 4294967295 The default is 2592000 The maximum value means that the preferred lifetime does not expire for the valid life time parameter preferred lifetime infinite Enter the amount of time that the prefix is preferred or enter infi...

Page 681: ...channel then the port channel number The range is from 1 to 128 For a 10 Gigabit Ethernet interface enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot port information For a 40 Gigabit Ethernet interface enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot port information For a tunnel interface enter the keyword tunnel then the tunnel interface number The range is from 1 to 16383 For a VLAN interface enter ...

Page 682: ...ed After an IPv6 static route interface is created if an IP address is not assigned to a peer interface the peer must be manually pinged to resolve the neighbor information Example Dell conf ipv6 route X X X X X IPv6 prefix x x y Dell conf ipv6 route 44 0 nn nn Mask in slash format Dell conf ipv6 route 44 0 64 X X X X X Forwarding router s address gigabitethernet Gigabit Ethernet interface loopbac...

Page 683: ... terminated connected routes and resolved neighbors remain in the CAM and new IPv6 neighbors are still discoverable additional protocol adjacencies OSPFv3 and BGP4 are brought down and no new adjacencies are formed the IPv6 address family configuration under router bgp is deleted IPv6 Multicast traffic continues to flow unhindered show ipv6 cam stack unit Displays the IPv6 CAM entries for the spec...

Page 684: ...a mask greater than 64 if the first 64 bits in the destination routes of the ECMP objects are the same only one route is installed in CAM even though multiple ECMP path entries exist show ipv6 control plane icmp Displays the status of the icmp control plane setting for the error eate limit setting Syntax show ipv6 control plane icmp Default 100 Command Modes EXEC Command History Version 9 2 0 0 In...

Page 685: ...nit output for neighbor entries such as address resolution protocol ARP entries show ipv6 flowlabel zero Display the flow label zero setting Syntax show ipv6 flowlabel zero Default Disabled Command Modes EXEC Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Related Commands ipv6 nd dad attempts Configure system to set the flow label field in the packets to zero show ...

Page 686: ...mmary of IPv6 interfaces configured OPTIONAL View information on all IPv6 configured interfaces gigabitethernet OPTIONAL View information for an IPv6 gigabitethernet interface linecard slot port OPTIONAL View information for a specific IPv6 linecard or stack unit The range is 0 to 11 managementet hernet slot port OPTIONAL View information on an IPv6 Management port Enter the slot number 0 1 and po...

Page 687: ...ds ND router advertisements live for 1800 seconds ND advertised hop limit is 64 IPv6 hop limit for originated packets is 64 Dell Example Managementet hernet Dell show ipv6 int man 0 0 ManagementEthernet 0 0 is up line protocol is up IPV6 is enabled Link Local address fe80 201 e8ff fea7 497e Global Unicast address es Actual address is 300 1 subnet is 300 64 MANUAL Remaining lifetime infinite Virtua...

Page 688: ...y 198 to 600 seconds ND router advertisements live for 1800 seconds ND advertised hop limit is 64 IPv6 hop limit for originated packets is 64 Dell show ipv6 mld_host Display the IPv6 MLD host counters Syntax show ipv6 mld_host Command Modes EXEC Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information The following describes the show ipv6 mld host command s...

Page 689: ...eters ipv6 address prefix length OPTIONAL Enter the IPv6 address in the x x x x x format then the prefix length in the x format The range is from 0 to 128 NOTE The notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros hostname OPTIONAL View information for this IPv6 routes with Host Name all OPTIONAL View information for all IPv6 routes bgp OPTIONAL View information for all IPv6 BGP routes con...

Page 690: ...l type 1 N2 OSPF NSSA external type 2 E1 OSPF external type 1 E2 OSPF external type 2 i IS IS L1 IS IS level 1 L2 IS IS level 2 IA IS IS inter area candidate default non active route summary routes Destination Identifies the route s destination IPv6 address Gateway Identifies whether the route is directly connected and on which interface the route is configured Dist Metric Identifies if the route ...

Page 691: ...Source Active Routes Non active Routes connected 3 0 static 1 0 Total 4 0 Total 4 active route s using 928 bytes Dell trust ipv6 diffserv Allows the dynamic classification of IPv6 DSCP Syntax trust ipv6 diffserv To remove the definition use the no trust ipv6 diffserv command Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION POLICY MAP IN Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switc...

Page 692: ...IPv6 Service Class Field Queue ID 111XXXXX 7 110XXXXX 6 101XXXXX 5 100XXXXX 4 011XXXXX 3 010XXXXX 2 001XXXXX 1 000XXXXX 0 692 IPv6 Basics ...

Page 693: ...exchange information including full routing tables and periodically send messages to update those routing tables The following commands allow you to configure and enable BGP address family This command changes the context to subsequent address family identifier SAFI Syntax address family ipv6 unicast To remove SAFI context use the no address family ipv6 unicast command Parameters ipv6 Enter the ke...

Page 694: ... configured route map to set filters for advertising an aggregate route as set OPTIONAL Enter the keywords as set to generate path attribute information and include it in the aggregate AS_SET includes AS_PATH and community information from the routes included in the aggregated route attribute map map name OPTIONAL Enter the keywords attribute map then the name of a configured route map to modify a...

Page 695: ...es all advertisements If you want to suppress advertisements to only specific neighbors use the neighbor distribute list command In the show ip bgp ipv6 unicast command aggregates contain an a in the first column and routes suppressed by the aggregate contain an s in the first column bgp always compare med Allows you to enable comparison of the MULTI_EXIT_DISC MED attributes in the paths from diff...

Page 696: ... size command to recompute the best path bgp bestpath med confed Enable MULTI_EXIT_DISC MED attribute comparison on paths learned from BGP confederations Syntax bgp bestpath med confed To disable MED comparison on BGP confederation paths use the no bgp bestpath med confed command Defaults Disabled Command Modes ROUTER BGP Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Mod...

Page 697: ... as 0 During path selection paths with a lower MED are preferred over those with a higher MED bgp client to client reflection Allows you to enable route reflection between clients in a cluster Syntax bgp client to client reflection To disable client to client reflection use the no bgp client to client reflection command Defaults Enabled when a route reflector is configured Command Modes ROUTER BGP...

Page 698: ...ster ID with the bgp cluster id command Without a cluster ID the route reflector cannot recognize route updates from the other route reflectors within the cluster The default format for displaying the cluster id is dotted decimal but if you enter the cluster id as an integer it displays as an integer Related Commands bgp client to client reflection enables route reflection between the route reflec...

Page 699: ...confederation Syntax bgp confederation peers as number as number To remove bgp confederation peers use the no bgp confederation peer command Parameters as number Enter the AS number The range is 1 to 65535 as number OPTIONAL Enter up to 16 confederation numbers The range is from 1 to 65535 Defaults Not configured Command Modes ROUTER BGP Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40G...

Page 700: ...is greater than the suppress value the flapping route is no longer advertised that is it is suppressed The range is from 1 to 20000 The default is 2000 max suppress time OPTIONAL Enter the maximum number of minutes a route can be suppressed The default is four times the half life value The range is from 1 to 255 The default is 60 minutes route map map name OPTIONAL Enter the keywords route map the...

Page 701: ... MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module bgp enforce first as Disable or enable enforce first as check for updates received from EBGP peers Syntax bgp enforce first as To turn off the default use the no bgp enforce first as command Defaults Enabled Command Modes ROUTER BGP Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information This is enabled by default that is for...

Page 702: ...uced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information The bgp fast external fallover command appears in the show config command output bgp four octet as support Enable 4 byte support for the BGP process Syntax bgp four octet as support To disable fast external fallover use the no bgp four octet as support command Defaults Disabled supports 2 Byte format Command Modes ROUTER BGP Command Histo...

Page 703: ...of the options ip address of the neighbor in IP address format of the neighbor peer group name of the neighbor peer group restart time seconds Enter the keywords restart time then the maximum number of seconds needed to restart and bring up all peers The range is from 1 to 3600 seconds The default is 120 seconds stale path time seconds Enter the keywords stale path time then the maximum number of ...

Page 704: ...ifferent ASs does not have their MEDs compared Command Modes ROUTER BGP Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information In Non Deterministic mode paths are compared in the order in which they arrive This method can lead to the system choosing different best paths from a set of paths depending on the order in which they are received from the neighbo...

Page 705: ... clear ip bgp command right after executing this command Related Commands capture bgp pdu max buffer size bgp regex eval optz disable Disables the Regex Performance engine that optimizes complex regular expression with BGP Syntax bgp regex eval optz disable To re enable optimization engine use the no bgp regex eval optz disable command Defaults Enabled Command Modes ROUTER BGP conf router_bgp Comm...

Page 706: ...router id ip address To delete a user assigned IP address use the no bgp router id command Parameters ip address Enter an IP address in dotted decimal format to reset only that BGP neighbor Defaults The router ID is the highest IP address of the Loopback interface or if no Loopback interfaces are configured the highest IP address of a physical interface on the router Command Modes ROUTER BGP Comma...

Page 707: ...es inbound policies for IPv6 routes without resetting the BGP TCP session capture bgp pdu neighbor ipv6 Enable capture of an IPv6 BGP neighbor packet Syntax capture bgp pdu neighbor ipv6 address direction both rx tx To disable capture of the IPv6 BGP neighbor packet use the no capture bgp pdu neighbor ipv6 address command Parameters ipv6 address Enter the IPv6 address of the target BGP neighbor di...

Page 708: ...oft parameter BGP Soft Reconfiguration clears the policies without resetting the TCP connection Syntax clear ip bgp ipv4 multicast soft in out ipv6 unicast soft in out soft in out Parameters Enter an asterisk to reset all BGP sessions ipv4 multicast soft in out OPTIONAL Enter the keywords ipv4 multicast soft in out to set options within the specified IPv4 address family ipv6 unicast soft in out OP...

Page 709: ...ap statistics OPTIONAL Enter the keywords flap statistics to clear all flap statistics belonging to that AS or a specified address family within that AS ipv4 OPTIONAL Enter the keyword ipv4 to select options for that address family ipv6 OPTIONAL Enter the keyword ipv6 to select options for that address family unicast OPTIONAL Enter the keyword unicast to select the unicast option within the select...

Page 710: ...keywords flap statistics to clear all flap statistics belonging to that AS or a specified address family within that IP ipv4 OPTIONAL Enter the keyword ipv4 to select options for that address family ipv6 OPTIONAL Enter the keyword ipv6 to select options for that address family unicast OPTIONAL Enter the keyword unicast to select the unicast option within the selected address family multicast OPTIO...

Page 711: ... dampening Clear information on route dampening and return suppressed route to active state Syntax clear ip bgp ipv6 unicast dampening ipv6 address Parameters ipv6 address Enter the IPv6 address in the x x x x x format then the prefix length in the x format The range is from 0 to 128 NOTE The notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Ver...

Page 712: ...owing period matches on any single character including white space asterisk matches on sequences in a pattern zero or more sequences plus sign matches on sequences in a pattern one or more sequences question mark matches sequences in a pattern 0 or 1 sequences brackets matches a range of single character patterns caret matches the beginning of the input string If the caret is used at the beginning...

Page 713: ...er group ipv6 unicast Clear and reapply policies for all IPv6 unicast routes in Reapply only inbound policies NOTE If you enter soft without an in or out option both inbound and outbound policies are reset out Reapply only outbound policies NOTE If you enter soft without an in or out option both inbound and outbound policies are reset Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Version 9 2 0 0 In...

Page 714: ... debug ip bgp out you do not see information on the incoming routes Entering a no debug ip bgp command removes all configured debug commands for BGP Related Commands debug ip bgp events views information about BGP events debug ip bgp keepalives views information about BGP keepalives debug ip bgp notifications views information about BGP notifications debug ip bgp updates views information about BG...

Page 715: ... commands for BGP debug ip bgp ipv6 dampening View information on dampened non active IPv6 routes Syntax debug ip bgp ipv6 unicast dampening in out To disable debugging use the no debug ip bgp ipv6 unicast dampening command Parameters in OPTIONAL Enter the keyword in to view only inbound dampened routes out OPTIONAL Enter the keyword out to view only outbound dampened routes Command Modes EXEC Pri...

Page 716: ... EXEC Privilege Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information This command turns on BGP soft reconfiguration inbound debugging for IPv6 unicast routes If no neighbor is specified debug is turned on for all neighbors Related Commands show ip bgp ipv6 unicast dampened paths views BGP dampened routes debug ip bgp keepalives Allows you to view inform...

Page 717: ...om neighbors Syntax debug ip bgp ipv6 address peer group peer group name notifications in out To disable debugging use the no debug ip bgp ip address peer group peer group name notifications in out command Parameters ipv6 address OPTIONAL Enter the IPv6 address in the x x x x x format then the prefix length in the x format The range is from 0 to 128 NOTE The notation specifies successive hexadecim...

Page 718: ...ss in the x x x x x format then the prefix length in the x format The range is from 0 to 128 NOTE The notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros peer group peer group name OPTIONAL Enter the keywords peer group then the name of the peer group ipv6 unicast ipv6 address OPTIONAL Enter the keywords ipv6 unicast and optionally an ipv6 address in OPTIONAL Enter the keyword in to view onl...

Page 719: ...and in BGP sets the value of the BGP MULTI_EXIT_DISC MED attribute for redistributed routes only Related Commands bgp always compare med enables comparison of all BGP MED attributes redistribute redistributes routes from other routing protocols into BGP description Enter a description of the BGP routing protocol Syntax description description To remove the description use the no description descri...

Page 720: ...20 internal distance 200 local distance 200 Command Modes ROUTER BGPV6 ADDRESS FAMILY Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information CAUTION Dell Force10 recommends that you do not change the administrative distance of internal routes Changing the administrative distances may cause routing table inconsistencies The higher the administrative distan...

Page 721: ...best path neighbor activate This command allows the specified neighbor peer group to be enabled for the current AFI SAFI Syntax neighbor ipv6 address peer group name activate To disable use the no neighbor ipv6 address peer group name activate command Parameters ipv6 address Enter the IPv6 address in the x x x x x format NOTE The notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros peer group...

Page 722: ...uccessive hexadecimal fields of zeros peer group name Enter the name of the peer group to set the advertisement interval for all routers in the peer group seconds Enter a number as the time interval in seconds between BGP advertisements The range is from 0 to 600 seconds The default is 5 seconds for internal BGP peers and 30 seconds for external BGP peers Defaults seconds 5 seconds internal peers ...

Page 723: ...iginate Inject the default route to a BGP peer or neighbor Syntax neighbor ipv6 address peer group name default originate route map map name To remove a default route use the no neighbor ipv6 address peer group name default originate route map map name command Parameters ipv6 address Enter the IPv6 address in the x x x x x format NOTE The notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros p...

Page 724: ...specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros peer group name Enter the name of the peer group text Enter a continuous text string up to 80 characters Defaults Not configured Command Modes ROUTER BGP Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module neighbor distribute list Distribute BGP information using an established prefix list Syntax neighbor ipv6 address pee...

Page 725: ... a neighbor or peer group neighbor ebgp multihop Attempt and accept BGP connections to external peers on networks that are not directly connected Syntax neighbor ipv6 address peer group name ebgp multihop ttl To disallow and disconnect connections use the no neighbor ipv6 address peer group name ebgp multihop ttl command Parameters ipv6 address Enter the IPv6 address in the x x x x x format NOTE T...

Page 726: ...R BGP Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information When you enable fall over BGP keeps track of IP or IPv6 reachability to the peer remote address and the peer local address Whenever either address becomes unreachable for examle no active route exists in the routing table for peer IP or IPv6 destination local address BGP brings down the session ...

Page 727: ...eighbor ipv6 address peer group name maximum prefix maximum threshold warning only command Parameters ipv6 address Enter the IPv6 address in the x x x x x format NOTE The notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros peer group name Enter the name of the peer group maximum Enter a number as the maximum number of prefixes allowed for this BGP router The range is from 1 to 4294967295 thr...

Page 728: ...o which the neighbor belongs or you enter neighbor shutdown and neighbor no shutdown commands Related Commands show ip bgp ipv6 unicast summary displays the current BGP configuration neighbor X X X X password Enable TCP MD5 Authentication for an IPv6 BGP peer session Syntax neighbor x x x x password 7 encrypt pass clear pass To return to the default setting use the no neighbor x x x x password com...

Page 729: ...the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information If you configure the set ipv6 next hop command in ROUTE MAP mode its configuration takes precedence over the neighbor next hop self command neighbor peer group assigning peers Allows you to assign one peer to a existing peer group Syntax neighbor ipv6 address peer group peer group name To delete a peer from a peer group use the no neighbor ipv6 a...

Page 730: ...eer group s and the neighbor s configuration does not affect outgoing updates A peer group must exist before you add a peer to it If the peer group is disabled shutdown the peers within the group are also disabled shutdown Related Commands capture bgp pdu max buffer size resets BGP sessions neighbor peer group creating group creates a peer group show ip bgp ipv6 unicast peer group views BGP peers ...

Page 731: ...does not send an OPEN message but does respond to one Syntax neighbor peer group name peer group passive To delete a passive peer group use the no neighbor peer group name peer group passive command Parameters peer group name Enter a text string up to 16 characters long as the name of the peer group Defaults Not configured Command Modes ROUTER BGP Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the ...

Page 732: ...duced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information If the number parameter is the same as the AS number used in the router bgp command the remote AS entry in the neighbor is considered an internal BGP peer entry This command creates a peer and the newly created peer is disabled shutdown Related Commands router bgp enters the ROUTER BGP mode and configure routes in an AS neighbor remove p...

Page 733: ...ers in the AS path Private AS numbers are from 64512 to 65535 neighbor route map Apply an established route map to either incoming or outbound routes of a BGP neighbor or peer group Syntax neighbor ipv6 address peer group name route map map name in out To remove the route map use the no neighbor ipv6 address peer group name route map map name in out command Parameters ipv6 address Enter the IPv6 a...

Page 734: ...eflector client or to delete a route reflector configuration use the no neighbor ipv6 address peer group name route reflector client command Parameters ipv6 address Enter the IPv6 address in the x x x x x format NOTE The notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros peer group name Enter the name of the peer group All routers in the peer group receive routes from a route reflector Defa...

Page 735: ...gured and COMMUNITY attributes are not sent to neighbors Command Modes ROUTER BGP Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module neighbor shutdown Disable a BGP neighbor or peer group Syntax neighbor ipv6 address peer group name shutdown To enable a disabled neighbor or peer group use the no neighbor ipv6 address peer group name shutdown command Parameters ipv6 add...

Page 736: ...nfiguration inbound Parameters ipv4 address ipv6 address Enter the IP address of the neighbor for which you want to start storing inbound routing updates peer group name Enter the name of the peer group for which you want to start storing inbound routing updates Defaults Disabled Command Modes ROUTER BGPv6 ADDRESS FAMILY conf router_bgpv6_af Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10...

Page 737: ...me timers for a BGP neighbor or a peer group Syntax neighbor ipv6 address peer group name timers keepalive holdtime To return to the default values use the no neighbor ipv6 address peer group name timers command Parameters ipv6 address Enter the IPv6 address in the x x x x x format NOTE The notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros peer group name Enter the name of the peer group t...

Page 738: ...r update source Enable the software to use Loopback interfaces for TCP connections for BGP sessions Syntax neighbor ipv6 address peer group name update source loopback interface To use the closest interface use the no neighbor ipv6 address peer group name update source loopback interface command Parameters ipv6 address Enter the IPv6 address in the x x x x x format NOTE The notation specifies succ...

Page 739: ...er group name Enter the name of the peer group to set the timers for all routers within the peer group weight Enter a number as the weight The range is from 0 to 65535 The default is 0 Defaults 0 Command Modes ROUTER BGP Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information In the system best path selection process the path with the highest weight value ...

Page 740: ...y Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information The software resolves the network address configured by the network command with the routes in the main routing table to ensure that the networks are reachable using non BGP routes and non default routes Related Commands redistribute redistributes routes into BGP network backdoor Specify this IGP route as the prefe...

Page 741: ...word static to redistribute manually configured routes These routes are treated as incomplete routes route map map name OPTIONAL Enter the keywords route map then the name of an established route map If the route map is not configured the default is deny to drop all routes Defaults Not configured Command Modes ROUTER BGPV6 ADDRESS FAMILY Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40G...

Page 742: ...st specify one of the following external internal default route map map name OPTIONAL Enter the keywords route map then the name of an established route map If the route map is not configured the default is deny to drop all routes Defaults Not configured Command Modes ROUTER BGPV6 ADDRESS FAMILY Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module redistribute ospf Redis...

Page 743: ... ADDRESS FAMILY Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information When you enter the redistribute ospf process id command without any other parameters the system redistributes all OSPF internal routes external type 1 routes and external type 2 routes router bgp Enter ROUTER BGP mode to configure and enable BGP Syntax router bgp as number To disable B...

Page 744: ... config Command Modes ROUTER BGPV6 ADDRESS FAMILY Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Example Dell conf router_bgp show conf router bgp 18508 neighbor RR CLIENT peer group neighbor RR CLIENT remote as 18508 neighbor RR CLIENT no shutdown neighbor RR CLIENT PASSIV peer group passive neighbor RR CLIENT PASSIV remote as 18508 neighbor RR CLIENT PASSIV subne...

Page 745: ...sk in slash prefix format of the BGP network address longer prefixes OPTIONAL Enter the keywords longer prefixes to view all routes with a common prefix Command Modes EXEC EXEC Privilege Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information When you enable the bgp non deterministic med command the show ip bgp command output for a BGP route does not list ...

Page 746: ...FFFF03 community attribute must not be advertised to external BGP peers no advertise Enter the keywords no advertise to view all routes containing the well known community attribute of NO_ADVERTISE All routes with the NO_ADVERTISE 0xFFFFFF02 community attribute must not be advertised to other BGP peers no export Enter the keywords no export to view all routes containing the well known community at...

Page 747: ...des EXEC EXEC Privilege Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module show ip bgp ipv6 unicast dampened paths View BGP routes that are dampened non active Syntax show ip bgp ipv6 unicast dampened paths Command Modes EXEC EXEC Privilege Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module show ip bgp ipv6 unicast detail Display BGP intern...

Page 748: ...ributes found use the show ip bgp ipv6 unicast summary command The text line above the route table states the number of COMMUNITY attributes found The show ip bgp ipv6 unicast community command without any parameters lists BGP routes with at least one BGP community attribute and the output is the same as for the show ip bgp ipv6 unicast command output show ip bgp ipv6 unicast filter list View the ...

Page 749: ...terisk the sequences in a pattern 0 or more sequences plus the sequences in a pattern 1 or more sequences question mark sequences in a pattern either 0 or 1 sequences NOTE You must enter an escape sequence CTRL v prior to entering the regular expression brackets a range of single character patterns caret the beginning of the input string If the caret is used at the beginning of a sequence or range...

Page 750: ...pened routes to view information on dampened routes from the BGP neighbor detail OPTIONAL Enter the keyword detail to view neighbor specific internal information for the IPv4 Unicast address family flap statistics OPTIONAL Enter the keywords flap statistics to view flap statistics on the neighbor s routes routes OPTIONAL Enter the keyword routes to view only the neighbor s feasible routes received...

Page 751: ...ds the router reads a message from its neighbor hold time is the number of seconds configured between messages from its neighbor keepalive interval is the number of seconds between keepalive messages to help ensure that the TCP session is still alive Received messages This line displays the number of BGP messages received the number of notifications error messages and the number of messages waitin...

Page 752: ...ress of the local router and the TCP port number Foreign host Displays the peering address of the neighbor and the TCP port number Example Dell show ip bgp ipv6 unicast neighbors BGP neighbor is 5ffe 10 3 remote AS 1 external link BGP version 4 remote router ID 5 5 5 3 BGP state ESTABLISHED in this state for 00 00 32 Last read 00 00 32 last write 00 00 32 Hold time is 180 keepalive interval is 60 ...

Page 753: ...Received 8 updates Sent 0 updates Route refresh request received 0 sent 0 Minimum time between advertisement runs is 30 seconds Minimum time before advertisements start is 0 seconds Capabilities received from neighbor for IPv6 Unicast MULTIPROTO_EXT 1 ROUTE_REFRESH 2 CISCO_ROUTE_REFRESH 128 Capabilities advertised to neighbor for IPv6 Unicast MULTIPROTO_EXT 1 ROUTE_REFRESH 2 CISCO_ROUTE_REFRESH 12...

Page 754: ...peer group Peer group RR CLIENT remote AS 18508 BGP version 4 Minimum time between advertisement runs is 5 seconds For address family IPv4 Unicast BGP neighbor is RR CLIENT peer group internal Number of peers in this group 1 Peer group members outbound optimized 9000 4 Peer group RR CLIENT PASSIV remote AS 18508 BGP version 4 Minimum time between advertisement runs is 5 seconds For address family ...

Page 755: ...35 32 0 0 0 00 16 42 0 9000 9 2 18508 44 19 0 0 0 00 16 41 0 9000 a 2 18508 35 32 0 0 0 00 16 43 0 9000 b 14 18508 29 29 0 0 0 00 13 01 0 Dell show ip bgp next hop View all next hops using learned routes only with current reachability and flap status This command only displays one path even if the next hop is reachable by multiple paths Syntax show ip bgp next hop local routes Parameters local rou...

Page 756: ... enter an escape sequence CTRL v prior to entering the regular expression brackets a range of single character patterns caret the beginning of the input string If the caret is used at the beginning of a sequence or range it matches on everything BUT the characters specified dollar sign the end of the output string Command Modes EXEC EXEC Privilege Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the ...

Page 757: ... bgp regexp Allows you to view the subset of BGP routing table matching the regular expressions specified Syntax show ip bgp regexp regular expression character Parameters regular expression character Enter a regular expression then use one or a combination of the following characters to match period any single character including a white space asterisk the sequences in a pattern 0 or more sequenc...

Page 758: ...e no timers bgp command Parameters keepalive Enter the time interval in seconds between which the system sends keepalive messages The range is from 1 to 65535 The default is 60 seconds holdtimer Enter the time interval in seconds that the the system waits since the last keepalive message before declaring a BGP peer dead The range is from 3 to 65535 The default is 180 seconds Defaults keepalive 60 ...

Page 759: ...PV6 ADDRESS FAMILY Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information After this command is executed all subsequent commands apply to this address family You can exit from this AFI SAFI to the IPv6 Unicast the default family by entering the exit command and returning to the Router BGP context aggregate address Summarize a range of prefixes to minimize...

Page 760: ...sed Defaults Not configured Command Modes ROUTER BGPV6 ADDRESS FAMILY Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information At least one of the routes included in the aggregate address must be in the BGP routing table for the configured aggregate to become active Do not add the as set parameter to the aggregate If routes within the aggregate are constant...

Page 761: ...des ROUTER BGPV6 ADDRESS FAMILY Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module clear ip bgp ipv6 unicast Reset MBGP sessions Syntax clear ip bgp ipv6 unicast ipv6 address prefix length dampening flap statistics peer group Parameters Enter the character to clear all peers ipv6 address prefix length Enter the IPv6 address in the x x x x x format then the prefix lengt...

Page 762: ... which includes the number of flaps and the time of the last flap Syntax clear ip bgp ipv6 unicast flap statistics network filter list list regexp regexp Parameters network OPTIONAL Enter the IPv6 network address in x x x x x format to clear flap statistics filter list list OPTIONAL Enter the keywords filter list then the name of a configured AS PATH list maximum 16 characters regexp regexp OPTION...

Page 763: ...cast dampening To disable debugging use the no debug ip bgp ipv6 unicast dampening command Parameters dampening Enter the keyword dampening to clear route flap dampening information Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the S4820T debug ip bgp ipv6 unicast peer group updates View information about BGP peer group updates Syntax debug ip bgp ipv6 unicast peer gro...

Page 764: ...ress prefix length updates in out Parameters ipv6 address prefix length Enter the IPv6 address in the x x x x x format then the prefix length in the x format The range is from 0 to 128 NOTE The notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros updates Enter the keyword updates to view BGP update information in OPTIONAL Enter the keyword in to view only BGP updates received from neighbors o...

Page 765: ...ommand Modes ROUTER BGPV6 ADDRESS FAMILY Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information CAUTION Dell Networking recommends that you do not change the administrative distance of internal routes Changing the administrative distances may cause routing table inconsistencies The higher the administrative distance assigned to a route means that your con...

Page 766: ...ddress family changes the context to SAFI neighbor advertisement interval Set the advertisement interval between BGP neighbors or within a BGP peer group Syntax neighbor ipv6 address peer group name advertisement interval seconds To return to the default value use the no neighbor ipv6 address peer group name advertisement interval command Parameters ipv6 address Enter the IPv6 address in the x x x...

Page 767: ...e hexadecimal fields of zeros peer group name Enter the name of the peer group to set the default route of all routers in that peer group route map map name OPTIONAL Enter the keywords route map then the name of a configured route map Defaults Not configured Command Modes ROUTER BGPV6 ADDRESS FAMILY Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module neighbor distribute...

Page 768: ...neighbor or peer group neighbor route map assigns a route map to a neighbor or peer group neighbor filter list Configure a BGP filter based on the AS PATH attribute Syntax neighbor ipv6 address peer group name filter list aspath access list name in out To delete a BGP filter use the no neighbor ipv6 address peer group name filter list aspath access list name in out command Parameters ipv6 address ...

Page 769: ...s of zeros peer group name Enter the name of the peer group maximum Enter a number as the maximum number of prefixes allowed for this BGP router The range is from 1 to 4294967295 threshold OPTIONAL Enter a number to be used as a percentage of the maximum value When the number of prefixes reaches this percentage of the maximum value the software sends a message The range is from 1 to 100 percent Th...

Page 770: ... Module Usage Information If you configure the set ipv6 next hop command in ROUTE MAP mode its configuration takes precedence over the neighbor next hop self command neighbor remove private as Remove private AS numbers from the AS PATH of outgoing updates Syntax neighbor ipv6 address peer group name remove private as To return to the default use the no neighbor ipv6 address peer group name remove ...

Page 771: ...e name of an established route map If the Route map is not configured the default is deny to drop all routes in Enter the keyword in to filter inbound routes out Enter the keyword out to filter outbound routes Defaults Not configured Command Modes ROUTER BGPV6 ADDRESS FAMILY Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information When you apply a route map...

Page 772: ...es ROUTER BGPV6 ADDRESS FAMILY Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information The first time you enter this command it configures the neighbor as a route reflector and members of the route reflector cluster Internal BGP IBGP speakers do not need to be fully meshed if you configure a route reflector When all clients of a route reflector are disable...

Page 773: ...es routes into BGP redistribute Redistribute routes into BGP Syntax redistribute connected static route map map name To disable redistribution use the no redistribution connected static command Parameters connected Enter the keyword connected to redistribute routes from physically connected interfaces static Enter the keyword static to redistribute manually configured routes These routes are treat...

Page 774: ...e BGP network to view information only on that network network mask OPTIONAL Enter the keywords network mask in slash prefix format of the BGP network address longer prefixes OPTIONAL Enter the keywords longer prefixes to view all routes with a common prefix Command Modes EXEC EXEC Privilege Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information When you ...

Page 775: ...RT_SUBCONFED 0xFFFFFF03 community attribute must not be advertised to external BGP peers no advertise Enter the keywords no advertise to view all routes containing the well known community attribute of NO_ADVERTISE All routes with the NO_ADVERTISE 0xFFFFFF02 community attribute must not be advertised to other BGP peers no export Enter the keywords no export to view all routes containing the well k...

Page 776: ...d non active Syntax show ip bgp ipv6 unicast dampened paths Command Modes EXEC EXEC Privilege Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module show ip bgp ipv6 unicast detail Display detailed BGP information Syntax show ip bgp ipv6 unicast detail Command Modes EXEC EXEC Privilege Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Example ...

Page 777: ...opDfrdHdP 0x41a1a3e0 NumNhDfrd 0 CfgHdrAFMsk 1 show ip bgp ipv6 unicast filter list View the routes that match the filter lists Syntax show ip bgp ipv6 unicast filter list as path name Parameters as path name Enter the name of an AS PATH Command Modes EXEC EXEC Privilege Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module show ip bgp ipv6 unicast flap statistics View fl...

Page 778: ...he input string If the caret is used at the beginning of a sequence or range it matches on everything BUT the characters specified dollar sign the end of the output string Command Modes EXEC EXEC Privilege Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Example Dell show ip bgp ipv6 unicast flap statistics BGP table version is 8 local router ID is 5 5 10 4 Status co...

Page 779: ... length OPTIONAL Enter the IPv6 address in the x x x x x format then the prefix length in the x format The range is from 0 to 128 NOTE The notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros advertised routes OPTIONAL Enter the keywords advertised routes to view only the routes the neighbor sent dampened routes OPTIONAL Enter the keywords dampened routes to view information on dampened route...

Page 780: ...nds between keepalive messages to help ensure that the TCP session is still alive Received messages This line displays the number of BGP messages received the number of notifications error messages and the number of messages waiting in a queue for processing Sent messages The line displays the number of BGP messages sent the number of notifications error messages and the number of messages waiting...

Page 781: ...32 Last read 00 00 32 last write 00 00 32 Hold time is 180 keepalive interval is 60 seconds Received 1404 messages 0 in queue 3 opens 1 notifications 1394 updates 6 keepalives 0 route refresh requests Sent 48 messages 0 in queue 3 opens 2 notifications 0 updates 43 keepalives 0 route refresh requests Minimum time between advertisement runs is 30 seconds Minimum time before advertisements start is ...

Page 782: ... for IPv6 Unicast MULTIPROTO_EXT 1 ROUTE_REFRESH 2 CISCO_ROUTE_REFRESH 128 For address family IPv6 Unicast BGP table version 12 neighbor version 12 2 accepted prefixes consume 32 bytes Prefix advertised 0 rejected 0 withdrawn 0 Connections established 3 dropped 2 Last reset 00 00 41 due to Closed by neighbor Notification History OPEN error Bad AS Sent 0 Recv 1 Local host 5ffe 11 4 Local port 179 s...

Page 783: ...version Displays the BGP table version and the main routing table version network entries Displays the number of network entries route paths and the amount of memory used to process those entries BGP path attribute entries Displays the number of BGP path attributes and the amount of memory used to process them BGP AS PATH entries Displays the number of BGP AS_PATH attributes processed and the amou...

Page 784: ...ork prefixes received If a maximum limit was configured with the neighbor maximum prefix command prfxd appears in this column If the neighbor is not in Established stage the current stage is displayed Idle Connect Active OpenSent OpenConfirm When the peer is transitioning between states and clearing the routes received the phrase Purging may appear in this column If the neighbor is disabled the ph...

Page 785: ...isabled Command Modes PROTOCOL LLDP Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the M I O Aggregator This command is supported in Programmable Mux PMUX mode only Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information You can configure iSCSI TLVs to send either globally or on a specified interface The interface configuration takes priority over global configuration isc...

Page 786: ...ty 4 without remark disable Enter the keyword disable to disable the application of preferential QoS treatment to iSCSI frames dot1p vlan priority value Enter the dot1p value of the VLAN priority tag assigned to the incoming packets in an iSCSI session The range is from 0 to 7 The default is the dot1p value in ingress iSCSI frames is not changed and is the same priority is used in iSCSI TLV advert...

Page 787: ...his command is supported in Programmable Mux PMUX mode only Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information When you enable the iSCSI feature using the iscsi enable command flow control settings are set to rx on tx off on all interfaces iscsi priority bits Configure the priority bitmap that advertises in the iSCSI application TLVs Syntax iscsi priority bits To re...

Page 788: ...ation is monitored Syntax iscsi target port tcp port 2 tcp port 16 ip address ip address To remove the configured iSCSI target ports or IP addresses use the no iscsi target port command Parameters tcp port 2 tcpport 16 Enter the tcp port number of the iSCSI target ports The tcp port n is the TCP port number or a list of TCP port numbers on which the iSCSI target listens to requests Separate port n...

Page 789: ...ax show iscsi Command Modes EXEC EXEC Privilege Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Example Dell show iscsi iSCSI is enabled iSCSI session monitoring is disabled iSCSI COS dot1p is 4 no remark Session aging time 10 Maximum number of connections is 256 iSCSI Targets and TCP Ports TCP Port Target IP Address 3260 860 Related Commands show iscsi sessions di...

Page 790: ...d48c94 iom011 Initiator iqn 1991 05 com microsoft win x9l8v27yajg ISID 400001370000 Related Commands show iscsi displays the currently configured iSCSI settings show iscsi sessions detailed displays detailed information about active iSCSI sessions on the switch show run iscsi shows run iscsi show iscsi session detailed Display detailed information on active iSCSI sessions on the switch Syntax show...

Page 791: ...ection IP Address TCP Port IP Address TCPPort ID 10 10 0 53 33432 10 10 0 101 3260 0 Related Commands show iscsi displays the currently configured iSCSI settings show iscsi sessions displays information about active iSCSI sessions on the switch show run iscsi shows run iscsi show run iscsi Display all globally configured non default iSCSI settings in the current session Syntax show run iscsi Comma...

Page 792: ...dard Compliance chapter in the Dell Networking OS Configuration Guide NOTE The fundamental mechanisms of IS IS are the same between IPv4 and IPv6 Where there are differences between the two versions they are identified and clarified in this chapter Except where identified the information in this chapter applies to both protocol versions adjacency check Verify that the protocols supported field of ...

Page 793: ...el2 Level 1 to Level 2 leaking enabled Command Modes ROUTER ISIS for IPv4 CONFIGURATION ROUTER ISIS ADDRESS FAMILY IPV6 for IPv6 Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information You cannot disable leaking from one level to another however you can regulate the rate flow from one level to another using an IP Prefix list If you do not configure the IP ...

Page 794: ...ord injects into Level 1 LSPs CSNPs and PSNPs Related Commands domain password allows you to set the authentication password for a routing domain isis password allows you to configure an authentication password for an interface clear config Clear IS IS configurations that display under the router isis heading of the show running config command output Syntax clear config Command Modes ROUTER ISIS C...

Page 795: ...e a name to network service mapping point NSAP that you use with commands that require NSAPs and system IDs Syntax clns host name nsap Parameters name Enter an alphanumeric string to identify the name to NSAP mapping nsap Enter a specific NSAP address that is associated with the name parameter Defaults Not configured Command Modes ROUTER ISIS Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 1...

Page 796: ...s Enable debugging on adjacency related activity such as hello packets that are sent and received on IS IS adjacencies Syntax debug isis adj packets interface To turn off debugging use the no debug isis adj packets interface command Parameters interface OPTIONAL Identifies the interface type slot port as one of the following For a Port Channel interface enter the keywords port channel then a numbe...

Page 797: ...d Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module debug isis snp packets To debug IS IS complete sequence number PDU CSNP and partial sequence number PDU PSNP packets enable debugging on a specific interface and provides diagnostic information Syntax debug isis snp packets interface To turn off debugging use the no debug isis snp packets interfa...

Page 798: ...n link state PDUs LSPs that a router detects Syntax debug isis update packets interface To turn off debugging use the no debug isis update packets interface command Parameters interface OPTIONAL Identifies the interface type slot port as one of the following For a Port Channel interface enter the keywords port channel then a number The range is from 1 to 128 For a 10 Gigabit Ethernet interface ent...

Page 799: ... 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information When you use this command to redistribute routes into a routing domain the router becomes an autonomous system AS boundary router An AS boundary router does not always generate a default route into a routing domain The router still requires its own default route before it can generate one How a metric value assigned to a default route advertises depends...

Page 800: ... To return to the default values use the no distance weight command Parameters weight The administrative distance value indicates the reliability of a routing information source The range is from 1 to 255 A higher relative value indicates lower reliability Routes with smaller values are given preference The default is 115 ip address mask OPTIONAL Enter an IP address in dotted decimal format and en...

Page 801: ...es in routing updates interface OPTIONAL Identifies the interface type slot port as one of the following For a Port Channel interface enter the keywords port channel then a number The range is from 1 to 128 For a 10 Gigabit Ethernet interface enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot port information For a VLAN enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094 Defaults Not configured Co...

Page 802: ...535 rip OPTIONAL Enter the keyword rip for RIP routes static OPTIONAL Enter the keyword static for user configured routing process Defaults Not configured Command Modes ROUTER ISIS for IPv4 CONFIGURATION ROUTER ISIS ADDRESS FAMILY IPV6 for IPv6 Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information You can assign a name to a routing process so a prefix li...

Page 803: ...ameters hmac md5 OPTIONAL Enter the keywords hmac md5 to encrypt the password using MD5 encryption type OPTIONAL Enter 7 to encrypt the password using DES password Enter an alphanumeric string up to 16 characters long If you do not specify an encryption type or hmac md5 keywords the password is processed as plain text which provides limited security Defaults No default password Command Modes ROUTE...

Page 804: ... acknowledge RA and suppress adjacency advertisement SA bit flags The ISIS graceful restart enabled router can co exist in mixed topologies where some routers are graceful restart enabled and others are not For neighbors that are not graceful restart enabled the restarting router brings up the adjacency per the usual methods graceful restart interval Set the graceful restart grace period the time ...

Page 805: ...e is from 1 to 10 attempts The default is 1 Defaults Refer to Parameters Command Modes ROUTER ISIS Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module graceful restart t2 Configure the wait time for the graceful restart timer T2 that a restarting router uses as the wait time for each database to synchronize Syntax graceful restart t2 level 1 level 2 seconds To return to...

Page 806: ...d time You can override this setting by implementing this command Override the default restart wait time by entering the no graceful restart restart wait command When you disable restart wait the current adjacency hold time is used Set the t3 timer to adjacency on the restarting router when implementing this command The restarting router gets the remaining time value from its peer and adjusts its ...

Page 807: ... use the no hello padding multi point point to point command Parameters multi point OPTIONAL Enter the keywords multi point to pad only LAN hello PDUs point to point OPTIONAL Enter the keywords point to point to pad only point to point PDUs Defaults Both LAN and point to point hello PDUs are padded Command Modes ROUTER ISIS Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO M...

Page 808: ...nore lsp errors Ignore LSPs with bad checksums instead of purging those LSPs Syntax ignore lsp errors To return to the default values use the no ignore lsp errors command Defaults In IS IS the default deletes LSPs with internal checksum errors no ignore lsp errors Command Modes ROUTER ISIS Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information IS IS norma...

Page 809: ...nfigures an IS IS network entity title NET for the routing process router isis enables the IS IS routing protocol ipv6 router isis Enable the IPv6 IS IS routing protocol and specify an IPv6 IS IS process Syntax ipv6 router isis tag To disable IS IS routing use the no router isis tag command Parameters tag OPTIONAL This parameter is a unique name for a routing process A null tag is assumed if the t...

Page 810: ... 1 and Level 2 adjacencies when the neighbor is also configured as Level 1 2 and there is at least one common area if not a Level 2 adjacency is established This setting is the default level 2 only You can form a Level 2 adjacencies when other Level 2 or Level 1 2 routers and their interfaces are configured for Level 1 2 or Level 2 Level 1 adjacencies cannot be established on this interface Defaul...

Page 811: ...dule Usage Information The default values of this command are typically satisfactory transmission times for a specific interface on a designated intermediate system To maintain database synchronization the designated routers send CSNPs You can configure Level 1 and Level 2 CSNP intervals independently isis csnp interval Configure the IS IS complete sequence number PDU CSNP interval on an interface...

Page 812: ...multiplier level 1 level 2 command Parameters multiplier Specifies an integer that sets the multiplier for the hello holding time Never configure a hello multiplier lower than the default 3 The range is from 3 to 1000 The default is 3 level 1 OPTIONAL Select this value to configure the hello multiplier independently for Level 1 adjacencies This value is the default level 2 OPTONAL Select this valu...

Page 813: ...c default metric level 1 level 2 To return to the default values use the no ipv6 isis metric default metric level 1 level 2 command Parameters default metric Metric assigned to the link and used to calculate the cost from each other router via the links in the network to other destinations You can configure this metric for Level 1 or Level 2 routing The range is from 0 to 16777215 The default is 1...

Page 814: ...les The default is 10 level 1 OPTIONAL Enter the keywords level 1 to configure the shortest path first SPF calculation for Level 1 intra area routing This setting is the default level 2 OPTIONAL Enter the keywords level 2 to configure the SPF calculation for Level 2 inter area routing Defaults default metric 10 level 1 if not otherwise specified Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Version 9 2 ...

Page 815: ... 1 The router acts as a station router for Level 1 routing This setting is the default level 2 OPTIONAL Independently configures the authentication password for Level 2 The router acts as an area router for Level 2 routing Defaults No default password level 1 if not otherwise specified Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Inf...

Page 816: ...istory Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information You can configure priorities independently for Level 1 and Level 2 Priorities determine which router on a LAN is the designated router Priorities are advertised within hellos The router with the highest priority becomes the designated intermediate system DIS NOTE Routers with a priority of 0 cannot be a design...

Page 817: ... both Level 1 and Level 2 routing algorithms You can configure the IS type as Level 1 log adjacency changes Generate a log messages for adjacency state changes Syntax log adjacency changes To disable this function use the no log adjacency changes command Defaults Adjacency changes are not logged Command Modes ROUTER ISIS Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Modu...

Page 818: ... ROUTER ISIS Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information LSP throttling slows down the frequency at which LSPs are generated during network instability Even though throttling LSP generations slows down network convergence no throttling can result in a network not functioning as expected If network topology is unstable throttling slows down the ...

Page 819: ... a database until their max lsp lifetime reaches zero and then LSPs is purged Syntax lsp refresh interval seconds To restore the default refresh interval use the no lsp refresh interval command Parameters seconds The LSP refresh interval in seconds This value has to be less than the seconds value specified with the max lsp lifetime command The range is from 1 to 65535 seconds The default is 900 De...

Page 820: ...Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information To configure the number of area addresses on router use this command This value must be consistent with routers in the same area otherwise the router forms only Level 2 adjacencies The value must be same among all the routers to form Level 1 adjacencies max lsp lifetime Set the maximum time that link state packets LSPs exist without...

Page 821: ...x maximum paths number To return to the default values use the no maximum paths command Parameters number Enter a number as the maximum number of parallel paths an IP routing installs in a routing table The range is from 1 to 16 The default is 4 Defaults 4 Command Modes ROUTER ISIS for IPv4 CONFIGURATION ROUTER ISIS ADDRESS FAMILY IPV6 for IPv6 Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL...

Page 822: ...ter the metric style wide command the system generates and accepts only new style TLVs The router uses less memory and other resources rather than generating both old style and new style TLVs The new style TLVs have wider metric fields than old style TLVs Related Commands isis metric configures a metric for an interface multi topology Enables multi topology IS IS It also allows enabling disabling ...

Page 823: ...interface Suppress routing updates on an interface This command stops the router from sending updates on that interface Syntax passive interface interface To delete a passive interface configuration use the no passive interface interface command Parameters interface Enter the following keywords and slot port or number information For a 1 Gigabit Ethernet interface enter the keyword GigabitEthernet...

Page 824: ... command Parameters connected Enter the keyword connected to redistribute active routes into IS IS rip Enter the keyword rip to redistribute RIP routes into IS IS static Enter the keyword static to redistribute user configured routes into IS IS metric metric value OPTIONAL Assign a value to the redistributed route The range is from 0 to 16777215 The default is 0 Use a value that is consistent with...

Page 825: ...out command to ensure that the routes are properly are passed to the receiving routing protocol How a metric value assigned to a redistributed route is advertised depends on how on the configuration of the metric style command If the metric style command is set for Narrow or Transition mode and the metric value in the redistribute command is set to a number higher than 63 the metric value advertis...

Page 826: ...al route map map name map name is an identifier for a configured route map The route map filters imported routes from the source routing protocol to the current routing protocol If you do not specify a map name all routes are redistributed If you specify a keyword but fail to list route map tags no routes are imported Defaults IS IS Level 2 routes only Command Modes ROUTER ISIS for IPv4 CONFIGURAT...

Page 827: ...estination protocol The range is from 0 to 16777215 The default is 0 metric type external internal OPTIONAL The external link type associated with the default route advertised into a routing domain The two options are external internal level 1 OPTIONAL Routes are independently redistributed into IS IS as Level 1 routes level 1 2 OPTIONAL Routes are independently redistributed into IS IS as Level 1...

Page 828: ... ospf command is advertised router isis Allows you to enable the IS IS routing protocol and to specify an IP IS IS process Syntax router isis tag To disable IS IS routing use the no router isis tag command Parameters tag OPTIONAL This is a unique name for a routing process A null tag is assumed if the tag option is not specified The tag name must be unique for all IP router processes for a given r...

Page 829: ...9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information Set the overload bit when a router experiences problems such as a memory shortage due to an incomplete link state database which can result in an incomplete or inaccurate routing table If you set the overload bit in its LSPs other routers ignore the unreliable router in their SPF calculations until the router has recovered s...

Page 830: ...5 exit address family show isis database Display the IS IS link state database Syntax show isis database level 1 level 2 local detail summary lspid Parameters level 1 OPTIONAL Displays the Level 1 IS IS link state database level 2 OPTIONAL Displays the Level 2 IS IS link state database local OPTIONAL Displays local link state database information detail OPTIONAL Detailed link state database inform...

Page 831: ...quence number for the LSP that allows other systems to determine if they have received the latest information from the source LSP Checksum This is the checksum of the entire LSP packet LSP Holdtime This value is the amount of time in seconds that the LSP remains valid A zero holdtime indicates that this is a purged LSP and is being removed from the link state database A value between brackets indi...

Page 832: ... IS MT IPv6 OSPF 00 Metric 10 IP 15 1 1 0 255 255 255 0 Metric 10 IPv6 MT IPv6 1511 64 Metric 10 IPv6 MT IPv6 2511 64 Metric 10 IPv6 MT IPv6 1011 64 Metric 10 IPv6 1511 64 Metric 10 IP 10 1 1 0 255 255 255 0 Hostname ISIS IS IS Level 2 Link State Database LSPID LSP Seq Num LSP Checksum LSP Holdtime ATT P OL ISIS 00 00 0x0000002D 0xB2CD 1075 0 0 0 Area Address 49 0000 0001 NLPID 0xCC 0x8E IP Addres...

Page 833: ...l Timer Value Current Mode State Normal RUNNING T3 Time left 0 T2 Time left 0 level 1 0 level 2 Restart ACK rcv count 0 level 1 0 level 2 Restart Req rcv count 0 level 1 0 level 2 Suppress Adj rcv count 0 level 1 0 level 2 Restart CSNP rcv count 0 level 1 0 level 2 Database Sync count 0 level 1 0 level 2 Dell show isis hostname Display IS IS host names configured or learned on the system Syntax sh...

Page 834: ...psulation SAP Routing Protocol IS IS Circuit Type Level 1 2 Interface Index 37847070 Local circuit ID 1 Level 1 Metric 10 Priority 64 Circuit ID systest 3 01 Hello Interval 10 Hello Multiplier 3 CSNP Interval 10 Number of active level 1 adjacencies 1 Level 2 Metric 10 Priority 64 Circuit ID systest 3 01 Hello Interval 10 Hello Multiplier 3 CSNP Interval 10 Number of active level 2 adjacencies 1 Ne...

Page 835: ...odes EXEC EXEC Privilege Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information Use this command to confirm that the neighbor adjacencies are operating correctly If you suspect that they are not you can verify the specified area addresses of the routers by using the show isis neighbors command The following describes the show isis neighbors command shown ...

Page 836: ... fe00 492c Topology IPv4 IPv6 Common IPv4 IPv6 Adjacency being used for MTs IPv4 IPv6 Dell show isis protocol Display IS IS routing information Syntax show isis protocol Command Modes EXEC EXEC Privilege Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Example The bold section identifies that Multi Topology IS IS is enabled Dell show isis protocol IS IS Router Null T...

Page 837: ...d vlan then a number from 1 to 4094 Command Modes EXEC EXEC Privilege Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information The following describes the show isis traffic command shown in the following example Item Description Level 1 Level 2 Hellos sent rcvd Displays the number of Hello packets sent and received PTP Hellos sent rcvd Displays the number o...

Page 838: ...vel 2 LSPs flooded sent rcvd 5934 5217 IS IS Level 1 LSPs CSNPs sent rcvd 0 0 IS IS Level 2 LSPs CSNPs sent rcvd 472 238 IS IS Level 1 LSPs PSNPs sent rcvd 0 0 IS IS Level 2 LSPs PSNPs sent rcvd 10 337 IS IS Level 1 DR Elections 4 IS IS Level 2 DR Elections 4 IS IS Level 1 SPF Calculations 0 IS IS Level 2 SPF Calculations 389 IS IS LSP checksum errors received 0 IS IS LSP authentication failures 0...

Page 839: ...ISIS AF IPV6 mode is used for IPv6 Multi Topology route computation only If using Single Topology mode use the spf interval command in CONFIG ROUTER ISIS mode for both IPv4 and IPv6 route computations SPF throttling slows down the frequency at which route calculations are performed during network instability Even though throttling route calculations slows down network convergence not throttling ca...

Page 840: ... channel counters Syntax clear lacp port channel number counters Parameters port channel number Enter a port channel number The range is from 1 to 128 Defaults Without a Port Channel specified the command clears all Port Channel counters Command Modes EXEC EXEC Privilege Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Related Commands show lacp displays the LACP co...

Page 841: ...nd Modes EXEC EXEC Privilege Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module lacp long timeout Configure a long timeout period 30 seconds for an LACP session Syntax lacp long timeout To reset the timeout period to a short timeout 1 second use the no lacp long timeout command Defaults 1 second Command Modes INTERFACE conf if po number Command History Version 9 2 0 0...

Page 842: ...nd History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the M I O Aggregator This command is supported in Programmable Mux PMUX mode only Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module lacp system priority Configure the LACP system priority Syntax lacp system priority priority value Parameters priority value Enter the port priority value The higher the value number the lower the priority The ra...

Page 843: ...his command is supported in Programmable Mux PMUX mode only Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information LACP Modes Mode Function active An interface is in an active negotiating state in this mode LACP runs on any link configured in the active state and also automatically initiates negotiation with other ports by initiating LACP packets passive An interface is...

Page 844: ...de active Dell conf interface TenGigabitethernet 3 16 Dell conf if tengig 3 16 no shutdown Dell conf if tengig 3 16 port channel protocol lacp Dell conf if tengig 3 16 lacp port channel 32 mode active show lacp Display the LACP matrix Syntax show lacp port channel number sys id counters Parameters port channel number Enter a port channel number The range is from 1 to 128 sys id OPTIONAL Enter the ...

Page 845: ...state P Receiver is not in expired state Port Gi 10 6 is enabled LACP is enabled and mode is lacp Actor Admin State ACEHJLMP Key 1 Priority 128 Oper State ACEGIKNP Key 1 Priority 128 Partner Admin State BDFHJLMP Key 0 Priority 0 Oper State BCEGIKNP Key 1 Priority 128 Dell Example Sys id Dell show lacp 1 sys id Actor System ID Priority 32768 Address 0001 e800 a12b Partner System ID Priority 32768 A...

Page 846: ...ss then a MAC address in nn nn nn nn nn nn format all Enter the keyword all to delete all MAC address entries in the MAC address table terface interface Enter the following keywords and slot port or number information For a Port Channel interface enter the keywords port channel then a number The range is from 1 to 128 For a 10 Gigabit Ethernet interface enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then th...

Page 847: ...egator This command is supported in Programmable Mux PMUX mode only Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module mac address table static Associate specific MAC or hardware addresses to an interface and virtual local area networks VLANs Syntax mac address table static mac address output interface vlan vlan id To remove a MAC address use the no mac address table static mac addre...

Page 848: ... Syntax no mac address table station move refresh arp Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the M I O Aggregator This command is supported in Programmable Mux PMUX mode only Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information For details about using this command refer to the NIC Teaming section of the Layer 2 chapter ...

Page 849: ...s learned on all VLANs not having any learning limit configuration is counted against the MAC learning limit MAC Learning Limit violation logs and actions are not available on a per VLAN basis With the keyword no station move option MAC addresses learned through this feature on the selected interface persist on a per VLAN basis even if received on another interface Enabling or disabling this optio...

Page 850: ...story Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information This command is supported on physical interfaces static LAGs and LACP LAGs Related Commands show mac learning limit displays details of the mac learning limit mac learning limit station move violation Specify the actions for a station move violation Syntax mac learning limit station move violation log shutdown...

Page 851: ...ning limit displays details of the mac learning limit mac learning limit reset Reset the MAC address learning limit error disabled state Syntax mac learning limit reset Defaults none Command Modes EXEC EXEC Privilege Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module show cam mac stack unit Display the content addressable memory CAM size and the portions allocated for...

Page 852: ...range is 1 to 128 For a 10 Gigabit Ethernet interface enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot port information For a 40 Gigabit Ethernet interface enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot port information vlan vlan id OPTIONAL Enter the keyword vlan then the VLAN ID to display the MAC address assigned to the VLAN The range is 1 to 4094 Command Modes EXEC EXEC Privilege Command History ...

Page 853: ...interface type OPTIONAL Instead of entering the keyword interface then the interface type slot and port information as above you can enter the interface type then just a slot number vlan vlan id OPTIONAL Enter the keyword vlan then the VLAN ID to display the MAC address assigned to the VLAN The range is 1 to 4094 count OPTIONAL Enter the keyword count then optionally by an interface or VLAN ID to ...

Page 854: ...s the VLAN ID number Mac Address Displays the MAC address in nn nn nn nn nn nn format Type Lists whether the MAC address was manually configured Static learned Dynamic or associated with a specific port Sticky An N indicates that the specified MAC address has been learnt by a neighbor and is synced to the node Interface Displays the interface type and slot port information The following abbreviati...

Page 855: ...aging time displays MAC aging time show mac address table aging time Display the aging times assigned to the MAC addresses on the switch Syntax show mac address table aging time vlan vlan id Parameters vlan vlan id OPTIONAL Enter the keyword vlan then the VLAN ID to display the MAC address assigned to the VLAN The range is from 1 to 4094 Command Modes EXEC EXEC Privilege Command History Version 8 ...

Page 856: ...the keywords port channel then a number The range is from 1 to 128 Command Modes EXEC EXEC Privilege Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Example Dell show mac learning limit Interface Learning Dynamic Static Unknown SA Slot port Limit MAC count MAC count Drops Dell Virtual LAN VLAN Commands The following commands configure and monitor virtual LANs VLANs...

Page 857: ...ntax default vlan id vlan id To remove the default VLAN status from a VLAN and VLAN 1 does not exist use the no default vlan id vlan id syntax Parameters vlan id Enter the VLAN ID number of the VLAN to become the new Default VLAN The range is from 1 to 4094 The default is 1 Defaults The Default VLAN is VLAN 1 Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40G...

Page 858: ...onfiguration name Assign a name to the VLAN Syntax name vlan name To remove the name from the VLAN use the no name command Parameters vlan name Enter up to 32 characters as the name of the VLAN Defaults Not configured Command Modes INTERFACE VLAN Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information To display information about a named VLAN enter the sh...

Page 859: ...ef id vlan id name vlan name Parameters brief OPTIONAL Enter the keyword brief to display the following information VLAN ID VLAN name left blank if none is configured Spanning Tree Group ID MAC address aging time IP address id vlan id OPTIONAL Enter the keyword id then a number from 1 to 4094 Only information on the VLAN specified is displayed name vlan name OPTIONAL Enter the keyword name then th...

Page 860: ...alized X for Dot1x tagged o not capitalized o for OpenFlow untagged O capitalized O for OpenFlow tagged H for VSN tagged i not capitalized i for Internal untagged I capitalized I for Internal tagged v not capitalized v for VLT untagged V capitalized V for VLT tagged Ports Displays the type slot and port information Po port channel Gi gigabit Ethernet Te ten gigabit Ethernet Example Dell show vlan ...

Page 861: ... 0 0 unassigned 2 0 0 unassigned 20 0 0 unassigned 1002 0 0 unassigned Dell Example Name Dellconf interface vlan 222 Dell conf if vl 222 name test Dell conf if vl 222 do show vlan name test Codes Default VLAN G GVRP VLANs Q U Untagged T Tagged x Dot1x untagged X Dot1x tagged G GVRP tagged M Vlan stack NUM Status Description Q Ports 222 Inactive U Gi 1 22 Dell conf if vl 222 Related Commands vlan s...

Page 862: ...e interface belongs to several VLANs remove it from all VLANs to change it to an untagged interface Tagged interfaces can belong to multiple VLANs while untagged interfaces can only belong to one VLAN at a time In programmable mux PMUX mode of input output aggregator IOA when you use the no tagged command on an interface the VLAN is not removed from the VLAN table even if there are no active membe...

Page 863: ...erational state depends on all the members of the VLAN The Layer 2 state of the VLAN and hence the Layer 2 traffic is not affected by the track ip command configuration Related Commands interface vlan configures a VLAN tagged specifies which interfaces in a VLAN are tagged untagged Add a Layer 2 interface to a VLAN as an untagged interface Syntax untagged interface To remove an untagged interface ...

Page 864: ...formation Untagged interfaces can only belong to one VLAN In the Default VLAN you cannot use the no untagged interface command To remove an untagged interface from all VLANs including the Default VLAN enter INTERFACE mode and use the no switchport command Related Commands interface vlan configures a VLAN tagged specifies which interfaces in a VLAN are tagged 864 Layer 2 ...

Page 865: ...le network management protocol SNMP For details about implementing LLDP LLDP MED refer to the Link Layer Discovery Protocol chapter of the Dell Networking OS Configuration Guide advertise dot1 tlv Advertise dot1 TLVs Type Length Value Syntax advertise dot1 tlv port protocol vlan id port vlan id vlan name To remove advertised dot1 tlv use the no advertise dot1 tlv port protocol vlan id port vlan id...

Page 866: ...ize Enter the keywords max frame size to advertise the dot3 maximum frame size Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION conf lldp and INTERFACE conf if interface lldp Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the M I O Aggregator This command is supported in Programmable Mux PMUX mode only Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module advertise management tlv Advertise mana...

Page 867: ... capabilities system description and system name can be invoked individually or together in any sequence clear lldp counters Clear LLDP transmitting and receiving counters for all physical interfaces or a specific physical interface Syntax clear lldp counters interface Parameters interface Enter the following keywords and slot port or number information For a 10 Gigabit Ethernet interface enter th...

Page 868: ... IO Module debug lldp interface To display timer events neighbor additions or deletions and other information about incoming and outgoing packets enable LLDP debugging Syntax debug lldp interface interface all events packet brief detail tx rx both To disable debugging use the no debug lldp interface interface all events packet brief detail tx rx both command Parameters interface Enter the followin...

Page 869: ...XEC Privilege Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the M I O Aggregator This command is supported in Programmable Mux PMUX mode only Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module disable Enable or disable LLDP Syntax disable To enable LLDP use the no disable command Defaults Enabled that is no disable Command Modes CONFIGURATION conf lldp and INTERFACE conf if interface...

Page 870: ...ersion 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the M I O Aggregator This command is supported in Programmable Mux PMUX mode only Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module mode To receive or transmit set LLDP Syntax mode tx rx To return to the default use the no mode tx rx command Parameters tx Enter the keyword tx to set the mode to transmit rx Enter the keyword rx to set the mode to receive ...

Page 871: ... dead The range is from 2 to 10 Defaults 4 x hello Command Modes CONFIGURATION conf lldp and INTERFACE conf if interface lldp Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the M I O Aggregator This command is supported in Programmable Mux PMUX mode only Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module protocol lldp Configuration Enable the LLDP globally on the switch Syntax protoco...

Page 872: ...ations When you execute the no protocol lldp from INTERFACE mode interfaces begin to inherit the configuration from global LLDP CONFIGURATION mode show lldp neighbors Display LLDP neighbor information for all interfaces or a specified interface Syntax show lldp neighbors interface detail Parameters interface OPTIONAL Enter the following keywords and slot port or number information For a 10 Gigabit...

Page 873: ...tics Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Example Dell show lldp statistics LLDP GLOBAL STATISTICS ON CHASSIS Total number of neighbors 2 Last table change time 1w5d4h In ticks 52729764 Total number of Table Inserts 56 Total number of Table Deletes 54 Total number of Table Drops 0 Total number of Table Age Outs ...

Page 874: ...E 802 LAN network edge can communicate using IP and uses the LLDP MED framework LLDP MED Network Connectivity Device any device that provides access to an IEEE 802 LAN to an LLDP MED endpoint device and supports IEEE 802 1AB LLDP and TIA 1057 LLDP MED The Dell Networking system is an LLDP MED network connectivity device Regarding connected endpoint devices LLDP MED provides network connectivity de...

Page 875: ...uration advertise med guest voice signaling To advertise a separate limited voice service for a guest user when the guest voice control packets use a separate network policy than the voice data configure the system Syntax advertise med guest voice signaling vlan id layer2_priority DSCP_value priority tagged number To return to the default use the no advertise med guest voice signaling vlan id laye...

Page 876: ...in hexadecimal value of 16 bytes civic based value Enter the keywords civic based then the civic based location in hexadecimal format The range is from 6 to 255 bytes ecs elin value Enter the keywords ecs elin then the Emergency Call Service ecs Emergency Location Identification Number elin numeric location string The range is from 10 to 25 characters Defaults unconfigured Command Modes CONFIGURAT...

Page 877: ...ce debugs LLDP show lldp neighbors displays the LLDP neighbors show running config lldp displays the LLDP running configuration advertise med softphone voice To advertise softphone to enable IP telephony on a computer so that the computer can be used as a phone configure the system Syntax advertise med softphone voice vlan id priority tagged number To return to the default use the no advertise med...

Page 878: ... id priority tagged number command Parameters vlan id Enter the VLAN ID The range is from 1 to 4094 priority tagged number Enter the keywords priority tagged then the Layer 2 priority The range is from 0 to 7 Defaults unconfigured Command Modes CONFIGURATION conf lldp Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Related Commands debug lldp interface debugs LLDP ...

Page 879: ...onfiguration advertise med voice signaling To advertise when voice control packets use a separate network policy than voice data configure the system Syntax advertise med voice signaling vlan id priority tagged number To return to the default use the no advertise med voice signaling vlan id priority tagged number command Parameters vlan id Enter the VLAN ID The range is from 1 to 4094 priority tag...

Page 880: ...ATION conf lldp Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Related Commands debug lldp interface debugs LLDP show lldp neighbors displays the LLDP neighbors show running config lldp displays the LLDP running configuration advertise med voice signaling To advertise when voice control packets use a separate network policy than voice data configure the system Syn...

Page 881: ...story Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Related Commands debug lldp interface debugs LLDP show lldp neighbors displays the LLDP neighbors show running config lldp displays the LLDP running configuration Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP 881 ...

Page 882: ...on the switch determines whether the ARP reply obtained from the server is of an NLB type The switch then maps the IP address cluster IP with the MAC address cluster MAC address In multicast mode the cluster IP address is mapped to a cluster multicast MAC address that is configured using a static ARP CLI configuration command After the NLB entry is learned the traffic is forwarded to all the serve...

Page 883: ...ding to transmit all packets to all the servers that are part of the VLAN When a large volume of traffic is processed the clustering performance might be impacted in a small way This limitation is applicable to switches that perform unicast flooding in the software The ip vlan flooding command applies globally across the system and for all VLANs In cases where the NLB is applicable and the ARP rep...

Page 884: ...P entries are not deleted or updated When a member port is deleted its ARP entries are also deleted from the CAM Port channels in the VLAN also receive traffic There is no impact on the configuration from saving the configuration The feature if enabled is displayed in the show running config command output that displays the ip vlan flooding CLI configuration Apart from it there is no indication of...

Page 885: ...el then a number The range is from 1 to 128 For a 10 Gigabit Ethernet interface enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot port information For a 40 Gigabit Ethernet interface enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot port information vlan vlan id Enter the keyword vlan then a VLAN ID number from 1 to 4094 Defaults Not configured Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 9 3 0 0 ...

Page 886: ...roduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module platform Default Disabled Usage Information By default this command is disabled There might be some ARP table entries which are resolved through ARP packets which had Ethernet MAC SA different from MAC information inside the ARP packet This unicast data traffic flooding occurs only for those packets which use these ARP entries 886 Microsoft Network Load...

Page 887: ...decimal format A B C D Defaults Not configured Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module clear ip msdp sa cache Clears the entire source active cache the source active entries of a particular multicast group rejected or local source active entries Syntax clear ip msdp sa cache group address rejected sa local Parameters group addres...

Page 888: ...al format A B C D rejected sa Enter the keyword rejected sa to clear the cache source active entries that are rejected because the RPF check failed an SA filter or limit is configured the RP or MSDP peer is unreachable or because of a format error local Enter the keyword local to clear out local PIM advertised entries It applies the redistribute filter if present while adding the local PIM SA entr...

Page 889: ...ear the MSDP rejected source active entries use the no ip msdp cache rejected sa number command then the ip msdp cache rejected sa number command Parameters number Enter the number of rejected SA entries to cache The range is from 0 to 32766 Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Related Commands show ip msdp sa cac...

Page 890: ...ter multiple default peer commands ip msdp log adjacency changes Enable logging of MSDP adjacency changes Syntax ip msdp log adjacency changes To disable logging use the no ip msdp log adjacency changes command Defaults Not configured Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module ip msdp mesh group To be a member of a mesh group configu...

Page 891: ...ntax ip msdp originator id interface To remove the originator id use the no ip msdp originator id interface command Parameters interface Enter the following keywords and slot port or number information For a Loopback interface enter the keyword loopback then a number from 0 to 16383 For a Port Channel interface enter the keywords port channel then a number The range is from 1 to 128 For a SONET in...

Page 892: ...he keyword fortyGigE then the slot port information For a VLAN enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094 description name OPTIONAL Enter the keyword description then a description name maximum 80 characters to designate a description for the MSDP peer sa limit number OPTIONAL Enter the maximum number of SA entries in SA cache The range is from 1 to 500000 The default it 500000 Defaults A...

Page 893: ...RATION Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information Modifications to the ACL do not have an immediate effect on the sa cache To apply the redistribute filter to entries already present in the SA cache use the clear ip msdp sa cache local command ip msdp sa filter Permit or deny MSDP source active SA messages based on multicast source and or grou...

Page 894: ...rom 0 to 40000 Defaults 50000 Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information The system counts the SA messages originated by itself and those messages received from the MSDP peers When the total SA messages reach this limit the subsequent SA messages are dropped even if they pass RPF checking and policy checking If the ...

Page 895: ...o ip multicast msdp command Defaults Not configured Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module show ip msdp Display the MSDP peer status SA cache or peer summary Syntax show ip msdp peer peer address sa cache summary Parameters peer peer address Enter the keyword peer then the peer address in a dotted decimal format A B C D sa cache ...

Page 896: ...21 220 10 172 21 3 254 172 21 3 254 102 00 02 52 Dell Example Summary Dell show ip msdp summary Peer Addr Local Addr State Source SA Up Down Description 72 30 1 2 72 30 1 1 Established none 0 00 00 03 peer1 72 30 2 2 72 30 2 1 Established none 0 00 00 03 peer2 72 30 3 2 72 30 3 1 Established none 0 00 00 02 test peer 3 Dell show ip msdp sa cache rejected sa Display the rejected SAs in the SA cache...

Page 897: ...1 1 2 Rpf Fail 00 00 13 225 1 2 10 10 1 1 4 110 1 1 1 13 1 1 2 Rpf Fail 00 00 13 225 1 2 11 10 1 1 3 110 1 1 1 13 1 1 2 Rpf Fail 00 00 13 225 1 2 11 10 1 1 3 110 1 1 1 13 1 1 2 Rpf Fail 00 00 13 225 1 2 12 10 1 1 4 110 1 1 1 13 1 1 2 Rpf Fail 00 00 13 225 1 2 13 10 1 1 3 110 1 1 1 13 1 1 2 Rpf Fail 00 00 13 225 1 2 14 10 1 1 4 110 1 1 1 13 1 1 2 Rpf Fail 00 00 13 225 1 2 15 10 1 1 3 110 1 1 1 13 1...

Page 898: ...d along with the type slot port of the interface you want displayed Type slot port options are the following For a Port Channel interface enter the keywords port channel then a number The range is from 1 to 128 For a 10 Gigabit Ethernet interface enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot port information For a 40 Gigabit Ethernet interface enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot port in...

Page 899: ...NNING TREE The prompt is config mstp Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Related Commands protocol spanning tree mstp enters MULTIPLE SPANNING TREE mode on the switch disable Globally disable the multiple spanning tree protocol on the switch Syntax disable To enable MSTP enter the no disable command Defaults disabled Command Modes MULTIPLE SPANNING TREE...

Page 900: ...tioning to the Forwarding State Syntax forward delay seconds To return to the default setting use the no forward delay command Parameters seconds Enter the number of seconds the interface waits in the Blocking State and the Learning State before transiting to the Forwarding State The range is from 4 to 30 The default is 15 seconds Defaults 15 seconds Command Modes MULTIPLE SPANNING TREE Command Hi...

Page 901: ...Forwarding State max age changes the wait time before MSTP refreshes protocol configuration information max age To maintain configuration information before refreshing that information set the time interval for the MSTB Syntax max age seconds To return to the default values use the no max age command Parameters max age Enter a number of seconds the system waits before refreshing configuration info...

Page 902: ...PDU it decrements the received value of the remaining hops and uses the resulting value as remaining hops in the BPDUs If the remaining hops reach zero the switch discards the BPDU and ages out any information that it holds for the port msti Configure multiple spanning tree instance bridge priority and one or multiple VLANs mapped to the MST instance Syntax msti instance vlan range bridge priority...

Page 903: ...ve instances are supported on the switch name The name you assign to the multiple spanning tree region Syntax name region name To remove the region name use the no name command Parameters region name Enter the MST region name The range is 32 character limit Defaults no default name Command Modes MULTIPLE SPANNING TREE Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module...

Page 904: ...d while in MULTIPLE SPANNING TREE mode For more information about the multiple spanning tree protocol refer to the Dell Networking OS Configuration Guide Example Dell conf protocol spanning tree mstp Dell config mstp no disable Related Commands disable disables multiple spanning tree revision The revision number for the multiple spanning tree configuration Syntax revision range To return to the de...

Page 905: ... Switch IO Module Example Dell conf mstp show config protocol spanning tree mstp no disable name CustomerSvc revision 2 MSTI 10 VLAN 101 105 max hops 5 Dell conf mstp show spanning tree mst configuration View the multiple spanning tree configuration Syntax show spanning tree mst configuration Command Modes EXEC EXEC Privilege Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch I...

Page 906: ...col prior to using this command Example Dell show spanning tree msti 0 brief MSTI 0 VLANs mapped 1 4094 Executing IEEE compatible Spanning Tree Protocol Root ID Priority 32768 Address 0001 e800 0204 Root Bridge hello time 2 max age 20 forward delay 15 max hops 20 Bridge ID Priority 32768 Address 0001 e800 0204 We are the root of MSTI 0 CIST Configured hello time 2 max age 20 forward delay 15 max h...

Page 907: ...0001 e801 6aa8 128 257 Interface Name Role PortID Prio Cost Sts Cost Link type Edge Boundary Gi 0 0 ErrDis 128 257 128 20000 EDS 0 P2P No No Dell show spanning tree msti 0 MSTI 0 VLANs mapped 1 4094 Root Identifier has priority 32768 Address 0001 e801 6aa8 Root Bridge hello time 2 max age 20 forward delay 15 max hops 20 Bridge Identifier has priority 32768 Address 0001 e801 6aa8 Configured hello t...

Page 908: ...g tree msti 0 guard Executing IEEE compatible Spanning Tree Protocol Bpdu filter disabled globally Interface Name Instance Sts Guard type Bpdu Filter Te 0 41 0 FWD None No Te 0 42 0 FWD None No Te 0 43 0 FWD None No spanning tree Enable the multiple spanning tree protocol on the interface Syntax spanning tree To disable the multiple spanning tree protocol on the interface use the no spanning tree ...

Page 909: ...6 as the priority The range is from 0 to 240 The default is 128 Defaults cost depends on the interface type priority 128 Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module spanning tree mstp Configures a Layer 2 MSTP interface as an edge port with optionally a bridge protocol data unit BPDU guard or enables the root guard or loop guard feature ...

Page 910: ...not be enabled at the same time on a port For example if you configure loop guard on a port on which root guard is already configured the following error message is displayed Error RootGuard is configured Cannot configure LoopGuard When used in an MSTP network if root guard blocks a boundary port in the CIST the port is also blocked in all other MST instances Enabling Portfast BPDU guard and loop ...

Page 911: ...ized flush mechanism for MSTP This mechanism helps in flushing the MAC addresses only when necessary and less often allowing for faster convergence during topology changes However if a standards based flush mechanism is needed this knob command can be turned on to enable flushing MAC addresses after receiving every topology change notification Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP 911 ...

Page 912: ...ree information base use the clear ip pim tib command Syntax clear ip mroute group address source address snooping Parameters group address source address Enter the multicast group address and source address if desired in dotted decimal format to clear information on a specific group Enter to clear all multicast routes snooping Enter the keyword snooping to delete multicast snooping route table en...

Page 913: ...rotocols Enter the BGP as number then the IP address in dotted decimal format of the reverse path forwarding RPF neighbor The range is from 1 to 65535 Enter the OSPF process identification number then the IP address in dotted decimal format of the RPF neighbor the range is from 1 to 65535 Enter the IS IS alphanumeric tag string then the IP address in dotted decimal format of the RPF neighbor Enter...

Page 914: ... line cards in the system On each line card the multicast module only installs the maximum number of entries depending on the configured CAM profile To store multicast routes use the IN L3 McastFib CAM partition It is a separate hardware limit that exists per port pipe This hardware space limitation can supersede any software configured limit The opposite is also true the CAM partition might not b...

Page 915: ...of multicast routes and packets snooping vlan vlan id group address source address Enter the keyword snooping to display information on the multicast routes PIM SM snooping discovers Enter a VLAN ID to limit the information displayed to the multicast routes PIM SM snooping discovers on a specified VLAN The VLAN ID range is from 1 to 4094 Enter a multicast group address and optionally a source mult...

Page 916: ...erface list GigabitEthernet 4 13 225 1 2 1 uptime 00 04 16 Incoming vlan Vlan 2 Outgoing interface list GigabitEthernet 4 11 GigabitEthernet 4 13 165 87 1 7 225 1 2 1 uptime 00 03 17 Incoming vlan Vlan 2 Outgoing interface list GigabitEthernet 4 11 GigabitEthernet 4 13 GigabitEthernet 4 20 Example Dell show ip mroute IP Multicast Routing Table 224 10 10 1 uptime 00 05 12 Incoming interface Gigabit...

Page 917: ...a directly connected member of the Group statically configured member of the Group received a G or S G Join message Example Dell show ip mroute IP Multicast Routing Table 224 10 10 1 uptime 00 05 12 Incoming interface GigabitEthernet 3 12 Outgoing interface list GigabitEthernet 3 13 1 13 1 100 224 10 10 1 uptime 00 04 03 Incoming interface GigabitEthernet 3 4 Outgoing interface list GigabitEtherne...

Page 918: ...able the collection of debug information for MLD host transactions Syntax no debug ipv6 mld_host int count interface type slot port range To discontinue collection of debug information for the MLD host transactions use the no debug ipv6 mld_host command Parameters int count Enter the keyword count to indicate the number of required debug messages interface type Enter the following keywords and slo...

Page 919: ... 50000 Defaults 15000 routes Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information This feature allows you to limit the number of multicast entries on the system This number is the total of all the multicast entries on all line cards in the system On each line card the multicast module only installs the maximum number of entri...

Page 920: ...the link Duplicate address detection DAD Allow a node to check whether a proposed address is already in use Redirect The router can inform a node about a better first hop NDP uses the following five ICMPv6 packet types in its implementation Router Solicitation Router Advertisement Neighbor Solicitation Neighbor Advertisement Redirect clear ipv6 neighbors Delete all entries in the IPv6 neighbor dis...

Page 921: ...ghbor ipv6 address interface interface hardware_address To remove a static IPv6 entry from the IPv6 neighbor discovery use the no ipv6 neighbor ipv6 address interface interface command Parameters ipv6 address Enter the IPv6 address of the neighbor in the x x x x x format NOTE The notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zero interface interface Enter the keyword interface then the inter...

Page 922: ...ero CPU Enter the keyword cpu then either rp1 or rp2 Route Processor 1 or 2 optionally then an IPv6 address to display the IPv6 neighbor entries stored on the designated RP interface interface Enter the keyword interface then the interface type and slot port or number information For a Fast Ethernet interface enter the keyword fastEthernet then the slot port information For a 10 Gigabit Ethernet i...

Page 923: ... 00 22 DELAY Te 0 12 CP fe80 200 ff fe00 22 232 00 00 00 00 00 22 STALE Te 0 12 CP 500 1 0 60 00 01 e8 17 5c af REACH Te 0 13 CP fe80 200 ff fe00 17 232 00 00 00 00 00 29 REACH Te 0 14 CP 900 1 0 60 00 01 e8 17 5c b1 STALE Po 23 CP 400 1 0 60 00 01 e8 17 5c ae REACH te 0 2 Vl 100 CP Dell Neighbor Discovery Protocol NDP 923 ...

Page 924: ... basis instead of on a per IP subnet basis This chapter is divided into two sections There is no overlap between the two sets of commands You cannot use an OSPFv2 command in the IPv6 OSPFv3 mode OSPFv2 Commands OSPFv3 Commands NOTE Multi process OSPF is supported on IPV4 OSPFv2 only It is not supported on IPv6 OSPFv3 The CLI requires that you include the Process ID when entering ROUTER OSPF mode E...

Page 925: ...d nssa default information originate no redistribution no summary To delete an NSSA use the no area area id nssa command Parameters area id Specify the OSPF area in dotted decimal format A B C D or enter a number from zero 0 to 65535 no redistribution OPTIONAL Specify that the redistribute command does not distribute routes into the NSSA Only use this command in an NSSA area border router ABR defa...

Page 926: ...areas Defaults Not configured Command Modes ROUTER OSPF Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information Only the routes within an area are summarized and that summary is advertised to other areas by the ABR External routes are not summarized Related Commands area stub creates a stub area router ospf enters ROUTER OSPF mode to configure an OSPF ins...

Page 927: ...ased on the interface type use the no auto cost reference bandwidth command Parameters ref bw OPTIONAL Specify a reference bandwidth in megabits per second The range is from 1 to 4294967 The default is 100 megabits per second Defaults 100 megabits per second Command Modes ROUTER OSPF Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module clear ip ospf Clear all OSPF routi...

Page 928: ...formation For Port Channel groups enter the keywords port channel then a number The range is from 1 to 128 For a 10 Gigabit Ethernet interface enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot port information For a VLAN enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094 For a 40 Gigabit Ethernet interface enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot port information neighbor router id OPTIONAL Ent...

Page 929: ...SPF packet information spf OPTIONAL Enter the keyword spf to display the Shortest Path First information database timer rate limit OPTIONAL Enter the keywords database timer rate limit to display the LSA throttling timer information Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information The following describes the debug ip os...

Page 930: ...s intended dst Displays the destination IP address netmask Displays the destination IP address mask pri Displays the OSPF priority N MC E T Displays information available in the Options field of the HELLO packet N N bit is set N N bit is not set MC bit used by MOSPF is set and router is able to forward IP multicast packets MC bit used by MOSPF is not set and router cannot forward IP multicast pack...

Page 931: ...ways OPTIONAL Enter the keyword always to specify that default route information must always be advertised metric metric value OPTIONAL Enter the keyword metric then a number to configure a metric value for the route The range is from 1 to 16777214 metric type type value OPTIONAL Enter the keywords metric type then an OSPF link state type of 1 or 2 for default routes The values are 1 Type 1 extern...

Page 932: ...GbE Switch IO Module Related Commands redistribute redistributes routes from other routing protocols into OSPF description Add a description about the selected OSPF configuration Syntax description description To remove the OSPF description use the no description command Parameters description Enter a text string description to identify the OSPF configuration 80 characters maximum Defaults none Co...

Page 933: ...OSPF Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module distance ospf Configure an OSPF distance metric for different types of routes Syntax distance ospf external dist3 inter area dist2 intra area dist1 To delete these settings use the no distance ospf command Parameters external dist3 OPTIONAL Enter the keyword external then a number to specify a distance for extern...

Page 934: ...face command Parameters prefix list name Enter the name of a configured prefix list interface OPTIONAL Enter one of the following keywords and slot port or number information For Port Channel groups enter the keywords port channel then a number The range is from 1 to 128 For a 10 Gigabit Ethernet interface enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot port information For a VLAN enter the key...

Page 935: ...IONAL Enter the keyword static to specify that only manually configured routes are distributed Defaults Not configured Command Modes ROUTER OSPF Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information The distribute list out command applies to routes autonomous system boundary routers ASBRs redistributes into OSPF It can be applied to external type 2 and ...

Page 936: ... Disabled Command Modes ROUTER OSPF Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Usage Information In OSPF flooding is the most resource consuming task The flooding algorithm described in RFC 2328 requires that OSPF flood LSAs Link State Advertisements on all interfaces as governed by LSA s flooding scope see Section 13 of the RFC When multiple direct links connect two routers the RFC 2328 flooding algorithm ...

Page 937: ...800 seconds Defaults Not Configured Command Modes ROUTER OSPF Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module graceful restart helper reject Specify the OSPF router to not act as a helper during graceful restart Syntax graceful restart helper reject ip address To return to default value use the no graceful restart helper reject command Parameters ip address Enter t...

Page 938: ...3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module graceful restart role Specify the role for your OSPF router during graceful restart Syntax graceful restart role helper only restart only To disable graceful restart role use the no graceful restart role command Parameters role helper only OPTIONAL Enter the keywords helper only to specify the OSPF router is a helper only during graceful resta...

Page 939: ...L 10 40GbE Switch IO Module ip ospf authentication key Enable authentication and set an authentication key on OSPF traffic on an interface Syntax ip ospf authentication key encryption type key To delete an authentication key use the no ip ospf authentication key command Parameters encryption type OPTIONAL Enter 7 to encrypt the key key Enter an eight character string Strings longer than eight char...

Page 940: ...p ospf cost command Otherwise OSPF routes improperly Related Commands auto cost controls how the OSPF interface cost is calculated ip ospf dead interval Set the time interval since the last hello packet was received from a router After the interval elapses the neighboring routers declare the router dead Syntax ip ospf dead interval seconds To return to the default values use the no ip ospf dead in...

Page 941: ...e Information The time interval between the hello packets must be the same for routers in a network Related Commands ip ospf dead interval sets the time interval before a router is declared dead ip ospf message digest key Enable OSPF MD5 authentication and send an OSPF message digest key on the interface Syntax ip ospf message digest key keyid md5key To delete a key use the no ip ospf message dige...

Page 942: ...t in the configuration file with service password encryption Write down or otherwise record the key You cannot learn the key once it is configured Use caution when changing the key ip ospf mtu ignore Disable OSPF MTU mismatch detection upon receipt of database description DBD packets Syntax ip ospf mtu ignore To return to the default use the no ip ospf mtu ignore command Defaults Enabled Command M...

Page 943: ... the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information Setting a priority of 0 makes the router ineligible for election as a designated router or backup designated router Use this command for interfaces connected to multi access networks not point to point networks ip ospf retransmit interval Set the retransmission time between lost link state advertisements LSAs for adjacencies belonging to the int...

Page 944: ...apsed Syntax ip ospf transmit delay seconds To return to the default value use the no ip ospf transmit delay command Parameters seconds Enter the number of seconds as the interval between retransmission The range is from 1 to 3600 The default is 1 second This value must be greater than the transmission and propagation delays for the interface Defaults 1 second Command Modes INTERFACE Command Histo...

Page 945: ... 4 paths The range for OSPFv3 is from 1 to 64 The default for OSPFv3 is 8 paths Defaults 4 Command Modes ROUTER OSPF for OSPFv2 ROUTER OSPFv3 for OSPFv3 Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Added support for OSPFv3 Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module mib binding Enable this OSPF process ID to manage the SNMP traps and process SNMP queries Syntax mib binding To mib binding o...

Page 946: ...nter a network mask in prefix format x area id Enter the OSPF area ID as either a decimal value or in a valid IP address Decimal value range is from 0 to 65535 IP address format is dotted decimal format A B C D NOTE If the area ID is smaller than 65535 it is converted to a decimal value For example if you use an area ID of 0 0 0 1 it is converted to 1 Command Modes ROUTER OSPF Command History Vers...

Page 947: ...hernet then the slot port information For a VLAN enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094 Command Modes ROUTER OSPF Command History Version 8 3 19 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information Although the passive interface does not send or receive routing updates the network on that interface is still included in OSPF updates sent using other interfaces The defaul...

Page 948: ...he default behavior All previously marked passive interfaces are removed May update ABR status redistribute Redistribute information from another routing protocol throughout the OSPF process Syntax redistribute connected rip static metric metric value metric type type value route map map name tag tag value To disable redistribution use the no redistribute connected isis rip static command Paramete...

Page 949: ... BGP routing information throughout the OSPF instance Syntax redistribute bgp as number metric metric value metric type type value tag tag value To disable redistribution use the no redistribute bgp as number metric metric value metric type type value tag tag value command Parameters as number Enter the autonomous system number The range is from 1 to 65535 metric metric value OPTIONAL Enter the ke...

Page 950: ... routes level 1 2 OPTIONAL Enter the keywords level 1 2 to redistribute both IS IS Level 1 and Level 2 routes level 2 OPTIONAL Enter the keywords level 2 to redistribute only IS IS Level 2 routes metric metric value OPTIONAL Enter the keyword metric then a number The range is from 0 zero to 4294967295 metric type type value OPTIONAL Enter the keywords metric type then one of the following 1 for OS...

Page 951: ...rs a prompt reminding you that changing the router id brings down the existing OSPF adjacency The new router ID is effective at the next reload Example Dell conf router ospf 100 Dell conf router_ospf router id 1 1 1 1 Changing router id will bring down existing OSPF adjacency y n Dell conf router_ospf show config router ospf 100 router id 1 1 1 1 Dell conf router_ospf no router id Changing router ...

Page 952: ...d History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Example Dell conf router_ospf show config router ospf 3 passive interface FastEthernet 0 1 Dell conf router_ospf show ip ospf Display information on the OSPF process configured on the switch Syntax show ip ospf process id Parameters process id Enter the OSPF Process ID to show a specific process If no Process ID is entered ...

Page 953: ...how ip ospf 10 Routing Process ospf 10 with ID 1 1 1 1 Virtual router default vrf Supports only single TOS TOS0 routes SPF schedule delay 5 secs Hold time between two SPFs 10 secs Convergence Level 0 Min LSA origination 0 msec Min LSA arrival 1000 msec Min LSA hold time 5000 msec Max LSA wait time 5000 msec Number of area in this router is 1 normal 1 stub 0 nssa 0 Area BACKBONE 0 Number of interfa...

Page 954: ... You can determine if an ASBR is in a directly connected area or not by the flags For ASBRs in a directly connected area E flags are set In the following example router 1 1 1 1 is in a directly connected area since the Flag is E For remote ASBRs the E flag is clear Example Dell show ip ospf 1asbr RouterID Flags Cost Nexthop Interface Area 3 3 3 3 2 10 0 0 2 Gi 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 E 0 0 0 0 0 0 Dell show...

Page 955: ...nk count 11 1 2 1 11 1 2 1 673 0x80000005 0x707e 2 13 1 1 1 13 1 1 1 676 0x80000097 0x1035 2 192 68 135 2 192 68 135 2 1419 0x80000294 0x9cbd 1 Network Area 0 0 0 0 Link ID ADV Router Age Seq Checksum 10 2 3 2 13 1 1 1 676 0x80000003 0x6592 10 2 4 2 192 68 135 2 908 0x80000055 0x683e Type 5 AS External Link ID ADV Router Age Seq Checksum Tag 0 0 0 0 192 68 135 2 908 0x80000052 0xeb83 100 1 1 1 1 1...

Page 956: ...e 1 LSAs or Type 4 LSAs the default destination 0 0 0 0 for Type 5 LSAs adv router ip address OPTIONAL Enter the keywords adv router and the ip address to display only the LSA information about that router Command Modes EXEC EXEC Privilege Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information The following describes the show ip ospf database asbr summar...

Page 957: ... is the only option Metric Displays the LSA metric Example Dell show ip ospf 100 database asbr summary OSPF Router with ID 1 1 1 10 Process ID 100 Summary Asbr Area 0 0 0 0 LS age 1437 Options No TOS capability No DC E LS type Summary Asbr Link State ID 103 1 50 1 Advertising Router 1 1 1 10 LS Seq Number 0x8000000f Checksum 0x8221 Length 28 Network Mask 0 TOS 0 Metric 2 LS age 473 Options No TOS ...

Page 958: ...e ip address to display only the LSA information about that router Command Modes EXEC EXEC Privilege Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information The following describes the show ip ospf process id database external command shown in the following example Field Description LS Age Displays the LSA s age Options Displays the optional capabilities ...

Page 959: ... data traffic is forwarded to the originating router External Route Tag Displays the 32 bit field attached to each external route The OSPF protocol does not use this field but you can use the field for external route management Example Dell show ip ospf 1 database external OSPF Router with ID 20 20 20 5 Process ID 1 Type 5 AS External LS age 612 Options No TOS capability No DC E LS type Type 5 AS ...

Page 960: ...s or Type 5 LSAs the router s OSPF router ID for Type 1 LSAs or Type 4 LSAs the default destination 0 0 0 0 for Type 5 LSAs adv router ip address OPTIONAL Enter the keywords adv router and the ip address to display only the LSA information about that router Command Modes EXEC EXEC Privilege Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information The follo...

Page 961: ...P address of routers attached to the network Example Dell show ip ospf 1 data network OSPF Router with ID 20 20 20 5 Process ID 1 Network Area 0 0 0 0 LS age 1372 Options No TOS capability DC E LS type Network Link State ID 202 10 10 2 Advertising Router 20 20 20 8 LS Seq Number 0x80000006 Checksum 0xa35 Length 36 Network Mask 24 Attached Router 20 20 20 8 Attached Router 20 20 20 9 Attached Route...

Page 962: ...Privilege Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Related Commands show ip ospf database displays OSPF database information show ip ospf database opaque area Display the opaque area type 10 LSA information Syntax show ip ospf process id database opaque area link state id adv router ip address Parameters process id Enter the OSPF Process ID to show a specifi...

Page 963: ... the originating router can support OSPF over demand circuits E or No E is displayed on whether the originating router can accept AS External LSAs LS Type Displays the LSA s type Link State ID Displays the Link State ID Advertising Router Identifies the advertising router s ID Checksum Displays the Fletcher checksum of the LSA s complete contents Length Displays the length in bytes of the LSA Opaq...

Page 964: ...process If you do not enter the process ID the command applies only to the first OSPF process link state id OPTIONAL Specify LSA ID in dotted decimal format The LSA ID value depends on the LSA type and it can be one of the following the network s IP address for Type 3 LSAs or Type 5 LSAs the router s OSPF router ID for Type 1 LSAs or Type 4 LSAs the default destination 0 0 0 0 for Type 5 LSAs adv ...

Page 965: ...ter ip address OPTIONAL Enter the keywords adv router then the IP address of an Advertising Router to display only the LSA information about that router Command Modes EXEC EXEC Privilege Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Related Commands show ip ospf database displays OSPF database information show ip ospf database router Display the router type 1 LSA...

Page 966: ...apability or No TOS capability is displayed depending on whether the router can support Type of Service DC or No DC is displayed depending on whether the originating router can support OSPF over demand circuits E or No E is displayed on whether the originating router can accept AS External LSAs LS Type Displays the LSA type Link State ID Displays the Link State ID Advertising Router Identifies the...

Page 967: ...ss 192 68 129 1 Number of TOS metric 0 TOS 0 Metric 1 Link connected to a Transit Network Link ID Designated Router address 192 68 130 1 Link Data Router Interface address 192 68 130 1 Number of TOS metric 0 TOS 0 Metric 1 Link connected to a Transit Network Link ID Designated Router address 192 68 142 2 Link Data Router Interface address 192 68 142 2 Number of TOS metric 0 TOS 0 Metric 1 Link con...

Page 968: ... default destination 0 0 0 0 for Type 5 LSAs adv router ip address OPTIONAL Enter the keywords adv router then the IP address of an Advertising Router to display only the LSA information about that router Command Modes EXEC EXEC Privilege Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information The following describes the show ip ospf process id database s...

Page 969: ...ic Displays the LSA metrics Example show ip ospf 100 database summary OSPF Router with ID 1 1 1 10 Process ID 100 Summary Network Area 0 0 0 0 LS age 1551 Options No TOS capability DC E LS type Summary Network Link State ID 192 68 16 0 Advertising Router 192 168 17 1 LS Seq Number 0x80000054 Checksum 0xb5a2 Length 28 Network Mask 24 TOS 0 Metric 1 LS age 9 Options No TOS capability No DC E LS type...

Page 970: ...the keywords port channel then a number The range is from 1 to 128 For a 10 Gigabit Ethernet interface enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot port information For a VLAN enter the keyword vlan then the VLAN ID The range is from 1 to 4094 For a 40 Gigabit Ethernet interface enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot port information Command Modes EXEC EXEC Privilege Command History Versi...

Page 971: ... up Internet Address 192 168 1 2 30 Area 0 0 0 1 Process ID 1 Router ID 192 168 253 2 Network Type BROADCAST Cost 1 Transmit Delay is 1 sec State DR Priority 1 Designated Router ID 192 168 253 2 Interface address 192 168 1 2 Backup Designated Router ID 192 168 253 1 Interface address 192 168 1 1 Timer intervals configured Hello 10 Dead 40 Wait 40 Retransmit 5 Hello due in 00 00 02 Neighbor Count i...

Page 972: ... following describes the show ip ospf process id neighbor command shown in the following example Item Description Neighbor ID Displays the neighbor router ID Pri Displays the priority assigned neighbor State Displays the OSPF state of the neighbor Dead Time Displays the expected time until the system declares the neighbor dead Address Displays the IP address of the neighbor Interface Displays the ...

Page 973: ...ding the route to the RTM This command has the following limitations The display output is sorted by prefixes intra area ECMP routes are not displayed together For Type 2 external routes Type 1 cost is not displayed Example Dell show ip ospf 100 route Prefix Cost Nexthop Interface Area Type 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 Lo 0 0 Intra Area 3 3 3 3 2 13 0 0 3 Gi 0 47 1 Intra Area 13 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 Gi 0 47 0 Int...

Page 974: ...in dotted decimal format A B C D Defaults none Command Modes EXEC EXEC Privilege Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information The following describes the show ip ospf statistics process id global command shown in the following example Row Heading Description Total Displays the total number of packets the OSPF process receives transmits Error Di...

Page 975: ...rong_Len The received packet length is different to what was indicated in the OSPF header Invld Nbr LSA LSR LSU and DDB are received from a peer which is not a neighbor peer Nbr State LSA LSR and LSU are received from a neighbor with stats less than the loading state Auth Error Simple authentication error MD5 Error MD5 error Cksum Err Checksum Error Version Version mismatch AreaMismatch Area misma...

Page 976: ... for each interface The grace timer remaining value for each interface The packet count received and transmitted for each neighbor Dead timer remaining value for each neighbor Transmit timer remaining value for each neighbor The LSU Q length and its highest mark for each neighbor The LSR Q length and its highest mark for each neighbor Example Statistics Dell show ip ospf 10 statistics Interface Te...

Page 977: ... Command Modes EXEC EXEC Privilege Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Example Dell show ip ospf 10 timers rate limit List of LSAs in rate limit Queue LSA id 1 1 1 0 Type 3 Adv Rtid 3 3 3 3 Expiry time 00 00 09 111 LSA id 3 3 3 3 Type 1 Adv Rtid 3 3 3 3 Expiry time 00 00 23 96 Dell show ip ospf topology Display routers in directly connected areas Syntax...

Page 978: ...g value To disable summary address use the no summary address ip address mask command Parameters ip address Specify the IP address in dotted decimal format of the address to summarize mask Specify the mask in dotted decimal format of the address to summarize not advertise OPTIONAL Enter the keywords not advertise to suppress that match the network prefix mask pair tag tag value OPTIONAL Enter the ...

Page 979: ...dtime Enter a number as the hold time The range is from 0 to 4294967295 The default is 10 seconds Defaults delay 5 seconds holdtime 10 seconds Command Modes ROUTER OSPF Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information Setting the delay and holdtime parameters to a low number enables the switch to an alternate path quickly but requires more CPU usag...

Page 980: ...tling exponential backoff is used when sending same LSA so that the interval is multiplied until the maximum time is reached For example if the start interval 5000 and hold interval 1000 and max interval 100 000 the LSA is sent at 5000 msec then 1000 msec then 2000 msec them 4000 until 100 000 msec is reached timers throttle lsa arrival Configure the LSA acceptance intervals Syntax timers throttle...

Page 981: ... type key Parameters area area id Area for which OSPFv3 traffic is to be authenticated For area id you can enter a number The range is from 0 to 4294967295 ipsec spi number Security Policy index SPI value that identifies an IPsec security policy The range is from 256 to 4294967295 MD5 SHA1 Authentication type Message Digest 5 MD5 or Secure Hash Algorithm 1 SHA 1 key encryption type OPTIONAL Specif...

Page 982: ...guration an area authentication policy that has been configured is applied to the interface area encryption Configure an IPsec encryption policy for OSPFv3 packets in an OSPFv3 area Syntax area area id encryption ipsec spi number esp encryption algorithm key encryption type key authentication algorithm key encryption type key null To remove an IPsec encryption policy from an interface use the no a...

Page 983: ...2 hex digits non encrypted or 64 hex digits encrypted For SHA 1 authentication the key must be 40 hex digits non encrypted or 80 hex digits encrypted null Causes an encryption policy configured for the area to not be inherited on the interface Defaults Not configured Command Modes ROUTER OSPFv3 Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information Before...

Page 984: ...Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module debug ipv6 ospf bfd Display debug information and interface types for BFD on OSPF IPv6 packets Syntax no debug ipv6 ospf bfd interface To cancel the debug command use the no debug ipv6 ospf command Parameters interface OPTIONAL Enter one of the following keywords and slot port or number information For a 1 Gigabit Ethernet interface e...

Page 985: ...ce Te 0 2 00 59 27 OSPFv3INFO Completed Interface mode BFD configuration on Te 0 2 00 59 27 OSPFv3INFO Enabling BFD for NBRIP fe80 0000 0000 0000 0201 e8ff fe8b 7720 00 59 27 OSPFv3INFO Ospf3_register_bfd ospf key 27648 00 59 27 OSPFv3INFO OSPFV3 Enabling BFD for NBRIP fe80 0000 0000 0000 0201 e8ff fe8b 7720 Interface Te 0 2 IfIndex 34145282 00 59 27 OSPFv3INFO BFD parameters interval 100 min_rx 1...

Page 986: ... For a VLAN enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094 Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module default information originate Configure the system to generate a default external route into an OSPFv3 routing domain Syntax default information originate always metric metric value metric type type value route map map name To ...

Page 987: ...d and functions in a helper only role Command Modes ROUTER OSPFv3 Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information By default OSPFv3 graceful restart is disabled and functions only in a helper role to help restarting neighbor routers in their graceful restarts when it receives a Grace LSA To enable OSPFv3 graceful restart enter the ipv6 router ospf ...

Page 988: ...n 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information OSPFv3 graceful restart supports planned only and or unplanned only restarts The default is support for both planned and unplanned restarts A planned restart occurs when you enter the redundancy force failover rpm command to force the primary RPM to switch to the backup RPM During a planned restart OSPF sends out a Type 11...

Page 989: ...ntication policy from an interface use the no ipv6 ospf authentication spi number command To remove null authentication on an interface to allow the interface to inherit the authentication policy configured for the OSPFv3 area use the no ipv6 ospf authentication null command Parameters null Causes an authentication policy configured for the area to not be inherited on the interface ipsec spi numbe...

Page 990: ...rs on a single interface or use non default BFD session parameters Syntax ipv6 ospf bfd all neighbors disable interval interval min_rx min_rx multiplier value role active passive To disable all BFD sessions on an OSPFv3 interface implicitly use the no ipv6 ospf bfd all neighbors disable command Parameters disable OPTIONAL Enter the keyword disable to disable BFD on this interface interval millisec...

Page 991: ...GURATION mode Any timer values specified with this command overrides timers set using the bfd all neighbors command Using the no form of this command does not disable BFD if you configured BFD in CONFIGURATION mode To disable BFD on a specific interface while BFD is configured in CONFIGURATION mode use the keyword disable ipv6 ospf cost Explicitly specify the cost of sending a packet on an interfa...

Page 992: ...story Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information By default the dead interval is four times longer than the default ipv6 ospf hello interval command ipv6 ospf encryption Configure an IPsec encryption policy for OSPFv3 packets on an IPv6 interface Syntax ipv6 ospf encryption null ipsec spi number esp encryption algorithm key encryption type key athentication a...

Page 993: ...r encrypted key are 3DES 48 or 96 hex digits DES 16 or 32 hex digits AES CBC 32 or 64 hex digits for AES 128 and 48 or 96 hex digits for AES 192 authentication algorithm Specifies the authentication algorithm to use for encryption Valid values are MD5 or SHA1 key encryption type OPTIONAL Specifies if the authentication key is encrypted Valid values 0 key is not encrypted or 7 key is encrypted key ...

Page 994: ...not configured Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Command By default OSPFv3 graceful restart is disabled and functions only in a helper role to help restarting neighbor routers in their graceful restarts when it receives a Grace LSA When configured in a helper reject role an OSPFv3 router ignores the Grace LSAs that it rece...

Page 995: ...ity command Parameters number Enter the number as the priority The range is from 1 to 255 Defaults 1 Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information Setting a priority of 0 makes the router ineligible for election as a Designated Router or Backup Designated Router Use this command for interfaces connected to multi access net...

Page 996: ...r Specify the number of paths The range is from 1 to 64 The default is 8 paths Defaults 4 Command Modes ROUTER OSPF for OSPFv3 Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Added support for OSPFv3 Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module passive interface Disable suppress sending routing updates on an interface Syntax passive interface default interface To enable sending routing updates...

Page 997: ... Module Usage Information By default no interfaces are passive Routing updates are sent to all interfaces on which the routing protocol is enabled If you disable the sending of routing updates on an interface the particular address prefix continues to be advertised to other interfaces and updates from other routers on that interface continue to be received and processed OSPFv3 for IPv6 routing inf...

Page 998: ...of 1 or 2 for default routes The values are 1 for a type 1 external route 2 for a type 2 external route The default is 2 route map map name OPTIONAL Enter the keywords route map then the name of an established route map If the route map is not configured the default is deny to drop all routes tag tag value OPTIONAL Enter the keyword tag to set the tag for routes redistributed into OSPFv3 The range...

Page 999: ... Version 9 2 0 0 Added support for OSPFv3 Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information You can configure an arbitrary value in the IP address for each router However each router ID must be unique If this command is used on an OSPFv3 process that is already active has neighbors all the neighbor adjacencies are brought down immediately and new sessions are initi...

Page 1000: ...SAs that it receives from a restarting OSPFv3 neighbor show crypto ipsec sa ipv6 Display the IPsec security associations SAs used on OSPFv3 interfaces Syntax show crypto ipsec sa ipv6 interface interface Parameters interface interface OPTIONAL Displays information about the SAs used on a specified OSPFv3 interface where interface is one of the following values For a 1 Gigabit Ethernet interface en...

Page 1001: ...ospf database database summary grace lsa Parameters database summary OPTIONAL Enter the keywords database summary to view a summary of database LSA information grace lsa OPTIONAL Enter the keywords grace lsa to display the Type 11 Grace LSAs sent and received on an OSPFv3 router Defaults none Command Modes EXEC EXEC Privilege Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO...

Page 1002: ...nd a number from 1 to 4094 Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information If you enable BFD at the global level show ipv6 ospf interface shows the BFD provisioning If you enable BFD at the interface level show ipv6 ospf interface shows the BFD interval timers Example Dell show ipv6 ospf interface gigabitethernet 1 ...

Page 1003: ...igabit Ethernet interface enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot port information For a 40 Gigabit Ethernet interface enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot port information For a Port Channel interface enter the keywords port channel then a number The range is 1 to 128 For a VLAN enter the keyword vlan then the VLAN ID The range is 1 to 4094 Defaults none Command Modes EXEC EXEC Pr...

Page 1004: ...tion correctly when you configure both in the same configuration NOTE Apply PBR to Layer 3 interfaces only description Add a description to this redirect list Syntax description description To remove the description use the no description description command Parameters description Enter a description to identify the IP redirect list 80 characters maximum Defaults none Command Modes REDIRECT LIST C...

Page 1005: ...coming traffic is to be redirected If the next hop address is reachable traffic is forwarded to the specified next hop Otherwise the normal routing table is used to forward traffic When a redirect group is applied to an interface and the next hop is reachable the rules are added into the PBR CAM region When incoming traffic hits an entry in the CAM the traffic is redirected to the corresponding ne...

Page 1006: ...rotocol type source mask any host ip address destination mask any host ip address bit operators command Parameters ip protocol number Enter a number from 0 to 255 for the protocol identified in the IP protocol header protocol type Enter one of the following keywords as the protocol type icmp for internet control message protocol ip for any internet protocol tcp for transmission control protocol ud...

Page 1007: ...EDIRECT LIST Command History Version 9 4 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Version 8 4 2 1 Introduced on the C Series and S Series Version 8 4 2 0 Introduced on the E Series TeraScale Version 7 5 1 0 Introduced on the E Series ExaScale redirect Configure a rule for the redirect list Syntax redirect ip address slot port ip protocol number protocol type bit source mask any host ip ...

Page 1008: ...ing TCP flags ack acknowledgement fin finish no more data from the user psh push function rst reset the connection syn synchronize sequence number urg urgent field source Enter the IP address of the network or host from which the packets were sent mask Enter a network mask in prefix format x any Enter the keyword any to specify that all traffic is subject to the filter host ip address Enter the ke...

Page 1009: ...lter use the no seq sequence number command Parameters sequence number Enter a number from 1 to 65535 permit Enter the keyword permit assign the sequence to the permit list redirect Enter the keyword redirect to assign the sequence to the redirect list ip address Enter the IP address of the forwarding router ip protocol number Enter the keyword ip protocol number then the number from 0 to 255 for ...

Page 1010: ...ater than lt less than range inclusive range of ports you must specify two ports for the port command parameter source port Enter the keywords source port then the port number to be matched in the ACL rule in the ICAP rule destination port Enter the keywords destination port then the port number to be matched in the ACL rule in the ICAP rule source port range Enter the keywords Source port range t...

Page 1011: ...n 9 4 0 0 Added support for removing the Sonet interface on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Version 7 4 1 0 Introduced Usage Information The show cam pbr command displays the PBR CAM content Example Dell show cam pbr stack unit 0 po 0 TCP Flag Bit 5 URG Bit 4 ACK Bit 3 PSH Bit 2 RST Bit 1 SYN Bit 0 FIN Cam Port VlanID Proto Tcp Src Dst SrcIp DstIp Next hop Egress Index Flag Port Port MAC Port 00...

Page 1012: ...mand History Version 9 4 0 0 Added support for removing the Sonet interface on the MXL Version 7 4 1 0 Introduced Example Dell show ip redirect list test_pbr IP redirect list test_pbr Defined as seq 5 redirect 1 1 1 2 ip host 22 22 2 22 33 33 3 0 24 Next hop reachable via Te 0 0 ARP resolved seq 10 redirect 2 1 1 2 145 any host 44 4 4 4 Next hop reachable via Vl 100 ARP resolved seq 15 redirect 3 ...

Page 1013: ...bootstrap router BSR feature uses this command to remove all or particular rendezvous point RP advertisement Syntax clear ip pim rp mapping rp address Parameters rp address OPTIONAL Enter the RP address in dotted decimal format A B C D Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module clear ip pim tib Clear PIM tree information from the PI...

Page 1014: ...m View IP PIM debugging messages Syntax debug ip pim bsr events group packet in out register state timer assert hello joinprune register To disable PIM debugging use the no debug ip pim command or use the undebug all to disable all the debugging commands Parameters bsr OPTIONAL Enter the keyword bsr to view PIM Candidate RP BSR activities events OPTIONAL Enter the keyword group to view PIM message...

Page 1015: ...Syntax ip pim bsr border To return to the default value use the no ip pim bsr border command Defaults Disabled Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information This command is applied to the subsequent PIM BSR Existing BSR advertisements are cleaned up by time out To clean the candidate RP advertisements use the clear ip pim ...

Page 1016: ...IGURATION Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module ip pim dr priority Change the designated router DR priority for the interface Syntax ip pim dr priority priority value To remove the DR priority value assigned use the no ip pim dr priority command Parameters priority value Enter a number Preference is given to larger higher number The range is from 0 to 4294...

Page 1017: ...le Dell conf ip access list extended iptv channels Dell config ext nacl permit ip 10 1 2 3 24 225 1 1 0 24 Dell config ext nacl permit ip any 232 1 1 0 24 Dell config ext nacl permit ip 100 1 1 0 16 any Dell config if gi 1 1 ip pim join filter iptv channels in Dell config if gi 1 1 ip pim join filter iptv channels out Related Commands ip access list extended configure an access list based on IP ad...

Page 1018: ...ter the name of a standard access list Maximum 16 characters Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information Do not enter this command before creating the access list ip pim query interval Change the frequency of PIM Router Query messages Syntax ip pim query interval seconds To return to the default value u...

Page 1019: ...that denies PIM register packets to RP at the source DR based on the multicast and group addresses Do not enter this command before creating the access list ip pim rp address Configure a static PIM rendezvous point RP address for a group or access list Syntax ip pim rp address address group address group address mask override To remove an RP address use the no ip pim rp address address group addre...

Page 1020: ...ddress to PIM BSR configure a PIM router Syntax ip pim rp candidate interface priority To return to the default value use the no ip pim rp candidate interface priority command Parameters interface Enter the following keywords and slot port or number information For a Gigabit Ethernet interface enter the keyword GigabitEthernet then the slot port information For a Loopback interface enter the keywo...

Page 1021: ...ticast must also be enabled globally using the ip multicast lag hashing command PIM is supported on the port channel interface ip pim sparse mode sg expiry timer Enable expiry timers globally for all sources or for a specific set of S G pairs an access list defines Syntax ip pim sparse mode sg expiry timer seconds access list name To disable configured timers and return to default mode use the no ...

Page 1022: ... kilobits per second The default is 10 packets per second A value of zero 0 causes a switchover on the first packet infinity OPTIONAL Enter the keyword infinity to never switch to the source tree Defaults Not configured Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information This command is applicable to last hop routers on the ...

Page 1023: ... Multicast traffic is transmitted on the egress port towards the PIM DR if the port is not the incoming interface Multicast traffic for an unknown group is sent on the port towards the PIM DR When DR flooding is disabled multicast traffic for an unknown group is dropped Related Commands ip pim sparse mode enables PIM SM snooping show ip pim bsr router View information on the Bootstrap router Synta...

Page 1024: ...g in PIM v2 PIM version 2 S PIM Sparse mode Nbr Count Displays the number of PIM neighbors discovered over this interface Query Intvl Displays the query interval for Router Query messages on that interface configured with ip pim query interval command DR Prio Displays the Designated Router priority value configured on the interface use the ip pim dr priority command DR Displays the IP address of t...

Page 1025: ...d Uptime expires Displays the amount of time the neighbor has been up then the amount of time until the neighbor is removed from the multicast routing table that is until the neighbor hold time expires Ver Displays the PIM version number v2 PIM version 2 DR prio Mode Displays the Designated Router priority and the mode 1 default Designated Router priority use the ip pim dr priority command DR Desi...

Page 1026: ... 165 87 20 4 229 1 2 2 165 87 20 4 Dell Example Mapping Dell sh ip pim rp mapping Group s 224 0 0 0 4 RP 165 87 20 4 v2 Info source 165 87 20 5 via bootstrap priority 0 Uptime 00 03 11 expires 00 02 46 RP 165 87 20 3 v2 Info source 165 87 20 5 via bootstrap priority 0 Uptime 00 03 11 expires 00 03 03 Dell Example Address Dell sh ip pim rp 229 1 2 1 Group RP 229 1 2 1 165 87 20 4 Dell show ip pim s...

Page 1027: ...M snooping on the interface DR Prio Displays the Designated Router priority value configured on the interface ip pim dr priority command DR Displays the IP address of the Designated Router for that interface Example 2 Dell show ip pim snooping interface Interface Ver Nbr DR DR Count Prio Vlan 2 v2 3 1 165 87 32 2 show ip pim snooping neighbor Display information on PIM neighbors learned through PI...

Page 1028: ... PIM version 2 DR prio Mode Displays the Designated Router priority and the mode 1 default Designated Router priority use the ip pim dr priority command DR Designated Router S Sparse mode Example Dell show ip pim snooping neighbor Neighbor Interface Uptime Expires Ver DR Prio Address 165 87 32 2 Vl 2 Gi 4 13 00 04 03 00 01 42 v2 1 165 87 32 10 Vl 2 Gi 4 11 00 00 46 00 01 29 v2 0 165 87 32 12 Vl 2 ...

Page 1029: ...pires Displays the amount of time until the entry expires and is removed from the database RP Displays the IP address of the RP source for this entry flags List the flags to define the entries S PIM Sparse Mode C directly connected L local to the multicast group P route was pruned R the forwarding entry is pointing toward the RP F Dell Networking OS is registering this entry for a multicast source...

Page 1030: ...oping Table Flags J P G Join Prune j p S G Join Prune SGR P S G R Prune Timers Uptime Expires Inherited port 165 87 1 7 225 1 2 1 uptime 00 00 08 expires 00 02 52 flags j Incoming interface Vlan 2 RPF neighbor 0 0 0 0 Outgoing interface list GigabitEthernet 4 11 Upstream Port GigabitEthernet 4 13 DR Port GigabitEthernet 4 20 RPF 165 87 32 10 00 00 08 00 02 52 show ip pim summary View information a...

Page 1031: ...ages sent received 0 0 Register stop messages sent received Data path event summary 0 no cache messages received 0 last hop switchover messages received 0 0 pim assert messages sent received 0 0 register messages sent received Memory usage TIB 3768 bytes Nexthop cache 0 bytes Interface table 992 bytes Neighbor table 528 bytes RP Mapping 0 bytes show ip pim tib View the PIM tree information base TI...

Page 1032: ...ell Networking OS is registering this entry for a multicast source T packets were received via Shortest Tree Path J first packet from the last hop router is received and the entry is ready to switch to SPT K acknowledge pending state Incoming interface Displays the reverse path forwarding RPF interface towards the RP source RPF neighbor Displays the next hop from this interface towards the RP sour...

Page 1033: ...lags SCJ Incoming interface GigabitEthernet 4 23 RPF neighbor 10 211 1 2 Outgoing interface list GigabitEthernet 8 0 226 1 1 4 uptime 00 18 08 expires 00 00 52 RP 10 211 2 1 flags SCJ Incoming interface GigabitEthernet 4 23 RPF neighbor 10 211 1 2 Outgoing interface list GigabitEthernet 8 0 show running config pim Display the current configuration of PIM SM snooping Syntax show running config pim ...

Page 1034: ...didate interface hash mask length priority To disable the bootstrap candidate use the no ipv6 pim bsr candidate command Parameters interface Enter the following keywords and slot port or number information For a Loopback interface enter the keyword loopback then a number from 0 to 16383 For a Port Channel interface enter the keywords port channel then a number For a 10 Gigabit Ethernet interface e...

Page 1035: ...on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information The router with the largest value assigned to an interface becomes the designated router If two interfaces contain the same designated router priority value the interface with the largest interface IP address becomes the designated router ipv6 pim join filter Permit or deny PIM Join Prune messages on an interface using an access list This comm...

Page 1036: ...v6 pim query interval Change the frequency of IPv6 PIM router query messages Syntax ipv6 pim query interval seconds To return to the default value use the no ipv6 pim query interval seconds command Parameters seconds Enter a number as the number of seconds between router query messages The range is from 0 to 65535 The default is 30 seconds Defaults 30 seconds Command Modes INTERFACE Command Histor...

Page 1037: ... Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Example Dell conf ipv6 pim register filter REG FIL_ACL Dell conf ipv6 access list REG FIL_ACL Dell conf ipv6 acl deny ipv6 165 87 34 10 128 ff0e 225 1 2 0 112 Dell conf ipv6 acl permit ipv6 any any Dell conf ipv6 acl exit ipv6 pim rp address Configure a static PIM rendezvous point RP address for a ...

Page 1038: ...duced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information The RP addresses are stored in the order in which they are entered RP addresses learned via BSR take priority over static RP addresses Without the override option the BSR advertised RPs updates take precedence over the statically configured RPs ipv6 pim rp candidate Specify an interface as an RP candidate Syntax ipv6 pim rp candidate int...

Page 1039: ...troduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information Enable the interface use the no shutdown command and not have the switchport command configured Also enable Multicast globally PIM is supported on the port channel interface ipv6 pim spt threshold Specifies when a PIM leaf router should join the shortest path tree Syntax ipv6 pim spt threshold kbps infinity To return to the default va...

Page 1040: ...rivilege Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Example Dell show ipv6 pim bsr router PIMv2 Bootstrap information This system is the Bootstrap Router v2 BSR address 14 2 Uptime 00 02 54 BSR Priority 0 Hash mask length 126 Next bootstrap message in 00 00 06 This system is a candidate BSR Candidate BSR address 14 2 priority 0 hash mask length 126 Dell show ipv6 pim interface Display IPv6 PIM enabled interf...

Page 1041: ...rivilege Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Example Dell show ipv6 pim neighbor detail Neighbor Interface Uptime Expires Ver DR Address Prio Mode fe80 201 e8ff fe00 6265 Gi 10 3 00 07 39 00 01 42 v2 1 S 165 87 50 6 Dell show ipv6 pim rp View all multicast groups to RP mappings Syntax show ipv6 pim rp mapping group address Parameters mapping OPTIONAL Ent...

Page 1042: ...ow ipv6 pim tib View the IPv6 PIM multicast routing database tree information base tib Syntax show ipv6 pim tib group address source address Parameters group address OPTIONAL Enter the multicast group address in the x x x x x format to view RP mappings for a specific group NOTE The notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zero source address OPTIONAL Enter the source address in the x x ...

Page 1043: ...f fe00 6265 Outgoing interface list GigabitEthernet 10 11 25 1 ff0e 225 1 2 2 uptime 00 09 54 expires 00 00 00 flags CJ RPF neighbor GigabitEthernet 10 3 fe80 201 e8ff fe00 6265 Outgoing interface list GigabitEthernet 10 11 25 2 ff0e 225 1 2 2 uptime 00 09 54 expires 00 00 00 flags CJ RPF neighbor GigabitEthernet 10 3 fe80 201 e8ff fe00 6265 Outgoing interface list GigabitEthernet 10 11 25 1 ff0e ...

Page 1044: ... them using the command A monitoring port also may not be a member of a VLAN A total of 4 MG can be configured in a single port pipe MG and MD ports can reside anywhere across a port pipe Dell Networking operating software supports multiple source ports to be monitored by a single destination port in one monitor session One monitor session can have only one MG port NOTE The monitoring port should ...

Page 1045: ...troduced on the E Series Usage Information To monitor traffic with particular flows the interface appropriate ACLs has be applied in ingress direction Flow based is not supported in the tx direction Even though we can configure it in both the direction only rx will work The flow based enable command has to be applied as a monitor session with some configuration which is already present in it other...

Page 1046: ...s saved in the running configuration at Monitor Session mode level and can be restored after a chassis reload Example Dell conf monitor session 60 Dell conf mon sess 60 Related Command show monitor session displays the monitor session show running config monitor session displays the running configuration of a monitor session show config Display the current monitor session configuration Syntax show...

Page 1047: ...troduced on the M I O Aggregator Example Dell show monitor session SessID Source Destination Dir Mode Source IP Dest IP 1 Vl 10 Te 0 8 rx Flow N A N A Related Commands monitor session creates a session for monitoring show running config monitor session Display the running configuration of all monitor sessions or a specific session Syntax show running config monitor session session ID To display th...

Page 1048: ...ce destination interface direction rx tx both command Parameters source interface Enter the one of the following keywords and slot port information For a 10 Gigabit Ethernet interface enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot port information For a 40 Gigabit Ethernet interface enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot port information For a VLAN interface enter the keyword VLAN then by a...

Page 1049: ... 4094 For a port channel interface enter the keyword LAG then port channel and the port channel id direction rx tx both Enter the keyword direction then one of the packet directional indicators rx to monitor receiving packets only tx to monitor transmitting packets only both to monitor both transmitting and receiving packets Defaults none Command Modes MONITOR SESSION conf mon sess session ID Comm...

Page 1050: ...lock all traffic to isolated ports except traffic from promiscuous ports Traffic received from an isolated port is forwarded only to promiscuous ports or trunk ports Community VLAN A community VLAN is a secondary VLAN of the primary VLAN Ports in a community VLAN can talk to each other Also all ports in a community VLAN can talk to all promiscuous ports in the primary VLAN and vice versa Devices o...

Page 1051: ...y VLAN To disable Layer 3 communication in a particular secondary VLAN use the no ip local proxy arp command in INTERFACE VLAN mode for the selected secondary VLAN NOTE Even after you disable ip local proxy arp use no ip local proxy arp in a secondary VLAN Layer 3 communication may happen between some secondary VLAN hosts until the address resolution protocol ARP timeout happens on those secondary...

Page 1052: ...INTERFACE VLAN Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information The list of secondary VLANs can be Specified in comma delimited or hyphenated range format Specified with this command even before they have been created Amended by specifying the new secondary VLAN to be added to the list Related Commands private vlan mode sets the mode of the selecte...

Page 1053: ...ore associating it to a primary VLAN This secondary VLAN continues to work normally as a normal VLAN even though it is not associated to a primary VLAN A syslog message indicates this must not have a port in it when VLAN mode is being set Only ports and port channels configured as promiscuous host or PVLAN trunk ports as previously described can be added to the PVLAN No other regular ports can be ...

Page 1054: ...he following describes the show interfaces private vlan command shown in the following examples Field Description Interface Displays the type of interface and associated slot and port number Vlan Displays the VLAN ID of the designated interface PVLAN Type Displays the type of VLAN in which the designated interface resides Interface Type Displays the PVLAN port type of the designated interface Stat...

Page 1055: ...eir interfaces isolated OPTIONAL Enter the keyword isolated to display VLANs configured as isolated VLANs along with their interfaces primary OPTIONAL Enter the keyword primary to display VLANs configured as primary VLANs along with their interfaces primary_vlan OPTIONAL Enter a private VLAN ID or secondary VLAN ID to display interface details about the designated PVLAN interface interface OPTIONA...

Page 1056: ... 2 10 20 primary Yes Po 10 12 13 Gi 3 1 200 isolated Yes Gi 3 2 4 6 201 community No 202 community Yes Gi 3 11 12 Example Primary Dell show vlan private vlan primary Primary Secondary Type Active Ports 10 primary Yes Gi 2 1 3 20 primary Yes Gi 3 1 3 Example Isolated Dell show vlan private vlan isolated Primary Secondary Type Active Ports 10 primary Yes Gi 2 1 3 100 isolated Yes Gi 2 2 4 6 200 isol...

Page 1057: ... mode of the selected VLAN to community isolated or primary show interfaces private vlan displays type and status of PVLAN interfaces show vlan private vlan mapping displays the primary secondary VLAN mapping switchport mode private vlan sets PVLAN mode of the selected port show vlan private vlan mapping Display primary secondary VLAN mapping Syntax show vlan private vlan mapping Defaults none Com...

Page 1058: ...d promiscuous to configure the selected port or port channel as an promiscuous interface trunk Enter the keyword trunk to configure the selected port or port channel as a trunk port in a PVLAN Defaults Disabled Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information The assignment of the various PVLAN port types to port and port ch...

Page 1059: ...y private vlan mapping secondary vlan sets the mode of the selected VLAN to primary and then associates the secondary VLANs to it show interfaces private vlan displays type and status of PVLAN interfaces show vlan private vlan mapping displays the primary secondary VLAN mapping Private VLAN PVLAN 1059 ...

Page 1060: ...T Syntax description description To remove the description use the no description description command Parameters description Enter a description to identify the spanning tree 80 characters maximum Defaults none Command Modes SPANNING TREE PVST The prompt is config pvst Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Related Commands protocol spanning tree pvst ente...

Page 1061: ...gment the Bridge ID with a VLAN ID so that PVST differentiate between BPDUs for each VLAN use extend system ID If the VLAN receives a BPDU meant for another VLAN PVST does not detect a loop and both ports can remain in Forwarding state Syntax extend system id Defaults Disabled Command Modes PROTOCOL PVST Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Example Dell ...

Page 1062: ...panning tree pvst enter SPANNING TREE mode on the switch protocol spanning tree pvst To enable PVST on a device enter the PVST mode Syntax protocol spanning tree pvst To disable PVST use the disable command Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Example Dell conf Dell conf protocol spanning tree pvst Dell conf pvst...

Page 1063: ...ot port information For a Port Channel interface enter the keyword port channel then a number The range is 1 to 128 For a 10 Gigabit Ethernet interface enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot port information For a 40 Gigabit Ethernet interface enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot port information guard OPTIONAL Enter the keyword guard to display the type of guard enabled on a PVST...

Page 1064: ...28 2000 FWD 0 32768 001e c9f1 00f3 128 459 Interface Bpdu Name Role PortID Prio Cost Sts Cost Link type Edge Filter Po 23 Desg 128 24 128 1600 FWD 0 P2P No No Te 5 41 Dis 128 450 128 2000 DIS 0 P2P No No Te 5 50 Desg 128 459 128 2000 FWD 0 P2P No No Dell Example Dell show spanning tree pvst vlan 2 VLAN 2 Root Identifier has priority 32768 Address 001e c9f1 00f3 Root Bridge hello time 2 max age 20 ...

Page 1065: ...e Edge port mode bpdu filter is disabled Example EDS LBK Dell show spanning tree pvst vlan 2 interface gigabitethernet 1 0 GigabitEthernet 1 0 of VLAN 2 is LBK_INC discarding Edge port no default port guard none default Link type point to point auto bpdu filter disable default Bpdu guard disable default Bpdus sent 152 received 27562 Interface Designated Name PortID Prio Cost Sts Cost Bridge ID Por...

Page 1066: ...d bpduguard to disable the port when it receives a BPDU shutdown on violation OPTIONAL Enter the keywords shutdown on violation to hardware disable an interface when a BPDU is received and the port is disabled bpdufilter OPTIONAL Enter the keyword bpdufilter to stop sending and receiving BPDUs on port fast enabled ports err disable Enter the keywords err disable to enable the port to be put into t...

Page 1067: ...DU filter takes the highest precedence NOTE A port configured as an edge port on a PVST switch will immediately transition to the forwarding state Only ports connected to end hosts should be configured as an edge port Consider an edge port similar to a port with a spanning tree portfast enabled Example Dell conf if gi 1 1 spanning tree pvst vlan 3 cost 18000 Dell conf if gi 1 1 end Dell conf if gi...

Page 1068: ...flushing after receiving every topology change notification Syntax tc flush standard To disable use the no tc flush standard command Defaults Disabled Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information By default the system implements an optimized flush mechanism for PVST This implementation helps in flushing the MAC addre...

Page 1069: ...hes show spanning tree pvst displays the PVST configuration vlan forward delay Set the amount of time the interface waits in the Listening state and the Learning state before transitioning to the Forwarding state Syntax vlan vlan id forward delay seconds To return to the default setting use the no vlan forward delay command Parameters vlan vlan range Enter the keyword vlan then the VLAN numbers Th...

Page 1070: ... the VLAN numbers The range is from 1 to 4094 hello time seconds Enter the keywords hello time then the time interval in seconds between transmission of BPDUs The range is from 1 to 10 seconds The default is 2 seconds Defaults 2 seconds Command Modes CONFIGURATION conf pvst Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Related Commands vlan bridge priority sets t...

Page 1071: ...n seconds that the system waits before refreshing configuration information The range is from 6 to 40 seconds The default is 20 seconds Defaults 20 seconds Command Modes CONFIGURATION conf pvst Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Related Commands vlan bridge priority sets the bridge priority value vlan forward delay changes the time interval before the ...

Page 1072: ... overhead only the fields from MAC destination address to the CRC are used for forwarding and are included in these rate metering calculations You can optionally include overhead fields in rate metering calculations by enabling QoS Rate Adjustment Syntax qos rate adjustment overhead bytes Parameters overhead bytes Include a specified number of bytes of packet overhead to include in rate limiting p...

Page 1073: ...Switch IO Module Per Port QoS Commands Per port QoS port based QoS allows you to define the QoS configuration on a per physical port basis dot1p priority Assign a value to the IEEE 802 1p bits on the traffic this interface receives Syntax dot1p priority priority value To delete the IEEE 802 1p configuration on the interface use the no dot1p priority command Parameters priority value Enter a value ...

Page 1074: ...te police kbps committed rate burst KB peak kbps peak rate burst KB vlan vlan id Parameters kbps Enter the keyword kbps to specify the rate limit in Kilobits per second Kbps Make the following value a multiple of 64 The range is from 0 to 40000000 The default granularity is Megabits per second Mbps committed rate Enter the bandwidth in Mbps The range is from 0 to 10000 burst KB OPTIONAL Enter the ...

Page 1075: ...output on the selected interface Syntax rate shape kbps rate burst KB Parameters kbps Enter the keyword kbps to specify the rate limit in Kilobits per second Kbps Make the following value a multiple of 64 The range is from 0 to 40000000 The default granularity is Megabits per second Mbps rate Enter the outgoing rate in multiples of 10 Mbps The range is from 10 to 10000 burst KB OPTIONAL Enter the ...

Page 1076: ...ted in Programmable Mux PMUX mode only Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information To honor all incoming 802 1p markings on incoming switched traffic on the interface enter this command By default this facility is not enabled that is the 802 1p markings on incoming traffic are not honored You can apply this command on both physical interfaces and port channel...

Page 1077: ...percentage command in an output QoS policy The bandwidth percentage command in QOS POLICY OUT mode supersedes the service class bandwidth percentage command When you enable ETS the egress QoS features in the output QoS policy map such as service class bandwidth percentage and bandwidth percentage the default bandwidth allocation ratio for egress queues are superseded by ETS configurations This is ...

Page 1078: ...BX Therefore Dell Networking OS recommends disabling ETS when you wish to apply these features exclusively After you disable ETS on an interface the configured parameters are applied Policy Based QoS Commands Policy based traffic classification is handled with class maps These maps classify unicast traffic into one of four classes The system allows you to match multiple class maps and specify mult...

Page 1079: ...keywords match any to determine that the packets must meet at least one of the match criteria in order to be a member of the class class map name Enter a name of the class for the class map in a character format 32 character maximum layer2 Enter the keyword layer2 to specify a Layer 2 Class Map The default is Layer 3 Defaults Layer 3 Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Int...

Page 1080: ... the following keywords For a 40 Gigabit Ethernet interface enter the keyword FortyGigabitEthernet then the slot port information For a 10 Gigabit Ethernet interface enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot port information Defaults none Command Modes EXEC EXEC Privilege Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the M I O Aggregator This command is supported in Programmable Mux PMUX ...

Page 1081: ...SH server ip ssh rekey Configures the time rekey interval or volume rekey limit threshold at which to re generate the SSH key during an SSH session Syntax ip ssh rekey time rekey interval volume rekey limit To reset to the default use no ip ssh rekey time rekey interval volume rekey limit command Parameters time minutes Enter the keywords time then the amount of time in minutes The range is from 1...

Page 1082: ...mining if packets belong to the class the class map specifies set ip dscp value OPTIONAL Enter the keywords set ip dscp then the IP DSCP value The matched traffic is marked with the DSCP value The range is from 0 to 63 Defaults none Command Modes CLASS MAP CONFIGURATION config class map Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information To access thi...

Page 1083: ...gle VLAN ID Related Commands class map identifies the class map match ip vrf Uses a VRF as the match criterion for an L3 class map Syntax match ip vrf vrf id To remove VRF as the match criterion use the no match ip vrf vrf id command Parameters vlan vlan id Enter the keyword vrf and then the ID of the VRF The range is from 1 to 63 Defaults none Command Modes CONF CLASS MAP Command History This gui...

Page 1084: ... on the M I O Aggregator This command is supported in Programmable Mux PMUX mode only Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Related Commands policy map output creates an output policy map qos policy output creates an output QoS policy on the router match ip dscp Use a differentiated services code point DSCP value as a match criteria Syntax match ip ipv6 ip any dscp dscp ...

Page 1085: ...configure the match criteria The match ip dscp and match ip precedence commands are mutually exclusive Up to 64 IP DSCP values can be matched in one match statement For example to indicate IP DCSP values 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 enter either the match ip dscp 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 or match ip dscp 0 7 command NOTE Only one of the IP DSCP values must be a successful match criterion not all of the specified IP DSC...

Page 1086: ...is command enter the class map command After the class map is identified you can configure the match criteria The match ip precedence command and the match ip dscp command are mutually exclusive Up to eight precedence values can be matched in one match statement For example to indicate the IP precedence values 0 1 2 3 enter either the match ip precedence 0 3 or match ip precedence 0 1 2 3 command ...

Page 1087: ...t Parameters dot1p list Enter a dot1p value The range is from 0 to 7 Defaults none Command Modes CLASS MAP Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information To access this command enter the class map command After the class map is identified you can configure the match criteria Related Commands class map identifies the class map match mac vlan Confi...

Page 1088: ...I O Aggregator This command is supported in Programmable Mux PMUX mode only Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information Aggregate input output QoS policy applies to all the port ingoing outgoing traffic Aggregate input output QoS policy can coexist with per queue input output QoS policies 1 If only aggregate input QoS policy exists input traffic conditioning ...

Page 1089: ...0 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information The input policy map is used to classify incoming traffic to different flows using class map QoS policy or incoming packets DSCP This command enables Policy Map Input Configuration mode conf policy map in Related Commands service queue assigns a class map and QoS policy to different queues policy aggregate allows an aggregate method of configuring per por...

Page 1090: ...t Create a QoS input policy on the router Syntax qos policy input qos policy name layer2 To remove an existing input QoS policy from the router use the no qos policy input qos policy name layer2 command Parameters qos policy name Enter the name for the policy map in character format 32 characters maximum layer2 OPTIONAL Enter the keyword layer2 to specify a Layer 2 Class Map The default is Layer 3...

Page 1091: ...characters maximum Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information To specify the name of the output QoS policy use this command After the output policy is specified rate limit bandwidth percentage and WRED can be defined This command enables Qos Policy Output Configuration mode conf qos policy out Related...

Page 1092: ...or This command is supported in Programmable Mux PMUX mode only Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Related Commands rate police specifies traffic policing on the selected interface qos policy input creates a QoS output policy rate shape Shape the traffic output on the selected interface Syntax rate shape kbps rate burst KB Parameters kbps Enter the keyword kbps to spe...

Page 1093: ... name Enter the name for the policy map in character format 16 characters maximum You can identify an existing policy map or name one that does not yet exist layer2 OPTIONAL Enter the keyword layer2 to specify a Layer 2 Class Map The default is Layer 3 Defaults Layer 3 Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the M I O Aggregator This command is supported in Programmab...

Page 1094: ...rsion 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the M I O Aggregator This command is supported in Programmable Mux PMUX mode only Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information A single policy map can be attached to one or more interfaces to specify the service policy for those interfaces A policy map attached to an interface can be modified Related Commands policy map output creat...

Page 1095: ...ON conf policy map in and conf policy map out Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the M I O Aggregator This command is supported in Programmable Mux PMUX mode only Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information There are four queues per interface on the MXL switch This command assigns a class map or QoS policy to different queues Related Commands servi...

Page 1096: ...Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Example Dell show qos class map Class map match any CM Match ip access group ACL Related Commands class map identifies the class map show qos policy map View the QoS policy map information Syntax show qos policy map summary interface detail interface Parameters summary interface To view a policy map interface summary enter the keywor...

Page 1097: ...d is supported in Programmable Mux PMUX mode only Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Example IPv4 Dell show qos policy map detail tengigabitethernet 0 0 Interface tenGigabitEthernet 4 1 Policy map input policy Trust diffserv Queue Class map name Qos policy name 0 q0 1 CM1 q1 2 CM2 q2 3 CM3 q3 Example Summary IPv4 Dell sho qos policy map summary Interface policy map in...

Page 1098: ...icy name 0 ClassMap1 qosPolicyInput Dell show qos policy map output View the output QoS policy map details Syntax show qos policy map output policy map name qos policy output qos policy name Parameters policy map name Enter the policy map name qos policy output qos policy name Enter the keyword qos policy output then the QoS policy name Defaults none Command Modes EXEC EXEC Privilege Command Histo...

Page 1099: ...duced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Example Dell show qos qos policy input Qos policy input QosInput Rate police 100 50 peak 100 50 Dscp 32 Dell show qos qos policy output View the output QoS policy details Syntax show qos qos policy output qos policy name Parameters qos policy name Enter the QoS policy name Defaults none Command Modes EXEC EXEC Privilege Command History Version 8 3 16 1 In...

Page 1100: ...ortyGigE then the slot port information For a 10 Gigabit Ethernet interface enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot port information interface Enter one of the following keywords and slot port or number information For a 40 Gigabit Ethernet interface enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot port information For a 10 Gigabit Ethernet interface enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then t...

Page 1101: ... Information The following describes the show qos statistics command in the following example Field EF Description Queue Queue Number Drop statistic Drop statistics for green yellow and out of profile packets Dropped Pkts The total of the number of packets dropped for green yellow and out of profile Related Commands clear qos statistics clears counters shown in show qos statistics show qos wred pr...

Page 1102: ...ndicate all the stack units Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information This feature allows you to determine if the CAM has enough space available before applying the configuration on an interface An input policy map with both Trust and Class map configuration the Class map rules are ignored and only the Trust ...

Page 1103: ... is always available for that interface Status Allowed ports Indicates if the input policy map configuration on an interface belonging to a linecard port pipe is successful Allowed n or not successful Exception The allowed number n indicates the number of ports in that port pipe on which the Policy Map can be applied successfully NOTE In a Layer 2 Policy Map IPv4 IPv6 rules are not allowed therefo...

Page 1104: ...ced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information When you configure trust matched bytes packets counters are not incremented in the show qos statistics command Dynamic mapping honors packets marked according to the standard definitions of DSCP The following lists the default mapping DSCP CP hex Range XXX DSCP Definition Traditional IP Precedence MXL Switch Internal Queue ID DSCP CP Decim...

Page 1105: ...ed_teng_y wred_teng_ ecn When you configure wred ecn cr command instead of droppping the packets exponentially Explicit Congestion Notification ECN marking is made on the packets Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION conf qos policy out Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the M I O Aggregator This command is supported in Programmable Mux PMUX mode only Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on ...

Page 1106: ...able wred ecn and the number of packets in the queue is between the minimum threshold and the maximum threshold one of the following two scenarios can occur If the transmission endpoints are ECN capable and traffic is congested and the WRED algorithm determines that the packet should have been dropped based on the drop probability the packet is transmitted and marked so the routers know the system...

Page 1107: ...FIGURATION Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the M I O Aggregator This command is supported in Programmable Mux PMUX mode only Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information Use the default pre defined profiles or configure your own profile You cannot delete the pre defined profiles or their default values This command enables WRED configuration mode...

Page 1108: ... not exist the Diffserv Manager DSM creates a color map and sets all the DSCP values to green low drop precedence The default setting for each DSCP value 0 63 is green low drop precedence This command allows setting the number of specific DSCP values to yellow or red Important Points to Remember All DSCP values that are not specified as yellow or red are colored green A DSCP value cannot be in bot...

Page 1109: ...or map outlines the codepoint mappings to the appropriate color mapping green yellow red for the traffic The system uses this information use to handle the traffic on the interface based on the traffic priority and places it into the appropriate shaping queue You cannot delete a DSCP color map when it is configured on an interface If you do all the DSCP values are set to green low drop precedence ...

Page 1110: ... The following is a list of the Dell Networking OS version history for this command Version 9 5 0 0 Introduced on the Z9000 S6000 S4820T S4810 and MXL Usage Information If the specified color map does not exist the Diffserv Manager DSM creates a color map and sets all the DSCP values to green low drop precedence Example The following example assigns the color map bat enclave map to interface te 0 ...

Page 1111: ...e Dell Networking OS version history for this command Version 9 5 0 0 Introduced on the Z9000 S6000 S4820T S4810 and MXL Example Display summary information about a color policy on one or more interfaces Dell show qos dscp color policy summary Interface dscp color map TE 0 10 mapONE TE0 11 mapTWO Display summary information about a color policy on a specific interface Dell show qos dscp color poli...

Page 1112: ...mmand Line Reference Guide The following is a list of the Dell Networking OS version history for this command Version 9 5 0 0 Introduced on the Z9000 S6000 S4820T S4810 and MXL Example Display all DSCP color maps Dell show qos dscp color map Dscp color map mapONE yellow 4 7 red 20 30 Dscp color map mapTWO yellow 16 55 Display a specific DSCP color map Dell show qos dscp color map mapTWO Dscp color...

Page 1113: ...tic summarization of subnet routes into network routes This command applies only to RIP version 2 Syntax auto summary To send sub prefix routing information use the no auto summary command Defaults Enabled Command Modes ROUTER RIP Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module clear ip rip Update all the RIP routes in the routing table Syntax clear ip rip Command ...

Page 1114: ...e keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094 database OPTIONAL Enter the keyword database to display messages when there is a change to the RIP database events OPTIONAL Enter the keyword events to debug only RIP protocol changes trigger OPTIONAL Enter the keyword trigger to debug only RIP trigger extensions Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE...

Page 1115: ... ensure that all redistributed routes use the same metric value use this command with the redistribute command Syntax default metric number To return the default metric to the original values use the no default metric command Parameters number Specify a number The range is from 1 to 16 The default is 1 Defaults 1 Command Modes ROUTER RIP Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40...

Page 1116: ...rn to the default values use the no distance weight ip address mask command Parameters weight Enter a number from 1 to 255 for the weight for prioritization The default is 120 ip address OPTIONAL Enter the IP address in dotted decimal format A B C D of the host or network to receive the new distance metric mask If you enter an IP address also enter a mask for that IP address in either dotted decim...

Page 1117: ... Ethernet interface enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot port information For a VLAN enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094 Defaults Not configured Command Modes ROUTER RIP Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Related Commands ip prefix list enters PREFIX LIST mode and configures a prefix list distribute list out Configure a filter for ...

Page 1118: ...static OPTIONAL Enter the keyword static to filter manually configured routes Defaults Not configured Command Modes ROUTER RIP Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Related Commands ip prefix list enters PREFIX LIST mode and configures a prefix list ip poison reverse Set the prefix of the RIP routing updates to the RIP infinity value Syntax ip poison reve...

Page 1119: ... both versions of RIP use the ip rip receive version 1 2 command Related Commands ip rip send version sets the RIP version for sending RIP traffic on an interface version sets the RIP version the switch software uses ip rip send version To send a specific version of RIP set the interface The version you set on the interface overrides the version command in ROUTER RIP mode Syntax ip rip send versio...

Page 1120: ...tax ip split horizon To disable split horizon use the no ip split horizon command Defaults Enabled Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Related Commands ip poison reverse sets the prefix for RIP routing updates maximum paths Set RIP to forward packets over multiple paths Syntax maximum paths number To return to the default values ...

Page 1121: ...ghbor router is identified unicast data exchanges occur Multiple neighbor routers are possible To ensure that only specific interfaces are receiving and sending data use the passive interface command with the neighbor command Related Commands passive interface sets the interface to only listen to RIP broadcasts network Enable RIP for a specified network To enable RIP on all networks connected to t...

Page 1122: ... to the incoming route metric matching the access list specified If you set an offset value to zero 0 no action is taken interface OPTIONAL Enter the following keywords and slot port or number information For a Port Channel interface enter the keywords port channel then a number The range is from 1 to 128 For a 10 Gigabit Ethernet interface enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot port i...

Page 1123: ... Module Usage Information This command is intended for low speed interfaces passive interface Suppress routing updates on a specified interface Syntax passive interface interface To delete a passive interface use the no passive interface interface command Parameters interface Enter the following information For a Port Channel interface enter the keywords port channel then a number The range is fro...

Page 1124: ...connected static To disable redistribution use the no redistribute connected static command Parameters connected Enter the keyword connected to specify that information from active routes on interfaces is redistributed static Enter the keyword static to specify that information from static routes is redistributed Defaults Not configured Command Modes ROUTER RIP Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Int...

Page 1125: ...nal 2 routes should be redistributed match internal OPTIONAL Enter the keywords match internal to indicate that internal routes should be redistributed metric metric value OPTIONAL Enter the keyword metric then a number as the metric value The range is from 0 to 16 route map map name OPTIONAL Enter the keywords route map then the name of a configured route map Defaults Not configured Command Modes...

Page 1126: ... rip network 172 31 0 0 passive interface GigabitEthernet 0 1 Dell conf router_rip show ip rip database Display the routes that RIP learns If the switch learned no RIP routes no output is generated Syntax show ip rip database ip address mask Parameters ip address OPTIONAL Specify an IP address in dotted decimal format to view RIP information on that network only If you enter an IP address also ent...

Page 1127: ...ry 203 250 49 0 24 50 1 via 192 13 1 3 00 00 12 GigabitEthernet 9 14 203 250 49 0 24 auto summary 210 250 40 0 24 50 2 via 1 1 18 2 00 00 14 Vlan 18 50 2 via 1 1 130 2 00 00 12 Port channel 30 210 250 40 0 24 auto summary 207 250 53 0 24 50 2 via 1 1 120 2 00 00 55 Port channel 20 50 2 via 1 1 130 2 00 00 12 Port channel 30 50 2 via 1 1 10 2 00 00 18 Vlan 10 207 250 53 0 24 auto summary 208 250 42...

Page 1128: ...declared invalid or expired The invalid value should be at least three times the update timer value The range is from zero 0 to 4294967295 The default is 180 seconds holddown Enter the number of seconds to specify a time interval during which the route is marked as unreachable but still sending RIP packets The holddown value should be at least three times the update timer value The range is from z...

Page 1129: ... the default version setting use the no version command Parameters 1 Enter the keyword 1 to specify RIP version 1 2 Enter the keyword 2 to specify RIP version 2 Defaults The system sends RIPv1 and receives RIPv1 and RIPv2 Command Modes ROUTER RIP Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Related Commands ip rip receive version sets the RIP version the interfa...

Page 1130: ...g Table RFC 2819 User History RFC 4502 Probe Configuration Capabilities SoftwareRev HardwareRev Date Time and ResetControl RFC 4502 RMON does not support the following statistics etherStatsCollisions etherHistoryCollisions etherHistoryUtilization NOTE Only simple network management protocol SNMP GET GETNEXT access is supported Configure RMON using the RMON commands Collected data is lost during a ...

Page 1131: ...isingEventIndex or alarmTable of the RMON MIB If there is no corresponding rising threshold event the value is zero falling threshold value event number Enter the keywords falling threshold then the value 32 bit the falling threshold alarm is either triggered or reset Then enter the event number to trigger when the falling threshold exceeds its limit This value is the same as the alarmFallingEvent...

Page 1132: ...conds in each polling cycle The range is from 5 to 3600 seconds The default is 1800 seconds Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION INTERFACE config if Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module rmon collection statistics Enable RMON MIB statistics collection on an interface Syntax rmon collection statistics controlEntry integer owner name To remove RMON MIB...

Page 1133: ...PTIONAL Enter the keyword trap then an SNMP community string to configure the eventType setting in the RMON MIB This keyword sets either snmp trap or log and trap The default is public description string OPTIONAL Enter the keyword description then a string describing the event owner name OPTIONAL Enter the keyword owner then the name of the owner of this event Defaults As noted in the Parameters s...

Page 1134: ...rm is either triggered or reset Then enter the event number to trigger when the rising threshold exceeds its limit This value is the same as the alarmRisingEventIndex or alarmTable of the RMON MIB If there is no corresponding rising threshold event the value is zero falling threshold value event number Enter the keywords falling threshold then the value 64 bit the falling threshold alarm is either...

Page 1135: ... bytes Dell show rmon alarms Display the contents of the RMON alarm table Syntax show rmon alarms index brief Parameters index OPTIONAL Enter the table index number to display just that entry brief OPTIONAL Enter the keyword brief to display the RMON alarm table in an easy to read format Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Modu...

Page 1136: ...20 1 3 6 1 2 1 1 3 21 1 3 6 1 2 1 1 3 22 1 3 6 1 2 1 1 3 Dell show rmon events Display the contents of the RMON event table Syntax show rmon events index brief Parameters index OPTIONAL Enter the table index number to display just that entry brief OPTIONAL Enter the keyword brief to display the RMON event table in an easy to read format Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Command History Version 8 3 ...

Page 1137: ...on hc alarm index brief Parameters index OPTIONAL Enter the table index number to display just that entry brief OPTIONAL Enter the keyword brief to display the RMON High Capacity alarm table in an easy to read format Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Example Index Dell show rmon hc alarm 1 RMON high capacity alarm entr...

Page 1138: ...he contents of the RMON Ethernet history table Syntax show rmon history index brief Parameters index OPTIONAL Enter the table index number to display just that entry brief OPTIONAL Enter the keyword brief to display the RMON Ethernet history table in an easy to read format Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Example Inde...

Page 1139: ...to display just that entry brief OPTIONAL Enter the keyword brief to display the RMON log table in an easy to read format Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information The log table has a maximum of 500 entries If the log exceeds that maximum the oldest log entry is purged to allow room for the new entry Example ...

Page 1140: ...ackets 0 multicast packets 0 CRC error 0 under size packets 0 over size packets 0 fragment errors 0 jabber errors 0 collision 0 64bytes packets 0 65 127 bytes packets 0 128 255 bytes packets 0 256 511 bytes packets 0 512 1023 bytes packets 0 1024 1518 bytes packets 0 owner 1 status OK high capacity data HC packets received overflow 0 HC packets received 0 HC bytes received overflow 0 HC bytes rece...

Page 1141: ...Ethernet 2 0 6002 100974631 GigabitEthernet 2 0 6003 101236775 GigabitEthernet 2 1 6004 101236775 GigabitEthernet 2 1 9001 134529054 GigabitEthernet 3 0 9002 134529054 GigabitEthernet 3 0 9003 134791198 GigabitEthernet 3 1 9004 134791198 GigabitEthernet 3 1 Dell Remote Monitoring RMON 1141 ...

Page 1142: ...ers priority value Enter a number as the bridge priority value in increments of 4096 The range is from 0 to 61440 The default is 32768 Defaults 32768 Command Modes CONFIGURATION RSTP conf rstp Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Related Commands protocol spanning tree rstp enters rapid spanning tree mode debug spanning tree rstp Enable debugging of RSTP...

Page 1143: ...he slot port information Optionally enter an in or out parameter with the optional interface For Receive enter in For Transmit enter out events OPTIONAL Enter the keyword events to debug RSTP events Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Example Dell debug spanning tree rstp bpdu gigabitethernet 2 0 in Receive in out Transmit o...

Page 1144: ...dule Related Commands protocol spanning tree rstp enters SPANNING TREE mode on the switch forward delay Configure the amount of time the interface waits in the Listening State and the Learning State before transitioning to the Forwarding State Syntax forward delay seconds To return to the default setting use the no forward delay command Parameters seconds Enter the number of seconds that the syste...

Page 1145: ...50 to 950 milliseconds Defaults 2 seconds Command Modes CONFIGURATION RSTP conf rstp Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information The hello time is encoded in BPDUs in increments of 1 256ths of a second The standard minimum hello time in seconds is 1 second which is encoded as 256 Millisecond hello times are encoded using values less than 256 t...

Page 1146: ...e Related Commands forward delay changes the wait time before RSTP transitions to the Forwarding state hello time changes the time interval between BPDUs edge port bpdufilter default To filter transmission of BPDU on port fast enabled interfaces enable BPDU Filter globally Syntax edge port bpdufilter default To disable global bpdu filter default use the no edge port bpdufilter default command Para...

Page 1147: ...the system use the no disable command from RSTP mode Example Dell conf protocol spanning tree rstp Dell config rstp no disable Related Commands disable disables RSTP globally on the system show config View the current configuration for the mode Only non default values are displayed Syntax show config Command Modes CONFIGURATION RSTP conf rstp Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL ...

Page 1148: ...the interface as a rapid spanning tree edge port bpduguard OPTIONAL Enter the keyword portfast to enable Portfast to move the interface into Forwarding mode immediately after the root fails Enter the keyword bpduguard to disable the port when it receives a BPDU shutdown on violation OPTIONAL Enter the keywords shutdown on violation to hardware disable an interface when a BPDU is received and the p...

Page 1149: ...at the same time on a port results in a port that remains in a Blocking state and prevents traffic from flowing through it For example when Portfast BPDU guard and loop guard are both configured If a BPDU is received from a remote device BPDU guard places the port in an Err Disabled Blocking state and no traffic is forwarded on the port If no BPDU is received from a remote device loop guard places...

Page 1150: ...eceiving BPDUs on port enabled interfaces priority priority Enter keyword priority then a value in increments of 16 as the priority The range is from 0 to 240 The default is 128 rootguard Enter the keyword rootguard to enable root guard on an RSTP port or port channel interface Defaults Not configured Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO...

Page 1151: ...tate and no traffic is forwarded on the port Example Dell conf interface gigabitethernet 4 0 Dell conf if gi 4 0 spanning tree rstp edge port Dell conf if gi 4 0 show config interface GigabitEthernet 4 0 no ip address switchport spanning tree rstp edge port no shutdown Dell tc flush standard Enable the MAC address flushing after receiving every topology change notification Syntax tc flush standard...

Page 1152: ...ing and the amount of network resources being consumed by those services When you enable AAA Accounting the network server reports user activity to the TACACS security server in the form of accounting records Each accounting record is comprised of accounting AV pairs and is stored on the access control server As with authentication and authorization you must configure AAA Accounting by defining a ...

Page 1153: ...ensure that the TACACS security server acknowledges the start notice before granting the user s process request stop only Enter the keywords stop only to instruct the TACACS security server to send a stop record accounting notice at the end of the requested user process tacacs Enter the keyword tacacs to use TACACS data for accounting The Dell Networking OS currently supports only TACACS accountin...

Page 1154: ...ge Information The system issues accounting records for all users on the system including users whose username string due to protocol translation is NULL For example a user who comes on line with the aaa authentication login method list none command is applied To prevent the accounting records from being generated for sessions that do not have user names associated to them use the aaa accounting s...

Page 1155: ...s the generated RSA host keys and zeroize the key storage location Syntax crypto key zeroize rsa Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform specific For command information about other platforms refer to the relevant Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide The following is a list of the Dell Networking OS version history for this command Version 9 5 0 ...

Page 1156: ... ID 16 EXEC Accounting record 00 00 04 Elapsed service shell Dell Related Commands aaa accounting enables AAA Accounting and creates a record for monitoring the accounting function Authorization and Privilege Commands To set command line authorization and privilege levels use the following commands authorization Apply an authorization method list to terminal lines Syntax authorization exec command...

Page 1157: ...s level role role name name default local tacacs none Undo a configuration with the no aaa authorization commands level role role name name default local tacacs none command Parameters commands level Enter the keyword commands then the command privilege level for command level authorization role role name Enter the keyword role then the role name name Define a name for the list of authorization me...

Page 1158: ... Command History Version 9 5 0 0 Introduced on the Z9000 S6000 S4820T S4810 MXL Usage Information By default access to commands are determined by the user s role if defined or by the user s privilege level If the aaa authorization role only command is enabled then only the user s role is used Before you enable role based only AAA authorization 1 Locally define a system administrator user role This...

Page 1159: ...mmand configures the system to check both EXEC level and CONFIGURATION level commands To enable only EXEC level command checking use the command no aaa authorization config commands aaa authorization exec Set parameters that restrict or permit a user s access to EXEC level commands Syntax aaa authorization exec name default local tacacs if authenticated none To disable authorization checking for E...

Page 1160: ... route map for ROUTE MAP mode router for ROUTER OSPF ROUTER RIP ROUTER ISIS and ROUTER BGP modes level level Enter the keyword level then a number for the access level The range is from 0 to 15 Level 1 is EXEC mode and Level 15 allows access to all CLI modes and commands reset Enter the keyword reset to return the security level to the default setting command Enter the command s keywords to assign...

Page 1161: ... access to the system use the following the commands aaa authentication enable Configure AAA Authentication method lists for user access to EXEC privilege mode the Enable access Syntax aaa authentication enable default method list name method method2 To return to the default setting use the no aaa authentication enable default method list name method method2 command Parameters default Enter the ke...

Page 1162: ...cess instead Methods configured with the aaa authentication enable command are evaluated in the order they are configured If authentication fails using the primary method the system employs the second method or third method if necessary automatically For example if the TACACS server is reachable but the server key is invalid the system proceeds to the next authentication method The TACACS is incor...

Page 1163: ...of a no response from the first method the system applies the next configured method up to four configured methods Defaults Not configured that is no authentication is performed Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 9 5 0 0 Introduced the support for role on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information By default the local...

Page 1164: ...tion on the terminal lines password creates a password radius server host specifies a RADIUS server host tacacs server host specifies a TACACS server host access class Restrict incoming connections to a particular IP address in a defined IP access control list ACL Syntax access class access list name To delete a setting use the no access class command Parameters access list name Enter the name of ...

Page 1165: ...assword Defaults No password is configured level 15 Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information To control access to command modes use this command to define a password for a level and use the privilege level CONFIGURATION mode command Passwords must meet the following criteria Start with a letter not a number Passw...

Page 1166: ...ng up to 32 characters long as the clear text password Defaults Not configured Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information Only Dell Networking Technical Support staff use this command enable secret Change the password for the enable command Syntax enable secret level level encryption type password To delete a password use the no enable secret...

Page 1167: ... create the password abcd e you type abcd CNTL v e When the password is created you do not use the CNTL v key combination and enter abcd e NOTE The question mark and the tilde are not supported characters Related Commands show running config views the current configuration privilege level CONFIGURATION mode controls access to the command modes within the switch login authentication To designate th...

Page 1168: ...ONAL Enter either zero 0 or 7 as the encryption type for the password entered The options are 0 is the default and means the password is not encrypted and stored as clear text 7 means that the password is encrypted and hidden password Enter a text string up to 32 characters long The first character of the password must be a letter You cannot use spaces in the password Defaults No password is confi...

Page 1169: ...er OPTIONAL Enter the keywords max retry then the number of maximum password retries The range is from 0 to 16 lockout period minutes OPTIONAL Enter the keyword lockout period then the number of minutes The range is from 1 to 1440 minutes The default is 0 minutes and the lockout period is not enabled This parameter enhances the security of the switch by locking out sessions on the Telnet or SSH se...

Page 1170: ...y Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information CAUTION Encrypting passwords with this command does not provide a high level of security When the passwords are encrypted you cannot return them to plain text unless you re configure them To remove an encrypted password use the no password password command To keep unauthorized people from viewing passwords in the ...

Page 1171: ...ers all OPTIONAL Enter the keyword all to view all terminal lines in the switch Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Version 9 5 0 0 Introduced the support for roles on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information The following describes the show user command shown in the following example Field Description untitled Indicates wi...

Page 1172: ...ware waits for the login input for example the user name and password before timing out Syntax timeout login response seconds To return to the default values use the no timeout login response command Parameters seconds Enter a number of seconds the software waits before logging you out The range is VTY the range is from 1 to 30 seconds the default is 30 seconds Console the range is from 1 to 300 s...

Page 1173: ...ess control list nopassword Enter the keyword nopassword to specify that the user should not enter a password password Enter the keyword password then the encryption type or the password secret Enter the keyword secret then the encryption type or the password encryption type Enter an encryption type for the password that you enter 0 directs the system to store the password as clear text It is the ...

Page 1174: ...view the defined user names use the show running config user command Related Commands password specifies a password for users on terminal lines show running config views the current configuration RADIUS Commands The following RADIUS commands are supported by Dell Networking operating system debug radius View RADIUS transactions to assist with troubleshooting Syntax debug radius To disable debuggin...

Page 1175: ...igabitEthernet then the slot port information For a 40 Gigabit Ethernet interface enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot port information For VLAN interface enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094 Defaults Not configured Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module radius server deadtime Configure a time interval during...

Page 1176: ...dius server retransmit command The range is from zero 0 to 100 The default is 3 attempts timeout seconds OPTIONAL Enter the keyword timeout then the seconds the time interval the switch waits for a reply from the RADIUS server This parameter overwrites the radius server timeout command The range is from 0 to 1000 The default is 5 seconds key encryption type key OPTIONAL Enter the keyword key then ...

Page 1177: ...ion sets the database to be checked when a user logs in radius server key sets an authentication key for RADIUS communications radius server retransmit sets the number of times the RADIUS server attempts to send information radius server timeout sets the time interval before the RADIUS server times out radius server key Configure a key for all RADIUS communications between the switch and the RADIU...

Page 1178: ... number of times the switch attempts to connect with the configured RADIUS host server before declaring the RADIUS host server unreachable Syntax radius server retransmit retries To configure zero retransmit attempts use the no radius server retransmit command To return to the default setting use the radius server retransmit 3 command Parameters retries Enter a number of attempts that the system t...

Page 1179: ...aults 5 seconds Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Related Commands radius server host configures a RADIUS host role Changes command permissions for roles Syntax role mode addrole deleterole role name reset command To delete access to a command use the no role mode role name Parameters mode Enter one of the following keyword...

Page 1180: ...et to reset all roles back to default for that command command Enter the command s keywords to assign the command to a certain access level You can enter one or more keywords Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 9 5 0 0 Introduced on the Z9000 S6000 S4820T S4810 MXL Related Commands userrole TACACS Commands The Dell Networking OS supports TACACS as an alternate method ...

Page 1181: ...erface enter the keywords port channel then a number The range is from 1 to 128 For a ten Gigabit Ethernet interface enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot port information For a 40 Gigabit Ethernet interface enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot port information For VLAN interface enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094 Defaults Not configured Command Modes CONFIGURATI...

Page 1182: ...ACS servers to be used by the aaa authentication login command configure this command multiple times If you are not configuring the switch as a TACACS server you do not need to configure the port timeout and key optional parameters If you do not configure a key the key assigned in the tacacs server key command is used Related Commands aaa authentication login specifies the login authentication met...

Page 1183: ...1 Parameters rsa Enter the keyword rsa then the key size to generate a SSHv2 RSA host keys The range is from 1024 to 2048 if you did not enable FIPS mode if you enabled FIPS mode you can only generate a 2048 bit key The default is 1024 rsa1 Enter the keyword rsa1 then the key size to generate a SSHv1 RSA host keys The range is from 1024 to 2048 The default is 1024 Defaults Key size 1024 if you ena...

Page 1184: ... displays the SSH host public keys debug ip ssh Enables collecting SSH debug information Syntax debug ip ssh client server To disable debugging use the no debug ip ssh client server command Parameters client Enter the keyword client to enable collecting debug information on the client server Enter the keyword server to enable collecting debug information on the server Defaults Disabled on both cli...

Page 1185: ... enables the SSH and SCP server on the switch ip ssh authentication retries Configure the maximum number of attempts that should be used to authenticate a user Syntax ip ssh authentication retries 1 10 Parameters 1 10 Enter the number of maximum retries to authenticate a user The range is from 1 to 10 The default is 3 Defaults 3 Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduc...

Page 1186: ...isable hostbased authentication for SSHv2 server use the no ip ssh hostbased authentication enable command Parameters enable Enter the keyword enable to enable hostbased authentication for SSHv2 server Defaults Disabled Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information If you enable this command clients can log in without...

Page 1187: ...bE Switch IO Module Usage Information The server generated key is used for SSHv1 key exchange ip ssh password authentication Enable password authentication for the SSH server Syntax ip ssh password authentication enable To disable password authentication use the no ip ssh password authentication enable command Parameters enable Enter the keyword enable to enable password authentication for the SSH...

Page 1188: ...pear in the running configuration because you only need to run this command once The file contains the OpenSSH compatible public keys of the host for which host based authentication is allowed An example known host file format poclab4 123 12 1 123 ssh rsa AAAAB3NzaC1yc2EAAAABIwAAAIEAox QQp8xYhzOxn07yh4VGPAoUfgKoieTHO9G4sNV ui DWEc3cgYAcU5Lai1MU2ODrzhCwyDNp05tKBU3t ReG1o8AxLi6 S4hyEMqHzkzBFNVqHzpQc...

Page 1189: ... default is 1024 megabytes Defaults The default time is 60 minutes The default volume is 1024 megabytes Command Modes CONFIGURATION mode Command History This guide is platform specific For command information about other platforms refer to the relevant Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide The following is a list of the Dell Networking OS version history for this command Version 9 5 0 0 ...

Page 1190: ...witch ip ssh rsa authentication Config Enable RSA authentication for the SSHv2 server Syntax ip ssh rsa authentication enable To disable RSA authentication use the no ip ssh rsa authentication enable command Parameters enable Enter the keyword enable to enable RSA authentication for the SSHv2 server Defaults Disabled Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MX...

Page 1191: ... the list of authorized keys This command adds the specified RSA keys to the following file flash ADMIN_DIR ssh authorized keys username where username is the user associated with this terminal NOTE The no form of this command deletes the file flash ADMIN_DIR ssh authorized keys username file Related Commands show ip ssh rsa authentication displays the RSA authorized keys ip ssh rsa authentication...

Page 1192: ...r aes192 ctr aes256 ctr mac hmac algorithm Enter the keyword mac then a space delimited list of hash message authentication code HMAC algorithms supported by the SSH server for keying hashing for the message authentication The following HMAC algorithms are available hmac sha1 hmac sha1 96 hmac sha2 256 hmac sha2 256 96 When FIPS is enabled the default HMAC algorithm is hmac sha1 96 When FIPS is no...

Page 1193: ...rt number of the listening port of the SSH server The range is from 1 to 65535 The default is 22 version 1 2 OPTIONAL Enter the keyword version then the SSH version 1 or 2 to specify only SSHv1 or SSHv2 NOTE If you enable FIPS mode you can only select version 2 Defaults Default listening port is 22 Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 9 5 0 0 Introduced the cipher kex and mac option...

Page 1194: ...ons on tty3 User ad Priv 15 Role none Task ID 2 EXEC Accounting record 00 01 22 Elapsed service shell Active accounted actions on tty4 User ad Priv 15 Role none Task ID 11 EXEC Accounting record 00 00 35 Elapsed service shell Active accounted actions on tty5 User ad Priv 1 Role sysadmin Task ID 16 EXEC Accounting record 00 00 04 Elapsed service shell Dell Related Commands aaa accounting enables AA...

Page 1195: ...30245739 774449604335364302251481307373438756957374121 Dell show crypto key mypubkey rsa ssh rsa AAAAB3NzaC1yc2EAAAADAQABAAAAgQC9IYgcUcc8wQm 5KUQgW zAs8V5STalGq4 S 6H9axpQnA A0xweeo5iR5hvPP6Vc HS uWoQH VOJ8H5Jxsm347XnYv gpSqhgjZ C5UwFiucVkVfYu8RDcJVIuQhLvPEebIF5Q sD8K89MXU90MAS UdoiJZSOIlbaCuSTW1Q Dell Related Commands crypto key generate generates the SSH keys show ip ssh Display information abou...

Page 1196: ...nts of the flash ADMIN_DIRssh knownhosts file Example Dell show ip ssh client pub keys 4 8 1 2 ssh rsa AAAAB3NzaC1yc2EAAAABIwAAAIEAu5NoTbmnLxBknaeXZmUJMupNwNUoGlo1 yLPI5eehQTyaldRPHtGyPlcmMbCH QJkqtyiw DPmH4njyDMYDCXY85vc55ibWsN9qalagklnh2cj2q4nYj5x8 8OOhYeFPaHiygd 8U FXict61jWs84Co1UTsAgRzDJ9aUSS75TVac root dt maa linux 1 force10networks com 2200 2200 2200 2200 2200 2202 ssh rsa AAAAB3NzaC1yc2EAA...

Page 1197: ...eys ssh rsa AAAAB3NzaC1yc2EAAAABIwAAAIEAyB17l4gFp4r2DRHIvMc1VZd0Sg5GQxRV1y1 X1JOMeO6Nd0WuYyzrQMM 4qJAoBwtneOXfLBcHF3V2hcMIqaZN CRCnw zCMlnCf0 qVTd1oofsea5r09kS0xTp0CNfHXZ3NuGCq9Ov33m9 U9tMwhS8vy8A VxdH4x4km3c3t5Jvc freedom poclab4 Dell Related Commands Xip ssh rsa authentication Config configures the RSA authorized keys show role Display information on permissions assigned to a command including u...

Page 1198: ...ds userrole username privilege show users Allows you to view information on all users logged in to the switch Syntax show users all Parameters all OPTIONAL Enter the keyword all to view all terminal lines in the switch Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Version 9 5 0 0 Introduced the support for roles on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Mo...

Page 1199: ... 1 idle 10 16 127 141 5 vty 3 ad1 sysadmin 1 idle 10 16 127 145 6 vty 4 admin unassigned 1 idle 10 16 127 141 7 vty 5 ad unassigned 15 idle 10 16 127 141 Dell Related Commands username enables a user show userroles Display information on all defined user roles Syntax show userroles Example Dell show userroles Role Inheritance Modes netoperator Exec netadmin Exec Config Interface Line Router IP Rou...

Page 1200: ...he range is from 1 to 65536 The default is 22 v 1 2 OPTIONAL Enter the keyword v then the SSH version 1 or 2 The default is the version from the protocol negotiation Defaults As shown in the Parameters section Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information The system supports both inbound and outbound SSH sessions usi...

Page 1201: ...ng Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Related Commands show ip dhcp snooping displays the contents of the DHCP binding table ip dhcp relay Enable Option 82 Syntax ip dhcp relay information option trust downstream Parameters trust downstream Configure the system to trust Option 82 when it is received from the p...

Page 1202: ...es DHCP Snooping on one or more VLANs ip dhcp snooping database Delay writing the binding table for a specified time Syntax ip dhcp snooping database write delay minutes Parameters minutes The range is from 5 to 21600 Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module ip dhcp snooping binding Create a static entry in the DHCP ...

Page 1203: ...E slot port Enter the slot and port number of the interface lease time Enter the keyword lease then the amount of time the IP address is leased The range is from 1 to 4294967295 Defaults none Command Modes EXEC EXEC Privilege Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Related Commands show ip dhcp snooping displays the contents of the DHCP binding table ip dhc...

Page 1204: ... History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module ip dhcp snooping vlan Enable DHCP Snooping on one or more VLANs Syntax no ip dhcp snooping vlan name Parameters name Enter the name of a VLAN on which to enable DHCP Snooping Defaults Disabled Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information When e...

Page 1205: ...word secret encryption type password privilege level role role name If you do not want a specific user to enter a password use the nopassword option To delete authentication for a user use the no username name command Parameters name Enter a text string for the name of the user up to 63 characters access class access list name Enter the keywords access class then the name of a configured access co...

Page 1206: ...keyword role followed by the role name to associate with that user ID secret Enter the keyword secret then the encryption type Defaults The default encryption type for the password option is 0 The default encryption type for the secret option is 0 Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 9 5 0 0 Introduced the support for roles on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on t...

Page 1207: ...for Roles NOTE You can change user role permissions on system pre defined user roles or user defined user roles Important Points to Remember Consider the following when creating a user role Only the system administrator and user defined roles inherited from the system administrator can create roles and usernames Only the system administrator security administrator and roles inherited from these ca...

Page 1208: ...ow packet is always zero sFlow sampling is done on a per port basis Community list and local preference fields are not filled up in the extended gateway element in the sFlow datagram The 802 1P source priority field is not filled up in the extended switch element in the sFlow datagram Only Destination and Destination Peer AS numbers are packed in the dst as path field in the extended gateway eleme...

Page 1209: ... Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information You can configure up to two sFlow collectors IPv4 or IPv6 If two collectors are configured traffic samples are sent to both The sFlow agent address is carried in a field in SFlow packets and is used by the collector to identify the sFlow agent In sFlow the agent address is a single invariant IPv4 or...

Page 1210: ...ted Commands sflow enable Global enables sFlow on interfaces sflow enable Interface Enable sFlow on interfaces Syntax sflow enable To disable sFlow use the no sflow enable command Defaults Disabled Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information When you enable sFlow on an interface flow sampling is done on any traffic goin...

Page 1211: ...sses are learned by different routing protocols and for cases where the destination is reachable over ECMP Related Commands show sflow displays the sFlow configuration sflow polling interval Global Set the sFlow polling interval at a global level Syntax sflow polling interval interval value To return to the default use the no sflow polling interval interval command Parameters interval value Enter ...

Page 1212: ...MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information The polling interval for an interface is the maximum number of seconds between successive samples of counters sent to the collector This command changes the global default counter polling 20 seconds interval You can configure an interface to use a different polling interval sflow sample rate Global Change the global default sampling rate Syntax sflow...

Page 1213: ...e value To return to the default sampling rate use the no sflow sample rate command Parameters value Enter the sampling rate value The range is from 256 to 8388608 packets Enter values in powers of 2 only for example 4096 8192 16384 and so forth The default is the Global default sampling Defaults The Global default sampling Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on...

Page 1214: ...le Usage Information The dropEvent counter sFlow samples dropped due to sub sampling shown in the following example always displays a value of zero Example Dell show sflow sFlow services are enabled Egress Mangement Interface sFlow services are disabled Global default sampling rate 2048 Global default counter polling interval 20 Global extended information enabled none 0 collectors configured 0 UD...

Page 1215: ... is from 0 to 5 Command Modes EXEC EXEC Privilege Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information The dropEvent counter sFlow samples dropped due to sub sampling shown in the following example below always displays a value of zero Example Dell show sflow stack unit 1 Stack Unit 1 Samples rcvd from h w 0 Total UDP packets exported 0 UDP packets dro...

Page 1216: ...ort channel including through link aggregation control protocol LACP can be configured as a VLAN Stack access or trunk port Address resolution protocol ARP packets work as expected across the tunnel Far end failure detection FEFD works the same as with Layer 2 links Protocols that use Multicast MAC addresses for example open shortest path first OSPF work as expected and carry over to the other end...

Page 1217: ... stacked Q in Q VLAN for specified protocol packets Syntax protocol tunnel rate limit rate stp To disable protocol tunneling for a Layer 2 protocol use the no protocol tunnel command Parameters rate limit rate Enter the keyword rate limit then a number for the rate limit for tunneled packets on the VMAN The range is from 64 to 320 stp Enter the keyword stp to enable protocol tunneling on a spannin...

Page 1218: ...ced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information When you enable VLAN Stacking no protocol packets are tunneled Related Command show protocol tunnel displays tunneling information for all VLANs protocol tunnel enable Enable protocol tunneling globally on the system Syntax protocol tunnel enable To disable protocol tunneling use the no protocol tunnel enable command Defaults Disabled Comm...

Page 1219: ...00 Dell conf Related Commands show protocol tunnel displays tunneling information for all VLANs show running config displays the current configuration show protocol tunnel Display protocol tunnel information for all or a specified VLAN Stack VLAN Syntax show protocol tunnel vlan vlan id Parameters vlan vlan id OPTIONAL Enter the keyword vlan then the VLAN ID to display information for the one VLAN...

Page 1220: ...4 OAM PAUSE Gi 5 7 Gi 5 6 1005 E LMI Gi 5 7 Gi 5 6 Example Specific VLAN Dell show protocol tunnel vlan 2 System Rate Limit 1000 Frames second Interface Vlan Protocol s Gi1 2 2 STP PVST Dell Related Commands show running config displays the current configuration 1220 Service Provider Bridging ...

Page 1221: ...t the network The system supports up to 16 SNMP trap receivers Important Points to Remember Typically 5 second timeout and 3 second retry values on an SNMP server are sufficient for both local area network LAN and wide area network WAN applications If you experience a timeout with these values the recommended best practice on Dell Networking switches to accommodate their high port density is to in...

Page 1222: ...nmp Command Modes EXEC EXEC Privilege Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Example Dell show snmp 32685 SNMP packets input 0 Bad SNMP version errors 0 Unknown community name 0 Illegal operation for community name supplied 0 Encoding errors 96988 Number of requested variables 0 Number of altered variables 31681 Get request PDUs 968 Get next PDUs 0 Set req...

Page 1223: ...e SNMP engines on the router show snmp group Display the group name security model status and storage type of each group Syntax show snmp group Command Modes EXEC EXEC Privilege Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information The following Example displays a group named ngroup The ngroup has a security model of version 3 v3 with authentication aut...

Page 1224: ...escription string through the Interface MIB which would be truncated otherwise to 63 characters Syntax snmp ifmib ifalias long Defaults Interface description truncated beyond 63 characters Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Example command run on host connected to switch snmpwalk c public 10 10 10 130 1 3 6 1 2 1 31 grep i a...

Page 1225: ...ission rw Enter the keyword rw to specify read write permission security name name Optional Enter the keywords security name then the security name as defined by the community MIB access list name Optional Enter a standard IPv4 access list name a string up to 16 characters long Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Modul...

Page 1226: ...and ICMP rules are not valid for SNMP In IPv6 ACLs port rules are not valid for SNMP Example Dell config Dell conf snmp server community public ro Dell conf snmp server community guest ro security name guestuser Dell conf Example Dell conf ip access list standard snmp ro acl Dell config std nacl seq 5 permit host 10 10 10 224 Dell config std nacl seq 10 deny any count Dell conf snmp server communi...

Page 1227: ...nvironmental threshold is exceeded eoam Notification of changes to the EOAM state ets Notification of changes to the ets traps fips Notification of changes to the FIP snooping state lacp Notification of changes pfc Notification of changes to pfc traps snmp Notification of RFC 1157 traps stp Notification of a state change in the spanning tree protocol RFC 1493 vrrp Notification of a state change in...

Page 1228: ...address udp port port number engineID To return to the default use the no snmp server engineID local engineID remote ip address udp port port number engineID command Parameters local engineID Enter the keyword local then the engine ID number that identifies the copy of the SNMP on the local device Format as specified in RFC 3411 12 octets The first four octets are set to the private enterprise num...

Page 1229: ...Commands show snmp engineID displays the SNMP engine and all the remote engines that are configured on the router show running config displays the SNMP running configuration snmp server group Configure a new SNMP group or a table that maps SNMP users to SNMP views Syntax snmp server group group_name 1 2c 3 auth noauth priv read name write name notify name access list name access list name To remov...

Page 1230: ... a string of up to 20 characters long as the write view name notify name OPTIONAL Enter the keyword notify then a name a string of up to 20 characters long as the notify view name access list name Optional Enter the standard IPv4 access list name a string up to 16 characters long Defaults As above Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO...

Page 1231: ... 2c or 3 Version 1 is the least secure version Version 3 is the most secure of the security modes Version 2c allows transmission of informs and counter 64 which allows for integers twice the width of what is normally allowed The default is version 1 auth OPTIONAL Enter the keyword auth to specify authentication of a packet without encryption noauth OPTIONAL Enter the keyword noauth to specify no a...

Page 1232: ...order to configure the router to send SNMP notifications enter at least one snmp server host command If you enter the command with no keywords all trap types are enabled for the host If you do not enter an snmp server host command no notifications are sent In order to enable multiple hosts issue a separate snmp server host command for each host You can specify multiple notification types in the co...

Page 1233: ... Configure a remote user 3 Configure a group for this user with access rights 4 Enable traps 5 Configure a host to receive informs Related Commands snmp server enable traps enables SNMP traps snmp server community configures a new community SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c snmp server location Configure the location of the SNMP server Syntax snmp server location text To delete the SNMP location use the no snmp s...

Page 1234: ...raps out a specific interface use the no snmp trap source command Parameters interface Enter the following keywords and slot port or number information For a Loopback interface enter the keyword loopback then a number from 0 to 16383 For a 10 Gigabit Ethernet interface enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot port information For a 40 Gigabit Ethernet interface enter the keyword fortyGig...

Page 1235: ...group_name Enter a text string up to 20 characters long as the name of the group The following groups are created for mapping to read write community security names defaults v1v2creadu maps to a community with ro permissions 1v2cwriteu maps to a community rw permissions remote ip address Enter the keywords udp port then the user datagram protocol UDP port number on the remote device The range is f...

Page 1236: ...password that enables the host to encrypt the contents of the message it sends to the agent and decrypt the contents of the message it receives from the agent Minimum eight characters long access list name Optional Enter the standard IPv4 access list name a string up to 16 characters long Defaults If no authentication or privacy option is configured then the messages are exchanged attempted anyway...

Page 1237: ...user for AES128 CFB Encryption Specify that AES128 CFB encryption algorithm needs to be used for transmission of SNMP information The Advanced Encryption Standard AES Cipher Feedback CFB 128 bit encryption algorithm is in compliance with RFC 3826 RFCs for SNMPv3 define two authentication hash algorithms namely HMAC MD5 96 and HMAC SHA1 96 These are the full forms or editions of the truncated versi...

Page 1238: ...nmp server user username group groupname 3 auth authentication type auth password priv aes128 priv password to specify that AES128 CFB encryption algorithm needs to be used You cannot modify the FIPS mode if SNMPv3 users are already configured and present in the system An error message is displayed if you attempt to change the FIPS mode by using the fips mode enable command in Global Configuration...

Page 1239: ...ree or a MIB The following Example configures a view named rview that allows access to all objects under 1 3 6 1 Example Dell conf snmp server view rview 1 3 6 1 included Related Commands show running config displays the SNMP running configuration snmp trap link status Enable the interface to send SNMP link traps which indicate whether the interface is up or down Syntax snmp trap link status To di...

Page 1240: ...nal buffer default logging buffered Return to the default setting for messages logged to the internal buffer Syntax default logging buffered Defaults size 40960 level 7 or debugging Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Related Commands default logging buffered sets the logging buffered parameters default logging console Return...

Page 1241: ...rmation This command is available with or without RBAC enabled When RBAC is enabled you can restrict access to audit and security logs based on the CLI sessions user roles If extended logging is disabled you can only view system events regardless of RBAC user role When you enabled RBAC and extended logging Only the system administrator role can execute this command The system administrator and sys...

Page 1242: ...gging trap Defaults level 6 or informational Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Related Commands logging trap limit messages logged to the Syslog servers based on severity logging Configure an IP address or host name of a Syslog server where logging messages are sent You can configure multiple logging servers of both IPv4 an...

Page 1243: ...al lines logging trap enables logging to the Syslog server based on severity logging buffered Enable logging and specify which messages are logged to an internal buffer By default all messages are logged to the internal buffer Syntax logging buffered level size To return to the default values use the default logging buffered command To disable logging stored to an internal buffer use the no loggin...

Page 1244: ... Syntax logging console level To return to the default values use the default logging console command To disable logging to the console use the no logging console command Parameters level OPTIONAL Indicate a value from 0 to 7 or enter one of the following parameters emergencies alerts critical errors warnings notifications informational or debugging The default is 7 or debugging Defaults level 7 s...

Page 1245: ... local use local1 local use local2 local use local3 local use local4 local use local5 local use local6 local use local7 local use lpr line printer system mail mail system news USENET news sys9 system use sys10 system use sys11 system use sys12 system use sys13 system use sys14 system use syslog Syslog process user user process uucp Unix to Unix copy process The default is local7 Defaults local7 Co...

Page 1246: ...and Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information When you configure the snmp server trap source command the system messages logged to the history table are also sent to the SNMP network management station Related Commands show logging displays information logged to the history buffer logging history size Specify the number o...

Page 1247: ...vel Indicate a value from 0 to 7 or enter one of the following parameters emergencies alerts critical errors warnings notifications informational or debugging The default is 7 or debugging Defaults 7 or debugging Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Related Commands default logging monitor returns the logging monitor parameter...

Page 1248: ...er Syntax logging source interface interface To disable this command and return to the default setting use the no logging source interface command Parameters interface Enter the following keywords and slot port or number information For Loopback interfaces enter the keyword loopback then a number from zero 0 to 16383 For a Port Channel interface enter the keywords port channel then a number Tthe r...

Page 1249: ...tes a low severity level and vice versa The range is from 0 to 7 The default is 2 all Enter the keyword all to turn off all limit number of buffers Enter the keyword limit then the number of buffers to be queued for the terminal after which new messages are dropped The range is from 20 to 300 The default is 20 Defaults Disabled If enabled without the level or number of buffers options specified le...

Page 1250: ... 6 or informational Defaults 6 or informational Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Related Commands logging enables the logging to another device logging on enables logging logging version Displays syslog messages in a RFC 3164 or RFC 5424 format Syntax logging version 0 1 Defaults 0 Command Modes CONFIGURATION Version 9 5 0...

Page 1251: ...gged to the internal buffer of the switch Syntax show logging number history reverse number reverse number summary Parameters number OPTIONAL Enter the number of messages displayed in the output The range is from 1 to 65535 history OPTIONAL Enter the keyword history to view only information in the Syslog history table reverse OPTIONAL Enter the keyword reverse to view the Syslog messages in FIFO f...

Page 1252: ...UNIT0 M CP SEC 5 LOGOUT Exec session is terminated for user admin on line vty2 10 11 68 22 May 19 14 22 48 STKUNIT0 M CP SYS 5 CONFIG_I Configured from vty2 10 11 68 22 by admin May 19 12 05 43 STKUNIT0 M CP SYS 5 CONFIG_I Configured from vty2 10 11 68 22 by admin May 19 10 23 59 STKUNIT0 M CP SYS 5 CONFIG_I Configured from vty0 10 11 68 22 by admin May 19 10 23 58 STKUNIT0 M CP SEC 5 LOGOUT Exec ...

Page 1253: ... guide is platform specific For command information about other platforms refer to the relevant Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide The following is a list of the Dell Networking OS version history for this command Version 9 5 0 0 Introduced on the S4810 S4820T S6000 Z9000 and MXL Example Dell conf show logging audit Related Commands clear logging auditlog clears audit log terminal mon...

Page 1254: ...vilege Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Related Commands logging monitor sets the logging parameters on the monitor terminal 1254 Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP and Syslog ...

Page 1255: ...ooted Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information When the command is given as redundancy disable auto reboot stack unit it prevents the MXL 10 40GbE switch stack management unit and standby unit from rebooting if they fail When a particular unit number in the range from 0 to 5 is issued as part of the CLI it preven...

Page 1256: ...y Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information Resetting the management unit is not allowed and an error message displays if you try to do so Resetting is a soft reboot including flushing the forwarding tables Starting with the Dell Networking OS version 7 8 1 0 you can run this command directly on the stack standby unit standby master to reset the standby You...

Page 1257: ...4 being reset 00 02 50 STKUNIT4 S CP CHMGR 2 STACKUNIT_DOWN Stack unit 4 down reset 00 02 50 STKUNIT4 S CP IFMGR 1 DEL_PORT Removed port TenGig 4 1 48 Dell rebooting U Boot 1 1 4 June 6 2012 00 00 04 Related Commands reload reboots the system redundancy disable auto reboot resets the designated stack member show redundancy Display the current redundancy configuration status of automatic reboot con...

Page 1258: ...ync done Dell Related Commands redundancy disable auto reboot prevents the system from auto rebooting if it fails show system stack ports Display information about the stacking ports on all switches in the MXL 10 40GbE stack Syntax show system stack ports status topology Parameters status OPTIONAL Enter the keyword status to display the command output without the Connection field topology OPTIONAL...

Page 1259: ...40 up up 0 37 2 33 40 up up 0 41 1 49 40 up up 0 45 2 53 40 up up 1 33 2 37 40 up up 1 37 0 33 40 up up 1 49 0 41 40 up up 1 53 2 49 40 up up 2 33 0 37 40 up up 2 37 1 33 40 up up 2 49 1 53 40 up up 2 53 0 45 40 up up Example Status Dell show system stack ports status Topology Ring Interface Link Speed Admin Link Trunk Gb s Status Status Group 0 33 40 up up 0 37 40 up up 0 41 40 up up 0 45 40 up u...

Page 1260: ...m stack unit unit number stack group configured Parameters unit number 0 5 Number of the member stack unit The valid values are from 0 to 5 The default is 0 Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Related Commands reload reboots the system show system displays the current status of all stack members or a specific member stack un...

Page 1261: ... Syntax stack unit 0 5 priority 1 14 Parameters 0 5 Enter the stack member unit identifier from 0 to 5 of the switch on which you want to set the management priority 1 14 This preference parameter allows you to specify the management priority of one backup switch over another with 1 the lowest priority and 14 the highest The switch with the highest priority value will be chosen to become the manag...

Page 1262: ...lated Commands reload reboots the system show system displays the status of all stack members or a specific member stack unit renumber Change the stack member ID of any stack member or a stand alone unit Syntax stack unit 0 5 renumber 0 11 Parameters 0 5 The first instance of this value is the stack member unit identifier from 0 to 5 of the switch that you want add to the stack The second instance...

Page 1263: ... the new unit number Example Dell stack unit 0 renumber 2 Renumbering master unit will reload the stack Proceed to renumber confirm yes no Related Commands reload reboots the system redundancy disable auto reboot resets the designated stack member show system displays the current status of all stack members or a specific member Stacking 1263 ...

Page 1264: ...that physical interface if both are configured Do not apply per VLAN quality of service QoS on an interface that has storm control enabled either on an interface or globally show storm control broadcast Display the storm control broadcast configuration Syntax show storm control broadcast interface Parameters interface OPTIONAL Enter one of the following interfaces to display the interface specific...

Page 1265: ...igabit Ethernet interface enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot port information For a 40 Gigabit Ethernet interface enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot port information Defaults none Command Modes EXEC EXEC Privilege Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Example Dell show storm control multicast gigabitethernet 1 0 Multicast storm cont...

Page 1266: ...ation Interface Direction Packets Second TenGig 3 0 Ingress 1000 Dell storm control broadcast Configuration Configure the percentage of broadcast traffic allowed in the network Syntax storm control broadcast packets_per_second in To disable broadcast rate limiting use the no storm control broadcast packets_per_second in command Parameters packets_per_se cond Enter the packets per second of broadca...

Page 1267: ...on Configure the packets per second pps of multicast traffic Syntax storm control multicast packets_per_second in To disable storm control for multicast traffic into the network use the no storm control multicast packets_per_second in command Parameters packets_per_se cond Enter the packets per second of multicast traffic allowed into the network The range is from 0 to 33554368 Defaults none Comma...

Page 1268: ...uced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module storm control unknown unicast Configuration Configure the percentage of unknown unicast traffic allowed on an MXL switch ingress rate only Syntax storm control unknown unicast packets_per_second in To disable storm control for unknown unicast traffic use the no storm control unknown unicast packets_per_second in command Parameters packets_per_se cond Enter...

Page 1269: ... unicast storm control on the interface use the no storm control unknown unicast packets_per_second in command Parameters packets_per_se cond Enter the packets per second of broadcast traffic allowed into the network The range is from 0 to 33554431 Defaults none Command Modes INTERFACE conf if interface slot port Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Stor...

Page 1270: ...eyword primary to designate the bridge as the root bridge secondary Enter the keyword secondary to designate the bridge as a secondary root bridge Defaults priority value 32768 Command Modes SPANNING TREE The prompt is config stp Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module debug spanning tree Enable debugging of the spanning tree protocol and view information o...

Page 1271: ...ware only sends information on BPDUs for the last interface specified Related Commands portfast bpdufilter default enters SPANNING TREE mode on the switch description Enter a description of the spanning tree Syntax description description To remove the description from the spanning tree use the no description description command Parameters description Enter a description to identify the spanning t...

Page 1272: ...g state and the Learning state before transitioning to the Forwarding state Syntax forward delay seconds To return to the default setting use the no forward delay command Parameters seconds Enter the number of seconds that the system waits before transitioning STP to the Forwarding state The range is from 4 to 30 The default is 15 seconds Defaults 15 seconds Command Modes SPANNING TREE Command His...

Page 1273: ...he Forwarding state max age changes the wait time before STP refreshes protocol configuration information max age To maintain configuration information before refreshing that information set the time interval for the spanning tree bridge Syntax max age seconds To return to the default values use the no max age command Parameters seconds Enter a number of seconds the system waits before refreshing ...

Page 1274: ...E mode Syntax protocol spanning tree stp id To disable the Spanning Tree group use the no protocol spanning tree stp id command Parameters stp id Enter zero 0 The system supports one spanning tree group group 0 Defaults Not configured Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information STP is not enabled when you enter SPAN...

Page 1275: ...keyword brief to display a synopsis of the spanning tree group configuration information guard OPTIONAL Enter the keyword guard to display the type of guard enabled on an STP interface and the current port state interface interface OPTIONAL Enter the keyword interface and the type slot port of the interface you want displayed Type slot port options are the following For a Port Channel interface en...

Page 1276: ...changes the time of the last topology change and on what interface the topology change occurred Timers Lists the values for the following bridge timers hold time topology change hello time max age and forward delay Times List the number of seconds since the last hello time topology change notification aging Port 1 Displays the Interface type slot port information and the status of the interface Di...

Page 1277: ...lay 0 hold 0 Number of transitions to forwarding state 1 BPDU sent 18 received 0 The port is not in the portfast mode Port 28 GigabitEthernet 1 3 is Forwarding Port path cost 4 Port priority 8 Port Identifier 8 28 Designated root has priority 32768 address 0001 e800 0a56 Designated bridge has priority 32768 address 0001 e800 0a56 Designated port id is 8 28 designated path cost 0 Timers message age...

Page 1278: ...he Portfast feature on the interface Syntax spanning tree stp id cost cost rootguard portfast bpduguard shutdown on violation bpdufilter priority priority To disable Spanning Tree group on an interface use the no spanning tree stp id cost cost rootguard portfast bpduguard shutdown on violation bpdufilter priority priority command Parameters stp id Enter the STP instance ID The range is 0 cost cost...

Page 1279: ...ty 8 Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information If you enable portfast bpduguard on an interface and the interface receives a BPDU the software disables the interface and sends a message stating that fact The port is in ERR_DISABLE mode yet appears in the show interface commands as enabled If you do not enable shutdown...

Page 1280: ...ths in English You can enter the name of a day to change the order of the display to time day month year day Enter the number of the day The range is from 1 to 31 You can enter the name of a month to change the order of the display to time day month year year Enter a four digit number as the year The range is from 1993 to 2035 Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduce...

Page 1281: ...ndar Defaults Not configured Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information In the switch the hardware clock is separate from the software and is called the calendar This hardware clock runs continuously After the hardware clock the calendar is set the system automatically updates the software clock after system bootu...

Page 1282: ...ock restarts based on the hardware clock when the switch reboots Dell Networking OS recommends using an outside time source such as NTP to ensure accurate time on the switch Example Dell clock set 12 11 00 21 may 2012 Dell Related Commands ntp update calendar sets the switch using the NTP settings clock summer time date Set a date and time zone on which to convert the switch to daylight saving tim...

Page 1283: ...le 17 15 is 5 15 pm end year Enter a four digit number as the year The range is from 1993 to 2035 offset OPTIONAL Enter the number of minutes to add during the summer time period The range is from 1 to1440 The default is 60 minutes Defaults Not configured Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Related Commands calendar set sets ...

Page 1284: ...r the time in hours minutes For the hour variable use the 24 hour format example 17 15 is 5 15 pm end week Enter the one of the following as the week that daylight saving ends week number enter a number from 1 to 4 as the number of the week to end daylight saving time first enter the keyword first to end daylight saving time in the first week of the month last enter the keyword last to end dayligh...

Page 1285: ...e timezone You cannot use spaces offset Enter one of the following a number from 1 to 23 as the number of hours in addition to universal time coordinated UTC for the timezone a minus sign then a number from 1 to 23 as the number of hours Defaults Not configured Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information Coordinated...

Page 1286: ...p adjust all authentication events loopfilter packets select sync To disable debugging of NTP transactions use the no debug ntp adjust all authentication events loopfilter packets select sync command Parameters adjust Enter the keyword adjust to display information on NTP clock adjustments all Enter the keyword all to display information on all NTP transactions authentication Enter the keyword aut...

Page 1287: ...GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information You also must configure an authentication key for NTP traffic using the ntp authentication key command Related Commands ntp authentication key configures the authentication key for NTP traffic ntp trusted key configures a key to authenticate ntp authentication key Specify a key for authenticating the NTP server Syntax ntp authentication key number md5 0 7 key...

Page 1288: ...rom previous versions beginning in version 8 2 1 0 the system uses DES encryption to store the key in the startup config when you enter the ntp authentication key command Therefore if your system boots with a startup configuration from an versions prior to 8 2 1 0 in which you have configured ntp authentication key the system cannot correctly decrypt the key and cannot authenticate NTP packets In ...

Page 1289: ...ent multicast address To disable multicast reception use the no ntp multicast client multicast address command Parameters multicast address OPTIONAL Enter a multicast address Enter either an IPv4 address in dotted decimal format If you do not enter a multicast address the address 224 0 1 1 is configured if the interface address is IPv4 Defaults Not configured Command Modes INTERFACE Command Histor...

Page 1290: ...cted use the show ntp associations command Because many polls to NTP hosts can impact network performance Dell Networking OS recommends limiting the number of hosts configured Related Commands show ntp associations displays the NTP servers configured and their status ntp source Specify an interface s IP address to be included in the NTP packets Syntax ntp source interface To delete the configurati...

Page 1291: ... Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information The number parameter in the ntp trusted key command must be the same number as the number parameter in the ntp authentication key command If you change the ntp authentication key command you must also change the ntp trusted key command Related Commands ntp authentication key sets an authentication k...

Page 1292: ...on the switch hardware clock Syntax show calendar Command Modes EXEC EXEC Privilege Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Example Dell show calendar 12 29 34 pacific Tue May 22 2012 Dell Related Commands show clock displays the time and date from the switch software clock show clock Display the current clock settings Syntax show clock detail Parameters de...

Page 1293: ...sociations Display the NTP master and peers Syntax show ntp associations Command Modes EXEC EXEC Privilege Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information The following describes the show ntp associations command shown in the following example Field Description none One or more of the following symbols could be displayed means synchronized to this...

Page 1294: ...iseconds disp Displays the dispersion Example Dell show ntp associations remote ref clock st when poll reach delay offset disp 10 10 120 5 0 0 0 0 16 256 0 0 00 0 000 16000 0 172 16 1 33 127 127 1 0 11 6 16 377 0 08 1499 9 104 16 172 31 1 33 0 0 0 0 16 256 0 0 00 0 000 16000 0 192 200 0 2 0 0 0 0 16 256 0 0 00 0 000 16000 0 master synced master unsynced selected candidate Dell Related Commands sho...

Page 1295: ...t clock root dispersion is Displays the root and path dispersion peer mode is State what NTP mode the switch is This should be Client mode Example Dell show ntp status Clock is unsynchronized stratum 16 no reference clock frequency is 0 000 ppm stability is 0 000 ppm precision is 4294967279 reference time is 00000000 00000000 6 28 16 000 UTC Thu Feb 7 2036 clock offset is 0 000000 msec root delay ...

Page 1296: ...eive only mode Defaults None Command Modes INTERFACE TUNNEL Command History Version 9 4 0 0 Added the decapsulate any command Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information To enable a tunnel interface use this command You must define a tunnel mode for the tunnel to function If you previously defined the tunnel destination or source address the tunnel mode must b...

Page 1297: ...face enter the keyword GigabitEthernet then the slot port information For a Port Channel interface enter the keywords port channel then a number from 1 to 128 For a 10 Gigabit Ethernet interface enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot port information For a VLAN interface enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094 Defaults none Command Modes INTERFACE TUNNEL conf if tu Command ...

Page 1298: ...r the keyword unlimited to specify the unlimited number of keepalive probe packets Defaults Tunnel keepalive is disabled Command Modes INTERFACE TUNNEL Command History Version 9 4 0 0 Introduced on the MXL Usage Information When configured the system will send ICMP echo probe packets at the configured interval and expect a response within the configured number of attempts else the tunnel interface...

Page 1299: ...his command will fail if the address family entered does not match the outer header address family of the tunnel mode tunnel source or any other tunnel allow remote If any allow remote are configured the tunnel source or tunnel mode commands will fail if the outer header address family does not match that of the configured allow remote tunnel dscp Configure the method to set the DSCP in the outer ...

Page 1300: ...n ip address ipv6 address To delete a tunnel destination address use the no tunnel destination ip address ipv6 address command Parameters ip address Enter the destination IPv4 address for the tunnel ipv6 address Enter the destination IPv6 address for the tunnel Defaults none Command Modes INTERFACE TUNNEL conf if tu Command History Version 9 3 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Us...

Page 1301: ...XL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information This command is only valid for tunnel interfaces with an IPv6 outer header tunnel hop limit Configure the method to set the IPv4 time to live or the IPv6 hop limit value in the outer tunnel header Syntax tunnel hop limit value To restore the default tunnel hop limit use the no tunnel hop limit command Parameters value Enter the hop limit ipv6 or time ...

Page 1302: ...n IPv6 address configured Parameters interface type interface number Enter the interface type followed by a slot number Defaults None Command Modes INTERFACE TUNNEL Command History Version 9 4 0 0 Introduced on the MXL Usage Information The ip unnumbered command will fail in two condition If the logical ip address is configured If the tunnel mode is ipv6ip where ip address over tunnel interface is...

Page 1303: ...ollowed by the type slot and port information Defaults None Command Modes INTERFACE TUNNEL Command History Version 9 4 0 0 Introduced on the MXL Usage Information The ip unnumbered command will fail in two condition If the logical ip address is configured If the tunnel mode is ipv6ip where ip address over tunnel interface is not possible To ping the unnumbered tunnels the logical address route inf...

Page 1304: ...mpt NOTE This chapter describes only a few commands available in u Boot mode NOTE You cannot use the Tab key to complete commands in this mode boot change Change the operating system boot parameters Syntax boot change primary secondary default Command Modes uBoot Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module boot selection Change the ROM bootstrap bootflash parti...

Page 1305: ...fig retries Set the number of retries for network boot configuration failure Syntax boot write net config retries int Command Modes uBoot Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Example BOOT_USER boot write net config retries 2 Updated number of Network Boot Config retries to 2 BOOT_USER boot zero Clears the primary secondary or default boot parameters Synt...

Page 1306: ...d on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Example BOOT_USER help Dell Force10 Boot Interface Help Information Current access level USER LEVEL Use syntax help for more information on syntax Available command list 22 commands total boot change primary secondary default change operating system boot parameters boot selection a b change the rom bootstrap bootflash partition boot show net config retries sh...

Page 1307: ... 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module ignore startup config Ignore the system startup configuration Syntax ignore startup config Command Modes uBoot Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module interface management ethernet ip address Set the management port IP address and mask Syntax interface management ethernet ip address ip mask Command Modes uB...

Page 1308: ...the management port IP address and mask Syntax no interface management ethernet ip address Command Modes uBoot Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module reload Reload the MXL switch Syntax reload Command Modes uBoot Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module show boot blc Show the boot loop counter value Syntax show boot ...

Page 1309: ... selection Command Modes uBoot Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Example BOOT_USER show boot selection ROM BOOTSTRAP SELECTOR PARMETERS Next ROM bootstrap set to occur from Bootflash partition A Last ROM bootstrap occurred from Bootflash partition B BOOT_USER show bootflash Show summary of boot flash information Syntax show bootflash Command Modes uBo...

Page 1310: ... parameters Syntax show bootvar Command Modes uBoot Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Example BOOT_USER show bootvar PRIMARY OPERATING SYSTEM BOOT PARAMETERS boot device tftp file name premnath Management Etherenet IP address 10 16 130 134 16 Server IP address 10 16 127 35 Default Gateway IP address 15 0 0 1 Management Etherenet MAC address 00 01 E8 4...

Page 1311: ...nt ethernet Command Modes uBoot Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Example BOOT_USER show interface management ethernet Management ethernet IP address 10 16 130 134 16 BOOT_USER show interface management port config Show the management port boot characteristics Syntax show interface management port config Command Modes uBoot Command History Version 8 3...

Page 1312: ...mand list 22 commands total boot change primary secondary default change operating system boot parameters boot selection a b change the rom bootstrap bootflash partition boot show net config retries show number of retries for network boot config failure boot write net config retries int write number of retries for network boot config failure boot zero primary secondary default zero operating syste...

Page 1313: ...port range 10 Gigabit Ethernet tengigabitethernet slot port slot port range 40 Gigabit Ethernet fortygigabitethernet slot port slot port range Port channel port channel 1 512 port channel range Where port range and port channel range specify a range of ports separated by a dash and or individual ports port channels in any order for example gigabitethernet 1 1 2 5 9 11 12 port channel 1 3 5 A comma...

Page 1314: ... values are from 1 to 16 Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Related Commands clear ufd disable re enables downstream interfaces that are in a UFD Disabled Error state description Enter a text description of an uplink state group Syntax description text Parameters text Text description of the uplink state group...

Page 1315: ...specify a range of ports separated by a dash and or individual ports port channels in any order for example gigabitethernet 1 1 2 5 9 11 12 port channel 1 3 5 A comma is required to separate each port and port range entry Defaults none Command Modes UPLINK STATE GROUP Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information You can assign physical port or ...

Page 1316: ... ports is enabled Command Modes UPLINK STATE GROUP Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Related Commands downstream assigns a port or port channel to the uplink state group as a downstream interface upstream assigns a port or port channel to the uplink state group as an upstream interface uplink state group creates an uplink state group and enables the t...

Page 1317: ...terface upstream assigns a port or port channel to the uplink state group as an upstream interface uplink state group creates an uplink state group and enables the tracking of upstream links enable Re enable upstream link tracking for an uplink state group after it has been disabled Syntax enable To disable upstream link tracking without deleting the uplink state group use the no enable command Pa...

Page 1318: ...e links 2 downstream TenGigabitEthernet 0 1 2 5 9 11 12 upstream TenGigabitEthernet 0 3 4 Related Commands show uplink state group displays the status information on a specified uplink state group or all groups uplink state group creates an uplink state group and enables the tracking of upstream links show uplink state group Display status information on a specified uplink state group or all group...

Page 1319: ...e 13 1 Up Te 13 3 Up Te 13 5 Up Te 13 6 Up Uplink State Group 5 Status Enabled Down Upstream Interfaces Gi 0 0 Dwn Gi 0 3 Dwn Gi 0 5 Dwn Downstream Interfaces Te 13 2 Dis Te 13 4 Dis Te 13 11 Dis Te 13 12 Dis Te 13 13 Dis Te 13 14 Dis Te 13 15 Dis Uplink State Group 6 Status Enabled Up Upstream Interfaces Downstream Interfaces Uplink State Group 7 Status Enabled Up Upstream Interfaces Downstream I...

Page 1320: ...the Link Up state An uplink state group is considered to be operationally down if no upstream interfaces in the group are in the Link Up state No uplink state tracking is performed when a group is disabled or in an operationally down state Example Dell conf uplink state group 16 Dell conf 02 23 17 STKUNIT0 M CP IFMGR 5 ASTATE_UP Changed uplink state group Admin state to up Group 16 Related Command...

Page 1321: ...nel interfaces to an uplink state group You can assign an interface to only one uplink state group Configure each interface assigned to an uplink state group as either an upstream or downstream interface but not both You can assign individual member ports of a port channel to the group An uplink state group can contain either the member ports of a port channel or the port channel itself but not bo...

Page 1322: ...N is supported when all the members are only stackable VLAN trunk ports IP addresses on a stackable VLAN enabled VLAN are not supported if the VLAN contains stackable VLAN access ports This facility is provided for the simple network management protocol SNMP management over a stackable VLAN enabled VLAN containing only stackable VLAN trunk interfaces Layer 3 routing protocols on such a VLAN are no...

Page 1323: ...ts with an unmapped DEI value are colored green Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information You must first enable DEI for this configuration to take effect Related Commands dei enable enables DEI dei mark Set the DEI value on egress according to the color currently assigned to the packet Syntax dei mark green yellow 0 1...

Page 1324: ...rds and slot port or number information For a Port Channel interface enter the keywords port channel then a number The range is from 1 to 128 For a 10 Gigabit Ethernet interface enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot port information For a 40 Gigabyte Ethernet interface enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot port information Defaults Not configured Command Modes conf if vl vlan id s...

Page 1325: ...ence Gi 0 1 0 Green Gi 0 1 1 Yellow Gi 8 9 1 Red Gi 8 40 0 Yellow Related Commands dei honor honors the incoming DEI value show interface dei mark Display the dei mark configuration Syntax show interface dei mark interface slot port Parameters interface slot port Enter the interface type then the line card slot and port number Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduce...

Page 1326: ...move the access port designation remove the port using the no member interface command from all stackable VLAN enabled VLANs vlan stack compatible Enable the stackable VLAN feature on a VLAN Syntax vlan stack compatible To disable the Stackable VLAN feature on a VLAN use the no vlan stack compatible command Defaults Not configured Command Modes CONF IF VLAN Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introdu...

Page 1327: ...ck dot1p mapping c tag dot1p values sp tag dot1p value Parameters c tag dot1p value Enter the keyword c tag dot1p then the customer dot1p value that is mapped to a service provider do1p value The range is from 0 to 5 sp tag dot1p value Enter the keyword sp tag dot1p then the service provider dot1p value The range is from 0 to 5 Defaults none Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Version 8 3 16 1...

Page 1328: ... 2 port or port channel as a trunk port to the Stackable VLAN network vlan stack trunk Specify a Layer 2 port or port channel as a trunk port to the Stackable VLAN network Syntax vlan stack trunk To remove a trunk port designation from the selected interface use the no vlan stack trunk command Defaults Not configured Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10...

Page 1329: ...interface GigabitEthernet 0 42 no ip address switchport vlan stack trunk no shutdown Dell conf if gi 0 42 interface vlan 100 Dell conf if vl 100 vlan stack compatible Dell conf if vl 100 stack member gigabitethernet 0 42 Dell conf if vl 100 stack show config interface Vlan 100 no ip address vlan stack compatible member GigabitEthernet 0 42 shutdown Dell conf if vl 100 stack interface vlan 20 Dell ...

Page 1330: ...ell conf if te 10 0 exit Dell config interface vlan 20 Dell conf if vlan vlan stack compatible Dell conf if vlan member Gi 7 0 Gi 3 10 TenGi 8 0 Dell conf if vlan exit Dell config interface vlan 20 Dell conf if vlan untagged TenGi 8 0 Dell conf if vlan exit Dell config Dell config interface vlan 40 Dell conf if vlan tagged TenGi 8 0 Dell conf if vlan exit Dell config 1330 VLAN Stacking ...

Page 1331: ...on and are configured for rapid spanning tree protocol RSTP as described in the Virtual Link Trunking VLT chapter in the Dell Networking OS Configuration Guide back up destination Configure the IP address of the management interface on the remote VLT peer to be used as the endpoint of the VLT backup link for sending out of band hello messages Syntax back up destination ip address interval seconds ...

Page 1332: ... Module clear ip pim tib Clear PIM tree information from the PIM database Syntax clear ip pim tib group Parameters group OPTIONAL Enter the multicast group address in dotted decimal format A B C D Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information If you use this command on a local VLT node all multicast routes from the lo...

Page 1333: ...ain synced multicast routes or synced multicast outgoing interface OIF after a VLT peer node failure Syntax multicast peer routing timeout value To restore the default value use the no multicast peer routing timeout command Parameters value Enter the timeout value in seconds The range is from 1 to 1200 The default is 150 Default Not configured Command Modes VLT DOMAIN conf vlt domain Command Histo...

Page 1334: ... timeout for the software to wait before connecting to a VLT peer with a Down status This command is applicable for both IPV6 IPV4 Syntax peer routing timeout value To restore the default value use the no peer routing timeout command Parameters value Enter the timeout value in seconds The range is from 1 to 65535 The default value is 0 no timeout Command Modes VLT DOMAIN conf vlt domain Command Hi...

Page 1335: ...able Syntax show ip mroute static group address source address count snooping vlan vlan id group address source address summary vlt group address count Parameters Static OPTIONAL Enter the keyword static to view static multicast routes group address source address OPTIONAL Enter the multicast group address to view only routes associated with that group Enter the source address to view routes with ...

Page 1336: ... IO Module Usage Information The following describes the show ip mroute command shown in the examples Field Description S G Displays the forwarding entry in the multicast route table uptime Displays the amount of time the entry has been in the multicast forwarding table Incoming interface Displays the reverse path forwarding RPF information towards the source for S G entries and the RP for G entri...

Page 1337: ...0 224 10 10 1 uptime 00 04 03 Incoming interface GigabitEthernet 3 4 Outgoing interface list GigabitEthernet 3 12 GigabitEthernet 3 13 224 20 20 1 uptime 00 05 12 Incoming interface GigabitEthernet 3 12 Outgoing interface list GigabitEthernet 3 4 utgoing interface l GigabitEthernet 3 4 show vlt backup link Displays information on the backup link operation Syntax show vlt backup link Default Not co...

Page 1338: ...artBeat Status Up VLT Peer Status Up Local Unit Id 0 Version 6 1 Local System MAC address 00 01 e8 d7 3f bd Remote System MAC address 00 01 e8 d7 3f cf Configured System MAC address 00 00 00 0a 0a 0a Remote system version 6 1 Delay Restore timer 90 seconds Peer Routing Disabled Peer Routing timeout timer 0 seconds Multicast peer routing timeout 150 seconds Dell show vlt detail Displays detailed st...

Page 1339: ...ticast Routing IIF Inconsistency Multicast Route LocalIIF PeerIIF 22 22 22 200 225 1 1 2 VLAN 5 VLAN 6 225 1 1 2 VLAN 15 te 0 5 Dell show vlt mismatch Configure the time for a VLT node to retain synced multicast routes or synced multicast OIF after VLT peer node failure Syntax show vlt mismatch Command Modes EXEC Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Examp...

Page 1340: ...00 0a 0a 0a Primary Role Priority 700 Local System MAC address 00 01 e8 d7 3f bd Local System Role Priority 700 Local Unit Id 0 Dell show vlt statistics Displays statistics on VLT operations Syntax show vlt statistics Default Not configured Command Modes EXEC Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Example Dell show vlt statistics VLT Domain Statistics Heart...

Page 1341: ...kts Rcvd 0 NDP NA Non VLT Tunnel Pkts sent 0 NDP NA Non VLT Tunnel Pkts Rcvd 0 Ndp sync Pkts Sent 0 Ndp sync Pkts Rcvd 0 Ndp Reg Request sent 17 Ndp Reg Request rcvd 15 VLT Multicast Statistics Info Pkts Sent 0 Info Pkts Rcvd 0 Reg Request Sent 0 Reg Request Rcvd 0 Reg Response Sent 0 Reg Response Rcvd 0 Route updates sent to Peer 0 Route updates rcvd from Peer 0 Route update pkts sent to Peer 0 R...

Page 1342: ...t id id Parameters id Enter the system unit ID for VLT The range is from 0 to 1 Defaults Automatically assigned based on the MAC address of each VLT peer The peer with the lower MAC address is assigned unit 0 the peer with the higher MAC address is assigned unit 1 Command Modes VLT DOMAIN Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information When you cre...

Page 1343: ...responding port channel in the VLT peer for the VLT connection to an attached device Syntax vlt peer lag port channel id number Parameters id number Enter the port channel number that connects to another port channel in the VLT peer The range is from 1 to 128 Defaults Not configured Command Modes INTERFACE PORT CHANNEL Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module...

Page 1344: ...an ICL to a PVLAN Similarly if you dissociate an ICL from a PVLAN although the PVLAN symmetrictiy exists ICL is removed from that PVLAN in such a case The ICL Status field denotes the type of the VLAN port of the VLTi link configured in a PVLAN Example Dell Show vlt private vlan vlan id Codes C Community I Isolated V Internally tagged T tagged VLT Pvlan Primary Secondary ICL Status 10 V 20 C V 30 ...

Page 1345: ...P advertisements Syntax advertise interval seconds centisecs centisecs To return to the default settings use the no advertise interval command Parameters seconds Enter a number of seconds The range is from 1 to 255 The default is 1 second centisecs centisecs Enter the keyword centisecs followed by the number of centisecs in multiple of 25 centisecs The range is 25 to 4075 centisecs in multiples of...

Page 1346: ...g numbers 0 zero specifies an un encrypted authentication data follows 7 seven specifies a hidden authentication data follows password Enter a character string up to eight characters long as a password If you do not enter an encryption type the password is stored as clear text Defaults Not configured Command Modes VRRP Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Modul...

Page 1347: ...word TenGigabitEthernet then the slot port information For a VLAN interface enter the keyword vlan then the VLAN ID The VLAN ID range is from 1 to 4094 vrrp id OPTIONAL Enter a number from 1 to 255 as the VRRP group ID all Enter the keyword all to enable debugging of all VRRP groups packets Enter the keyword packets to enable debugging of VRRP control packets state Enter the keyword state to enabl...

Page 1348: ...Enabled Command Modes VRRP Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information To enable VRRP traffic assign an IP address to the VRRP group using the virtual address command and enter no disable Related Commands virtual address specifies the IP address of the virtual router hold time Specify a delay in seconds before a switch becomes the MASTER virtu...

Page 1349: ...the hold timer disable and re enable VRRP for the new hold timer value to take effect Related Commands disable disables a VRRP group preempt To preempt or become the MASTER router permit a BACKUP router with a higher priority value Syntax preempt To prohibit preemption use the no preempt command Defaults Enabled that is a BACKUP router can preempt the MASTER router Command Modes VRRP Command Histo...

Page 1350: ...change the priority of the VRRP group to 255 If you set the priority command to 255 and the virtual address is not equal to the interface s primary IP address an error message appears NOTE Configuring VRRP priority 255 on an interface on which DHCP Client is enabled is not supported show config View the non default VRRP configuration Syntax show config verbose Parameters verbose OPTIONAL Enter the...

Page 1351: ...ief OPTIONAL Enter the keyword brief to view a table of information on the VRRP groups Command Modes EXEC EXEC Privilege Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information The following describes the show vrrp brief command shown in the following example Item Description Interface Lists the interface type slot and port on which the VRRP group is conf...

Page 1352: ...00 200 200 207 short desc Dell Usage Information The following describes the show vrrp command shown in the following example Item Description GigabitEthernet 12 3 Displays the Interface the VRRP group ID and the network address If the interface is not sending VRRP packets 0 0 0 0 appears as the network address State master Displays the interface s state Na If not available master MASTER virtual r...

Page 1353: ...s displayed Dn or Up states whether the interface is down or up the interface type slot port information Example Dell show vrrp GigabitEthernet 12 3 VRID 1 Net 10 1 1 253 State Master Priority 105 Master 10 1 1 253 local Hold Down 0 sec Preempt TRUE AdvInt 1 sec Adv rcvd 0 Adv sent 1862 Gratuitous ARP sent 0 Virtual MAC address 00 00 5e 00 01 01 Virtual IP address 10 1 1 252 Authentication none Tr...

Page 1354: ...ubtracted from the priority value The range is 1 to 254 The default is 10 Defaults cost 10 Command Modes VRRP Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information If the interface is disabled the cost value is subtracted from the priority value and forces a new MASTER election if the priority value is lower than the priority value in the BACKUP virtual...

Page 1355: ...the VRRP group s virtual address with the same IP address as the interface s primary IP address and change the priority of the VRRP group to 255 You can ping the virtual addresses configured in all VRRP groups vrrp delay minimum Set the delay time for VRRP initialization after an interface comes up Syntax vrrp delay minimum seconds Parameters seconds Enter the number of seconds for the delay for V...

Page 1356: ...40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information This command applies to all the VRRP configured interfaces on a system When used with the vrrp delay minimum CLI the later timer rules the VRRP enabling For example if vrrp delay reload is 600 and the vrrp delay minimum is 300 When the system reloads VRRP waits 600 seconds 10 minutes to bring up VRRP on all interfaces that are up and configured for VRRP Whe...

Page 1357: ...s up to 12 virtual IP addresses per VRRP group VRRP for IPv6 Commands The following commands apply to IPv6 clear counters vrrp ipv6 Clear the counters recorded for IPv6 VRRP groups Syntax clear counters vrrp ipv6 vrid vrf instance Parameters vrid OPTIONAL Enter the number of an IPv6 VRRP group The range is from 1 to 255 vrf instance OPTIONAL Enter the name of a VRF instance 32 characters maximum t...

Page 1358: ...of all VRRP groups packets Enter the keyword packets to enable debugging of VRRP control packets state Enter the keyword state to enable debugging of VRRP state changes timer Enter the keyword timer to enable debugging of the VRRP timer Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information If no options are specified debug i...

Page 1359: ...scribes the show vrrp ipv6 command shown in the following example Line Beginning with Description GigabitEthernet Displays the Interface the VRRP group ID and the network address If the interface is no sending VRRP packets 0 0 0 0 appears as the network address VRF VRF instance to which the interface on which the VRRP group is configured belongs State master Displays the interface s state Na If no...

Page 1360: ... type and slot port or object number description and time since the last change in the state of the tracked object Cost to be subtracted from the VRRP group priority if the state of the tracked interface object goes DOWN Example Dell show vrrp ipv6 GigabitEthernet 5 6 IPv6 VRID 255 Version 3 Net fe80 201 e8ff fe7a 6bb9 VRF 0 default vrf State Master Priority 101 Master fe80 201 e8ff fe7a 6bb9 loca...

Page 1361: ...d VRRP group 10 is configured in VRF 2 the VRID used for the VRRP group is 16 x 10 2 or 162 This VRID value is used in the lowest byte of the virtual MAC address of the VRRP group and is also used for VRF routing NOTE Configure the same VRID on neighboring routers Dell Networking OS or non Dell Networking OS in the same VRRP group in order for all routers to interoperate version Set VRRP protocol ...

Page 1362: ...he VRRP protocol version to both the switch sends only VRRPv3 advertisements but can receive either VRRPv2 or VRRPv3 packets To migrate an IPv4 VRRP group from VRRPv2 to VRRPv3 1 Set the switches with the lowest priority to both 2 Set the switch with the highest priority to version to 3 3 Set all the switches from both to version 3 NOTE Do not run VRRP version 2 and version 3 in the same group for...

Page 1363: ...chable 0 network unreachable 1 host unreachable 2 protocol unreachable 3 port unreachable 4 fragmentation needed but don t fragment bit set 5 source route failed 6 destination network unknown 7 destination host unknown 8 source host isolated obsolete 9 destination network administratively prohibited 10 destination host administratively prohibited 11 network unreachable for TOS 12 host unreachable ...

Page 1364: ...dvertisement 10 0 router solicitation 11 time exceeded 0 time to live equals 0 during transit 1 time to live equals 0 during reassembly 12 parameter problem 1 IP header bad catchall error 2 required option missing 13 0 timestamp request 14 0 timestamp reply 15 0 information request obsolete 16 0 information reply obsolete 17 0 address mask request 18 0 address mask reply 1364 ICMP Message Types ...

Page 1365: ...e state to down d LINK_UP SNMP LINKUP IFA 1 PORT_LINKUP changed interface state to up d AUTHENTICATION_FAIL SNMP AUTH SNMP 3 SNMP_AUTH_FAIL SNMP Authentication failed Request with invalid community string EGP_NEIGHBOR_LOSS SNMP NONE OSTATE_DOWN SNMP LINKDOWN IFM 1 OSTATE_DN changed interface state to down s IFM 5 CSTATE_DN Changed interface Physical state to down s OSTATE_UP SNMP LINKUP IFM 1 OSTA...

Page 1366: ...arm cleared chassis temperature normal s d temperature is within threshold of dC CHM_MAJ_ALRM_TEMP ENVMON TEMP CHMGR 2 MAJOR_TEMP Major alarm chassis temperature high s temperature reaches or exceeds threshold of dC CHM_MAJ_ALRM_TEMP_CLR ENVMON TEMP CHMGR 2 MAJOR_TEMP_CLR Major alarm cleared chassis temperature lower s d temperature is within threshold of dC TME_TASK_SUSPEND ENVMON NONE TME 2 TASK...

Page 1367: ...PROTOERR VRRP protocol error on S BGP4_ESTABLISHED PROTO NONE TRAP 5 PEER_ESTABLISHED Neighbor a state s BGP4_BACKW_XSITION PROTO NONE TRAP 5 BACKWARD_STATE_TRANS Neighbor a state s ETS_TRAP_TYPE_MODULE_STATUS_CHA NGE ETS NONE DIFFSERV 5 ETS_TRAP_TYPE_MODULE_STATUS_CHANGE ETS Module status changed to enabled DIFFSERV 5 ETS_TRAP_TYPE_MODULE_STATUS_CHANGE ETS Module status changed to disabled ETS_TR...

Page 1368: ...MIN_MODE_CHANGE PFC Admin mode changed to on for port s DIFFSERV 5 PFC_TRAP_TYPE_ADMIN_MODE_CHANGE PFC Admin mode changed to off for port s PFC_TRAP_TYPE_OPER_STATE_CHANGE PFC NONE DIFFSERV 5 PFC_TRAP_TYPE_OPER_STATE_CHANGE PFC Oper state changed to init for port s DIFFSERV 5 PFC_TRAP_TYPE_OPER_STATE_CHANGE PFC Oper state changed to off for port s DIFFSERV 5 PFC_TRAP_TYPE_OPER_STATE_CHANGE PFC Ope...

Page 1369: ...mit per VLAN is reached FIPS_ENODE_DROP FIPS NONE FCOE 5 ENODE_DROP New ENode d s discovered in interface s dropped as max ENode limit in system reached FIPS_SESSION_DROP FIPS NONE FCOE 5 SESSION_DROP New session d s request in interface s dropped as max session limit in system reached FIPS_ACL_INSTALL_FAIL FIPS NONE FCOE 5 ACL_INSTALL_FAIL problem in installing ACL entries due to no space or hard...

Page 1370: ...s The dcb input and dcb output configuration commands are deprecated starting with Dell Networking OS Release 9 3 0 0 on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch platform Use the dcp map command to create a DCB map to configure priority flow control PFC and enhanced transmission selection ETS on Ethernet ports that support converged Ethernet traffic The Dell Networking Operating System OS commands for the DCB feat...

Page 1371: ...ll dcb buffer threshold policies to change mappings The show dcb command has been enhanced to display the following additional buffer related information S4810 YU MR Dell conf do show dcb dcb Status Enabled PFC Queue Count 2 Indicate the PFC queue configured Total buffer lossy lossless in KB 7787 Total buffer space for lossy and lossless queues PFC total buffer in KB 6526 Indicates the total buffe...

Page 1372: ...e dcb map command is supported only on physical Ethernet interfaces To remove a DCB map from an interface enter the no dcb map map name command in Interface configuration mode Related Commands show qos dcb map displays the dcb map profiles configured on the system priority pgid Assign 802 1p priority traffic to a priority group in a DCB map FC Flex IO Modules with MXL Syntax priority pgid dot1p0_g...

Page 1373: ...rity 4 Priority group 4 contains traffic with dot1p priority 5 6 and 7 To remove a priority pgid configuration from a DCB map enter the no priority pgid command Related Commands dcb map creates a DCB map to configure PFC and ETS parameters and applies the PFC and ETS settings on Ethernet ports priority group bandwidth pfc configures the ETS bandwidth allocation and the PFC setting used to manage t...

Page 1374: ... priority group Repeat the priority group bandwidth pfc command to configure PFC and ETS traffic handling for each priority group in a DCB map You can enable PFC on a maximum of two priority queues If you configure more than one priority group as strict priority the higher numbered priority queue is given preference when scheduling data traffic If a priority group does not use its allocated bandwi...

Page 1375: ... configure Ethernet FCoE ports in a converged network You can also configure and apply a different DCB map with other PFC and ETS settings to customize the handling of CEE traffic on specified ports dcb map command The following table describes the show dcb map brief and show dcb map output shown in the example below Field Description DCB Map Name Name of a DCB map Interface Ethernet interface on ...

Page 1376: ...e specified map Command Modes EXEC EXEC Privilege Command History Version 9 3 0 0 Introduced on the FC Flex IO module installed in the MXL 10 40GbE Switch Usage Information Use the show qos dcb map command to display the enhanced transmission selection ETS and priority based flow control PFC parameters used to configure server facing Ethernet ports The following table describes the show qos dcb ma...

Page 1377: ...iorities 3 Related Commands dcb map creates a DCB map to configure PFC and ETS parameters and applies the PFC and ETS settings on Ethernet ports DCB Command The following DCB command is supported on the FC Flex IO module installed in the MXL 10 40GbE Switch platform dcb enable Enable data center bridging Syntax dcb enable To disable DCB use the no dcb enable command Defaults none Command Modes CON...

Page 1378: ...ty TLVs are enabled to advertise FCoE and iSCSI Command Modes PROTOCOL LLDP Command History Version 9 3 0 0 Introduced on the FC Flex IO module installed in the M I O Aggregator and MXL 10 40GbE Switch Usage Information To disable TLV transmission use the no form of the command for example no advertise dcbx appln tlv iscsi advertise dcbx tlv On a DCBX port with a manual role configure the PFC and ...

Page 1379: ...il command dcbx port role Configure the DCBX port role the interface uses to exchange DCB information Syntax dcbx port role config source auto downstream auto upstream manual To remove DCBX port role use the no dcbx port role config source auto downstream auto upstream manual command Parameters config source auto downstream auto upstream manual Enter the DCBX port role where config source configur...

Page 1380: ...n the interface where auto configures the port to operate using the DCBX version received from a peer cee configures the port to use CDD Intel 1 01 cin configures the port to use Cisco Intel Nuova DCBX 1 0 ieee v2 configures the port to use IEEE 802 1az Draft 2 5 Defaults Auto Command Modes INTERFACE PROTOCOL LLDP Command History Version 9 3 0 0 Introduced on the FC Flex IO module installed in the...

Page 1381: ...TLVs Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Version 9 3 0 0 Introduced on the FC Flex IO module installed in the M I O Aggregator and MXL 10 40GbE Switch fcoe priority bits Configure the FCoE priority advertised for the FCoE protocol in application priority TLVs Syntax fcoe priority bits priority bitmap To remove the configured FCoE priority use the no fcoe priority bits comman...

Page 1382: ...show interface dcbx detail Displays the DCBX configuration on an interface Syntax show interface port type slot port dcbx detail Parameters port type Enter the port type slot port Enter the slot port number Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 9 3 0 0 Introduced on the FC Flex IO module installed in the M I O Aggregator and MXL 10 40GbE Switch Usage Information To clear DCBX frame c...

Page 1383: ...rating version DCBX version that the peer uses to exchange DCB parameters Local DCBX TLVs Transmitted Transmission status enabled or disabled of advertised DCB TLVs see TLV code at the top of the show command output Local DCBX Status DCBX Operational Version DCBX version advertised in Control TLVs Local DCBX Status DCBX Max Version Supported Highest DCBX version supported in Control TLVs Local DCB...

Page 1384: ...Configuration TLV enabled e ETS Configuration TLV disabled R ETS Recommendation TLV enabled r ETS Recommendation TLV disabled P PFC Configuration TLV enabled p PFC Configuration TLV disabled F Application priority for FCOE enabled f Application Priority for FCOE disabled I Application priority for iSCSI enabled i Application Priority for iSCSI disabled Interface TenGigabitEthernet 0 49 Remote Mac ...

Page 1385: ...bandwidth is assigned to each port queue and each dot1p priority in a priority group To configure bandwidth amounts in associated dot1p queues use the bandwidth percentage command When specified bandwidth is assigned to some port queues and not to others the remaining bandwidth 100 minus assigned bandwidth amount is equally distributed to unassigned non strict priority queues in the priority group...

Page 1386: ...Syntax clear ets counters port type slot port Parameters port type Enter the keywords port type then the slot port information Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Version 9 3 0 0 Introduced on the FC Flex IO module installed in the MXL 10 40GbE Switch dcb map Create a DCB map to configure priority flow control PFC and enhanced transmission selection ETS on Ethernet ports tha...

Page 1387: ...Configure the ETS bandwidth allocation and PFC mode used to manage port traffic in an 802 1p priority group MXL 10 40GbE Switch with the FC Flex IO module Syntax priority group group num bandwidth percentage strict priority pfc on off Parameters priority group group num Enter the keyword priority group followed by the number of an 802 1p priority group Use the priority pgid command to create the p...

Page 1388: ... If a priority group does not use its allocated bandwidth the unused bandwidth is made available to other priority groups To remove a priority group configuration in a DCB map enter the no priority group bandwidth pfc command By default equal bandwidth is assigned to each dot1p priority in a priority group Use the bandwidth parameter to configure the bandwidth percentage assigned to a priority gro...

Page 1389: ...ing is not supported at the same time for a priority group If you configure both the configured bandwidth allocation is ignored for priority group traffic when you apply the output policy on an interface Related Commands qos policy output ets configures the ETS bandwidth allocation bandwidth percentage bandwidth percentage allocated to priority traffic in port queues set pgid Configure the priorit...

Page 1390: ...erface summary command shown in the following example Field Description Interface Interface type with stack unit and port number Max Supported TC Group Maximum number of priority groups supported Number of Traffic Classes Number of 802 1p priorities currently configured Admin mode ETS mode on or off When on the scheduling and bandwidth allocation configured in an ETS output policy or received in a...

Page 1391: ...ture for legacy DCBX versions Asymmetric for an IEEE version Conf TLV Tx Status Status of ETS Configuration TLV advertisements enabled or disabled Reco TLV Tx Status Status of ETS Recommendation TLV advertisements enabled or disabled Input Conf TLV pkts Number of ETS Configuration TLVs received Output Conf TLV pkts Number of ETS Configuration TLVs transmitted Error Conf TLV pkts Number of ETS Erro...

Page 1392: ...idth TSA 0 13 ETS 1 13 ETS 2 13 ETS 3 13 ETS 4 12 ETS 5 12 ETS 6 12 ETS 7 12 ETS Oper status is init Conf TLV Tx Status is disabled Traffic Class TLV Tx Status is disabled Example Detail Dell conf show interfaces tengigabitethernet 0 0 ets detail Interface TenGigabitEthernet 0 0 Max Supported TC Groups is 4 Number of Traffic Classes is 8 Admin mode is on Admin Parameters Admin is enabled TC grp Pr...

Page 1393: ...t Conf TLV Tx Status is disabled Traffic Class TLV Tx Status is disabled 0 Input Conf TLV Pkts 0 Output Conf TLV Pkts 0 Error Conf TLV Pkts 0 Input Traffic Class TLV Pkts 0 Output Traffic Class TLV Pkts 0 Error Traffic Class TLV Pkts show qos dcb output Displays the ETS configuration in a DCB output policy Syntax show qos dcb output ets profile Parameters ets profile Enter the ETS profile Command ...

Page 1394: ...ls Displays the ETS configuration applied to egress traffic on stacked ports including ETS Operational mode on each unit and the configurated priority groups with dot1p priorities bandwidth allocation and scheduler type Syntax show stack unit all stack unit stack ports all port number ets details Parameters stack unit Enter the stack unit identification port number Enter the port number Command Mo...

Page 1395: ...counters Clear the PFC TLV counters and PFC statistics on an interface or stack unit Syntax clear pfc counters port type slot port stack unit unit number all all stack ports all interface statistics Parameters port type Enter the keywords port type then the slot port information stack unit unit number Enter the keywords stack unit then the stack unit number to be cleared all stack ports all Enter ...

Page 1396: ...policy The maximum is 32 characters Defaults none Command Modes DCB INPUT POLICY DCB OUTPUT POLICY Command History Version 9 3 0 0 Introduced on the FC Flex IO module installed in the MXL 10 40GbE Switch pfc link delay Configure the link delay used to pause specified priority traffic Syntax pfc link delay value To remove the link delay use the no pfc link delay command Parameters value The range i...

Page 1397: ...lete lossless handling of traffic also enable PFC on all DCB egress ports or configure the dot1p priority queue assignment of PFC priorities to lossless queues refer to pfc no drop queues To disable PFC operation on an interface enter the no pfc mode on command in DCB Input Policy Configuration mode PFC is enabled and disabled as global DCB operation is enabled dcb enable or disabled no dcb enable...

Page 1398: ...3 1 4 2 5 3 6 3 7 3 pfc priority Configure the CoS traffic to be stopped for the specified delay Syntax pfc priority priority range To delete the pfc priority configuration use the no pfc priority command Parameters priority range Enter the 802 1p values of the frames to be paused Separate the priority values with a comma specify a priority range with a dash for example pfc priority 1 3 5 7 The ra...

Page 1399: ...ow dcb stack unit unit number Parameters unit number Enter the DCB unit number The range is from 0 to 5 Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Version 9 3 0 0 Introduced on the FC Flex IO module installed in the MXL 10 40GbE Switch Usage Information Specify a stack unit number on the Master switch in a stack Example Dell show dcb stack unit 0 port set 0 DCB Status Enabled PFC Port Count 56 c...

Page 1400: ...vice for DCBX exchange of PFC configuration with a list of the configured PFC priorities Willing status of peer device for DCBX exchange Willing bit received in PFC TLV enabled or disable Local is enabled DCBX operational status enabled or disabled with a list of the configured PFC priorities Operational status local port Port state for current operational PFC configuration Init Local PFC configur...

Page 1401: ... Application Priority TLV Remote ISCSI Priority Map Status of iSCSI advertisements in application priority TLVs from the remote peer port enabled or disabled PFC TLV Statistics Input TLV pkts Number of PFC TLVs received PFC TLV Statistics Output TLV pkts Number of PFC TLVs transmitted PFC TLV Statistics Error pkts Number of PFC error packets received PFC TLV Statistics Pause Tx pkts Number of PFC ...

Page 1402: ...orityMap is 0x8 Local ISCSI PriorityMap is 0x10 Remote FCOE PriorityMap is 0x8 Remote ISCSI PriorityMap is 0x8 0 Input TLV pkts 1 Output TLV pkts 0 Error pkts 0 Pause Tx pkts 0 Pause Rx pkts show interface pfc statistics Displays counters for the PFC frames received and transmitted by dot1p priority class on an interface Syntax show interface port type slot port pfc statistics Parameters port type...

Page 1403: ...d to ingress traffic on stacked ports including PFC Operational mode on each unit with the configured priorities link delay and number of pause packets sent and received Syntax show stack unit all stack unit stack ports all port number pfc details Parameters stack unit Enter the stack unit port number Enter the port number Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 9 3 0 0 Introduced on t...

Page 1404: ...aring for different traffic types such as LAN and SAN according to 802 1p priority classes of service DCBx should be enabled on the system before the FIP snooping feature is enabled All of the commands that are supported for FCoE on the MXL and I O Aggregator apply to the FC Flex IO modules Similarly all of the configuration procedures and the settings that are applicable for FCoE on the MXL and I...

Page 1405: ... 0 Introduced on the M I O Aggregator and MXL 10 40GbE Switch with the FC Flex IO module Usage Information A DCB map is a template used to configure DCB parameters and apply them on converged Ethernet interfaces DCB parameters include priority based flow control PFC and enhanced traffic selection ETS To display the PFC and ETS settings in DCB maps enter the show qos dcb map command Use the dcb map...

Page 1406: ...e map creates an FCoE map which contains the parameters used in the communication between servers and a SAN fabric show fcoe map displays the Fibre Channel and FCoE configuration parameters in FCoE maps fabric Apply an FCoE map on a fabric facing Fibre Channel FC port M I O Aggregator and MXL 10 40GbE Switch with the FC Flex IO module Syntax fabric map name Parameters map name Maximum 32 alphanume...

Page 1407: ...nd in Interface configuration mode Related Commands fcoe map creates an FCoE map which contains the parameters used in the communication between servers and a SAN fabric show fcoe map displays the Fibre Channel and FCoE configuration parameters in FCoE maps fabric id vlan In an FCoE map configure the association between the dedicated VLAN used to carry FCoE traffic between servers and a SAN and th...

Page 1408: ...priority In an FCoE map configure the priority used by a server CNA to select an upstream FCoE forwarder FCF M I O Aggregator and MXL 10 40GbE Switch with the FC Flex IO module Syntax fcf priority priority Parameters priority Enter the priority assigned to the M I O Aggregator and MXL 10 40GbE Switch with the FC Flex IO module NPIV proxy gateway which appears to a downstream server CNA as an FCF T...

Page 1409: ... on the M I O Aggregator and MXL 10 40GbE Switch with the FC Flex IO module Usage Information The FC MAP value you enter must match the FC MAP value used by an FC switch or FCoE forwarder FCF in the fabric An FCF switch accepts only FCoE traffic that uses the correct FC MAP value The FC MAP value is used to generate the fabric provided MAC address FP MAC The FPMA is used by servers to transmit FCo...

Page 1410: ...s available at the global level only fcoe map Create an FCoE map which contains the parameters used to configure the links between server CNAs and a SAN fabric Apply the FCoE map on a server facing Ethernet port M I O Aggregator and MXL 10 40GbE Switch with the FC Flex IO module Syntax fcoe map map name Parameters map name Maximum 32 alphanumeric characters Defaults None on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch...

Page 1411: ...applied on fabric facing FC ports and server facing 10 Gigabit Ethernet ports An FCoE map consists of the following parameters the dedicated FCoE VLAN used for storage traffic the destination SAN fabric FC MAP value FCF priority used by a server and the FIP keepalive FKA advertisement timeout In each FCoE map the fabric ID FC MAP value and FCoE VLAN parameters must be unique Use one FCoE map to ac...

Page 1412: ...x interface vlan vlan id Parameters vlan id Enter a number as the VLAN Identifier The range is 1 to 4094 Defaults Not configured Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 9 3 0 0 Introduced on the M I O Aggregator and MXL 10 40GbE Switch with the FC Flex IO module configured as an NPIV proxy gateway Usage Information FCoE storage traffic received from servers on an M I O Aggregator and M...

Page 1413: ...ing of FIP keepalive messages if it is disabled M I O Aggregator and MXL 10 40GbE Switch with the FC Flex IO module Syntax keepalive Parameters None Defaults FIP keepalive monitoring is enabled on Ethernet and Fibre Channel interfaces Command Modes FCOE MAP Command History Version 9 3 0 0 Introduced on the M I O Aggregator and MXL 10 40GbE Switch with the FC Flex IO module Usage Information FIP ke...

Page 1414: ...figure whether priority based flow control is enabled on or disabled off for port traffic in the priority group Defaults None Command Modes DCB MAP Command History Version 9 3 0 0 Introduced on the M I O Aggregator and MXL 10 40GbE Switch with the FC Flex IO module Usage Information Use the dcb map command to configure priority groups with PFC and or ETS settings and apply them to Ethernet interfa...

Page 1415: ...nd MXL 10 40GbE Switch with the FC Flex IO module Syntax show fcoe map brief map name Parameters brief Displays an overview of currently configured FCoE maps map name Displays the FC and FCoE configuration parameters in a specified FCoE map The FCoE map is applied on Ethernet FCoE and FC ports to transmit FC storage traffic to a specified fabric Command Modes EXEC EXEC Privilege Command History Ve...

Page 1416: ...rameters in the FCoE map are valid Active all mandatory FCoE and FC parameters are correctly configured or Incomplete either the FC MAP value fabric ID or VLAN ID are not correctly configured Oper State Operational status of link to the fabric Up link is up and transmitting FC traffic Down link is down and not transmitting FC traffic Link wait link is up and waiting for FLOGI to complete on peer F...

Page 1417: ...ing FC traffic Link wait link is up and waiting for FLOGI to complete on peer FC port or Removed port has been shut down Members M I O Aggregator and MXL 10 40GbE Switch with the FC Flex IO module Ethernet and FC ports that are members of the dedicated FCoE VLAN that carries storage traffic to the specified fabric Example FTOS show fcoe map brief Fabric Name Fabric Id Vlan Id FC MAP FCF Priority C...

Page 1418: ... and the SAN fabric in each server fabric connection over an M I O Aggregator and MXL 10 40GbE Switch with the FC Flex IO module NPIV proxy gateway The following table describes the show npiv devices brief output shown in the example below Field Description ENode Intf M I O Aggregator and MXL 10 40GbE Switch with the FC Flex IO module Ethernet interface slot port to which a server CNA is connected...

Page 1419: ...and MXL 10 40GbE Switch with the FC Flex IO module Ethernet port in ENode mode Enode MAC MAC address of a server CNA port Enode Intf Port number of a server facing Ethernet port operating in ENode mode FCF MAC Fibre Channel forwarder MAC MAC address of M I O Aggregator and MXL 10 40GbE Switch with the FC Flex IO module FCF interface Fabric Intf Fabric facing Fibre Channel port slot port on which F...

Page 1420: ... dd ef 10 c8 Fabric Intf Fc 0 5 FCoE Vlan 1003 Fabric Map fid_1003 ENode WWPN 20 01 00 10 18 f1 94 20 ENode WWNN 20 00 00 10 18 f1 94 21 FCoE MAC 0e fc 03 01 02 01 FC ID 01 02 01 LoginMethod FLOGI Secs 5593 Status LOGGED_IN ENode 1 ENode MAC 00 10 18 f1 94 22 ENode Intf Te 0 13 FCF MAC 5c f9 dd ef 10 c9 Fabric Intf Fc 0 0 FCoE Vlan 1003 Fabric Map fid_1003 ENode WWPN 10 00 00 00 c9 d9 9c cb ENode ...

Page 1421: ...dcbx appln tlv On a DCBX port with a manual role configure the application priority TLVs advertised on the interface to DCBX peers Syntax advertise dcbx appln tlv fcoe iscsi To remove the application priority TLVs use the no advertise dcbx appln tlv fcoe iscsi command Parameters fcoe iscsi Enter the application priority TLVs where fcoe enables the advertisement of FCoE in application priority TLVs...

Page 1422: ...s command is supported in Programmable Mux PMUX mode only Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information You can configure the transmission of more than one TLV type at a time for example advertise dcbx tlv ets conf ets reco You can enable ETS recommend TLVs ets reco only if you enable ETS configuration TLVs ets conf To disable TLV transmission use the no form o...

Page 1423: ...only to data queues not to control queues The configuration of bandwidth allocation and strict queue scheduling is not supported at the same time for a priority group If you configure both the configured bandwidth allocation is ignored for priority group traffic when you apply the output policy on an interface By default equal bandwidth is assigned to each priority group in the ETS output policy a...

Page 1424: ...Usage Information As soon as you apply a DCB policy with PFC enabled on an interface DCBx starts exchanging information with PFC enabled peers The IEEE802 1Qbb CEE and CIN versions of PFC TLV are supported DCBx also validates PFC configurations received in TLVs from peer devices By applying a DCB input policy with PFC enabled you enable PFC operation on ingress port traffic To achieve complete los...

Page 1425: ...utput policy on an interface ETS configured scheduling and bandwidth allocation take precedence over any configured settings in QoS output policies The ETS configuration associated with 802 1 priority traffic in a DCB output policy is used in DCBX negotiation with ETS peers NOTE Please note that Dell Networking does not recommended to use this command as it has been deprecated in the current 9 4 0...

Page 1426: ...for PFC applied to an interface may become invalid if you reconfigure the dot1p queue mapping This situation occurs when the new dot1p queue assignment exceeds the maximum number 2 of lossless queues supported globally on the switch In this case all PFC configurations received from PFC enabled peers are removed and resynchronized with the peer devices Traffic may be interrupted when you reconfigur...

Page 1427: ...put stack unit all configuration NOTE Please note that Dell Networking does not recommended to use this command as it has been deprecated in the current 9 4 0 0 release A warning message appears when you try to run this command indicating that you have to use the dcb map commands in the future Related Commands dcb policy output stack unit stack ports all applies the specified DCB output policy dcb...

Page 1428: ...tack or a single stacked switch Syntax dcb policy output stack unit all stack unit id stack ports all dcb output policy name To remove all DCB output policies applied to the stacked ports use the no dcb policy output stack unit all command To remove only the DCB output policies applied to the specified switch use the no dcb policy output stack unit command Parameters stack unit id Enter the stack ...

Page 1429: ...t 1 56 Enter the pfc port count The range is 1 to 56 pfc queues 1 2 Enter the pfc queue number The range is 1 to 2 Defaults The PFC buffer is enabled on all ports on the stack unit Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the M I O Aggregator This command is supported in Programmable Mux PMUX mode only Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Modul...

Page 1430: ...TION Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the M I O Aggregator This command is supported in Programmable Mux PMUX mode only Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information If you configure PFC on a 40GbE port count the 40GbE port as four PFC enabled ports in the pfc port number you enter in the command syntax To achieve lossless PFC operation the PFC por...

Page 1431: ...LLDP Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the M I O Aggregator This command is supported in Programmable Mux PMUX mode only Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information DCBX requires that you enable LLDP to advertise DCBX TLVs to peers Configure DCBX operation at the INTERFACE level on a switch or globally on the switch To verify the DCBX configuratio...

Page 1432: ...tect timer config exchng fail mgmt resource sem tlv To disable DCBX debugging use the no debug dcbx command Parameters all auto detect timer config exchng fail mgmt resource sem tlv Enter the type of debugging where all enables all DCBX debugging operations auto detect timer enables traces for DCBX auto detect timers config exchng enables traces for DCBX configuration exchanges fail enables traces...

Page 1433: ... Module Related Commands dcb input creates a DCB PFC input policy dcb policy input applies the output policy dcb output creates a DCBETS output policy dcb policy output applies the output policy ets mode on Enable the ETS configuration so that scheduling and bandwidth allocation configured in an ETS output policy or received in a DCBX TLV from a peer can take effect on an interface Syntax ets mode...

Page 1434: ...onfigure the FCoE priority advertised for the FCoE protocol in application priority TLVs Syntax fcoe priority bits priority bitmap To remove the configured FCoE priority use the no fcoe priority bits command Parameters priority bitmap Enter the priority bitmap range The range is from 1 to FF Defaults 0x8 Command Modes PROTOCOL LLDP Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the M I O Aggregator...

Page 1435: ... Defaults 45556 quantum Command Modes DCB INPUT POLICY Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the M I O Aggregator This command is supported in Programmable Mux PMUX mode only Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information The minimum link delay must be greater than the round trip transmission time a peer must honor a PFC pause frame multiplied by the num...

Page 1436: ...vel flow control at the same time on an interface Related Commands dcb input creates a DCB input policy pfc no drop queues Configure the port queues that still function as no drop queues for lossless traffic Syntax pfc no drop queues queue range To remove the no drop port queues use the no pfc no drop queues command Parameters queue range Enter the queue range Separate the queue values with a comm...

Page 1437: ... Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the M I O Aggregator This command is supported in Programmable Mux PMUX mode only Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information You can enable any number of 802 1p priorities for PFC Queues to which PFC priority traffic is mapped are lossless by default Traffic may be interrupted due to an interface flap going down and coming up w...

Page 1438: ...y values that are grouped for similar bandwidth allocation and scheduling and that share latency and loss requirements All 802 1p priorities mapped to the same queue must be in the same priority group You must configure 802 1p priorities in priority groups associated with an ETS output policy You can assign each dot1p priority to only one priority group The maximum number of priority groups suppor...

Page 1439: ... MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information The ETS configuration associated with 802 1p priority traffic in a DCB output policy is used in DCBX negotiation with ETS peers If you disable ETS in an output policy applied to an interface using the no ets mode on command any previously configured QoS settings at the interface or global level take effect If you configure QoS settings at the interf...

Page 1440: ...t bandwidth is assigned to priority group 0 The complete bandwidth is equally assigned to each priority class so that each class has 12 to 13 NOTE Please note that Dell Networking does not recommended to use this command as it has been deprecated in the current 9 4 0 0 release A warning message appears when you try to run this command indicating that you have to use the dcb map commands in the fut...

Page 1441: ...s Related Commands scheduler schedules the priority traffic in port queues bandwidth percentage bandwidth percentage allocated to the priority traffic in port queues scheduler Configure the method used to schedule priority traffic in port queues Syntax scheduler value To remove the configured priority schedule use the no scheduler command Parameters value Enter schedule priority value The valid va...

Page 1442: ...eues set pgid Configure the priority group identifier Syntax set pgid value To remove the priority group use the no set pgid command Parameters value Enter the priority group identification The range is from 0 to 7 Defaults none Command Modes PRIORITY GROUP Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the M I O Aggregator This command is supported in Programmable Mux PMUX mode only Version 8 3 16...

Page 1443: ... port set 0 DCB Status Enabled PFC Queue Count 2 Total Buffer lossy lossless in KB 7982 PFC Total Buffer in KB 5872 PFC Shared Buffer in KB 832 PFC Available Buffer in KB 4860 Dell conf show interface dcbx detail Displays the DCBX configuration on an interface Syntax show interface port type slot port dcbx detail Parameters port type Enter the port type slot port Enter the slot port number Command...

Page 1444: ... can only receive a DCBX version supported on the remote peer Local DCBX Configured mode DCBX version configured on the port CEE CIN IEEE v2 5 or Auto port auto configures to use the DCBX version received from a peer Peer Operating version DCBX version that the peer uses to exchange DCB parameters Local DCBX TLVs Transmitted Transmission status enabled or disabled of advertised DCB TLVs see TLV co...

Page 1445: ...al DCBX Frames unrecognized Number of unrecognizable DCBX frames received Example Dell conf show interface tengigabitethernet 0 49 dcbx detail Dell show interface te 0 49 dcbx detail E ETS Configuration TLV enabled e ETS Configuration TLV disabled R ETS Recommendation TLV enabled r ETS Recommendation TLV disabled P PFC Configuration TLV enabled p PFC Configuration TLV disabled F Application priori...

Page 1446: ... slot and port ETS information summary detail Enter the keyword summary for a summary list of results or enter the keyword detail for a full list of results Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the M I O Aggregator This command is supported in Programmable Mux PMUX mode only Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information To c...

Page 1447: ...ational status local port Port state for current operational ETS configuration Init Local ETS configuration parameters were exchanged with the peer Recommend Remote ETS configuration parameters were received from the peer Internally propagated ETS configuration parameters were received from the configuration source ETS DCBX Oper status Operational status of the ETS configuration on the local port ...

Page 1448: ...idth TSA 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 100 ETS 1 0 ETS 2 0 ETS 3 0 ETS 4 0 ETS 5 0 ETS 6 0 ETS 7 0 ETS Priority Bandwidth TSA 0 13 ETS 1 13 ETS 2 13 ETS 3 13 ETS 4 12 ETS 5 12 ETS 6 12 ETS 7 12 ETS Oper status is init Conf TLV Tx Status is disabled Traffic Class TLV Tx Status is disabled Example Detail Dell conf show interfaces tengigabitethernet 0 0 ets detail Interface TenGigabitEthernet 0 0 Max Supported T...

Page 1449: ...ETS 6 12 ETS 7 12 ETS Oper status is init Conf TLV Tx Status is disabled Traffic Class TLV Tx Status is disabled 0 Input Conf TLV Pkts 0 Output Conf TLV Pkts 0 Error Conf TLV Pkts 0 Input Traffic Class TLV Pkts 0 Output Traffic Class TLV Pkts 0 Error Traffic Class TLV Pkts show interface pfc Displays the PFC configuration applied to ingress traffic on an interface including priorities and link del...

Page 1450: ...ived PFC configuration take effect The admin operational status for a DCBX exchange of PFC configuration is enabled or disabled Remote is enabled Priority list Remote Willing Status is enabled Operational status enabled or disabled of peer device for DCBX exchange of PFC configuration with a list of the configured PFC priorities Willing status of peer device for DCBX exchange Willing bit received ...

Page 1451: ... bitmap the local DCBX port uses in ISCSI advertisements in application priority TLVs Application Priority TLV Remote FCOE Priority Map Status of FCoE advertisements in application priority TLVs from the remote peer port enabled or disabled Application Priority TLV Remote ISCSI Priority Map Status of iSCSI advertisements in application priority TLVs from the remote peer port enabled or disabled PF...

Page 1452: ...TLV Tx Status is disabled ISCSI TLV Tx Status is disabled Local FCOE PriorityMap is 0x8 Local ISCSI PriorityMap is 0x10 Remote FCOE PriorityMap is 0x8 Remote ISCSI PriorityMap is 0x8 0 Input TLV pkts 1 Output TLV pkts 0 Error pkts 0 Pause Tx pkts 0 Pause Rx pkts show interface pfc statistics Displays counters for the PFC frames received and transmitted by dot1p priority class on an interface Synta...

Page 1453: ...to use this command as it has been deprecated in the current 9 4 0 0 release A warning message appears when you try to run this command indicating that you have to use the dcb map commands in the future Example Dell conf show qos dcb input dcb input pfc profile pfc link delay 32 pfc priority 0 1 dcb input pfc profile1 no pfc mode on pfc priority 6 7 show qos dcb output Displays the ETS configurati...

Page 1454: ...his command is supported in Programmable Mux PMUX mode only Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information NOTE Please note that Dell Networking does not recommended to use this command as it has been deprecated in the current 9 4 0 0 release A warning message appears when you try to run this command indicating that you have to use the dcb map commands in the fu...

Page 1455: ...Bandwidth TSA 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 100 ETS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Stack unit 1 stack port all Max Supported TC Groups is 4 Number of Traffic Classes is 1 Admin mode is on Admin Parameters Admin is enabled TC grp Priority Bandwidth TSA 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 100 ETS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 show stack unit stack ports pfc details Displays the PFC configuration applied to ingress traffic on stacked ports including PFC Oper...

Page 1456: ...e Ethernet bridge to snoop on Fibre Channel over Ethernet initialization protocol FIP packets during the login process on Fibre Channel over Ethernet FCoE forwarders FCFs Acting as a transit FIP snooping bridge the switch uses dynamically created ACLs to permit only authorized FCoE traffic to be transmitted between an FCoE end device and an FCF The following Dell Networking Operating System OS com...

Page 1457: ...number Parameters vlan id Enter the VLAN ID of the FIP packet statistics to be cleared port type port slot Enter the port type and slot number of the FIP packet statistics to be cleared port channel number Enter the port channel number of the FIP packet statistics to be cleared Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the M I O Aggregator This command is supported...

Page 1458: ...UX mode only Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information The maximum number of FCFs supported per FIP snooping enabled VLAN is four The maximum number of FIP snooping sessions supported per ENode server is 16 fip snooping fc map Configure the FC MAP value FIP snooping uses on all VLANs Syntax fip snooping fc map fc map value To return the configured FM MAP va...

Page 1459: ...N is four iSCSI Optimization Internet small computer system interface iSCSI optimization enables quality of service QoS treatment for iSCSI storage traffic To configure and verify the iSCSI optimization feature use the following Dell Networking Operating System OS commands advertise dcbx app tlv Configure DCBX to send iSCSI TLV advertisements Syntax advertise dcbx app tlv iscsi To disable DCBX iSC...

Page 1460: ...nable disable dot1p vlan priority value remark dscp dscp value remark To disable the QoS policy use the no iscsi cos dscp command Parameters enable Enter the keyword enable to allow the application of preferential QoS treatment to iSCSI traffic so that the iSCSI packets are scheduled in the switch with a dot1p priority 4 regardless of the VLAN priority tag in the packet The default is the iSCSI pa...

Page 1461: ... Module iscsi enable Globally enable iSCSI optimization Syntax iscsi enable To disable iSCSI optimization use the no iscsi enable command Parameters enable Enter the keyword enable to enable the iSCSI optimization feature Defaults Disabled Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the M I O Aggregator This command is supported in Programmable Mux PMUX mode only Vers...

Page 1462: ... 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module iscsi target port Configure the iSCSI target ports and optionally the IP addresses on which iSCSI communication is monitored Syntax iscsi target port tcp port 2 tcp port 16 ip address ip address To remove the configured iSCSI target ports or IP addresses use the no iscsi target port command Parameters tcp port 2 tcpport 16 Enter the tcp port ...

Page 1463: ... are for Physical interfaces clear counters Clear the counters used in the show interfaces commands for all virtual router redundancy protocol VRRP groups virtual local area networks VLANs and physical interfaces or selected ones Syntax clear counters interface Parameters interface OPTIONAL Enter any of the following keywords and slot port or number to clear counters from a specified interface For...

Page 1464: ...string in double quotes Defaults none Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the M I O Aggregator This command is supported in Programmable Mux PMUX mode only Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information Important Points to Remember Spaces between characters are not preserved after entering this command unless you enclose the ent...

Page 1465: ... is supported in Programmable Mux PMUX mode only Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information The globally assigned 48 bit Multicast address 01 80 C2 00 00 01 is used to send and receive pause frames To allow full duplex flow control stations implementing the pause operation instruct the MAC to enable the reception of frames with a destination address equal to...

Page 1466: ...metric flowcontrol when speed 1G config ignored You cannot configure half duplex when the flow control configuration is on default is rx on tx on The following error is returned Cannot configure half duplex when flowcontrol is on config ignored NOTE The flow control must be off rx off tx off before configuring the half duplex Example partial Dell conf if tengig 0 1 show config interface TenGigabit...

Page 1467: ... the switch Syntax interface interface Parameters interface Enter one of the following keywords and slot port or number information For a 10 Gigabit Ethernet interface enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot port information For a 40 Gigabit Ethernet interface enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot port information For a Fibre Channel interface enter the keyword FibreChannel then the...

Page 1468: ...ce port channel configures a port channel interface vlan configures a VLAN show interfaces displays the interface configuration interface ManagementEthernet Configure the Management port on the system Syntax interface ManagementEthernet slot port Parameters slot port Enter the keyword ManagementEthernet then the slot number 0 or 1 and port number zero 0 Defaults Not configured Command Modes CONFIG...

Page 1469: ...from 1 to 128 For a 10 Gigabit Ethernet interface enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot port information For a 40 Gigabit Ethernet interface enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot port information For a VLAN interface enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094 Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the M I O Aggregator This ...

Page 1470: ...e used with the bulk configuration feature of the interface range command You cannot create virtual interfaces VLAN Port channel using the interface range command NOTE If a range has VLAN physical port channel and SONET interfaces only commands related to physical interfaces can be bulk configured To configure commands specific to VLAN or port channel only those respective interfaces should be con...

Page 1471: ...from 1 to 4096 Defaults Not configured except for the Default VLAN which is configured as VLAN 1 Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the M I O Aggregator This command is supported in Programmable Mux PMUX mode only Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information For more information about VLANs and the commands to configure t...

Page 1472: ...e link issues are resolved by setting the interface type as CR4 Related Commands interface configures a physical interface interface port channel configures a port channel group keepalive Send keepalive packets periodically to keep an interface alive when it is not transmitting data Syntax keepalive seconds To stop sending keepalive packets use the no keepalive command Parameters seconds OPTIONAL ...

Page 1473: ...e link MTU and IP MTU ip mtu command must be enough bytes to include the Layer 2 header The IP MTU is adjusted automatically when you configure the Layer 2 MTU with the mtu command When you enter the no mtu command The Dell Networking OS reduces the IP MTU value to 1536 bytes Link MTU and IP MTU considerations for port channels and VLANs are as follows port channels All members must have the same ...

Page 1474: ...aults Enabled Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the M I O Aggregator This command is supported in Programmable Mux PMUX mode only Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information The no negotiation auto command is only available if you first manually set the speed of a port to 10Mbits or 100Mbits The negotiation auto command pro...

Page 1475: ...e port to slave mode Dell conf if autoneg Example Master Slave partial Dell show interfaces configured TenGigabitEthernet 13 18 is up line protocol is up Hardware is Dell Force10Eth address is 00 01 e8 05 f7 fc Current address is 00 01 e8 05 f7 fc Interface index is 474791997 Internet address is 1 1 1 1 24 MTU 1554 bytes IP MTU 1500 bytes LineSpeed 1000 Mbit Mode full duplex Master ARP type ARPA A...

Page 1476: ...d frames non hybrid use the no portmode hybrid command Defaults non hybrid Command Modes INTERFACE conf if interface slot port Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the M I O Aggregator This command is supported in Programmable Mux PMUX mode only Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information The following describes the interface command shown in the fol...

Page 1477: ...ged hybrid Dell conf interface tengig 0 20 Dell conf if te 0 20 no shut Dell conf if te 0 20 portmode hybrid Dell conf if te 0 20 sw Dell conf if te 0 20 int vlan 10 Dell conf if vl 10 int tengig 0 20 Dell conf if vl 20 untag tengig 0 20 Dell conf if vl 20 Dell conf do show interfaces switchport tengigabitethernet 3 20 Codes U Untagged T Tagged x Dot1x untagged X Dot1x tagged G GVRP tagged M Trunk...

Page 1478: ... Disabled Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the M I O Aggregator This command is supported in Programmable Mux PMUX mode only Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information Splitting a 40G port into 4x10G port is supported on standalone and stacked units You cannot use split ports as stack link to stack an MXL Switch The s...

Page 1479: ...regation control protocol LACP for dynamic LAGs refer to the Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP chapter For more information about configuring and using Port Channels refer to the Dell Networking OS Configuration Guide channel member Add an interface to the Port Channel while in INTERFACE PORTCHANNEL mode Syntax channel member interface To delete an interface from a Port Channel use the no cha...

Page 1480: ...rfaces whose speed does not match the speed of the first interface configured and enabled in the Port Channel If that first interface goes down the Port Channel does not change its designated speed disable and re enable the Port Channel or change the order of the channel members configuration to change the designated speed If the Port Channel contains a mix of interfaces with 100 Mb s speed and 10...

Page 1481: ...n speed For more information refer to channel member If the line card is in a Jumbo mode chassis you can also configure the mtu and ip mtu commands The Link MTU and IP MTU values configured on the channel members must be greater than the Link MTU and IP MTU values configured on the Port Channel interface NOTE In a Jumbo enabled system you must configure all members of a Port Channel with the same ...

Page 1482: ...P Commands IGMP Snooping Commands IGMP Commands Dell Networking OS supports IGMPv1 v2 v3 and is compliant with RFC 3376 Important Points to Remember IGMPv2 is the default version of IGMP on interfaces You can configure IGMPv3 on interfaces It is backward compatible with IGMPv2 There is no hard limit on the maximum number of groups supported IGMPv3 router interoperability with IGMPv2 and IGMPv1 rou...

Page 1483: ...hat must pass before a multicast router decides that there is no longer another multicast router that should be the querier Syntax ip igmp querier timeout seconds To return to the default value use the no ip igmp querier timeout command Parameters seconds Enter the number of seconds the router must wait to become the new querier The range is from 60 to 300 The default is 125 seconds Defaults 125 s...

Page 1484: ...en queries sent out The range is from 1 to 18000 The default is 60 seconds Defaults 60 seconds Command Modes INTERFACE Command History This guide is platform specific For command information about other platforms refer to the relevant Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide The following is a list of the Dell Networking OS version history for this command Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the ...

Page 1485: ...er to the relevant Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide The following is a list of the Dell Networking OS version history for this command Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the M I O Aggregator This command is supported in Programmable Mux PMUX mode only Version 9 0 2 0 Introduced on the S6000 Version 8 3 19 0 Introduced on the S4820T Version 8 3 11 1 Introduced on the Z9000 Version 8 3 7 0...

Page 1486: ...duced on the Z9000 Version 8 3 7 0 Introduced on the S4810 Version 7 8 1 0 Introduced on the S Series Version 7 7 1 0 Introduced on the C Series Version 7 5 1 0 Introduced on the E Series IGMP Snooping Commands Dell Networking OS supports IGMP Snooping version 2 and 3 on all Dell Networking systems Important Points to Remember for IGMP Snooping Dell Networking OS supports version 1 version 2 and v...

Page 1487: ... OS version history for this command Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the M I O Aggregator This command is supported in Programmable Mux PMUX mode only Version 9 0 2 0 Introduced on the S6000 Version 8 3 19 0 Introduced on the S4820T Version 8 3 11 1 Introduced on the Z9000 Version 8 3 7 0 Introduced on the S4810 Version 7 6 1 0 Introduced on the S Series Version 7 5 1 0 Introduced on the C Series Us...

Page 1488: ...nd some queries when a leave message is received prior to deleting a group from the membership database There may be situations when you require a fast deletion of a group When you enable IGMP fast leave processing the switch removes an interface from the multicast group as soon as it detects an IGMP version 2 leave message on the interface ip igmp snooping last member query interval The last memb...

Page 1489: ...l use this command ip igmp snooping mrouter Statically configure a VLAN member port as a multicast router interface Z9000 S4810 S4820TS6000 Syntax ip igmp snooping mrouter interface interface To delete a specific multicast router interface use the no igmp snooping mrouter interface interface command Parameters interface interface Enter the following keywords and slot port or number information For...

Page 1490: ...g OS provides the capability of statically configuring the interface to which a multicast router is attached To configure a static connection to the multicast router enter the ip igmp snooping mrouter interface command in the VLAN context The interface to the router must be a part of the VLAN where you are entering the command ip igmp snooping querier Enable IGMP querier processing for the VLAN in...

Page 1491: ... VLAN interface for the switch to act as a querier for this VLAN Layer 2 This chapter describes commands to configure Layer 2 features This chapter contains MAC Addressing Commands MAC Addressing Commands The following commands are related to configuring managing and viewing MAC addresses mac address table aging time Specify an aging time for MAC addresses to remove from the MAC address table Synt...

Page 1492: ...fic is forwarded For a Port Channel interface enter the keywords port channel then a number The range is from 1 to 128 For a 10 Gigabit Ethernet interface enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot port information For a 40 Gigabit Ethernet interface enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot port information vlan vlan id Enter the keyword vlan then a VLAN ID number from 1 to 4094 Defaults ...

Page 1493: ...For static LAG commands refer to the Interfaces chapter based on the standards specified in the IEEE 802 3 Carrier sense multiple access with collision detection CSMA CD access method and physical layer specifications lacp long timeout Configure a long timeout period 30 seconds for an LACP session Syntax lacp long timeout To reset the timeout period to a short timeout 1 second use the no lacp long...

Page 1494: ...ced on the M I O Aggregator This command is supported in Programmable Mux PMUX mode only Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module port channel mode Configure the LACP port channel mode Syntax port channel number mode active passive off Parameters number Enter the keywords number then a number active Enter the keyword active to set the mode to the active state NOTE LACP mode...

Page 1495: ...face cannot be part of a dynamic port channel in off mode LACP does not run on a port configured in off mode port channel protocol lacp Enable LACP on any LAN port Syntax port channel protocol lacp To disable LACP on a LAN port use the no port channel protocol lacp command Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the M I O Aggregator This command is supported in Progra...

Page 1496: ...lementing LLDP LLDP MED refer to the Link Layer Discovery Protocol chapter of the Dell Networking OS Configuration Guide advertise dot3 tlv Advertise dot3 TLVs Type Length Value Syntax advertise dot3 tlv max frame size To remove advertised dot3 tlv use the no advertise dot3 tlv max frame size command Parameters max frame size Enter the keywords max frame size to advertise the dot3 maximum frame si...

Page 1497: ...lities system description and system name can be invoked individually or together in any sequence clear lldp counters Clear LLDP transmitting and receiving counters for all physical interfaces or a specific physical interface Syntax clear lldp counters interface Parameters interface Enter the following keywords and slot port or number information For a 10 Gigabit Ethernet interface enter the keywo...

Page 1498: ...ule debug lldp interface To display timer events neighbor additions or deletions and other information about incoming and outgoing packets enable LLDP debugging Syntax debug lldp interface interface all events packet brief detail tx rx both To disable debugging use the no debug lldp interface interface all events packet brief detail tx rx both command Parameters interface Enter the following keywo...

Page 1499: ...ersion 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the M I O Aggregator This command is supported in Programmable Mux PMUX mode only Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module disable Enable or disable LLDP Syntax disable To enable LLDP use the no disable command Defaults Enabled that is no disable Command Modes CONFIGURATION conf lldp and INTERFACE conf if interface lldp Command History Version 9...

Page 1500: ...PMUX mode only Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module multiplier Set the number of consecutive misses before LLDP declares the interface dead Syntax multiplier integer To return to the default use the no multiplier integer command Parameters integer Enter the number of consecutive misses before the LLDP declares the interface dead The range is from 2 to 10 Defaults 4 x he...

Page 1501: ...he IEEE 802 1p configuration on the interface use the no dot1p priority command Parameters priority value Enter a value from 0 to 7 dot1p Queue Number 0 0 1 0 2 0 3 1 4 2 5 3 6 3 7 3 Defaults none Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the M I O Aggregator This command is supported in Programmable Mux PMUX mode only Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Swi...

Page 1502: ...ue 0 unless you enable the service class dynamic dot1p command The default mapping is as follows dot1p Queue ID 0 0 1 0 2 0 3 1 4 2 5 3 6 3 7 3 Command Modes INTERFACE CONFIGURATION Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the M I O Aggregator This command is supported in Programmable Mux PMUX mode only Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information To hono...

Page 1503: ...dot1p6 value dot1p7 value Parameters value Enter a dot1p list number and value The list number range is from 0 to 7 The range is from 0 to 3 Defaults For each dot1p Priority the default CoS queue value is dot1p CoS Queue 0 0 7 1 0 7 2 0 7 3 0 7 4 0 7 5 0 7 6 0 7 7 0 7 Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform specific For command information about other platforms refer to ...

Page 1504: ...nly Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information Guarantee a minimum bandwidth to different queues globally using the service class bandwidth percentage command from CONFIGURATION mode The command is applied in the same way as the bandwidth percentage command in an output QoS policy The bandwidth percentage command in QOS POLICY OUT mode supersedes the service...

Page 1505: ... 1 Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION conf qos policy out Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the M I O Aggregator This command is supported in Programmable Mux PMUX mode only Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information The unit of bandwidth percentage is 1 If the sum of the bandwidth percentages given to all eight classes exceeds 100 the ban...

Page 1506: ...and Modes CONFIGURATION policy map input and policy map output Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the M I O Aggregator This command is supported in Programmable Mux PMUX mode only Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information Aggregate input output QoS policy applies to all the port ingoing outgoing traffic Aggregate input output QoS policy can coexi...

Page 1507: ... Information To assign traffic to different flows using QoS policy use the Output Policy map This command enables Policy Map Output Configuration mode conf policy map out Related Commands service queue assigns a class map and QoS policy to different queues policy aggregate allows an aggregate method of configuring per port QoS using policy maps service policy output applies an output policy map to...

Page 1508: ...mmand Parameters policy map name Enter the name for the policy map in character format 16 characters maximum You can identify an existing policy map or name one that does not yet exist Defaults none Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the M I O Aggregator This command is supported in Programmable Mux PMUX mode only Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE S...

Page 1509: ... assigned to the queue under policy map input and output QoS policy under policy map output context Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION conf policy map in and conf policy map out Command History Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the M I O Aggregator This command is supported in Programmable Mux PMUX mode only Version 8 3 16 1 Introduced on the MXL 10 40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information Ther...

Page 1510: ... Id is configured only on one of the VLT peers The VLT domain ID is not the same on both peers If the VLT peer ship is already established changing the System MAC or Unit Id does not cause VLT peer ship to go down Also if the VLT peer ship is already established and the VLT Unit Id or System MAC are configured on both peers then changing the CLI configurations on the VLT Unit Id or System MAC is r...

Page 1511: ...sion 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the M I O Aggregator This command is supported in Programmable Mux PMUX mode only Version 9 2 0 2 Added support for IPv6 Version 9 0 2 0 Introduced on the S6000 Version 9 0 0 0 Introduced on the Z9000 Version 8 3 19 0 Introduced on the S4820T Version 8 3 8 0 Introduced on the S4810 clear vlt statistics Clear the statistics on VLT operations Syntax clear vlt statistics ar...

Page 1512: ...Rcvd 0 ARP Reg Request sent 19 ARP Reg Request rcvd 10 lacp ungroup member independent Prevent possible loop during the bootup of a VLT peer switch or a device that accesses the VLT domain Syntax lacp ungroup member independent vlt port channel Parameters port channel Force all LACP port channel members to become switchports vlt Force all VLT LACP members to become switchports Defaults Not configu...

Page 1513: ...ports of an ungrouped LACP port channel to inherit vlan membership of that port channel to ensure untagged packets that are sent by a VLT peer device reach the DHCP server located on the ToR To ungroup the VLT and port channel configurations use the no lacp ungroup member independent command on a VLT port channel depending on whether the port channel is VLT or non VLT Example Dell conf lacp ungrou...

Page 1514: ...own vlan parameter When a VLT peer with bare metal provisioning BMP is booting up it sends untagged DHCP discover packets to its peer over the VLTi To ensure that the DHCP discover packets are forwarded to the VLAN that has the DHCP server use this configuration show vlt mismatch Display mismatches in VLT parameters Syntax show vlt mismatch Command Modes EXEC Command History This guide is platform...

Page 1515: ...nd Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the M I O Aggregator This command is supported in Programmable Mux PMUX mode only Version 9 0 0 0 Introduced on the Z9000 Version 8 3 19 0 Introduced on the S4820T Version 8 3 8 0 Introduced on the S4810 Usage Information When you create a VLT domain on a switch Dell Networking OS automatically creates a VLT system MAC address used for internal system operations To...

Page 1516: ...age Information When you create a VLT domain on a switch Dell Networking OS automatically assigns a unique unit ID 0 or 1 to each peer switch The unit IDs are used for internal system operations Use the unit id command to explicitly configure the unit ID of a VLT peer Configure a different unit ID 0 or 1 on each peer switch To minimize the time required for the VLT system to determine the unit ID ...

Page 1517: ...el in the VLT peer for the VLT connection to an attached device Syntax vlt peer lag port channel id number Parameters id number Enter the respective vlt port channel number of the peer device Defaults Not configured Command Modes INTERFACE PORT CHANNEL Command History This guide is platform specific For command information about other platforms refer to the relevant Dell Networking OS Command Line...

Page 1518: ...s are automatically saved to the startup configuration Auto saving the downloaded configurations also requires enabling the config scr download parameter Downloaded scripts are automatically saved to the autoexec script config scr download enable Optional Configure whether the configuration file must be downloaded from the DHCP file servers enable config download disable Optional Configure if the ...

Page 1519: ... After the configuration file is successfully downloaded the config scr download parameter is automatically disabled You can enable it again using the reload type command Set the Auto Configuration mode BMP or Normal reload using the reload type command Next enter the reload command to reload the switch in the configured mode When a switch reloads in BMP mode all ports including the management por...

Page 1520: ...e traffic Syntax clear ufd disable interface interface uplink state group group id Parameters interface interface Specify one or more downstream interfaces For interface enter one of the following interface types Fast Ethernet fastethernet slot port slot port range 1 Gigabit Ethernet gigabitethernet slot port slot port range 10 Gigabit Ethernet tengigabitethernet slot port slot port range Port cha...

Page 1521: ...the tracking of upstream links debug uplink state group Enable debug messages for events related to a specified uplink state group or all groups Syntax debug uplink state group group id To turn off debugging event messages enter the no debug uplink state group group id command Parameters group id Enables debugging on the specified uplink state group The valid group id values are from 1 to 16 Defau...

Page 1522: ...Reference Guide The following is a list of the Dell Networking OS version history for this command Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the M I O Aggregator This command is supported in Programmable Mux PMUX mode only Version 8 3 19 0 Introduced on the S4820T Version 8 3 12 0 Introduced on the S4810 Version 8 4 2 3 Introduced on the S Series S50 Example Dell conf uplink state group 16 description test De...

Page 1523: ... to the relevant Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide The following is a list of the Dell Networking OS version history for this command Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the M I O Aggregator This command is supported in Programmable Mux PMUX mode only Version 8 3 19 0 Introduced on the S4820T Version 8 3 12 0 Introduced on the S4810 Version 8 4 2 3 Introduced on the S Series S50 Usage Info...

Page 1524: ...levant Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide The following is a list of the Dell Networking OS version history for this command Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the M I O Aggregator This command is supported in Programmable Mux PMUX mode only Version 8 3 19 0 Introduced on the S4820T Version 8 3 12 0 Introduced on the S4810 Version 8 4 2 3 Introduced on the S Series S50 Related Commands dow...

Page 1525: ...ersion 8 4 2 3 Introduced on the S Series S50 Usage Information A user configurable number of downstream interfaces in an uplink state group are put into a link down state with an UFD Disabled error message when one upstream interface in an uplink state group goes down If all upstream interfaces in an uplink state group go down all downstream interfaces in the same uplink state group are put into ...

Page 1526: ...ing config uplink state group Display the current configuration of one or more uplink state groups Syntax show running config uplink state group group id Parameters group id Displays the current configuration of all uplink state groups or a specified group The valid group id values are from 1 to 16 Defaults none Command Modes EXEC EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform specific For ...

Page 1527: ... state group group id detail Parameters group id Displays status information on a specified uplink state group or all groups The valid group id values are from 1 to 16 detail Displays additional status information on the upstream and downstream interfaces in each group Defaults none Command Modes EXEC EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform specific For command information about othe...

Page 1528: ... Downstream Interfaces Te 13 2 Dis Te 13 4 Dis Te 13 11 Dis Te 13 12 Dis Te 13 13 Dis Te 13 14 Dis Te 13 15 Dis Uplink State Group 6 Status Enabled Up Upstream Interfaces Downstream Interfaces Uplink State Group 7 Status Enabled Up Upstream Interfaces Downstream Interfaces Uplink State Group 16 Status Disabled Up Upstream Interfaces Gi 0 41 Dwn Po 8 Dwn Downstream Interfaces Gi 0 40 Dwn Related Co...

Page 1529: ...n the Link Up state An uplink state group is considered to be operationally down if no upstream interfaces in the group are in the Link Up state No uplink state tracking is performed when a group is disabled or in an operationally down state To disable upstream link tracking without deleting the uplink state group use the no enable command in uplink state group configuration mode Example Dell conf...

Page 1530: ... about other platforms refer to the relevant Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide The following is a list of the Dell Networking OS version history for this command Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the M I O Aggregator This command is supported in Programmable Mux PMUX mode only Version 8 3 19 0 Introduced on the S4820T Version 8 3 12 0 Introduced on the S4810 Version 8 4 2 3 Introduced on...

Page 1531: ...ps which are messages informing an SNMP management system about the network Dell Networking OS supports up to 16 SNMP trap receivers Important Points to Remember Typically 5 second timeout and 3 second retry values on an SNMP server are sufficient for both LAN and WAN applications If you experience a timeout with these values the recommended best practice on Dell Networking switches to accommodate...

Page 1532: ...ing device notifications when an environmental threshold is exceeded isis Notification of intermediate service traps lacp Notification of changes snmp Notification of RFC 1157 traps stp Notification of a state change in the spanning tree protocol RFC 1493 vlt Notification of virtual link trunking vrrp Notification of a state change in a VRRP group xstp Notification of a state change in MSTP 802 1s...

Page 1533: ...STP traps Introduced on the S Series Version 7 5 1 0 Introduced on the C Series E Series legacy command Usage Information Dell Networking OS supports up to 16 SNMP trap receivers If you do not configure this command no traps controlled by this command are sent If you do not specify a notification type and notification option all traps are enabled snmp server host Configure the recipient of an SNMP...

Page 1534: ...e packet community string Enter a text string up to 20 characters long as the name of the SNMP community NOTE For version 1 and version 2c security models this string represents the name of the SNMP community The string can be set using this command however Dell Networking OS recommends setting the community string using the snmp server community command before executing this command For version 3...

Page 1535: ...9 0 Introduced on the S4820T Version 8 3 11 1 Introduced on the Z9000 Version 8 3 7 0 Introduced on the S4810 Version 8 4 1 0 Added support for VRRP traps Version 7 6 1 0 Added support for STP and xSTP notification types Introduced on the S Series Version 7 5 1 0 Introduced on the C Series E Series legacy command Usage Information In order to configure the router to send SNMP notifications enter a...

Page 1536: ...the community name the same as specified in the snmp server host command Configuring Informs To send an inform use the following steps 1 Configure a remote engine ID 2 Configure a remote user 3 Configure a group for this user with access rights 4 Enable traps 5 Configure a host to receive informs Related Commands snmp server enable traps enables SNMP traps Syslog Commands The following commands al...

Page 1537: ... the IPv4 address in dotted decimal format ipv6 address Enter the IPv6 address in the x x x x X format NOTE The notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros hostname Enter the name of a host already configured and recognized by the switch Defaults Disabled Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform specific For command information about other platforms refer to...

Page 1538: ...icate a value from 0 to 7 or enter one of the following equivalent words emergencies alerts critical errors warnings notifications informational or debugging The default is 7 or debugging size OPTIONAL Indicate the size in bytes of the logging buffer The number of messages buffered depends on the size of each message The range is from 40960 to 524288 The default is 40960 bytes Defaults level 7 siz...

Page 1539: ...e the default logging console command To disable logging to the console use the no logging console command Parameters level OPTIONAL Indicate a value from 0 to 7 or enter one of the following parameters emergencies alerts critical errors warnings notifications informational or debugging The default is 7 or debugging Defaults level 7 size debugging Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This g...

Page 1540: ...s warnings notifications informational or debugging The default is 7 or debugging Defaults 7 or debugging Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform specific For command information about other platforms refer to the relevant Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide The following is a list of the Dell Networking OS version history for this command Version 9 2 0 0 Int...

Page 1541: ...the range is from 1 to 128 For a ten Gigabit Ethernet interface enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot port information For a 40 Gigabit Ethernet interface enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot port information For VLAN interface enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094 Defaults Not configured Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform specific Fo...

Page 1542: ...d history to view only information in the Syslog history table reverse OPTIONAL Enter the keyword reverse to view the Syslog messages in FIFO first in first out order summary OPTIONAL Enter the keyword summary to view a table showing the number of messages per type and per slot Slots 7 and 8 represent RPMs Command Modes EXEC EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform specific For comman...

Page 1543: ...BGP 5 ADJCHANGE Neighbor 192 4 1 3 Up Oct 8 09 25 38 RPM1 RP1 BGP 5 ADJCHANGE Neighbor 192 1 1 4 Up Oct 8 09 25 38 RPM1 RP1 BGP 5 ADJCHANGE Neighbor 192 1 1 6 Up Oct 8 09 25 38 RPM1 RP1 BGP 5 ADJCHANGE Neighbor 192 1 1 12 Up Oct 8 09 25 38 RPM1 RP1 BGP 5 ADJCHANGE Neighbor 192 1 1 15 Up Oct 8 09 25 38 RPM1 RP1 BGP 5 ADJCHANGE Neighbor 192 1 1 3 Up Oct 8 09 25 38 RPM1 RP1 BGP 5 ADJCHANGE Neighbor 1...

Page 1544: ...orking OS version history for this command Version 9 2 0 0 Introduced on the M I O Aggregator This command is supported in Programmable Mux PMUX mode only Version 9 0 2 0 Introduced on the S6000 Version 8 3 19 0 Introduced on the S4820T Version 8 3 11 1 Introduced on the Z9000 Version 8 3 7 0 Introduced on the S4810 Version 7 6 1 0 Introduced on the S Series Usage Information This command displays...

Page 1545: ... O Aggregator This command is supported in Programmable Mux PMUX mode only Version 9 0 2 0 Introduced on the S6000 Version 8 3 19 0 Introduced on the S4820T Version 8 3 11 1 Introduced on the Z9000 Version 8 3 7 0 Introduced on the S4810 Version 7 6 1 0 Introduced on the S Series Version 7 5 1 0 Introduced on the C Series E Series legacy command Related Commands logging monitor sets the logging pa...

Reviews:

No comments

Related manuals for MXL 10GbE

CALIENT S320 Hardware User'S Manual preview
S320
Brand: CALIENT Pages: 46
CALIENT S320 Getting Started Manual preview
S320
Brand: CALIENT Pages: 42
OEM VX-100 Specifications preview
VX-100
Brand: OEM Pages: 1
Gefen EXT-DVI-441DL User Manual preview
EXT-DVI-441DL
Brand: Gefen Pages: 31
ORiNG IGS-1082GP Quick Installation Manual preview
IGS-1082GP
Brand: ORiNG Pages: 2
Theben TIMEGUARD WF10COM Installation & Operating Instructions Manual preview
TIMEGUARD WF10COM
Brand: Theben Pages: 35
N-Tron NT24k User Manual preview
NT24k
Brand: N-Tron Pages: 132
Imtex-Controls SLR Series Installation & Adjusting Instructions preview
SLR Series
Brand: Imtex-Controls Pages: 2
OTS IES8242MPp9H-S-DR Quick Installation Manual preview
IES8242MPp9H-S-DR
Brand: OTS Pages: 3
BluStream SW41HDBT Quick Reference Manual preview
SW41HDBT
Brand: BluStream Pages: 4
Pulsar SG108 Quick Start Manual preview
SG108
Brand: Pulsar Pages: 5
VigilLink VL-MX88-1 User Manual preview
VL-MX88-1
Brand: VigilLink Pages: 24
LEGRAND Valena Life LE-752107 User Manual preview
Valena Life LE-752107
Brand: LEGRAND Pages: 5
Maestro MS-VPS6M2N-DV Manual preview
MS-VPS6M2N-DV
Brand: Maestro Pages: 2
Alloy GSS-8T2SFPV2 User Manual preview
GSS-8T2SFPV2
Brand: Alloy Pages: 64
AMX AVS-OP-2404-210 Specifications preview
AVS-OP-2404-210
Brand: AMX Pages: 1
IDK FDX-32 Command Reference Manual preview
FDX-32
Brand: IDK Pages: 81
Eaton Tripp-Lite B005-HUA2-K Quick Start Manual preview
Tripp-Lite B005-HUA2-K
Brand: Eaton Pages: 4

Brands by name

Popular brands

Load more brands